Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 16, 2004
Registration No. 333-            


SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549


Form S-1

REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

BofI Holding, Inc.

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
         
Delaware   6035   33-0867444
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)
  (Primary Standard Industrial
Classification Code Number)
  (I.R.S. Employer
Identification No.)

BofI Holding, Inc.

12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220
San Diego, CA 92130
(858) 350-6200
(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of registrant’s principal executive offices)

Gary Lewis Evans

President and Chief Executive Officer
BofI Holding, Inc.
12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220
San Diego, CA 92130
(858) 350-6200
(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number,
including area code, of agent for service)


Copies to:

     
Allen Z. Sussman, Esq.
  Ellen R. Marshall, Esq.
Charles C. Kim, Esq.   Ivan A. Gaviria, Esq.
Morrison & Foerster LLP   Manatt, Phelps & Phillips, LLP
555 West Fifth Street   695 Town Center Drive, 14th Floor
Los Angeles, CA 90013-1024   Costa Mesa, CA 92626
(213) 892-5200   (714) 371-2500


      Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public: As soon as practicable after the effective date of this Registration Statement.

     If any of the securities being registered on this form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, check the following box.      o

     If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.      o

     If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.      o

     If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.      o

     If delivery of the prospectus is expected to be made pursuant to Rule 434, please check the following box.      o


CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

         


Title of Each Class of Proposed Maximum Aggregate Amount of
Securities to be Registered Offering Price(1) Registration Fee

Common stock, par value $0.01 per share
  $23,000,000   $2,707.10


(1)  Estimated solely for the purpose of determining the registration fee in accordance with Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933.


      The Registrant hereby amends this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933 or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the SEC, acting pursuant to Section 8(a), may determine.




Table of Contents

The information in this prospectus is not complete and may be changed. We may not sell these securities until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any state where the offer or sale is not permitted.

SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED DECEMBER 16, 2004

         
    (BANK OF INTERNET USA LOGO)   BofI Holding, Inc.
                         
Shares
of Common Stock


This is our initial public offering and no public market currently exists for our shares. We expect that the public offering price will be between $                    and $          per share.  

                 
THE OFFERING PER SHARE TOTAL

Public Offering Price
  $       $    
Underwriting Discount
  $       $    
Proceeds to BofI Holding, Inc.
  $       $    

We have granted the underwriters the right to purchase up to                additional shares from us within 30 days after the date of this prospectus to cover any over-allotments. The underwriters expect to deliver shares of common stock to purchasers on                , 2005.  
 
Proposed Nasdaq National Market Symbol: BOFI  
 
OpenIPO® :     The method of distribution being used by the underwriters in the offering differs somewhat from that traditionally employed in firm commitment underwritten public offerings. In particular, the public offering price and allocation of shares will be determined primarily by an auction process conducted by the underwriters and other securities dealers participating in the offering. A more detailed description of this process, known as an OpenIPO, is included in “Plan of Distribution” beginning on page 99.  


The offering involves a high degree of risk. You should purchase

shares only if you can afford a complete loss of your investment.
See “Risk Factors” beginning on page 7.


Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission or other regulatory body has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

These securities are not savings or deposit accounts or obligations of any bank and are not insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, Bank Insurance Fund, Savings Association Insurance Fund or any other governmental agency.

WRHAMBRECHT+CO                                The Seidler Companies            

Incorporated                     

The date of this prospectus is                     , 2005.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

         
Page

    1  
    7  
    19  
    20  
    20  
    21  
    23  
    25  
    28  
    50  
    68  
    81  
    83  
    85  
    90  
    97  
    99  
    106  
    106  
    107  
    F-1  
  Exhibit 3.4
  Exhibit 10.2
  Exhibit 10.3
  Exhibit 10.4
  Exhibit 10.5
  Exhibit 10.6
  Exhibit 10.7
  Exhibit 10.8
  Exhibit 10.9
  Exhibit 23.2


      You should rely only on the information contained in this prospectus. We have not, and the underwriters have not, authorized any other person to provide you with different information. If anyone provides you with different or inconsistent information, you should not rely on it. We are not, and the underwriters are not, making an offer to sell these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted. You should assume that the information contained in this prospectus is accurate only as of the date on the front cover of this prospectus. Our business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects may have changed since that date.


i


Table of Contents

PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

      This summary provides an overview of information contained elsewhere in this prospectus and does not contain all of the information you should consider. You should read the following summary together with the more detailed information set out in this prospectus, including the “Risk Factors” section beginning on page 7 and our consolidated financial statements and notes to those consolidated financial statements that appear elsewhere in this prospectus.

      Unless otherwise stated, all information in this prospectus assumes that the underwriters will not exercise their over-allotment option to purchase any of the                 shares of our common stock subject to that option.

      Unless the context requires otherwise, references to “BofI,” “our company,” “we,” “us” and “our” refer to BofI Holding, Inc. and our wholly owned subsidiary, Bank of Internet USA. References to “Bank of Internet USA,” “Bank of Internet” and “our bank” refer to Bank of Internet USA, a federal savings bank.

BofI Holding, Inc.

General

      We are the holding company for Bank of Internet USA, a consumer-focused, nationwide savings bank operating primarily through the Internet from a single location in San Diego, California. Since the inception of our bank in 2000, we have designed and implemented an automated Internet-based banking platform and electronic workflow process that we believe affords us low operating expenses and allows us to pass these savings along to our customers in the form of attractive interest rates and low fees on our products. Our bank was designed from the ground-up to use this platform, providing us with an advantage in leveraging technology to handle routine banking transactions with lean staffing.

      We believe that our business model is highly scalable, allowing us to expand into new regions and products and rapidly increase deposits and, to a lesser extent, loans, without significant delays or significant increased costs, and with limited additional fixed assets and personnel. We are able to operate in all 50 states and can be selective in entering new geographic markets and targeting demographic groups such as seniors or students.

      At September 30, 2004, we had total assets of $453.9 million, net loans held for investment of $355.1 million and total deposits of $295.7 million. Our deposits consist primarily of interest-bearing checking and savings accounts and time deposits. Our loans are primarily first mortgages secured by multifamily (five or more units) and single family (one to four units) real property.

      During the past three fiscal years, we have achieved strong growth. From the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002 to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, we have:

  •  increased our net income from $1.0 million to $2.2 million and diluted earnings per share from $0.21 to $0.39;
 
  •  increased our total assets at year end from $217.6 million to $405.0 million, while only increasing our employment base from 20 to 24 full time employees;
 
  •  increased net loans held for investment at year end from $167.3 million to $355.3 million, increased originations of multifamily loans from $30.0 million to $57.3 million and increased originations of single family loans held for sale from $7.0 million to $76.6 million;
 
  •  increased total deposits at year end from $167.6 million to $269.8 million and the number of online deposit accounts from 6,400 to 13,700; and
 
  •  improved our efficiency ratio, or noninterest expense as a percentage of net interest income plus noninterest income, from 79.3% to 49.5%.

1


Table of Contents

Business Strategy

      Our business strategy is to lower the cost of delivering banking products and services by leveraging technology, while continuing to grow our assets and deposits to achieve increased economies of scale. Our strategy includes a number of key elements:

  •  Leverage Technology. We have designed our automated Internet-based banking platform and workflow process to handle traditional banking functions with reduced paperwork and human intervention. We intend to continue to improve our systems and implement new systems with the goal of providing for increased transaction capacity and scalability in our systems without materially increasing personnel costs.
 
  •  Exploit Advantages of Nationwide Presence. Our thrift charter allows us to operate in all 50 states. Our nationwide, online presence allows us increased flexibility to target a large number of loan and deposit customers based on demographics, geographic location and price. It also provides us with a low cost of customer acquisition and the ability to be selective in approving prospective loan customers. We can rapidly shift and target our marketing based on the demographics and location of the target audience nationwide and establish a presence in new geographic and demographic markets with relatively low entry costs.
 
  •  Continue to Grow Online Deposits and Expand Services. We offer a broad selection of retail deposit instruments and plan to continue to develop new products and services to serve specific demographics. We intend to expand the volume and breadth of our deposit marketing over the Internet.
 
  •  Increase Loan Originations and Purchases. We intend to increase single family and multifamily loan originations through our websites, including our “ApartmentBank” and “Broker Advantage” websites. We also plan to continue to purchase high-quality multifamily and, to a lesser extent, single family loans.

Corporate Information

      We were incorporated in the State of Delaware on July 6, 1999 for the purpose of organizing and opening an Internet-based bank. Bank of Internet USA, our wholly-owned subsidiary, is a federal savings bank that opened for business over the Internet on July 4, 2000. Our executive offices are located at 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220, San Diego, California 92130, and our telephone number is (858) 350-6200. We maintain a number of websites, including www.BankofInternet.com, www.BancodeInternet.com, www.BofI.com and www.ApartmentBank.com. Information contained on our websites is not a part of this prospectus.

2


Table of Contents

The Offering

 
Common Stock offered                shares(1)
 
Common Stock outstanding after the offering                shares(2)
 
Net proceeds The net proceeds from the offering will be approximately $           million, assuming an offering price of $          per share (the midpoint of the range) and that the underwriters’ over-allotment option is not exercised.
 
Use of proceeds We intend to contribute approximately $           million of the net proceeds from this offering to Bank of Internet USA to provide additional capital to support its growth. We also intend to use a portion of the net proceeds to prepay in full a note payable that had an outstanding principal balance of $5.0 million at November 30, 2004. The note payable bears interest at prime plus one percent per annum. Pending these uses, we will invest the net proceeds initially in short term, investment grade securities and other qualified investments. See “Use of Proceeds” for more information.
 
Dividends on Common Stock We have never paid cash dividends on our common stock, electing to retain earnings for funding our growth and business. We currently anticipate continuing our policy of retaining earnings to fund growth. See “Dividend Policy” for more information.
 
Proposed Nasdaq National Market symbol We have applied to have our common stock listed for quotation on the Nasdaq National Market under the symbol “BOFI.”


(1)  The number of shares of our common stock offered assumes that the underwriters’ over-allotment option is not exercised. If the over-allotment option is exercised in full, we will issue and sell an additional                      shares.
 
(2)  The number of shares of our common stock outstanding after the offering is based on the number of shares outstanding at September 30, 2004, and assumes that the underwriters’ over-allotment option is not exercised. The number includes 728,000 shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of warrants with an exercise price of $4.19 per share, which warrants we expect to be exercised on a cash basis prior to the offering because they terminate if not exercised prior to that time.

      The number excludes:

  •  722,517 shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of outstanding stock options with a weighted average exercise price of $6.11 per share;
 
  •  59,950 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of warrants with an exercise price of $14.00 per share;
 
  •  642,600 shares of common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our Series A — 6% Cumulative Nonparticipating Perpetual Preferred Stock, or our Series A preferred stock. Our Series A preferred stock is convertible at prices which increase periodically through January 2009, after which time our Series A preferred stock is no longer convertible into our common stock. The current conversion price of $10.50 per share is in effect through January 1, 2006;
 
  •  shares of common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2004 stock incentive plan, which provides that aggregate equity awards under our 2004 stock incentive plan and options outstanding under our 1999 stock option plan may not exceed 14.8% of our outstanding common stock at any time; and

3


Table of Contents

  •  up to 500,000 shares of common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2004 employee stock purchase plan.

Risk Factors

      See “Risk Factors” beginning on page 7 for a discussion of material risks related to an investment in our common stock.

4


Table of Contents

Summary Consolidated Financial Information

      You should read the summary consolidated financial information set forth below together with our consolidated financial statements and related notes and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” included elsewhere in this prospectus. Our consolidated income statement information for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 and the consolidated balance sheet information as of September 30, 2004 are derived from our unaudited consolidated financial statements, which are included in this prospectus and, in the opinion of management, include all adjustments necessary for fair presentation of the results of such periods. The consolidated balance sheet information as of September 30, 2003 is derived from our unaudited consolidated financial information. The consolidated income statement information for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002 and the consolidated balance sheet information as of June 30, 2004 and 2003 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. The consolidated income statement information for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2001 and the period from July 6, 1999 (inception) to June 30, 2000 and the consolidated balance sheet information at June 30, 2002, 2001 and 2000 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements that are not included in this prospectus. Historical results are not necessarily indicative of future results.

                                                         
At or for
At or for the Period
the Three Months July 6, 1999
Ended September 30, At or for the Fiscal Years Ended June 30, (inception) to


June 30,
2004 2003 2004 2003 2002 2001 2000







(Dollars in thousands, except per share data)
Selected Balance Sheet Data:
                                                       
Total assets
  $ 453,939     $ 284,617     $ 405,039     $ 273,464     $ 217,614     $ 156,628     $ 13,295  
Loans held for investment, net of allowance for loan losses
    355,105       246,760       355,261       245,933       167,251       139,679        
Loans held for sale, at cost
    216       969       435       3,602       128       22        
Allowance for loan losses
    1,060       805       1,045       790       505       310        
Investment securities
    55,702       377       3,665       441       726       1,522        
Total deposits
    295,677       202,190       269,841       193,992       167,618       127,204        
Advances from the FHLB
    121,475       58,360       101,446       55,900       29,900       15,900        
Note payable
    3,300             1,300                   870        
Total stockholders’ equity
    32,296       23,349       31,759       22,885       19,501       11,903       12,936  
Selected Income Statement Data:
                                                       
Interest and dividend income
  $ 4,826     $ 3,581     $ 15,772     $ 13,514     $ 11,641     $ 4,697     $ 24  
Interest expense
    2,738       2,176       9,242       8,426       8,144       3,535        
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net interest income
    2,088       1,405       6,530       5,088       3,497       1,162       24  
Provision for loan losses
    15       15       255       285       195       310        
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net interest income after provision for loan losses
    2,073       1,390       6,275       4,803       3,302       852       24  
Noninterest income
    169       288       1,190       1,349       297       52        
Noninterest expense
    1,139       1,077       3,819       3,158       3,008       1,985       1,012  
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
Income (loss) before income tax expense (benefit)
    1,103       601       3,646       2,994       591       (1,081 )     (988 )
Income tax expense (benefit)
    442       247       1,471       1,264       (429 )     1        
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net income (loss)
  $ 661     $ 354     $ 2,175     $ 1,730     $ 1,020     $ (1,082 )   $ (988 )
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net income (loss) attributable to common stock
  $ 560     $ 354     $ 2,035     $ 1,730     $ 1,020     $ (1,082 )   $ (988 )

5


Table of Contents

                                                           
At or for
At or for the Period
the Three Months July 6, 1999
Ended September 30, At or for the Fiscal Years Ended June 30, (inception) to


June 30,
2004 2003 2004 2003 2002 2001 2000







(Dollars in thousands, except per share data)
Per Share Data:
                                                       
Net income (loss):
                                                       
 
Basic
  $ 0.12     $ 0.08     $ 0.45     $ 0.39     $ 0.25     $ (0.29 )   $ (0.33 )
 
Diluted
  $ 0.11     $ 0.07     $ 0.39     $ 0.34     $ 0.21     $ (0.29 )   $ (0.33 )
Book value per common share
  $ 5.68     $ 5.22     $ 5.57     $ 5.11     $ 4.50     $ 3.21     $ 3.50  
Tangible book value per common share
  $ 5.68     $ 5.22     $ 5.57     $ 5.11     $ 4.50     $ 3.21     $ 3.50  
Weighted average number of common shares outstanding:
                                                       
 
Basic
    4,508,664       4,490,136       4,502,284       4,468,296       4,128,051       3,706,050       2,950,999  
 
Diluted
    5,164,963       5,150,298       5,160,482       5,134,940       4,795,401       3,706,050       2,950,999  
Common shares outstanding at end of period
    4,519,649       4,474,351       4,506,524       4,474,351       4,334,401       3,707,156       3,694,031  
Performance Ratios and Other Data:
                                                       
Loan originations for investment
  $ 11,329     $ 18,059     $ 64,478     $ 58,609     $ 34,659     $ 16,003       NM  
Loan originations for sale
    2,514       35,010       76,550       124,739       6,994       3,317       NM  
Loan purchases
    5,336       11,888       129,193       81,778       132,298       139,565       NM  
Return (loss) on average assets
    0.64%       0.50%       0.67%       0.71%       0.53%       (1.56 )%     NM  
Return (loss) on average common stockholders’ equity
    8.77%       6.09%       8.42%       7.87%       6.32%       (8.68 )%     NM  
Interest rate spread(1)
    1.87%       1.73%       1.81%       1.76%       1.45%       0.67 %     NM  
Net interest margin(2)
    2.06%       2.02%       2.04%       2.11%       1.83%       1.73 %     NM  
Efficiency ratio(3)
    50.47%       63.61%       49.47%       49.06%       79.28%       163.51 %     NM  
Allowance for loan losses to total loans held for investment at end of period
    0.30%       0.32%       0.29%       0.32%       0.30%       0.22 %     NM  
Capital Ratios:
                                                       
Equity to assets at end of period
    7.11%       8.20%       7.84%       8.37%       8.96%       7.60 %     NM  
Tier 1 leverage (core) capital to adjusted tangible assets(4)
    7.60%       8.00%       7.84%       8.09%       8.65%       8.16 %     NM  
Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio(4)
    12.03%       11.56%       11.11%       11.40%       13.76%       15.00 %     NM  
Total risk-based capital ratio(4)
    12.40%       11.97%       11.48%       11.81%       14.13%       15.37 %     NM  
Tangible capital to tangible assets(4)
    7.60%       8.00%       7.84%       8.09%       8.65%       8.16 %     NM  


(1)  Interest rate spread represents the difference between the weighted average yield on interest-earning assets and the weighted average rate paid on interest-bearing liabilities.
 
(2)  Net interest margin represents net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.
 
(3)  Efficiency ratio represents noninterest expense as a percentage of the aggregate of net interest income and noninterest income.
 
(4)  Reflects regulatory capital ratios of Bank of Internet USA only.

“NM” means not meaningful.

6


Table of Contents

RISK FACTORS

      An investment in our common stock involves risk, and you should not invest in our common stock unless you can afford to lose some or all of your investment. You should carefully read the risks described below, together with all of the other information included in this prospectus, before you decide to buy any of our common stock. Our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations could be harmed by any of the following risks or other risks which have not been identified which we believe are immaterial or unlikely.

Risks Relating to Our Business

 
      Our limited operating history makes our future prospects and financial performance unpredictable, which may impair our ability to manage our business and your ability to assess our prospects.

      We commenced banking operations in July 2000. We remain subject to the risks inherently associated with new business enterprises in general and, more specifically, the risks of a new financial institution and, in particular, a new Internet-based financial institution. Our prospects are subject to the risks and uncertainties frequently encountered by companies in their early stages of development, including the risk that we will not be able to implement our business strategy. In addition, we have a limited history upon which we can rely in planning and making the critical decisions that will affect our future operating results. Similarly, because of the relatively immature state of our business, it will be difficult to evaluate our prospects. Accordingly, our financial performance to date may not be indicative of whether our business strategy will be successful.

 
      We may not be able to implement our plans for growth successfully, which could adversely affect our future operations.

      We have grown substantially, from $217.6 million in total assets and $167.6 million in total deposits at June 30, 2002 to $453.9 million in total assets and $295.7 million in total deposits at September 30, 2004. We expect to continue to grow our assets, our deposits, the number of our customers and the scale of our operations generally and will seek to grow at an accelerated rate following completion of the offering. Our future success will depend in part on our continued ability to manage our growth. We may not be able to achieve our growth plans, or sustain our historical growth rates or grow at all. Various factors, such as economic conditions, regulatory and legislative considerations and competition, may also impede our ability to expand our market presence. If we are unable to grow as planned, our business and prospects could be adversely affected.

      Our business strategy involves, among other things, continuing to grow our assets and loan portfolio and our customer base. We intend to use the net proceeds from the offering to help us achieve this objective. Our ability to achieve profitable growth depends in part upon our ability to identify favorable loan and investment opportunities and successfully attract deposits. Our management may not be able to use the net proceeds from the offering to implement our business strategy effectively, and we may encounter unanticipated obstacles in implementing our strategy. If we are unable to expand our business as we anticipate, we may be unable to benefit from the investments we have made to support our future growth. If this occurs, we may not be able to maintain profitability.

 
      Our inability to manage our growth could harm our business.

      We anticipate that our asset size and deposit base will continue to grow over time, perhaps significantly. To manage the expected growth of our operations and personnel, we will be required to, among other things:

  •  improve existing and implement new transaction processing, operational and financial systems, procedures and controls;
 
  •  maintain effective credit scoring and underwriting guidelines; and
 
  •  expand our employee base and train and manage this growing employee base.

      If we are unable to manage growth effectively, our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected.

7


Table of Contents

 
      We could be adversely affected by changes in interest rates.

      Our profitability depends substantially on our net interest income, which could be negatively affected by changes in interest rates. Net interest income is the difference between the income we earn on interest-earning assets, such as mortgage loans and investment securities, and the interest we pay on interest-bearing liabilities, such as deposits and other borrowings. Because of the differences in both maturities and repricing characteristics of our interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, changes in interest rates do not produce equivalent changes in interest income earned on interest-earning assets and interest paid on interest-bearing liabilities. Accordingly, fluctuations in interest rates could adversely affect our net interest income and therefore profitability. We may not be able to manage our interest rate risk.

      Interest rates are highly sensitive to many factors which are beyond our control, including general economic conditions and policies of various governmental and regulatory agencies and, in particular, the Federal Reserve Board, or the FRB. Changes in monetary policy, including change in interest rates, will influence not only the interest we receive on our loans and investment securities and the amount of interest we pay on deposits, it will also affect our ability to originate loans and obtain deposits and our costs in doing so. When interest rates rise, the cost of borrowing also increases. Our business model is predicated on our operating on levels of net interest income that other banks might find unacceptable or unsustainable, as we typically pay interest rates on deposits in the higher end of the spectrum and often charge lower interest rates and fees than those charged by competitors. Accordingly, changes in levels of market interest rates could materially and adversely affect our net interest income, asset quality, loan origination volume, business and prospects.

      We expect more of our interest-bearing liabilities will mature or reprice within one year than will our interest-earning assets, resulting in a one year negative interest rate sensitivity gap (the difference between our interest rate sensitive assets maturing or repricing within one year and our interest rate sensitive liabilities maturing or repricing within one year, expressed as a percentage of interest-earning assets). In a rising interest rate environment, an institution with a negative gap generally would be expected, absent the effects of other factors, to experience a greater increase in its cost of liabilities relative to its yield on assets, and thus a decrease in its net interest income. For a further discussion of our interest rate risks and the assumptions underlying our interest rate risk calculations, see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations — Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk.”

 
      We may need to raise additional capital that may not be available, which could harm our business.

      Due to applicable capital adequacy regulations and sound banking practices, our growth will require that we generate additional capital either through retained earnings or the issuance of additional shares of common stock or other capital instruments. We may choose to raise additional capital even if we believe we have sufficient funds for our current operating plan. Additional capital may not be available on terms acceptable to us, if at all. Any equity financings could result in dilution to our stockholders or reduction in the earnings available to our common stockholders. If adequate capital is not available or the terms of such capital are not attractive, we may have to curtail our growth and our business, and our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected.

 
      As a bank whose principal means of delivering banking services is the Internet, we are subject to risks particular to that method of delivery.

      We are an independent Internet-based bank, as distinguished from the Internet banking services of an established “brick and mortar” bank. Independent Internet-based banks often have found it difficult to achieve profitability and revenue growth. Several factors contribute to the unique problems that Internet-based banks face. These include concerns for the security of personal information, the absence of personal relationships between bankers and customers, the absence of loyalty to a conventional hometown bank, customers’ difficulty in understanding and assessing the substance and financial strength of an Internet-based bank, a lack of confidence in the likelihood of success and permanence of Internet-based banks and many

8


Table of Contents

individuals’ unwillingness to trust their personal assets to a relatively new technological medium such as the Internet. As a result, some potential customers may be unwilling to establish a relationship with us.

      Conventional “brick and mortar” banks, in growing numbers, are offering the option of Internet-based banking services to their existing and prospective customers. The public may perceive conventional banks as being safer, more responsive, more comfortable to deal with and more accountable as providers of their banking services, including their Internet-based banking services. We may not be able to offer Internet-based banking services that have sufficient advantages over the Internet-based banking services and other characteristics of conventional “brick and mortar” banks to enable us to compete successfully.

      Moreover, both the Internet and the financial services industry are undergoing rapid technological changes, with frequent introductions of new technology-driven products and services. In addition to improving the ability to serve customers, the effective use of technology increases efficiency and enables financial institutions to reduce costs. Our future success will depend in part upon our ability to address the needs of our customers by using technology to provide products and services that will satisfy customer demands, as well as to create additional efficiencies in our operations. We may not be able to effectively implement new technology-driven products and services or be successful in marketing theses products and services to our customers. If we are unable, for technical, legal, financial or other reasons, to adapt in a timely manner to changing market conditions, customer requirements or emerging industry standards, our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected.

      Many of our competitors have substantially greater resources to invest in technological improvements. To remain competitive, we must continue to enhance and improve the responsiveness, functionality and features of our Internet-based services. Most of our software and computer systems are comprised of “off-the-shelf” applications, and we have limited proprietary computer software, information databases and applications. Others may develop and offer superior banking products and services that may gain greater acceptance among potential customers. Our success will depend in part on our ability both to license and develop leading technologies to enhance our existing services, develop new services and technologies that address the increasingly sophisticated and varied needs of our customers and respond to technological advances and emerging industry standards and practices on a cost effective and timely basis.

 
      We face strong competition for customers and may not succeed in implementing our business strategy.

      Our business strategy depends on our ability to remain competitive. There is strong competition for customers from existing banks and other types of financial institutions, including those that use the Internet as a medium for banking transactions or as an advertising platform. Our competitors include:

  •  large, publicly-traded, Internet-based banks, as well as smaller Internet-based banks;
 
  •  “brick and mortar” banks, including those that have implemented websites to facilitate online banking; and
 
  •  traditional banking institutions such as thrifts, finance companies, credit unions and mortgage banks.

      Some of these competitors have been in business for a long time and have name recognition and an established customer base. Most of our competitors are larger and have greater financial and personnel resources. In order to compete profitably, we may need to reduce the rates we offer on loans and investments and increase the rates we offer on deposits, which actions may adversely affect our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations.

      To remain competitive, we believe we must successfully implement our business strategy. Our success depends on, among other things:

  •  having a large and increasing number of customers who use our bank for their banking needs;
 
  •  our ability to attract, hire and retain key personnel as our business grows;
 
  •  our ability to secure additional capital as needed;

9


Table of Contents

  •  the relevance of our products and services to customer needs and demands and the rate at which we and our competitors introduce them;
 
  •  our ability to offer products and services with fewer employees than competitors;
 
  •  the satisfaction of our customers with our customer service;
 
  •  ease of use of our websites; and
 
  •  our ability to provide a secure and stable technology platform for financial services that provides us with reliable and effective operational, financial and information systems.

      If we are unable to implement our business strategy, our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected.

 
      A natural disaster or recurring energy shortage, especially in California, could harm our business.

      We are based in San Diego, California, and approximately 63.5% of our total loan portfolio was secured by real estate located in California at September 30, 2004. In addition, the computer systems that operate our Internet websites and some of their back-up systems are located in San Diego, California. Historically, California has been vulnerable to natural disasters. Therefore, we are susceptible to the risks of natural disasters, such as earthquakes, wildfires, floods and mudslides. Natural disasters could harm our operations directly through interference with communications, including the interruption or loss of our websites which would prevent us from gathering deposits, originating loans and processing and controlling our flow of business, as well as through the destruction of facilities and our operational, financial and management information systems. A natural disaster or recurring power outages may also impair the value of our largest class of assets, our loan portfolio, which is comprised substantially of real estate loans. Uninsured or underinsured disasters may reduce borrowers’ ability to repay mortgage loans. Disasters may also reduce the value of the real estate securing our loans, impairing our ability to recover on defaulted loans through foreclosure and making it more likely that we would suffer losses on defaulted loans. California has also experienced energy shortages which, if they recur, could impair the value of the real estate in those areas affected. Although we have implemented several back-up systems and protections (and maintain business interruption insurance), these measures may not protect us fully from the effects of a natural disaster. The occurrence of natural disasters or energy shortages in California could have a material adverse effect on our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations.

 
      Our multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans held for investment are generally unseasoned, and defaults on such loans would harm our business.

      At September 30, 2004, our multifamily residential loans held for investment were $318.9 million, or 90.0% of our total loans held for investment, and the average loan size of our multifamily residential loans was $673,000. At September 30, 2004, our commercial real estate loans held for investment were $11.7 million, or 3.3% of our total loans held for investment, and the average loan size of our commercial real estate loans was $617,000. The payment on such loans is typically dependent on the cash flows generated by the projects, which are affected by the supply and demand for multifamily residential units and commercial property within the relative market. If the market for multifamily residential units and commercial property experiences a decline in demand, multifamily and commercial borrowers may suffer losses on their projects and be unable to repay their loans.

 
      Our emphasis on multifamily loans increases the possibility of loan losses.

      We may incur significant losses because approximately 90.0% of our loans are secured by multifamily properties. Loans secured by multifamily properties may have a greater risk of loss than loans secured by single family properties because they typically involve larger loan balances to single borrowers or groups of related borrowers. Significant losses on loans secured by multifamily properties are possible because the cash flows from multifamily properties securing the loans may become inadequate to service the loan payments. The payment experience on these loans typically depends upon the successful operation of the related real

10


Table of Contents

estate project and is subject to risks such as excessive vacancy rates or inadequate rental income levels. Many of our borrowers have more than one commercial real estate or multifamily loan outstanding with us.

      Multifamily underwriting typically requires inspection of each property and familiarity with the location of the property and the local real estate market. While we have a policy to conduct a site visit of the property underlying every multifamily loan and focus our multifamily originations in only four states with which we believe we have greater familiarity, we intend to expand our multifamily loan originations beyond those four states. We may not be able to develop the requisite experience with other markets to be able to underwrite successfully multifamily loans in additional communities and states. We also may not be able to assess correctly relevant criteria such as the level of vacancies with respect to a particular property or the community in which it is located or that we will be able to continue to physically inspect each multifamily property. Our inability to successfully underwrite multifamily loans could lead to delinquencies and charge-offs and could adversely affect our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations.

 
      If our allowance for loan losses is not sufficient to cover actual loan losses, our earnings, capital adequacy and overall financial condition may suffer materially.

      Our loans are generally secured by multifamily and, to a lesser extent, commercial and single family real estate properties, each initially having a fair market value generally greater than the amount of the loan secured. However, even though our loans are typically secured, the risk of default, generally due to a borrower’s inability to make scheduled payments on his or her loan, is an inherent risk of the banking business. In determining the amount of the allowance for loan losses, we make various assumptions and judgments about the collectibility of our loan portfolio, including the creditworthiness of our borrowers and the value of the real estate serving as collateral for the repayment of our loans. Defaults by borrowers could result in losses that exceed our loan loss reserves. We have originated or purchased many of our loans recently, so we do not have sufficient repayment experience to be certain whether the allowance for loan losses we have established is adequate. We may have to establish a larger allowance for loan losses in the future if, in our judgment, it is necessary. Any increase in our allowance for loan losses will increase our expenses and consequently may adversely affect our profitability, capital adequacy and overall financial condition.

 
      Declining real estate values, particularly in California, could reduce the value of our loan portfolio and impair our profitability and financial condition.

      Substantially all of the loans in our portfolio are secured by real estate. At September 30, 2004, approximately 63.5% of our total loan portfolio was secured by real estate located in California. If there is a significant decline in real estate values, especially in California, the collateral for our loans will become less valuable. If such an event were to occur, we may experience charge-offs at a greater level than we would otherwise experience, as the proceeds resulting from foreclosure may be significantly lower than the amounts outstanding on such loans. Declining real estate values frequently accompany periods of economic downturn or recession and increasing unemployment, all of which can lead to lower demand for mortgage loans of the types we originate. These changes would likely have a material adverse effect on our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations.

 
      We frequently purchase loans in bulk or “pools.” We may experience lower yields or losses on loan “pools” because the assumptions we use when purchasing loans in bulk may not always prove correct.

      From time to time, we purchase loans in bulk or “pools.” When we determine the purchase price we are willing to pay to purchase loans in bulk, management makes certain assumptions about, among other things, how fast borrowers will prepay their loans, the real estate market and our ability to collect loans successfully and, if necessary, to dispose of any real estate that may be acquired through foreclosure. When we purchase loans in bulk, we perform certain due diligence procedures and we purchase the loans subject to customary limited indemnities. To the extent that our underlying assumptions prove to be inaccurate or the basis for those assumptions change (such as an unanticipated decline in the real estate market), the purchase price paid for the “pool” of loans may prove to have been excessive, resulting in a lower yield or a loss. For example, if we purchase a “pool” of loans at a premium and some of the loans are prepaid before we expected, we will

11


Table of Contents

earn less on the purchase than expected. Our success in growing through purchases of loan “pools” depends on our ability to price loan “pools” properly and on general economic conditions in the geographic areas where the underlying properties of our loans are located.

      Acquiring loans through bulk purchases may involve acquiring loans of a type or in geographic areas where management may not have substantial prior experience. We may be exposed to a greater risk of loss to the extent that bulk purchases contain such loans.

 
      We face limits on our ability to lend.

      The amount that we can lend to a single borrower is limited to 15.0% of the unimpaired capital and surplus of our subsidiary bank. At September 30, 2004, no single loan was larger than $2.9 million and our bank’s largest single lending relationship had an outstanding balance of $4.3 million. We expect that our lending limit will increase to approximately $           million immediately following the offering, assuming $           million is raised in the offering and that $           million of the net proceeds are contributed to our bank, based on the assumptions set forth below the table in “Capitalization.” Because our lending limits may be significantly lower than those of our competitors, we may be at a competitive disadvantage in pursuing relationships with larger borrowers in our market areas. Notwithstanding our loan limits, we may elect not to make loans up to our maximum loan limit for any reason. If we do elect to make larger loans, we may seek to reduce our exposure by making the loan with one or more other financial institutions which become solely liable for their portion of the loan. We may not be successful in securing other institutions to make loans with us or in successfully administering those loans, if we elect to make larger loans.

 
      Our success depends in large part on the continuing efforts of a few individuals. If we are unable to retain these personnel or attract, hire and retain others to oversee and manage our company, our business could suffer.

      Our success depends substantially on the skill and abilities of our senior management team, including our President and Chief Executive Officer Gary Lewis Evans, our Chief Financial Officer Andrew J. Micheletti and our bank’s Chief Credit Officer Patrick A. Dunn, each of whom performs multiple functions that might otherwise be performed by separate individuals at larger banks, as well as our Chairman Jerry F. Englert and our Vice Chairman Theodore C. Allrich. These individuals may not be able to fulfill their responsibilities adequately, and they may not remain with us. The loss of the services of any of these individuals or other key employees, whether through termination of employment, disability or otherwise, could have a material adverse effect on our business. In addition, our ability to grow and manage our growth depends on our ability to continue to identify, attract, hire, train, retain and motivate highly skilled executive, technical, managerial, sales and marketing, customer service and professional personnel. The implementation of our business plan and our future success will depend on such qualified personnel. Competition for such employees is intense, and there is a risk that we will not be able to successfully attract, assimilate or retain sufficiently qualified personnel. If we fail to attract and retain the necessary technical, managerial, sales and marketing and customer service personnel, as well as experienced professionals, our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected. We maintain a “key man” life insurance policy on Gary Lewis Evans and bank-owned life insurance on other executive officers.

 
      We depend on third-party service providers for our core banking technology, and interruptions in or terminations of their services could materially impair the quality of our services.

      We rely substantially upon third-party service providers for our core banking technology and to protect us from bank system failures or disruptions. This reliance may mean that we will not be able to resolve operational problems internally or on a timely basis, which could lead to customer dissatisfaction or long-term disruption of our operations. Our operations also depend upon our ability to replace a third-party service provider if it experiences difficulties that interrupt operations or if an essential third-party service terminates. If these service arrangements are terminated for any reason without an immediately available substitute arrangement, our operations may be severely interrupted or delayed. If such interruption or delay were to

12


Table of Contents

continue for a substantial period of time, our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected.
 
      A national or regional economic downturn could reduce our customer base, our level of deposits and demand for our financial products such as loans.

      A deterioration in economic conditions, whether caused by national events or local events, in particular an economic slowdown in California, where approximately 63.5% of our total loan portfolio was located at September 30, 2004, could result in the following consequences, any of which could hurt our business materially:

  •  loan delinquencies may increase;
 
  •  problem assets and foreclosures may increase;
 
  •  demand for our products and services may decline; and
 
  •  the value of collateral supporting our loans, especially real estate, may decline, in turn reducing customers’ borrowing power and reducing potential proceeds from foreclosures and from sales of loans.

      The State of California continues to face its own fiscal challenges, the long term effect of which on the State’s economy cannot be predicted.

 
      We rely substantially on third parties to service our loans and to provide us with appraisals, credit reports, title searches, environmental inspections and reports and other underwriting services without errors or fraud and in a timely manner.

      We rely on other companies to administer and service some of our loans by collecting payments, disbursing proceeds of collection and, if necessary, conducting foreclosures. We also rely on other companies to support our loan underwriting process by providing us with, among other things, appraisals, credit reports, environmental inspections and reports and title searches. The value to our customers of the services we offer and the success of our business ultimately depend in large part on third parties providing these ancillary services without errors, interruptions, delays and fraud. If third parties commit fraud or perform their services negligently, such as by intentionally or negligently reporting false or misleading information, we could suffer losses by relying on that information in conducting our business. Errors, interruptions or delays by third parties providing these ancillary services could also cause losses, as well as delays, in the processing and closing of loans for our customers. If we cannot manage these third parties so that they deliver these ancillary services as we expect, we likely will experience customer dissatisfaction, and our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected.

 
Our operations are subject to numerous laws and government regulation, which may change.

      We are subject to a large body of laws governing our business, such as laws governing our charter, state laws determining our remedies as lenders, laws governing labor relations, taxation, contracts, consumer issues and many other aspects of our business. We are regulated primarily by the OTS, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, or the FDIC, and, to a lesser extent, the FRB. Because we are an Internet-based bank, we are subject to various electronic funds transfer rules adopted by the FRB. We are also subject to various general commercial and consumer laws and regulations, such as the Truth-in-Lending Act, the Truth-in-Savings Act, the Real Estate Settlement Procedures Act of 1974 and the Uniform Commercial Code, among many others. Any significant change in applicable laws, rules and regulations, as well as new laws, rules and regulations could significantly increase our cost of compliance and adversely affect our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations.

      Laws and regulations directly applicable to the Internet and electronic commerce may become more prevalent in the future. In the event Congress or state legislatures or regulators such as the OTS, the FDIC, the FRB, the Federal Trade Commission or other governmental authorities enact or modify laws or adopt regulations relating to the Internet, our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations could

13


Table of Contents

be adversely affected. Such legislation and regulation could reduce the rate of growth in Internet usage generally and decrease the acceptance of the Internet as a commercial medium. The laws and regulations governing the Internet remain largely unsettled, even in areas where there has been some legislative or regulatory action. It may take years to determine whether, and how, existing laws and regulations such as those governing intellectual property, privacy and taxation apply to the Internet. The growth and development of the market for electronic commerce may prompt calls for more stringent consumer protection laws and regulations, both in the United States and abroad, that may impose additional burdens on companies conducting business over the Internet.
 
      We will incur increased costs as a result of being a public company.

      As a public company, we will incur significant legal, accounting and other expenses that we did not incur as a private company, including costs associated with our public company reporting requirements. We also anticipate that we will incur costs associated with recently adopted corporate governance requirements, including requirements under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, as well as new accounting pronouncements and new rules implemented by the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the SEC, and the Nasdaq National Market. Any expenses required to comply with evolving standards may result in increased general and administrative expenses and a diversion of management time and attention from our business. In addition, these new laws and regulations could make it more difficult or more costly for us to obtain certain types of insurance, including director and officer liability insurance, and we may be forced to accept reduced policy limits and coverage or incur substantially greater costs to obtain the same or similar coverage. The effect of these events could also make it more difficult for us to attract and retain qualified persons to serve on our board of directors, on our board committees or as executive officers. We are presently evaluating and monitoring developments with respect to these laws and regulations and cannot predict or estimate the amount or timing of additional costs we may incur to respond to their requirements.

 
      Ownership of our common stock is highly concentrated, which may prevent you or other stockholders from influencing significant corporate decisions and may result in conflicts of interest that could cause our stock price to decline.

      Our executive officers, directors and their affiliates beneficially owned or controlled approximately 33.0% of our outstanding common stock at November 30, 2004, and will beneficially own or control approximately      %, or approximately      % assuming full exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option, of our outstanding common stock following the offering, in each case assuming the exercise of all outstanding warrants held by them and the conversion of all shares of Series A preferred stock held by them into common stock (based on current conversion terms). Accordingly, these executive officers, directors and their affiliates, acting as a group, will have substantial influence over the outcome of corporate actions requiring stockholder approval, including the election of directors, any merger, consolidation or sale of all or substantially all of our assets or any other significant corporate transactions. This concentration of ownership may also delay or prevent a change of control of us, even if such a change of control would benefit our other stockholders, and might affect our stock price.

 
Anti-takeover provisions of our certificate of incorporation and bylaws and federal and Delaware law may prevent or frustrate a change in control, even if an acquisition would be beneficial to our stockholders, which could affect our stock price adversely and prevent attempts by our stockholders to replace or remove our current management.

      Provisions of our certificate of incorporation and bylaws may delay or prevent a change in control, discourage bids at a premium over the market price of our common stock and adversely affect the market price of our common stock and the voting or other rights of the holders of our common stock. These provisions, among other things:

  •  authorize our board of directors to issue preferred stock with voting and other rights to be determined by them;

14


Table of Contents

  •  limit the persons who can call special meetings of stockholders;
 
  •  prohibit stockholder action by written consent;
 
  •  create a classified board of directors pursuant to which our directors are elected for staggered three-year terms; and
 
  •  provide that a supermajority vote of our stockholders is required to amend certain provisions of our certificate of incorporation and bylaws.

      We are subject to the provisions of the Delaware corporation law that, in general, prohibit any business combination with a beneficial owner of 15.0% or more of our common stock for five years unless the holder’s acquisition of our stock was approved in advance by our board of directors or other conditions are met.

      Acquisition of control of a federal savings bank such as Bank of Internet USA requires advance approval by the Office of Thrift Supervision, Department of the Treasury, or the OTS. Under federal law, acquisition of more than 10.0% of our common stock would result in a rebuttable presumption of control of Bank of Internet USA and the ownership of more than 25% of the voting stock would result in conclusive control of Bank of Internet USA. Depending on the circumstances, the foregoing requirements may prevent or frustrate a change in control of us, discourage bids at a premium over the market price of our common stock and adversely affect the market price of our common stock and the voting or other rights of the holders of our common stock.

 
We are exposed to risk of environmental liability with respect to properties to which we take title.

      In the course of our business, we may foreclose and take title to real estate and could be subject to environmental liabilities with respect to those properties. We may be held liable to a governmental entity or to third parties for property damage, personal injury, investigation and clean-up costs incurred by these parties in connection with environmental contamination or may be required to investigate or clean up hazardous or toxic substances or chemical releases at a property. The costs associated with investigation or remediation activities could be substantial. In addition, if we are the owner or former owner of a contaminated site, we may be subject to common law claims by third parties based on damages and costs resulting from environmental contamination emanating from the property. If we become subject to significant environmental liabilities, our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected.

 
The U.S. government’s monetary policies or changes in those policies could have a major effect on our operating results, and we cannot predict what those policies will be or any changes in such policies or the effect of such policies on us.

      Our earnings will be affected by domestic economic conditions and the monetary and fiscal policies of the U.S. government and its agencies. The monetary policies of the FRB have had, and will continue to have, an important effect on the operating results of commercial banks and other financial institutions through its power to implement national monetary policy in order, among other things, to curb inflation or combat a recession.

      The monetary policies of the FRB, effected principally through open market operations and regulation of the discount rate and reserve requirements, have had major effects upon the levels of bank loans, investments and deposits. For example, in 2001, several drops in the discount rate by the Federal Open Market Committee placed tremendous pressure on the profitability of all financial institutions because of the resulting contraction of net interest margins. Any increase in prevailing interest rates due to changes in monetary policies may adversely affect banks such as us, whose liabilities tend to reprice quicker than their assets. It is not possible to predict the nature or effect of future changes in monetary and fiscal policies.

 
We have risks of systems failure and security risks, including “hacking” and identity theft.

      The computer systems and network infrastructure utilized by us and others could be vulnerable to unforeseen problems. This is true of both our internally developed systems and the systems of our third-party service providers. Our operations are dependent upon our ability to protect computer equipment against

15


Table of Contents

damage from fire, power loss, telecommunication failure or similar catastrophic events. Any damage or failure that causes an interruption in our operations could adverse affect our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations.

      Our operations depend upon encryption and authentication technology to provide secure transmission of confidential information and upon our ability to generally protect the computer systems and network infrastructure utilized by us against damage from security breaches and other disruptive problems associated with Internet-related technological problems or malicious behavior of other users. Advances in computer capabilities, new discoveries in the field of cryptography or other developments could result in a compromise or breach of the processes and systems used to protect customer data. Notwithstanding such possible advances and developments, “hackers” and other disruptions could jeopardize the security of information stored in, and transmitted through, such computer systems and network infrastructure, which may result in significant liability to us and deter potential customers. With the rise in business conducted over the Internet, incidents of “identity theft” have become more frequent. Although management has implemented security technology and established operational procedures to prevent these and other threats to security, these security measures may not continue to be successful. A failure of such security measures, or the failure of our third-party service providers to design, implement and monitor their own security systems, could adverse affect our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations.

      Any disruption in our operations due to systems failure or security breach could deter potential customers or cause existing customers to leave, could cause losses for which we would be liable and could adversely affect our reputation. Any such system failure or security breach could adversely affect our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations.

Risks Relating to the Offering

 
There has been no prior market for our common stock, and our stock price may be volatile.

      Prior to the offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. The offering price for our common stock in the offering will be determined by negotiations between us and the representatives of the underwriters participating in the offering. Among the factors to be considered in determining the offering price of our common stock, in addition to prevailing market conditions, are our historical performance, estimates regarding our business potential and earnings prospects, an assessment of our management and the consideration of the above factors in relation to market valuation of companies in related businesses. The initial public offering price of our common stock may bear no relationship to the price at which our common stock will trade upon completion of the offering, and you may not be able to resell your shares at or above the initial public offering price.

 
You will experience substantial dilution in the value of your shares immediately following the offering.

      Investors purchasing shares of our common stock in the offering will pay more for their shares than the amount paid by existing stockholders who acquired shares prior to the offering. Accordingly, if you purchase common stock in the offering, you will incur immediate dilution in pro forma net tangible book value of approximately $           per share. In the past, we issued options and warrants to acquire common stock at exercise prices significantly below the initial public offering price and Series A preferred stock that is currently convertible at a conversion price of $10.50 per share. If the holders of outstanding options and warrants exercise those securities or, depending on the per share initial public offering price, holders of Series A preferred stock convert their securities into common stock, you will incur further dilution. See “Dilution.”

 
A public trading market for our common stock may not develop or be maintained.

      We have applied to have our common stock listed for quotation on the Nasdaq National Market under the symbol “BOFI.” However, we cannot assure you that an established and liquid trading market for our common stock will develop, that it will continue if it does develop or that after the completion of the offering the common stock will trade at or above the initial public offering price. The representatives of the underwriters have advised us that they intend to make a market in our common stock. However, neither the

16


Table of Contents

representatives of the underwriters nor any other market maker is obligated to make a market in our shares, and any market making in our common stock may be discontinued at any time in the sole discretion of the party making such market.
 
We have never paid cash dividends on our common stock, and we do not expect to pay cash dividends on our common stock following the offering.

      We have never paid cash dividends on our common stock and do not expect to pay cash dividends on our common stock following the offering. Rather, we intend to retain earnings and increase capital in furtherance of our overall business objectives. We will periodically review our dividend policy in view of our operating performance and may declare dividends in the future if such payments are deemed appropriate and in compliance with applicable law and regulations. Cash and stock dividends are subject to determination and declaration by our board of directors, which will take into account our consolidated earnings, financial condition, liquidity and capital requirements, applicable governmental regulations and policies and other factors deemed relevant by our board of directors. Our ability to pay dividends, should we elect to do so, depends largely upon the ability of our bank to declare and pay dividends to us, which are subject to, among other things, the regulations of the OTS and the FDIC. The principal source of our revenues is dividends paid to us by our bank.

 
We will have broad discretion in the use of proceeds from the offering and may not obtain a significant return on the use of these proceeds.

      We intend to contribute approximately $           million of the net proceeds of the offering to Bank of the Internet USA to provide additional capital to support its growth, including the addition of loans secured by single family and multifamily residential properties and commercial real estate and U.S. government agency mortgage-backed and other securities, as well as to increase deposits and advances from Federal Home Loan Bank, or the FHLB. We also intend to use a portion of the net proceeds of the offering to prepay in full a note payable. Although we have no current plans, agreements or commitments with respect to any acquisition, we may, if the opportunity arises, use an unspecified portion of the net proceeds to acquire or invest in products, technologies or companies. Our management will have broad discretion in the use of the net proceeds from the offering and may spend the proceeds in ways that our stockholders may not deem desirable. The timing and amount of our actual expenditures will be based on many factors, including cash flows from operations and the growth of our business.

      Until we use the net proceeds of the offering for the above purposes, we intend to invest the funds in short term, investment grade securities and other qualified investments, such as federal funds sold. We cannot predict whether the net proceeds invested will yield a favorable return.

 
After an initial period of restriction, there will be a significant number of shares of our common stock available for future sale, which may depress our stock price.

      The market price of our common stock could decline as a result of sales of substantial amounts of our common stock in the public market after the offering, or even the perception that such sales could occur. We have agreed, and our directors, executive officers and certain holders of our outstanding common stock have also agreed, not to sell, offer, agree to sell, contract to sell, hypothecate, pledge, grant any option to purchase, make any short sale or otherwise dispose of or hedge, directly or indirectly, any of our common stock or securities that are substantially similar to our common stock, including but not limited to any securities that are convertible into or exchangeable for, or that represent the right to receive, our common stock or any substantially similar securities, or publicly announce an intention to do any of the foregoing for a period of 180 days in the case of directors, executive officers and certain holders of our common stock, and 90 days in the case of certain other holders of our common stock, after the date of this prospectus without the prior written consent of WR Hambrecht + Co, LLC.

      Notwithstanding the restrictions, and based on the number of shares of common stock outstanding at September 30, 2004 and on the assumptions set forth below the table in “Capitalization,” there will be

17


Table of Contents

 shares of common stock outstanding immediately following the offering, or            shares if the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full. Of these shares, the following will be available for sale in the public market as follows:

  •             shares will be eligible for sale upon completion of the offering;
 
  •             shares will be eligible for sale 180 days from the date of this prospectus upon the expiration of the lock-up agreements described above;
 
  •             shares will be eligible for sale 90 days from the date of this prospectus upon expiration of the lock-up agreements described above; and
 
  •             shares will be eligible for sale upon the exercise of vested options 180 days after the date of this prospectus.

Risks Relating to the Auction Process

 
Potential investors should not expect to sell our shares for a profit shortly after our common stock begins trading.

      We will determine the initial public offering price for the shares sold in the offering through an auction conducted by us and our underwriters. We believe the auction process will reveal a clearing price for the shares of our common stock offered in the offering. The clearing price is the highest price at which all of the shares offered (including the shares subject to the underwriters’ over-allotment option) may be sold to potential investors. Although we and our underwriters may elect to set the initial public offering price below the auction clearing price, the public offering price may be at or near the clearing price. If there is little to no demand for our shares at or above the initial public offering price once trading begins, the price of our shares would decline following the offering. If your objective is to make a short term profit by selling the shares you purchase in the offering shortly after trading begins, you should not submit a bid in the auction.

 
Some bids made at or above the initial public offering price may not receive an allocation of shares.

      Our underwriters may require that bidders confirm their bids before the auction for the offering closes. If a bidder is requested to confirm a bid and fails to do so within a required time frame, that bid will be rejected and will not receive an allocation of shares even if the bid is at or above the initial public offering price. In addition, we, in consultation with our underwriters, may determine, in our sole discretion, that some bids that are at or above the initial public offering price are manipulative and disruptive to the bidding process, in which case such bids will be rejected.

 
Potential investors may receive a full allocation of the shares they bid for if their bids are successful and should not bid for more shares than they are prepared to purchase.

      If the initial public offering price is at or near the clearing price for the shares offered in the offering, the number of shares represented by successful bids will equal or nearly equal the number of shares offered by this prospectus. Successful bidders may therefore be allocated all or nearly all of the shares that they bid for in the auction. Therefore, we caution investors against submitting a bid that does not accurately represent the number of shares of our common stock that they are willing and prepared to purchase.

18


Table of Contents

CAUTIONARY STATEMENT REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

      A number of the presentations and disclosures in this prospectus, including any statements preceded by, followed by or which include the words “may,” “could,” “should,” “will,” “would,” “hope,” “might,” “believe,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “estimate,” “intend,” “plan,” “assume” or similar expressions, constitute forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements, implicitly and explicitly, include the assumptions underlying the statements and other information with respect to our beliefs, plans, objectives, goals, expectations, anticipations, estimates, intentions, financial condition, results of operations, future performance and business, including our expectations and estimates with respect to our revenues, expenses, earnings, return on equity, return on assets, efficiency ratio, asset quality and other financial data and capital and performance ratios.

      Although we believe that the expectations reflected in our forward-looking statements are reasonable, these statements involve risks and uncertainties that are subject to change based on various important factors (some of which are beyond our control). The following factors, among others, could cause our financial performance to differ materially from our beliefs, plans, objectives, goals, expectations, anticipations, estimates, intentions and other forward-looking statements:

  •  inflation and interest rate, market and monetary fluctuations;
 
  •  higher defaults on our loan portfolio than we expect;
 
  •  the strength of the United States economy in general and the strength of the regional and local economies within California and other regions in which we have loan collateral and concentration of loans;
 
  •  the continued acceptance of Internet-based banking by consumers and businesses;
 
  •  the willingness of users to substitute competitors’ products and services for our products and services;
 
  •  our timely development of new products and services in a changing environment, including the features, pricing and quality of our products and services compared to the products and services of our competitors;
 
  •  technological changes;
 
  •  changes in consumer spending and savings habits;
 
  •  the effects of, and changes in, trade, monetary and fiscal policies and laws, including interest rate policies of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System;
 
  •  the effect of changes in financial services policies, laws and regulations, including laws, regulations and policies concerning taxes, banking, securities and insurance, and their application by regulatory bodies; and
 
  •  the other risks discussed under “Risk Factors.”

      If one or more of the factors affecting our forward-looking information and statements proves incorrect, then our actual results, performance or achievements could differ materially from those expressed in, or implied by, our forward-looking information and statements. We caution you not to place undue reliance on our forward-looking information and statements.

      We do not intend to update our forward-looking information and statements, whether written or oral, to reflect events or circumstances after the date of this prospectus. All forward-looking statements attributable to us are expressly qualified by our cautionary statements.

19


Table of Contents

USE OF PROCEEDS

      Our net proceeds from the sale of our shares of common stock in the offering are expected to be approximately $           million (or approximately $           million if the underwriters’ over-allotment option is exercised in full), assuming an initial public offering price of $           per share and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses.

      We intend to contribute approximately $           million of the net proceeds of the offering to Bank of Internet USA to provide additional capital to support its growth, including the addition of loans secured by single family (one to four units) and multifamily (five or more units) residential properties and commercial real estate and U.S. government agency mortgage-backed and other securities, as well as to increase deposits and advances from the FHLB. We also intend to use a portion of the net proceeds of the offering to prepay in full a note payable. At November 30, 2004, the note payable had an outstanding principal balance of $5.0 million. The note payable bears interest at prime plus one percent per annum, which at November 30, 2004 was 6.0% per annum, and interest is payable quarterly. Principal on the note payable is due quarterly in 36 equal installments beginning on January 24, 2005 and ending on October 24, 2013. As a result of repaying the note payable, our bank’s common stock that is collateral for the note payable will be released. Pending these uses, we will invest the net proceeds initially in short term, investment grade securities and other qualified investments, such as federal funds sold.

DIVIDEND POLICY

      We have never paid cash dividends on our common stock, electing to retain earnings for funding our growth and business. We currently anticipate continuing our policy of retaining earnings to fund growth. Our ability to pay dividends, should we ever elect to do so, depends largely upon the ability of our bank to declare and pay dividends to us as the principal source of our revenues is dividends paid to us by our bank. Future dividends will depend primarily upon our earnings, financial condition and need for funds, as well as government policies and regulations applicable to us and our bank, which limit the amount that may be paid as dividends without prior approval. See “Regulation — Regulation of Bank of Internet USA — Capital Distribution Limitations.”

20


Table of Contents

CAPITALIZATION

      The following table sets forth our capitalization at September 30, 2004. Our capitalization is presented:

  •  on an actual basis; and
 
  •  on an as adjusted basis to reflect our receipt of the net proceeds from the sale of                      shares of common stock in the offering, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us in the offering (and assuming no exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option), as if the sale of our common stock had been consummated on September 30, 2004.

      The following information should be read together with our consolidated financial statements and the related notes thereto.

                       
At September 30, 2004

Actual As Adjusted


(Dollars in thousands)
Borrowings:
               
 
Advances from the FHLB
  $ 121,475     $    
 
Note payable(1)
    3,300          
     
     
 
   
Total borrowings(2)
  $ 124,775     $    
     
     
 
Stockholders’ equity:
               
 
Convertible preferred stock, $10,000 stated value; 1,000,000 shares authorized; 1,200 shares designated Series A preferred stock, 675 shares issued and outstanding
  $ 6,637     $    
 
Common stock, $.01 par value; 10,000,000 shares authorized; 4,519,649 shares issued and outstanding actual and         shares issued and outstanding as adjusted(3)
    45          
 
Additional paid-in capital
    22,418          
 
Accumulated other comprehensive loss, net of tax
    (78 )        
 
Retained earnings
    3,274          
     
     
 
   
Total stockholders’ equity
  $ 32,296     $    
     
     
 
     
Total capitalization
  $ 157,071     $    
     
     
 
Capital ratios:
               
 
Equity to assets at end of period
    7.11 %        
 
Tier 1 leverage (core) to adjusted tangible assets(4)
    7.60 %        
 
Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio(4)
    12.03 %        
 
Total risk-based capital ratio(4)
    12.40 %        
 
Tangible capital to tangible assets(4)
    7.60 %        


(1)  We intend to prepay in full without penalty the note payable with a portion of the net proceeds from the offering. At November 30, 2004, the note payable had an outstanding principal balance of $5.0 million.
 
(2)  In addition to the indebtedness reflected above, we had total deposits of $295.7 million at September 30, 2004.
 
(3)  Common stock actual, but not common stock as adjusted, excludes 728,000 shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of warrants with an exercise price of $4.19 per share, which warrants we expect to

21


Table of Contents

be exercised on a cash basis prior to the offering because they terminate if not exercised prior to that time. Common stock actual and common stock as adjusted exclude:

  •  722,517 shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of outstanding stock options, with a weighted average exercise price of $6.11 per share;
 
  •  59,950 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of warrants with an exercise price of $14.00 per share;
 
  •  642,600 shares of common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our Series A preferred stock. Our Series A preferred stock is convertible at prices which increase periodically through January 2009, after which time our Series A preferred stock is no longer convertible into our common stock. The current conversion price of $10.50 per share is in effect through January 1, 2006;
 
  •  shares of common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2004 stock incentive plan, which provides that aggregate equity awards under our 2004 stock incentive plan and options outstanding under our 1999 stock option plan may not exceed 14.8% of our outstanding common stock at any time; and
 
  •  up to 500,000 shares of common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2004 employee stock purchase plan.

(4)  Reflects regulatory capital ratios of Bank of Internet USA only. The as adjusted ratio assumes the deployment of the net proceeds of the offering in assets with a      % risk weighting under applicable regulations.

22


Table of Contents

DILUTION

      If you invest in our common stock, your interest will be diluted to the extent of the difference between the public offering price per share of our common stock and the pro forma net tangible book value per share of our common stock after the offering. Net tangible book value per share is equal to the amount of our common stockholders’ equity less intangible assets, divided by the number of shares outstanding. The net tangible book value of our common stock at September 30, 2004 was $25.7 million, or $5.68 per share, based on the number of shares of common stock outstanding at September 30, 2004.

      After (1) giving effect to the sale of the                      shares of common stock in the offering, at an assumed initial public offering price of $           per share, assuming that the underwriters’ over-allotment option is not exercised, and (2) deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, our pro forma net tangible book value at September 30, 2004 would be approximately $           million, or $           per share. The offering will result in an immediate increase in net tangible book value of $           per share to existing stockholders and an immediate dilution of $           per share to new investors, or approximately      % of the assumed initial public offering price of $           per share. Dilution is determined by subtracting pro forma net tangible book value per share after the offering from the assumed initial public offering price of $           per share. The following table illustrates this per share dilution:

                   
Assumed initial public offering price per share
          $    
 
Net tangible book value per share at September 30, 2004
  $ 5.68          
 
Increase in net tangible book value per share attributable to new investors
               
     
         
Pro forma net tangible book value per share at September 30, 2004
               
             
 
Dilution per share to new investors
          $    
             
 

      We expect warrants for 728,000 shares of common stock with an exercise price of $4.19 per share to be exercised on a cash basis prior to the offering because they terminate if not exercised prior to that time. If these warrants are exercised, then the dilution per share to new investors would be $          .

      The following table summarizes the tangible book value of the outstanding shares and the total consideration paid to us and the average price paid per share by existing stockholders and new investors purchasing common stock in the offering. This information is presented on a pro forma basis at September 30, 2004, after giving effect to the sale of the                      shares of common stock in the offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $           per share.

                                           
Total
Shares Purchased Consideration Average


Price
Number Percent Amount Percent Per Share





Existing stockholders
              %   $           %   $    
New investors
              %     (1 )       %        
     
     
     
     
         
 
Total
            100 %   $         100 %   $    
     
     
     
     
         


(1)  Before deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions of approximately $           million and estimated offering expenses of approximately $                          payable by us, and assuming exercise of warrants for 728,000 shares of common stock with an exercise price of $4.19 per share, which warrants we expect to be exercised on a cash basis prior to the offering because they terminate if not exercised prior to that time. We have assumed no exercise of outstanding stock options and other warrants or conversion of our Series A preferred stock. In addition to the warrants for 728,000 shares of common stock, at September 30, 2004, there were outstanding:

  •  722,517 shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of outstanding stock options with a weighted average exercise price of $6.11 per share;

23


Table of Contents

  •  59,950 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of warrants with an exercise price of $14.00 per share; and
 
  •  642,600 shares of common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our Series A preferred stock (based on the current conversion price of $10.50 per share).

      To the extent that any outstanding options or warrants are exercised or, depending on the per share initial public offering price, Series A preferred stock is converted into common stock, there will be further dilution to new investors. In addition, we may choose to raise additional capital even if we believe we have sufficient funds for our current or future operating plans. To the extent that additional capital is raised through the sale of equity or convertible debt securities, the issuance of such securities could result in further dilution to our stockholders.

24


Table of Contents

SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL INFORMATION

      You should read the selected consolidated financial information set forth below together with our consolidated financial statements and related notes and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” included elsewhere in this prospectus. Our consolidated income statement information for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 and the consolidated balance sheet information as of September 30, 2004 are derived from our unaudited consolidated financial statements, which are included in this prospectus and, in the opinion of management, include all adjustments necessary for fair presentation of the results of such periods. The consolidated balance sheet information as of September 30, 2003 is derived from our unaudited consolidated financial information. The consolidated income statement information for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002 and the consolidated balance sheet information at June 30, 2004 and 2003 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. The consolidated income statement information for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2001 and the period from July 6, 1999 (inception) to June 30, 2000 and the consolidated balance sheet information at June 30, 2002, 2001 and 2000 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements that are not included in this prospectus. Historical results are not necessarily indicative of future results.

                                                         
At or for
At or for the Period
the Three Months July 6, 1999
Ended September 30, At or for the Fiscal Years Ended June 30, (inception) to


June 30,
2004 2003 2004 2003 2002 2001 2000







(Dollars in thousands, except per share data)
Selected Balance Sheet Data:
                                                       
Total assets
  $ 453,939     $ 284,617     $ 405,039     $ 273,464     $ 217,614     $ 156,628     $ 13,295  
Loans held for investment, net of allowance for loan losses
    355,105       246,760       355,261       245,933       167,251       139,679        
Loans held for sale, at cost
    216       969       435       3,602       128       22        
Allowance for loan losses
    1,060       805       1,045       790       505       310        
Investment securities
    55,702       377       3,665       441       726       1,522        
Total deposits
    295,677       202,190       269,841       193,992       167,618       127,204        
Advances from the FHLB
    121,475       58,360       101,446       55,900       29,900       15,900        
Note payable
    3,300             1,300                   870        
Total stockholders’ equity
    32,296       23,349       31,759       22,885       19,501       11,903       12,936  
Selected Income Statement Data:
                                                       
Interest and dividend income
  $ 4,826     $ 3,581     $ 15,772     $ 13,514     $ 11,641     $ 4,697     $ 24  
Interest expense
    2,738       2,176       9,242       8,426       8,144       3,535        
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net interest income
    2,088       1,405       6,530       5,088       3,497       1,162       24  
Provision for loan losses
    15       15       255       285       195       310        
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net interest income after provision for loan losses
    2,073       1,390       6,275       4,803       3,302       852       24  
Noninterest income
    169       288       1,190       1,349       297       52        
Noninterest expense
    1,139       1,077       3,819       3,158       3,008       1,985       1,012  
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
Income (loss) before income tax expense (benefit)
    1,103       601       3,646       2,994       591       (1,081 )     (988 )
Income tax expense (benefit)
    442       247       1,471       1,264       (429 )     1        
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net income (loss)
  $ 661     $ 354     $ 2,175     $ 1,730     $ 1,020     $ (1,082 )   $ (988 )
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net income (loss) attributable to common stock
  $ 560     $ 354     $ 2,035     $ 1,730     $ 1,020     $ (1,082 )   $ (988 )

25


Table of Contents

                                                           
At or for
At or for the Period
the Three Months July 6, 1999
Ended September 30, At or for the Fiscal Years Ended June 30, (inception) to


June 30,
2004 2003 2004 2003 2002 2001 2000







(Dollars in thousands, except per share data)
Per Share Data:
                                                       
Net income (loss):
                                                       
 
Basic
  $ 0.12     $ 0.08     $ 0.45     $ 0.39     $ 0.25     $ (0.29 )   $ (0.33 )
 
Diluted
  $ 0.11     $ 0.07     $ 0.39     $ 0.34     $ 0.21     $ (0.29 )   $ (0.33 )
Book value per common share
  $ 5.68     $ 5.22     $ 5.57     $ 5.11     $ 4.50     $ 3.21     $ 3.50  
Tangible book value per common share
  $ 5.68     $ 5.22     $ 5.57     $ 5.11     $ 4.50     $ 3.21     $ 3.50  
Weighted average number of common shares outstanding:
                                                       
 
Basic
    4,508,664       4,490,136       4,502,284       4,468,296       4,128,051       3,706,050       2,950,999  
 
Diluted
    5,164,963       5,150,298       5,160,482       5,134,940       4,795,401       3,706,050       2,950,999  
Common shares outstanding at end of period
    4,519,649       4,474,351       4,506,524       4,474,351       4,334,401       3,707,156       3,694,031  
Performance Ratios and Other Data:
                                                       
Loan originations for investment
  $ 11,329     $ 18,059     $ 64,478     $ 58,609     $ 34,659     $ 16,003       NM  
Loan originations for sale
    2,514       35,010       76,550       124,739       6,994       3,317       NM  
Loan purchases
    5,336       11,888       129,193       81,778       132,298       139,565       NM  
Return (loss) on average assets
    0.64%       0.50%       0.67%       0.71%       0.53%       (1.56)%       NM  
Return (loss) on average common stockholders’ equity
    8.77%       6.09%       8.42%       7.87%       6.32%       (8.68)%       NM  
Interest rate spread(1)
    1.87%       1.73%       1.81%       1.76%       1.45%       0.67%       NM  
Net interest margin(2)
    2.06%       2.02%       2.04%       2.11%       1.83%       1.73%       NM  
Efficiency ratio(3)
    50.47%       63.61%       49.47%       49.06%       79.28%       163.51%       NM  
Allowance for loan losses to total loans held for investment at end of period
    0.30%       0.32%       0.29%       0.32%       0.30%       0.22%       NM  
Capital Ratios:
                                                       
Equity to assets at end of period
    7.11%       8.20%       7.84%       8.37%       8.96%       7.60%       NM  
Tier 1 leverage (core) capital to adjusted tangible assets(4)
    7.60%       8.00%       7.84%       8.09%       8.65%       8.16%       NM  
Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio(4)
    12.03%       11.56%       11.11%       11.40%       13.76%       15.00%       NM  
Total risk-based capital ratio(4)
    12.40%       11.97%       11.48%       11.81%       14.13%       15.37%       NM  
Tangible capital to tangible assets(4)
    7.60%       8.00%       7.84%       8.09%       8.65%       8.16%       NM  


(1)  Interest rate spread represents the difference between the weighted average yield on interest-earning assets and the weighted average rate paid on interest-bearing liabilities.

26


Table of Contents

(2)  Net interest margin represents net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.
 
(3)  Efficiency ratio represents noninterest expense as a percentage of the aggregate of net interest income and noninterest income.
 
(4)  Reflects regulatory capital ratios of Bank of Internet USA only.

“NM” means not meaningful.

27


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF

FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

      The following discussion and analysis contains forward-looking statements that are based upon current expectations. Forward-looking statements involve risks and uncertainties. Our actual results and the timing of events could differ materially from those anticipated in our forward-looking statements due to various important factors, including those set forth under “Risk Factors‘ and elsewhere in this prospectus. The following discussion and analysis should be read together with the “Selected Consolidated Financial Information” and our consolidated financial statements, including the related notes, included elsewhere in this prospectus.

General

      Our company, BofI Holding, Inc., is the holding company for Bank of Internet USA, a consumer-focused, nationwide savings bank operating primarily over the Internet. We generate retail deposits in all 50 states and originate loans for our customers directly through our websites, including www.BankofInternet.com, www.BofI.com and www.ApartmentBank.com. We are a unitary savings and loan holding company and, along with Bank of Internet USA, are subject to primary federal regulation by the OTS.

      Our deposit customers are acquired and serviced exclusively over the Internet. Using online applications on our websites, our customers apply for deposit products, including time deposits, interest-bearing demand accounts (including interest-bearing checking accounts) and savings accounts (including money market savings accounts). We specialize in originating and purchasing small- to medium-size multifamily mortgage loans. We manage our cash and cash equivalents based upon our need for liquidity, and we seek to minimize the assets we hold as cash and cash equivalents by investing our excess liquidity in higher yielding assets such as loans or securities.

      Our ability to increase our assets is limited primarily by the capital we are required to maintain by regulation. Our bank must maintain certain minimum ratios of capital to assets. Thus, to enable us to increase the rate at which our bank grows its assets, we have raised additional capital in three separate private placements totaling $14.5 million between September 2001 and June 2004. Following each of these private placements, we increased our total assets. Other than the constraints of these capital requirements, we believe that our business model is highly scalable, allowing us to expand into new regions and products and rapidly increase deposits and, to a lesser extent, loans, without significant delays and with a significantly slower growth rate of noninterest expenses and fixed assets.

      At June 30, 2001, the end of our first fiscal year of operations, our total deposits were $127.2 million and total assets were $156.6 million. We have since grown our deposits and assets to $295.7 million and $453.9 million, respectively, at September 30, 2004. During the last three fiscal years, we have operated with net interest margins (the difference between the rate on average interest-earning assets and the rate on average interest-bearing liabilities) ranging from 1.83% to 2.11%. During the same three-year period, our efficiency ratio (noninterest expense divided by the sum of net interest income and noninterest income) improved from 79.3% to 49.5%.

      During our first two years of operation, we focused primarily on building our online franchise and deposit growth. We became profitable during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, as we grew sufficiently to generate enough net interest income to exceed our operating expenses. In our deposit gathering business, we initially sought time deposits because of their large average size and their relatively simple application and processing. This initial focus gave us time to develop our CRM software and manage workflow, as well as develop our online advertising strategy. The proceeds from our deposits were invested primarily in single family mortgage loans, which we purchased in pools with servicing retained by the sellers. The initial pool purchases and third-party servicing provided us the time to hire and train loan origination and servicing staff. In the last half of the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, we began to shift our focus from purchasing single family mortgage loans to originating and purchasing multifamily mortgage loans. At June 30, 2002, we had 20 full time employees and $217.6 million in assets. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, our net interest income, the primary

28


Table of Contents

component of our net income, was $3.5 million, which resulted in a net interest margin of 1.83% on average interest earning assets.

      During the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2004, we developed and strengthened our online loan origination capabilities. We launched our single family loan origination website in March 2002. We originated single family mortgage loans for sale of $7.0 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, $124.7 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 and $76.6 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004. We launched our multifamily loan origination website in December 2002. We originated multifamily mortgage loans of $30.0 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, $49.9 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 and $57.3 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004.

      At June 30, 2004, we had $405.0 million in assets, or $16.9 million in assets per full time employee. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, our net interest income was $6.5 million which resulted in a net interest margin of 2.0% on average interest-earning assets. Our asset growth, the shift in our loan portfolio toward multifamily loans and the relative increase in demand and savings accounts, combined with the relatively slower growth in our operating expense as result of our Internet platform, are principally responsible for our increase in earnings from $1.0 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002 to $1.7 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 and $2.2 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004.

      At September 30, 2004, we had $453.9 million in assets, or $18.9 million in assets per full time employee. For the three months ended September 30, 2004, our net income was $661,000 and increased 86.7% compared to the same period ended September 30, 2003. The earnings increase was a result of asset growth after incurring a contract termination expense incurred in the period ended September 30, 2003.

Critical Accounting Policies

      The following discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of operations is based upon our consolidated financial statements and the notes thereto, which have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. The preparation of these consolidated financial statements requires us to make a number of estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. On an ongoing basis, we evaluate our estimates and assumptions based upon historical experience and various factors and circumstances. We believe that our estimates and assumptions are reasonable in the circumstances. However, actual results may differ significantly from these estimates and assumptions that could have a material effect on the carrying value of assets and liabilities at the balance sheet dates and our results of operations for the reporting periods.

      Our significant accounting policies and practices are described in Note 1 to our June 30, 2004 audited consolidated financial statements, which are included in this prospectus. Following is a summary of the accounting policies and practices that require management’s judgment and estimates:

      Investment Securities. Investment securities generally must be classified as held-to-maturity, available-for-sale or trading. The appropriate classification is based partially on our ability to hold the securities to maturity and largely on management’s intentions with respect to either holding or selling the securities. The classification of investment securities is significant since it directly impacts the accounting for unrealized gains and losses on securities. Unrealized gains and losses on trading securities flow directly through earnings during the periods in which they arise, whereas for available-for-sale securities, they are recorded as a separate component of stockholders’ equity (accumulated comprehensive other income or loss) and do not affect earnings until realized. The fair values of our investment securities are generally determined by reference to quoted market prices and reliable independent sources. We are obligated to assess, at each reporting date, whether there is an “other-than-temporary” impairment to our investment securities. Any impairment must be recognized in current earnings rather than in other comprehensive income. We have not had any impaired investment securities.

      Allowance for Loan Losses. We maintain an allowance for loan losses at an amount that we believe is sufficient to provide adequate protection against probable losses in our loan portfolio. Quarterly, we evaluate the adequacy of the allowance based upon reviews of individual loans, recent loss experience, current

29


Table of Contents

economic conditions, risk characteristics of the various categories of loans and other pertinent factors. The evaluation is inherently subjective, as it requires estimates that are susceptible to significant revision as more information becomes available. The allowance is increased by the provision for loan losses, which is charged against current period operating results. The allowance is decreased by the amount of charge-offs of loans deemed uncollectible and increased by recoveries of loans previously charged-off.

      Under our allowance for loan loss policy, impairment calculations are determined based on loan level data (specific reserves) and general portfolio data (general reserves). Specific loans are evaluated for impairment and are classified in accordance with OTS regulation when they are 90 days or more delinquent, nonperforming or in foreclosure. Under our allowance for loan loss policy, a loan is considered impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the bank will be unable to collect the scheduled payments of principal or interest when due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Factors that we consider in determining impairment include payment status, collateral value and the probability of collecting scheduled principal and interest payments when due. Loans that experience insignificant payment delays and payment shortfalls generally are not classified as impaired. Impairment is measured on a loan by loan basis by either the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate or the fair value of the collateral if repayment of the loan is expected primarily from the sale of collateral.

      Under our policies, specific reserves are calculated when an internal asset review of a loan identifies a significant adverse change in the financial position of the borrower or the value of the collateral. We calculate our general loan loss reserves by grouping each loan by collateral type ( e.g. , single family, multifamily) and by grouping the loan-to-value ratios of each loan within the collateral type. An estimated impairment rate for each loan-to-value group within each type of loan is multiplied by the total principal amount in the group to calculate the required general reserve attributable to that group. We believe that absent any other evidence of impairment ( e.g. , delinquent payments), the greater the loan-to-value ratio the greater the risk the loan will be impaired. We use a calculation methodology that provides a larger loss allowance for loans with greater loan-to-value ratios, measured at the time the loan was funded. The internal asset review committee of our board of directors reviews and approves the calculation methodology.

      For every quarter from inception to June 30, 2004, we had no loan defaults, no foreclosures, no nonperforming loans and no specific loan loss allowances. During the quarter ended September 30, 2004, one loan in the amount of $152,000 became nonperforming. We received payment in full from the borrower in September 2004. At September 30, 2004, we had no loan defaults, no foreclosures, no nonperforming loans and no specific loan loss allowances. Our history is limited, and we expect to have over time additional loans default or become nonperforming. We have provided general loan loss allowances as an estimate of the impairment inherent in our portfolio. See “Risk Factors” for more information regarding the risks associated with our loan portfolio.

Comparison of Financial Condition at September 30, 2004 and June 30, 2004

      Total assets increased by $48.9 million to $453.9 million at September 30, 2004 from $405.0 million at June 30, 2004. The increase in total assets resulted primarily from the purchase of mortgage-backed securities during the three months ended September 30, 2004, resulting in an increase in investment securities available for sale of $47.5 million. Total liabilities increased by $48.3 million to $421.6 million at September 30, 2004 from $373.3 million at June 30, 2004. The increase in total liabilities resulted from growth in deposits of $25.8 million, growth in advances from the FHLB of $20.0 million and growth in notes payable of $2.0 million.

      Stockholders’ equity increased by $0.5 million during the three months ended September 30, 2004. The increase was the result of $661,000 in net income which increased retained earnings and $101,000 in dividends paid to holders of our Series A preferred stock.

Comparison of Financial Condition at June 30, 2004 and 2003

      Total assets increased by $131.5 million, or 48.1%, to $405.0 million at June 30, 2004 from $273.5 million at June 30, 2003. The increase in total assets resulted primarily from a $109.3 million increase in net loans due to loan purchases and originations totaling $193.7 million, which were offset by loan principal repayments of

30


Table of Contents

$83.6 million. In addition, investment securities increased by $3.2 million to $3.7 million due to the purchase of a government agency debt security. Total liabilities increased by $122.7 million, or 49.0%, to $373.3 million at June 30, 2004 from $250.6 million at June 30, 2003. The increase in total liabilities resulted primarily from growth in deposits of $75.8 million and increases in advances from the FHLB of $45.5 million. We designed and marketed new savings account programs, which increased our savings accounts by $75.3 million between June 30, 2003 and 2004. We used advances from the FHLB to extend the average maturities of our liabilities to match better the expected timing of changes in the interest rates on our loans.

      Stockholders’ equity increased by $8.9 million, or 38.9%, during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004. The increase is primarily due to $6.6 million in net cash received from our issuance of Series A preferred stock and an increase of $2.2 million in retained earnings from net income, less a total of $140,000 in dividends paid to holders of our Series A preferred stock.

Comparison of Financial Condition at June 30, 2003 and 2002

      Total assets increased by $55.9 million, or 25.7%, to $273.5 million at June 30, 2003 from $217.6 million at June 30, 2002. The increase in total assets resulted primarily from loan purchases and originations of $140.4 million, 70% of which were multifamily mortgage loans. The increase was offset by principal repayments during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, which totaled $60.9 million, consisting primarily of single family mortgage prepayments by borrowers who refinanced during a period of low interest rates. Loans held for sale increased $3.5 million to $3.6 million at June 30, 2003 from $128,000 at June 30, 2002, due to increased originations of single family mortgage loans which were held for sale.

      Total liabilities increased by $52.5 million, or 26.5%, to $250.6 million at June 30, 2003 from $198.1 million at June 30, 2002. The increase in total liabilities resulted from growth in deposits of $26.4 million and $26.0 million in advances from the FHLB.

      Stockholders’ equity increased by $3.4 million, or 17.4%, during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. The increase is primarily due to $1.7 million in new common stock issued in a private placement, which closed on July 31, 2002, and $1.7 million in net income which increased retained earnings.

31


Table of Contents

Average Balances, Net Interest Income, Yields Earned and Rates Paid

      The following tables sets forth, for the periods indicated, information regarding (i) average balances; (ii) the total amount of interest income from interest-earning assets and the weighted average yields on such assets; (iii) the total amount of interest expense on interest-bearing liabilities and the weighted average rates paid on such liabilities; (iv) net interest income; (v) interest rate spread; and (vi) net interest margin.

                                                 
For the Three Months Ended September 30,

2004 2003


Interest Rates Interest Rates
Average Income/ Earned/ Average Income/ Earned/
Balance Expense Paid Balance Expense Paid






(Dollars in thousands)
Assets:
Loans
  $ 355,965     $ 4,472       5.03 %   $ 243,484     $ 3,431       5.64 %
Federal funds sold
    13,259       43       1.30 %     19,974       46       0.92 %
Interest-earning deposits in other financial institutions
    10,206       95       3.72 %     11,684       72       2.46 %
Investment securities
    21,507       160       2.98 %     423       3       2.84 %
Stock of the FHLB, at cost
    4,890       56       4.58 %     2,956       29       3.92 %
     
     
             
     
         
Total interest-earning assets
    405,827       4,826       4.76 %     278,521       3,581       5.14 %
Noninterest-earning assets
    8,821                       4,001                  
     
                     
                 
Total assets
  $ 414,648                     $ 282,522                  
     
                     
                 
 
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity:
Interest-bearing demand and savings
  $ 121,527     $ 559       1.84 %   $ 62,150     $ 264       1.70 %
Time deposits
    155,662       1,291       3.32 %     134,824       1,312       3.89 %
Advances from the FHLB
    99,961       868       3.47 %     58,446       600       4.11 %
Other borrowings
    1,343       20       5.96 %                  
     
     
             
     
         
Total interest-bearing liabilities
    378,493       2,738       2.89 %     255,420       2,176       3.41 %
             
                     
         
Noninterest-bearing demand deposits
    2,883                       3,065                  
Other noninterest-bearing liabilities
    33,272                       24,037                  
     
                     
                 
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
  $ 414,648                     $ 282,522                  
     
                     
                 
Net interest income
          $ 2,088                     $ 1,405          
             
                     
         
Net interest spread
                    1.87 %                     1.73 %
Net interest margin
                    2.06 %                     2.02 %

32


Table of Contents

                                                                         
For the Fiscal Years Ended June 30,

2004 2003 2002



Average Average Average
Yields Yields Yields
Interest Earned/ Interest Earned/ Interest Earned/
Average Income/ Rates Average Income/ Rates Average Income/ Rates
Balance Expense Paid Balance Expense Paid Balance Expense Paid









(Dollars in thousands)
Assets:
Loans
  $ 284,617     $ 15,177       5.33 %   $ 202,955     $ 12,723       6.27 %   $ 158,105     $ 10,765       6.81 %
Federal funds sold
    20,944       192       0.92 %     16,446       235       1.43 %     21,953       459       2.09 %
Interest-earning deposits in other financial institutions
    10,919       261       2.39 %     19,327       445       2.30 %     8,793       305       3.47 %
Investment securities held to maturity, at cost
    336       7       2.08 %     586       17       2.92 %     1,082       46       4.25 %
Stock of the FHLB, at cost
    3,467       135       3.89 %     1,866       94       5.05 %     1,182       66       5.58 %
     
     
             
     
             
     
         
Total interest-earning assets
    320,283       15,772       4.92 %     241,180       13,514       5.60 %     191,115       11,641       6.09 %
Noninterest-earning assets
    5,790                       3,040                       1,927                  
     
                     
                     
                 
Total assets
  $ 326,073                     $ 244,220                     $ 193,042                  
     
                     
                     
                 
 
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity:
Interest-bearing demand and savings
  $ 93,797     $ 1,668       1.78 %   $ 41,373     $ 854       2.07 %   $ 28,391     $ 759       2.67 %
Time deposits
    132,166       4,866       3.68 %     142,903       5,854       4.10 %     123,812       6,196       5.00 %
Advances from the FHLB
    69,932       2,648       3.79 %     35,343       1,718       4.86 %     22,764       1,143       5.02 %
Other borrowings
    1,119       60       5.36 %                       487       46       9.45 %
     
     
             
     
             
     
         
Total interest-bearing liabilities
    297,014       9,242       3.11 %     219,619       8,426       3.84 %     175,454       8,144       4.64 %
             
                     
                     
         
Noninterest-bearing demand deposits
    2,003                       1,756                       825                  
Other noninterest-bearing liabilities
    27,056                       22,845                       16,763                  
     
                     
                     
                 
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
  $ 326,073                     $ 244,220                     $ 193,042                  
     
                     
                     
                 
Net interest income
          $ 6,530                     $ 5,088                     $ 3,497          
             
                     
                     
         
Net interest spread
                    1.81 %                     1.76 %                     1.45 %
Net interest margin
                    2.04 %                     2.11 %                     1.83 %

33


Table of Contents

Results of Operations

      Our results of operations depend on our net interest income, which is the difference between interest income on interest-earning assets and interest expense on interest-bearing liabilities. Our net interest income has grown primarily as a result of the growth in our assets and, to a lesser extent, from the shift in our loan portfolio and the relative increases in demand and savings accounts, as compared to time deposits. We also earn noninterest income from gains on sales of single family mortgage loans and prepayment fee income from multifamily borrowers who repay their loans before maturity. During the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, lower interest rates resulted in higher mortgage refinancing activity. Interest rates increased during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 and, as a result, mortgage loan refinancing activity declined. In the near term, we believe that prepayment penalty fee income and gain on sale income will be reduced as a result of rising interest rates. The largest component of noninterest expense is salary and benefits, which is a function of the number of personnel, which increased from 20 full time employees at June 30, 2001 to 24 full time employees at June 30, 2004. We are subject to federal and state income taxes, and our effective tax rate has changed from a benefit of 72.6% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002 to an expense of 42.2% and 40.4% for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2004, respectively. We recognized the benefit of prior tax operating losses for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2002 and 2003. No such benefit was recognized for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004. Other factors that affect our results of operations include expenses relating to occupancy, data processing and other miscellaneous expenses.

      Net income for the three months ended September 30, 2004 totaled $661,000 compared to $354,000 for the three months ended September 30, 2003. The $307,000 increase resulted from a $683,000 increase in net interest income, reduced by a decrease in noninterest income of $119,000. Net income totaled $2.2 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, compared to $1.7 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. The $445,000 increase resulted from a $1.4 million increase in net interest income, reduced by a $661,000 increase in noninterest expense, a $207,000 increase in income tax expense and a $159,000 decrease in noninterest income. The increase in noninterest expense for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 was due to increased salaries and benefits and the termination of a services contract. Net income increased $710,000 to $1.7 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 compared to $1.0 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. The increase in net income resulted from a $1.6 million increase in net interest income and a $1.1 million increase in noninterest income, a $90,000 increase in loan loss provisions, a $150,000 increase in noninterest expense and a $1.7 million increase in income tax expense.

 
Comparison of the Three Months Ended September 30, 2004 and 2003

      Net Interest Income. Net interest income is determined by our interest rate spread ( i.e. , the difference between the yields earned on our interest-earning assets and the rates paid on our interest-bearing liabilities) and the relative amounts (volume) of our interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities. Net interest income totaled $2.1 million for the three months ended September 30, 2004 compared to $1.4 million for the

34


Table of Contents

three months ended September 30, 2003. The following table reflects net changes in interest income and interest expense attributable to changes in volume and interest rates of significant assets and liabilities.
                                 
2004 vs. 2003

Increase (Decrease) Due to

Total
Increase
Volume Rate Rate/Volume (Decrease)




(Dollars in thousands)
Increase/(decrease) in interest income:
                               
Loans
  $ 1,585     $ (371 )   $ (173 )   $ 1,041  
Federal funds sold
    (15 )     19       (7 )     (3 )
Interest-earning deposits in other financial institutions
    (9 )     37       (5 )     23  
Investment securities
    150             7       157  
Stock of the FHLB, at cost
    19       5       3       27  
     
     
     
     
 
    $ 1,730     $ (310 )   $ (175 )   $ 1,245  
     
     
     
     
 
Increase/(decrease) in interest expense:
                               
Interest-bearing demand and savings
  $ 252     $ 22     $ 21     $ 295  
Time deposits
    203       (195 )     (29 )     (21 )
Advances from the FHLB
    426       (92 )     (66 )     268  
Other borrowings
                20       20  
     
     
     
     
 
    $ 881     $ (265 )   $ (54 )   $ 562  
     
     
     
     
 

      Interest Income. Interest income for the three months ended September 30, 2004 totaled $4.8 million, an increase of $1.2 million, or 33.3%, compared to $3.6 million in interest income for the three months ended September 30, 2003. Average interest-earning assets for the three months ended September 30, 2004 increased by $127.3 million compared to the three months ended September 30, 2003 due primarily to an $112.5 million increase in the average balance of the loan portfolio as a result of our emphasis on building our multifamily loan portfolio. Also, our average balance of investment securities increased to $21.5 million during the three months ended September 30, 2004 compared to the $423,000 average balance for the same period in 2003 as a result of the purchase of $53.0 million of mortgaged-backed securities. Average interest earning balances associated with our stock of the FHLB increased by $1.9 million for the three months ended September 30, 2004 compared to the three months ended September 30, 2003 because our required minimum investment increased, in line with increased advances from the FHLB. The average yield earned on our interest-earning assets declined to 4.8% for the three months ended September 30, 2004 from 5.1% for the same period in 2003 due primarily to the lower yield on our loan portfolio as market interest rates declined. The widespread increase in prepayments or refinancing of mortgage loans during 2003 and 2004 reduced the higher-yielding older loans which were replaced with lower yielding new loans, causing the average yield on the loan portfolio to decline to 5.0% for the three months ended September 30, 2004 from 5.6% for the same period in 2003. Thus, the loan portfolio volume increase in the three months ended September 30, 2004 would have increased interest income $1.6 million, but the average rate decline and the higher volume of loans originated at the lower average rates reduced the interest income by $0.6 million, resulting in a net increase in interest income of $1.0 million.

      Interest Expense. Interest expense totaled $2.7 million for the three months ended September 30, 2004, an increase of $562,000, compared to $2.2 million in interest expense during the three months ended September 30, 2003. Average interest-bearing balances for the three months ended September 30, 2004 increased $123.1 million compared to the same period in 2003, due to higher deposit totals from increased customer accounts and additional borrowings from the FHLB. The average interest-bearing balances of advances from the FHLB increased $41.5 million as new 2-, 3-, 4-, 5- and 7-year fixed-rate advances were added. In addition, $15.9 million of advances scheduled to mature during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004

35


Table of Contents

were modified and extended for periods of three to six years. Our increased borrowing of long-term fixed rate amounts during fiscal 2003 and 2004 was part of our strategy to manage our interest rate risk. The average rate paid on our interest-bearing liabilities declined to 2.9% for the three months ended September 30, 2004 from 3.4% for same period in 2003, due principally to the maturity of higher-rate term deposits and the adding of new advances from the FHLB at market rates that were significantly lower in 2003 and 2004. Our weighted average rates paid on interest-bearing demand and savings accounts, time deposits and advances from the FHLB and other borrowings for the three months ended September 30, 2004 was 52 basis points lower than for the three months ended September 30, 2003. Thus, the decline in average rates paid on interest-bearing liabilities would have reduced interest expense in the three months ended September 30, 2004 by $319,000, but the growth of average balances in demand and savings accounts and advances from the FHLB caused an increase in interest expense of $881,000, resulting in a net increase in interest expense of $562,000.

      Provision for Loan Losses. Provision for loan losses was $15,000 for each of the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003. The provisions were made to maintain our allowance for loan losses at levels which management believed to be adequate. The assessment of the adequacy of our allowance for loan losses is based upon a number of quantitative and qualitative factors, including levels and trends of past due and nonaccrual loans, change in volume and mix of loans and collateral values. We did not have any nonperforming loans at September 30, 2004 or 2003. We believe that our history is limited and it is unlikely that every loan in our investment portfolio will continue to perform without exception so we provide general allowances based upon the overall volume of loans, the loan types and the estimated collateral values. Because there were very small changes in the size and the mix of the loans held for investment portfolio between the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003, the loan loss provisions during those periods were relatively small.

      Noninterest Income. The following table sets forth information regarding our noninterest income for the periods shown.

                   
For the Three Months
Ended
September 30,

2004 2003


(Dollars in thousands)
 
Prepayment penalty fee income
  $ 86     $ 97  
 
Gain on sale of loans originated for sale
    11       164  
 
Banking service fees and other income
    72       27  
     
     
 
Total noninterest income
  $ 169     $ 288  
     
     
 

      Noninterest income totaled $169,000 for the three months ended September 30, 2004 compared to $288,000 for the same period in 2003. The decrease in 2004 is due to lower gains on sale of loans, partially reduced by higher bank service fees collected and gains in cash surrender value in key man life insurance. Our gain on sale income decreased $153,000 as result of the general decline in mortgage loan refinance volumes in the three months ended September 30, 2004 compared to refinance volumes in the same period in 2003.

36


Table of Contents

      Noninterest Expense. The following table sets forth information regarding our noninterest expense for the periods shown.

                   
For the Three Months
Ended
September 30,

2004 2003


(Dollars in thousands)
 
Salaries and employee benefits
  $ 608     $ 465  
 
Professional services
    85       32  
 
Occupancy and equipment
    65       60  
 
Data processing and internet
    90       78  
 
Advertising and promotional
    47       44  
 
Depreciation and amortization
    27       24  
 
Service contract termination
          197  
 
Other general and administrative
    217       177  
     
     
 
Total noninterest expenses
  $ 1,139     $ 1,077  
     
     
 

      Noninterest expense totaled $1.1 million for the three months ended September 30, 2004, an increase of $62,000 compared to the same period in 2003. This increase was due primarily to a $143,000 increase in salaries and employee benefits for additional operations staff, increased existing staff wages and new management bonus plans, a $53,000 increase in professional services which was due primarily to an increase in audit, legal and professional fees. This was offset by a $197,000 reduction in unrecoverable expenses associated with the termination of a contract for advice and placement of a capital funding.

      Income Tax Expense. Income tax expense was $442,000 for the three months ended September 30, 2004 compared to $247,000 for the same period in 2003. Our effective tax rates were 40.1% and 41.1% for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003, respectively.

37


Table of Contents

 
Comparison of Fiscal Years Ended June 30, 2004 and 2003

      Net Interest Income. Net interest income totaled $6.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, compared to $5.1 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. The following table reflects net changes in interest income and interest expense attributable to changes in volume and interest rates of significant assets and liabilities:

                                 
2004 vs. 2003

Increase (Decrease) Due to

Total
Increase
Volume Rate Rate/Volume (Decrease)




(Dollars in thousands)
Increase (decrease) in interest income:
                               
Loans
  $ 5,119     $ (1,908 )   $ (757 )   $ 2,454  
Federal funds sold
    64       (84 )     (23 )     (43 )
Interest-earning deposits in other financial institutions
    (193 )     17       (8 )     (184 )
Investment securities
    (7 )     (5 )     2       (10 )
Stock of the FHLB, at cost
    81       (21 )     (19 )     41  
     
     
     
     
 
    $ 5,064     $ (2,001 )   $ (805 )   $ 2,258  
     
     
     
     
 
Increase (decrease) in interest expense:
                               
Interest-bearing demand and savings
  $ 1,083     $ (120 )   $ (149 )   $ 814  
Time deposits
    (440 )     (586 )     38       (988 )
Advances from the FHLB
    1,681       (378 )     (373 )     930  
Other borrowings
                60       60  
     
     
     
     
 
    $ 2,324     $ (1,084 )   $ (424 )   $ 816  
     
     
     
     
 

      Interest Income. Interest income for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 totaled $15.8 million, an increase of $2.3 million, or 17.0%, compared to $13.5 million in interest income for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. Average interest-earning assets for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 increased by $79.1 million compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 due primarily to an $81.7 million increase in the average balance of the loan portfolio as a result of our emphasis on building our multifamily loan portfolio. We reduced our average balances in interest-earning deposits in other financial institutions and investment securities by $8.4 million during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, as we redirected maturing time deposits into higher yielding mortgage loans. Average interest-earning balances associated with our stock of the FHLB increased by $1.6 million during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 because our required minimum investment increased, as a result of increased advances from the FHLB. The average yield earned on our interest-earning assets declined to 4.9% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 from 5.6% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 due primarily to the lower yield on our loan portfolio as market interest rates declined. The widespread increase in prepayments and refinancing of mortgage loans during the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2004 reduced the amount of higher yielding older loans, which were replaced with lower yielding loans, causing the average yield on the loan portfolio to decline to 5.3% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 from 6.3% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. Thus, the average rate declined, reducing interest income from what it otherwise would have been by $2.7 million, resulting in a net increase in interest income of $2.5 million. The average rate on all other interest-earning assets declined in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 due to the general decline in market interest rates in the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2004.

      Interest Expense. Interest expense totaled $9.2 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, an increase of $816,000 from $8.4 million in interest expense during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. Average interest-bearing liabilities in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 increased $77.4 million compared to the fiscal

38


Table of Contents

year ended June 30, 2003, due to higher deposits from increased customer accounts and increased advances from the FHLB. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, we emphasized increasing our savings and checking accounts, particularly our money market savings accounts. As a result, average balances in interest-bearing demand and savings accounts increased by $52.4 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, while average time deposits declined $10.7 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 as we replaced maturing time deposits with money market savings accounts. The average interest-bearing balances of advances from the FHLB increased $34.6 million as new 2-, 3-, 4-, 5- and 7-year fixed rate advances were added during the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2004. In addition, $15.9 million of advances scheduled to mature during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 were modified and extended for three or six years. Our increase in long-term fixed rate borrowings during the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2004 was part of our strategy to manage our interest rate risk. The average rate paid on our interest-bearing liabilities declined to 3.1% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 from 3.8% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, due principally to the addition of new money market savings accounts, the maturity of higher-rate term deposits and the adding of new advances from the FHLB at market rates that were significantly lower in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 compared to past periods. During the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, our savings account balances (including money market savings) increased by $75.3 million and had an average interest rate of 2.0%. At June 30, 2003, time deposits scheduled to mature within one year from that time were $71.1 million, which bore a weighted average interest rate of 3.7%. The declines in average rates paid on our interest-bearing demand and savings accounts, time deposits and advances from the FHLB were 29 basis points, 42 basis points and 107 basis points, respectively, during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004. Thus, the growth in average balances in demand and savings accounts and advances from the FHLB would have increased interest expense by $2.8 million. However, the volume decrease in time deposits and the decline in interest rates paid on all interest-bearing liabilities reduced interest expense by $1.9 million, resulting in a net increase in interest expense of $816,000.

      Provision for loan losses. Provision for loan losses was $255,000 and $285,000 for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2004 and 2003, respectively. We have not had any nonperforming loans through June 30, 2004. Our history is limited, and we expect over time to have some defaulted and nonperforming loans. As there were no nonperforming loans for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2004 and 2003, the provisions for loan losses represent increases in general allowances which are determined based upon the overall volume of loans, the loan types and the estimated collateral values. Our loans held for investment increased by net amounts of $109.3 million and $78.7 million during the fiscal years ended June 30, 2004 and 2003, respectively. The provisions for loan losses were approximately 23 basis points and 36 basis points on the net increase in our loans held for investment for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2004 and 2003, respectively. The provision for loan losses for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 declined by 13 basis points primarily due to the addition of more multifamily loans with lower loan-to-value ratios in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. Management estimates that the lower average loan-to-value ratio should result in a smaller percentage of impairment.

      Noninterest income. The following table sets forth information regarding our noninterest income for the periods shown:

                   
For the Fiscal Years
Ended June 30,

2004 2003


(Dollars in thousands)
 
Prepayment penalty fee income
  $ 624     $ 446  
 
Gain on sale of loans originated for sale
    364       778  
 
Banking service fees and other income
    202       125  
     
     
 
Total noninterest income
  $ 1,190     $ 1,349  
     
     
 

      Noninterest income totaled $1.2 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, compared to $1.3 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. The decrease is attributable to lower gains on sale, partially reduced by higher prepayment penalty fee income and income from banking services fees. Prepayment penalty fee income

39


Table of Contents

increased $178,000 in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 due to a higher volume of multifamily loans and market interest rates that continued to be low compared to historical rates, which encouraged more multifamily borrowers to refinance and incur a prepayment penalty. Most of our multifamily mortgage loans have prepayment penalties at the time of origination, while most of our single family mortgage loans do not have prepayment penalties. Our gain on sale income is derived from the origination and sale of single family loans, which we generally do not hold for investment. During the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, the mortgage industry experienced record volumes of mortgage refinancings. Many of the single family loans that we originated in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 were mortgage refinancings with lower rates and longer fixed terms, which we sold. During the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, the mortgage refinancing volumes declined, leading to a $414,000 decline in our gain on sales in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. Mortgage loan refinancing activity has declined and will likely decline further if mortgage rates rise. In the near term, we believe that prepayment penalty fee income and gain on sale income likely will be reduced by rising interest rates.

      Noninterest Expense. The following table sets forth information regarding our noninterest expense for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2004 and 2003:

                   
For the Fiscal
Years Ended
June 30,

2004 2003


(Dollars in
thousands)
 
Salaries and employee benefits
  $ 1,880     $ 1,538  
 
Professional services
    166       152  
 
Occupancy and equipment
    245       205  
 
Data processing and Internet
    328       278  
 
Advertising and promotional
    220       189  
 
Depreciation and amortization
    97       144  
 
Service contract termination
    197        
 
Other general and administrative
    686       652  
     
     
 
Total noninterest expense
  $ 3,819     $ 3,158  
     
     
 

      Noninterest expense totaled $3.8 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, an increase of $661,000 compared to $3.2 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. This increase was due principally to a $342,000 increase in salaries and employee benefits for additional operations staff, increased existing staff wages and new management bonus plans, and a $197,000 charge for unrecoverable expenses associated with the termination of a contract for advice regarding a capital funding.

      Income Tax Expense. Income tax expense was $1.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, compared to $1.3 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. Our effective tax rates were 40.4% and 42.2% for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2004 and 2003, respectively. The lower effective tax rate for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 included the benefit primarily from nontaxable income from our investment in bank-owned life insurance.

40


Table of Contents

 
Comparison of Fiscal Years Ended June 30, 2003 and 2002

      Net Interest Income. Net interest income totaled $5.1 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 as compared to $3.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. The following table reflects net changes in interest income and interest expense attributable to changes in volume and interest rates of significant assets and liabilities:

                                 
2003 vs. 2002

Increase (Decrease) Due to

Total
Increase
Volume Rate Rate/Volume (Decrease)




(Dollars in thousands)
Increase (decrease) in interest income:
                               
Loans
  $ 3,054     $ (854 )   $ (242 )   $ 1,958  
Federal funds sold
    (115 )     (145 )     36       (224 )
Interest-earning deposits in other financial institutions
    365       (103 )     (122 )     140  
Investment securities
    (21 )     (14 )     6       (29 )
Stock of the FHLB, at cost
    38       (6 )     (4 )     28  
     
     
     
     
 
    $ 3,321     $ (1,122 )   $ (326 )   $ 1,873  
     
     
     
     
 
Increase (decrease) in interest expense:
                               
Interest-bearing demand and savings
  $ 347     $ (173 )   $ (79 )   $ 95  
Time deposits
    955       (1,127 )     (170 )     (342 )
Advances from the FHLB
    632       (36 )     (21 )     575  
Other borrowings
    (46 )                 (46 )
     
     
     
     
 
    $ 1,888     $ (1,336 )   $ (270 )   $ 282  
     
     
     
     
 

      Interest Income. Interest income totaled $13.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, an increase of $1.9 million, or 16.4%, from $11.6 million during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. Average interest-earning assets in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 increased $50.1 million compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002 due primarily to the $44.9 million increase in the average balance of our loan portfolio. Our average balances in interest-earning deposits in other financial institutions and investment securities increased by $10.0 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. The average interest-earning balance associated with our stock of the FHLB increased $684,000 in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002 because our required minimum investment increased due to increased advances from the FHLB. The average yield earned on interest-earning assets declined to 5.6% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 from 6.1% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, due primarily to the decline in interest rates generally during this period. The widespread increase in prepayments and refinancings of mortgage loans during the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2002 reduced the higher yielding loans which were replaced with lower yielding loans, causing the average yield on the loan portfolio to decline to 6.3% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 from 6.8% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. Thus, the loan portfolio volume increase in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 was partially offset by the decline in average rate, thereby reducing the interest income by $1.1 million, resulting in a net increase in interest income of $1.9 million. The average rate on all other interest-earning assets declined in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 due to the general decline in market interest rates in the fiscal years ended June 30, 2002 and 2003.

      Interest Expense. Interest expense for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 totaled $8.4 million, an increase of $282,000 from $8.1 million in interest expense during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. Average interest-bearing liabilities in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 increased $44.2 million compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002 due to higher deposits in customer accounts and additional advances from the

41


Table of Contents

FHLB. The average balance of time deposits increased by $19.1 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. The average balance of advances from the FHLB increased $12.6 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, as new 3- and 5-year fixed rate advances were added. Our increased borrowing of long-term fixed rate amounts was part of our strategy to manage interest rate risk. The average rate paid on our interest-bearing liabilities declined to 3.8% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 from 4.6% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, due principally to the maturity of higher-rate term deposits and the addition of new lower rate deposits and advances. The declines in our average rates paid on interest-bearing demand and savings accounts, time deposits and advances from the FHLB were 60 basis points, 90 basis points and 16 basis points, respectively. The decline in average rates paid on interest-bearing liabilities was more than offset by the growth of average balances in demand and savings accounts, time deposits and advances from the FHLB, which, had rates not declined, would have resulted in an increase in interest expense of $1.9 million. The net increase in interest expense for the year was $282,000.

      Provision for loan losses. Provision for loan losses was $285,000 and $195,000 for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2002, respectively. Since we did not have any nonperforming loans during these periods, our loan loss provisions were added to general loan loss reserves. Our loans held for investment increased by net amounts of $78.7 million and $27.6 million during the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2002, respectively. The provisions for loan losses were approximately 36 basis points and 71 basis points on the net increase in our loans held for investment for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2002, respectively. The provision declined to 36 basis points in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 because the prior fiscal year included a large shift away from single family loans with lower estimated loss rates towards multifamily loans with higher estimated loss rates. During the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, our mix of loans held for investment moved from 9.2% to 75.2% in multifamily loans, while during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 the mix moved a smaller amount, from 75.2% to 78.0% in multifamily loans.

      Noninterest income. Noninterest income totaled $1.3 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, compared to $297,000 for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. The increase in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 is attributable to greater prepayment penalty fee income and increased gains on sale of loans. Prepayment penalty income increased $332,000 due to our increased investment in multifamily loans and declining mortgage rates. Our gain on sale of loans increased $711,000 in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, the first full year of operation of our single family mortgage loan origination website. Also, in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, declining interest rates encouraged high levels of mortgage refinancing nationwide. Our single family mortgage loan originations in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 were primarily refinancings which were sold.

                   
For the Fiscal
Years Ended
June 30,

2003 2002


(Dollars in
thousands)
 
Prepayment penalty fee income
  $ 446     $ 114  
 
Gain on sale of loans originated for sale
    778       67  
 
Banking service fees and other income
    125       116  
     
     
 
Total noninterest income
  $ 1,349     $ 297  
     
     
 

42


Table of Contents

      Noninterest expense. The following table sets forth information regarding our noninterest expense for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2002:

                   
For Fiscal Years
Ended June 30,

2003 2002


(Dollars in
thousands)
 
Salaries and employee benefits
  $ 1,538     $ 1,300  
 
Professional services
    152       172  
 
Occupancy and equipment
    205       161  
 
Data processing and Internet
    278       210  
 
Advertising and promotional
    189       141  
 
Depreciation and amortization
    144       118  
 
Other general and administrative
    652       906  
     
     
 
Total noninterest expense
  $ 3,158     $ 3,008  
     
     
 

      Noninterest expense was $3.2 million and $3.0 million for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2002, respectively. The increase of $150,000 in noninterest expense was due principally to a $238,000 increase in salaries and employee benefits for additional operations staff and reduced by a $254,000 decrease in other general and administrative expenses. The decrease in other general and administrative expenses is due to a $318,000 non-cash expense incurred in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002 for a two-year extension of previously issued warrants to acquire 736,750 shares of common stock.

      Income Tax Benefit. Income tax expense was $1.3 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, compared to an income tax benefit of $429,000 in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. During the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, we began to operate profitably, making it likely that our deferred tax benefits accumulated from operating losses incurred since inception could be realized. The valuation allowance of $823,000 at June 30, 2001 associated with the tax benefit of operating loss carryforwards was reversed in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, reducing our effective tax rate. The reversal of the valuation allowance was large enough to create a net tax benefit for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

      Liquidity. Our sources of liquidity include deposits, borrowings, payments and maturities of outstanding loans, sales of loans, maturities or gains on sales of investment securities and other short term investments. While scheduled loan payments and maturing investment securities and short term investments are relatively predictable sources of funds, deposit flows and loan prepayments are greatly influenced by general interest rates, economic conditions and competition. We invest excess funds in overnight deposits and other short term interest-earning assets. We use cash generated through retail deposits, our largest funding source, to offset the cash utilized in lending and investing activities. Our short term interest-earning investment securities are also used to provide liquidity for lending and other operational requirements. As an additional source of funds, we have three credit agreements. Bank of Internet USA can borrow up to 35% of its total assets from the FHLB. Borrowings are collateralized by the pledge of certain mortgage loans and investment securities to the FHLB. Based on the loans and securities pledged at September 30, 2004, we had total borrowing capacity of approximately $158.7 million, of which $121.9 million was outstanding and $36.8 million was available. At September 30, 2004, we also had a $4.5 million unsecured fed funds purchase line with a major bank under which no borrowings were outstanding.

      On October 24, 2003, we entered into a $5.0 million loan facility with a commercial bank consisting of a one-year revolving line of credit plus a fully amortizing term loan of up to nine years. Interest is payable quarterly under the credit line at prime plus 1% per annum. Principal is payable in 36 equal quarterly installments starting on January 24, 2005. We may prepay all or a portion of the principal at anytime without a prepayment penalty. At November 30, 2004, the note payable balance was $5.0 million and the interest rate

43


Table of Contents

was 6.0% per annum. We intend to use a portion of the net proceeds from the offering to prepay in full the entire amount outstanding under the note payable. See “Use of Proceeds.”

      The loan facility is secured by our bank’s common stock held by BofI Holding, Inc. Under the terms of the loan facility, we are bound by a number of significant covenants that restrict our ability, out of the ordinary course of business, to dispose of assets, to incur additional debt or guarantees, to invest in or acquire any interest in another enterprise and to suffer a change in ownership of 51% or more of our common stock. The loan facility also requires us to maintain a debt coverage ratio of 1.50 as calculated by the lender. At November 30, 2004, management believes we were in compliance with all such covenants and restrictions and does not anticipate that such covenants and restrictions will limit our operations.

      On December 13, 2004, we entered into an agreement to form a trust and to establish $5.0 million of trust preferred securities in a transaction expected to close on December 16, 2004. When consummated, the net proceeds from the offering will be used to purchase a like amount of junior subordinated debentures of our company. The debentures will be the sole assets of the trust. The trust preferred securities are expected to be mandatorily redeemable upon maturity, or upon earlier redemption as provided in the indenture. We will have the right to redeem the debentures in whole (but not in part) on or after specific dates, at a redemption price specified in the indenture plus any accrued but unpaid interest through the redemption date. When consummated, we expect the principal balance of the debentures to be approximately $5.2 million, with a stated maturity of 30 years. Interest will accrue at the rate of three-month LIBOR plus 2.4%, with interest to be distributed quarterly starting in February 2005.

      Contractual Obligations. At September 30, 2004, we had $10.8 million in loan commitments outstanding. Time deposits due within one year of September 30, 2004 totaled $101.0 million. We believe the large percentage of time deposits that mature within one year reflects customers’ hesitancy to invest their funds long term when they expect interest rates to rise. If these maturing deposits do not remain with us, we may be required to seek other sources of funds, including other time deposits and borrowings. Depending on market conditions, we may be required to pay higher rates on deposits and borrowings than we currently pay on time deposits maturing with one year. We believe, however, based on past experience, that a significant portion of our time deposits will remain with us. We believe we have the ability to attract and retain deposits by adjusting interest rates offered.

      The following table presents certain of our contractual obligations as of June 30, 2004.

                                           
Payments Due by Period

Less than One to Three to More Than
Total One Year Three Years Five Years Five Years





(In thousands)
Long-term debt obligations
  $ 114,243     $ 6,451     $ 62,883     $ 35,866     $ 9,043  
Operating lease obligations(1)
    220       220                    
     
     
     
     
     
 
 
Total
  $ 114,463     $ 6,671     $ 62,883     $ 35,866     $ 9,043  
     
     
     
     
     
 


(1)  Payments are for lease of real property.

      Capital Requirements. Bank of Internet USA is subject to various regulatory capital requirements set by the federal banking agencies. Failure by our bank to meet minimum capital requirements could result in certain mandatory and discretionary actions by regulators that could have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial statements. Under capital adequacy guidelines and the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action, our bank must meet specific capital guidelines that involve quantitative measures of our bank’s assets, liabilities and certain off-balance-sheet items as calculated under regulatory accounting practices. Our bank’s capital amounts and classifications are also subject to qualitative judgments by the regulators about components, risk weightings and other factors.

      Quantitative measures established by regulation require our bank to maintain certain minimum capital amounts and ratios. The OTS requires our bank to maintain minimum ratios of tangible capital to tangible

44


Table of Contents

assets of 1.5%, core capital to tangible assets of 4.0% and total risk-based capital to risk-weighted assets of 8.0%. At September 30, 2004, our bank met all the capital adequacy requirements to which it was subject.

      At September 30, 2004, our bank was “well capitalized” under the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action. To be “well capitalized,” our bank must maintain minimum leverage, tier 1 risk-based and total risk-based capital ratios of at least 5.0%, 6.0% and 10.0%, respectively. No conditions or events have occurred since that date that management believes would change the bank’s capital levels. To maintain its status as a “well capitalized” financial institution under applicable regulations and to support additional growth, we anticipate the need for additional capital, which includes raising funds in this offering. From time to time after the offering, we may need to raise additional capital to support our bank’s further growth and to maintain its “well-capitalized” status.

      Bank of Internet capital amounts, ratios and requirements at September 30, 2004 were as follows:

                                                   
To Be “Well
Capitalized” Under
For Capital Prompt Corrective
Actual Adequacy Purposes Action Regulations



Amount Ratio Amount Ratio Amount Ratio






(Dollars in thousands)
Tier 1 leverage (core) capital:
                                               
 
Amount and ratio to adjusted tangible assets
  $ 34,447       7.60 %   $ 18,142       4.00 %   $ 22,677       5.00 %
Tier 1 capital:
                                               
 
Amount and ratio to risk-weighted assets
  $ 34,447       12.03 %     N/A       N/A     $ 17,180       6.00 %
Total capital:
                                               
 
Amount and ratio to risk-weighted assets
  $ 35,507       12.40 %   $ 22,907       8.00 %   $ 28,634       10.00 %
Tangible capital:
                                               
 
Amount and ratio to tangible assets
  $ 34,447       7.60 %   $ 6,803       1.50 %     N/A       N/A  

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk

      Market risk is defined as the sensitivity of income and capital to changes in interest rates, foreign currency exchange rates, commodity prices and other relevant market rates or prices. The primary market risk to which we are exposed is interest rate risk. Changes in interest rates can have a variety of effects on our business. In particular, changes in interest rates affect out net interest income, net interest margin, net income, the value of our securities portfolio, the volume of loans originated, and the amount of gain or loss on the sale of our loans.

      We are exposed to different types of interest rate risk. These risks include lag, repricing, basis, prepayment and lifetime cap risk, each of which is described in further detail below:

      Lag/ Repricing Risk. Lag risk results from the inherent timing difference between the repricing of our adjustable rate assets and our liabilities. Repricing risk is caused by the mismatch of repricing methods between interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities. Lag/repricing risk can produce short term volatility in our net interest income during periods of interest rate movements even though the effect of this lag generally balances out over time. One example of lag risk is the repricing of assets indexed to the monthly treasury average, or the MTA. The MTA index is based on a moving average of rates outstanding during the previous 12 months. A sharp movement in interest rates in a month will not be fully reflected in the index for 12 months resulting in a lag in the repricing of our loans and securities based on this index. We expect more of our interest-bearing liabilities will mature or reprice within one year than will our interest-earning assets, resulting in a one year negative interest rate sensitivity gap (the difference between our interest rate sensitive assets maturing or repricing within one year and our interest rate sensitive liabilities maturing or repricing within one year, expressed as a percentage of total interest-earning assets). In a rising interest rate

45


Table of Contents

environment, an institution with a negative gap would generally be expected, absent the effects of other factors, to experience a greater increase in its cost of liabilities relative to its yield on assets, and thus a decrease in its net interest income.

      Basis Risk. Basis risk occurs when assets and liabilities have similar repricing timing but repricing is based on different market interest rate indices. Our adjustable rate loans that reprice are directly tied to indices based upon U.S. Treasury rates, LIBOR, Eleventh District Cost of Funds and the prime rate. Our deposit rates are not directly tied to these same indices. Therefore, if deposit interest rates rise faster than the adjustable rate loan indices and there are no other changes in our asset/liability mix, our net interest income will likely decline due to basis risk.

      Prepayment Risk. Prepayment risk results from the right of customers to pay their loans prior to maturity. Generally, loan prepayments increase in falling interest rate environments and decrease in rising interest rate environments. In addition, prepayment risk results from the right of customers to withdraw their time deposits before maturity. Generally, early withdrawals of time deposits increase during rising interest rate environments and decrease in falling interest rate environments. When estimating the future performance of our assets and liabilities, we make assumptions as to when and how much of our loans and deposits will be prepaid. If the assumptions prove to be incorrect, the asset or liability may perform different from expected. In the last three fiscal years, the mortgage industry and our bank have experienced high rates of loan prepayments due to historically low interest rates. Market rates began rising in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 and, if they continue, mortgage loan prepayments are expected to decrease. In addition, if that occurs, we may experience increased rates of customer early withdrawals of their time deposits.

      Lifetime Cap Risk. Our adjustable rate loans have lifetime interest rate caps. In periods of rising interest rates, it is possible for the fully indexed interest rate (index rate plus the margin) to exceed the lifetime interest rate cap. This feature prevents the loan from repricing to a level that exceeds the cap’s specified interest rate, thus adversely affecting net interest income in periods of relatively high interest rates. On a weighted average basis, our adjustable rate loans at September 30, 2004 had lifetime rate caps that were 500 basis points or more greater than the effective rate at September 30, 2004. If market rates rise by more than the interest rate cap, we will not be able to increase these customers’ loan rates above the interest rate cap.

      The principal objective of our asset/liability management is to manage the sensitivity of net income to changing interest rates. Asset/liability management is governed by policies reviewed and approved annually by our board of directors. Our board of directors has delegated the responsibility to oversee the administration of these policies to the asset/liability committee, or ALCO. ALCO’s members are board members Theodore C. Allrich and Robert Eprile, our President and Chief Executive Officer Gary Lewis Evans and our Chief Financial Officer Andrew J. Micheletti. ALCO meets regularly to consider investment and financing alternatives with particular emphasis on duration and interest rate risk. The interest rate risk strategy currently deployed by ALCO is to use “natural” balance sheet hedging (as opposed to derivative hedging) or to avoid holding loans which ALCO views as higher risk. Specifically, we attempt to match the effective duration of our assets with our borrowings. To reduce the repricing risk associated with holding certain adjustable loans, which are fixed for the first three or five years, we have matched estimated maturities by obtaining long-term three year or five year advances from the FHLB. Other examples of ALCO policies designed to reduce our interest rate risk include limiting the premiums paid to purchase mortgage loans or mortgage-backed securities to 3% or less of mortgage principal. This policy addresses mortgage prepayment risk by capping the yield loss from an unexpected high level of mortgage loan prepayments. Once a quarter, ALCO members report to our board of directors the status of our interest rate risk profile.

46


Table of Contents

      We measure interest rate sensitivity as the difference between amounts of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities that mature within a given period of time. The difference, or the interest rate sensitivity gap, provides an indication of the extent to which an institution’s interest rate spread will be affected by changes in interest rates. A gap is considered positive when the amount of interest rate sensitive assets exceeds the amount of interest rate sensitive liabilities and negative when the amount of interest rate sensitive liabilities exceeds the amount of interest rate sensitive assets. In a rising interest rate environment, an institution with a positive gap would be in a better position than an institution with a negative gap to invest in higher yielding assets or to have its asset yields adjusted upward, which would result in the yield on its assets to increase at a faster pace than the cost of its interest-bearing liabilities. During a period of falling interest rates, however, an institution with a positive gap would tend to have its assets mature at a faster rate than one with a negative gap, which would tend to reduce the growth in its net interest income. The following table sets forth the interest rate sensitivity of our assets and liabilities at September 30, 2004:

                                 
Term to Repricing, Repayment, or Maturity at
September 30, 2004

Over Over
One Year One Year Five Years
or through and
Less Five Years Insensitive Total




(Dollars in thousands)
Interest-earning assets:
                               
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 21,131     $     $     $ 21,131  
Interest-earning deposits in other financial institutions
    6,034       2,875             8,909  
Investment securities(1)
    232       55,470             55,702  
Stock of FHLB, at cost
    5,729                   5,729  
Loans held for investment, net of allowance for loan loss(2)
    94,651       209,980       50,474       355,105  
Loans held for sale, at cost
    216                   216  
     
     
     
     
 
Total interest-earning assets
    127,993       268,325       50,474       446,792  
Noninterest-earning assets
                7,147       7,147  
     
     
     
     
 
Total assets
  $ 127,993     $ 268,325     $ 57,621     $ 453,939  
     
     
     
     
 
Interest-bearing liabilities:
                               
Interest-bearing deposits(3)
  $ 219,280     $ 69,750     $     $ 289,030  
Advances from the FHLB
    23,000       90,564       7,911       121,475  
Other borrowings
    3,300                   3,300  
     
     
     
     
 
Total interest-bearing liabilities
    245,580       160,314       7,911       413,805  
Other noninterest-bearing liabilities
                40,134       40,134  
     
     
     
     
 
Total liabilities and equity
  $ 245,580     $ 160,314     $ 48,045     $ 453,939  
     
     
     
     
 
Net interest rate sensitivity gap
  $ (117,587 )   $ 108,011     $ 42,563     $ 32,987  
Cumulative gap
  $ (117,587 )   $ (9,576 )   $ 32,987     $ 32,987  
Net interest rate sensitivity gap — as a % of interest-earning assets
    (91.9 )%     40.3 %     84.3 %     7.4 %
Cumulative gap — as a % of cumulative interest-earning assets
    (91.9 )%     (2.4 )%     7.4 %     7.4 %


(1)  Comprised of U.S. government securities and mortgage-backed securities which are classified as held to maturity and available for sale. The table reflects contractual repricing dates.
 
(2)  The table reflects either contractual repricing dates or maturities.
 
(3)  The table assumes that the principal balances for demand deposit and savings accounts will reprice in the first year.

47


Table of Contents

      Although “gap” analysis is a useful measurement device available to management in determining the existence of interest rate exposure, its static focus as of a particular date makes it necessary to utilize other techniques in measuring exposure to changes in interest rates. For example, gap analysis is limited in its ability to predict trends in future earnings and makes no assumptions about changes in prepayment tendencies, deposit or loan maturity preferences or repricing time lags that may occur in response to a change in the interest rate environment.

      We have not entered into any derivative financial instruments such as futures, forwards, swaps and options. Also, we have no market risk-sensitive instruments held for trading purposes. Our exposure to market risk is reviewed on a regular basis by management.

      We attempt to measure the effect market interest rate changes will have on the net present value of assets and liabilities, which is defined as market value of equity. At June 30, 2004 (the most recent period for which data is available), we analyzed the market value of equity sensitivity to an immediate parallel and sustained shift in interest rates derived from the current treasury and LIBOR yield curves. For rising interest rate scenarios, the base market interest rate forecast was increased by 100 and 200 basis points. For the falling interest rate scenarios, we used a 100 basis point decrease due to limitations inherent in the current rate environment. The following table indicates the sensitivity of market value of equity to the interest rate movement described above at June 30, 2004:

                                 
Net Present
Percentage Value as Board
Change from Percentage Established
Sensitivity Base of Assets Minimum




(Dollars in thousands)
Up 200 basis points
  $ (4,426 )     (11.00 )%     9.16 %     8.00 %
Up 100 basis points
  $ (2,236 )     (5.00 )%     9.54 %     8.00 %
Base
                9.92 %     8.00 %
Down 100 basis points
  $ 2,070       5.00 %     10.24 %     8.00 %

      The board of directors of our bank establishes limits on the amount of interest rate risk we may assume, as estimated by the net present value model. At June 30, 2004, the board’s established limit was 8.0%, meaning that the net present value after a theoretical instantaneous increase or decrease in interest rates must be greater than 8.0%. At June 30, 2004, the net present value for a 200 basis point and 100 basis point increase in interest rates exceed the board requirement by 116 basis points and 154 basis points, respectively.

      The computation of the prospective effects of hypothetical interest rate changes is based on numerous assumptions, including relative levels of interest rates, asset prepayments, runoffs in deposits and changes in repricing levels of deposits to general market rates, and should not be relied upon as indicative of actual results. Furthermore, these computations do not take into account any actions that we may undertake in response to future changes in interest rates.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

      In March 2004, SEC Staff Accounting Bulletin, or SAB, No. 105 was issued, which provides guidance regarding loan commitments that are accounted for as derivative instruments under Financial Accounting Standards Board, or the FASB, No. 133 (as amended), Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities . In this Bulletin, the SEC ruled that the amount of the expected servicing rights should not be included when determining the fair value of derivative interest rate lock commitments. This guidance must be applied to rate locks initiated after March 31, 2004. The adoption of SAB No. 105 did not have a material effect on our consolidated financial statements.

      In December 2003, the FASB issued Interpretation No. 46R, or FIN 46R, which revised the January 2003, FASB issued Interpretation No. 46, or FIN 46, Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities . FIN 46R is a revision to the original FIN 46 that addresses the consolidation of certain variable interest entities ( e.g. , nonqualified special purpose entities). The revision clarifies how variable interest entities should be

48


Table of Contents

identified and evaluated for consolidation purposes. We adopted FIN 46R as of June 30, 2004. The adoption of FIN 46R did not have a material effect on our consolidated financial statements.

      In December 2003, the Accounting Standards Executive Committee of the AICPA issued Statement of Position No. 03-3, or SOP 03-3, Accounting for Certain Loans or Debt Securities Acquired in a Transfer . SOP 03-3 addresses the accounting for differences between contractual cash flows and the cash flows expected to be collected from purchased loans or debt securities if those differences are attributable, in part, to credit quality. SOP 03-3 requires purchased loans and debt securities to be recorded initially at fair value based on the present value of the cash flows expected to be collected with no carryover of any valuation allowance previously recognized by the seller. Interest income should be recognized based on the effective yield from the cash flows expected to be collected. To the extent that the purchased loans or debt securities experience subsequent deterioration in credit quality, a valuation allowance would be established for any additional cash flows that are not expected to be received. However, if more cash flows subsequently are expected to be received than originally estimated, the effective yield would be adjusted on a prospective basis. SOP 03-3 will be effective for loans and debt securities acquired after December 31, 2004. Management does not expect the adoption of this statement to have a material effect on our consolidated financial statements.

      In May 2003, the FASB issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 150, Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of both Liabilities and Equity . This Statement establishes standards for how an issuer classifies and measures certain financial instruments with characteristics of both liabilities and equity. It requires that an issuer classify a financial instrument that is within its scope as a liability (or an asset in some circumstances). Many of these instruments were previously classified as equity. This Statement is effective for financial instruments entered into or modified after May 31, 2003, and otherwise is effective for public companies at the beginning of the first interim period beginning after June 15, 2003. The adoption of this standard did not have a material effect on our consolidated financial statements.

49


Table of Contents

BUSINESS

General

      We are the holding company for Bank of Internet USA, a consumer-focused, nationwide savings bank operating primarily over the Internet. Since the inception of our bank in 2000, we have designed and implemented an automated Internet-based banking platform and electronic workflow process that affords us low operating expenses and allows us to pass these savings along to our customers in the form of more attractive interest rates and fees on deposits and loans. This approach to banking is the foundation of our business model, allowing us to leverage technology and handle routine banking functions electronically.

      We believe that our business model is highly scalable, allowing us to expand into new regions and products and rapidly increase deposits and, to a lesser extent, loans, without significant delays or significant increased costs, and with limited additional fixed assets and personnel. We operate in all 50 states without the need for branches or regulatory approval to enter new markets. Therefore, we can be selective in entering new geographic markets and targeting demographic groups, such as seniors or students.

      We operate our Internet-based bank from a single location in San Diego, California. At September 30, 2004, we had total assets of $453.9 million, net loans held for investment of $355.1 million and total deposits of $295.7 million. Our deposits consist primarily of interest-bearing checking and savings accounts and time deposits. Our loans are primarily first mortgages secured by multifamily (five or more units) and single family (one to four units) real property. To a lesser extent, we also make commercial real estate and consumer loans.

      Since inception, we have achieved strong growth while controlling our operating costs. From the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002 to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, we have:

  •  increased our net income from $1.0 million to $2.2 million and diluted earnings per share from $0.21 to $0.39;
 
  •  increased our total assets at year end from $217.6 million to $405.0 million, while only increasing our employment base from 20 to 24 full time employees;
 
  •  increased net loans held for investment at year end from $167.3 million to $355.3 million, increased originations of multifamily loans from $30.0 million to $57.3 million and increased originations of single family loans held for sale from $7.0 million to $76.6 million;
 
  •  increased total deposits at year end from $167.6 million to $269.8 million and the number of online deposit accounts from 6,400 to 13,700; and
 
  •  improved our efficiency ratio, which decreased from 79.3% to 49.5%.

Business Strategy

      Our business strategy is to lower the cost of delivering banking products and services by leveraging technology, while continuing to grow our assets and deposits to achieve increased economies of scale. Our strategy includes a number of key elements:

  •  Leverage Technology. We believe that efficient management and processing of information is critical in online banking. We have designed and implemented an automated Internet-based banking platform and workflow process to handle traditional banking functions with reduced paperwork and human intervention. Our websites and CRM software support our customer self-service model by automating interactions with customers. Our banking platform also increases the efficiency of routine analysis work by our personnel and assists our account representatives in handling customer requests and applications. Our banking platform transfers much of the data entry tasks to the customer and allows for batch handling of applications by our employees. We intend to continue to improve our systems and implement new systems with the goal of providing for increased transaction capacity and scalability in our systems without materially increasing personnel costs.

50


Table of Contents

  •  Exploit Advantages of Nationwide Presence. Our nationwide, online presence allows us increased flexibility to target a large number of loan and deposit customers based on demographics, geographic location and price and provides us with a low cost of customer acquisition and the ability to be selective in approving prospective loan customers. Our advertising is carried mostly over the Internet so we can rapidly shift and target our marketing based on the demographics and location of the target audience nationwide. We can also establish a presence in new geographic and demographic markets with relatively low entry costs, such as our recent efforts to target multifamily lending in the State of Texas. Our thrift charter allows us to operate in all 50 states without the need to seek regulatory approval to enter new markets.
 
  •  Continue to Grow Online Deposits and Expand Services. We offer a broad selection of retail deposit instruments, including interest-bearing demand accounts, savings accounts (including money market savings) and time deposits. We provide our customers with many options for accessing funds, including ATM machines, debit cards, automated clearing house funds and checking accounts. We plan to continue to develop new products and services to serve specific demographics. For example, we recently opened our “Senior Banking Center” website to market to seniors, who we believe tend to maintain relatively high balances but are also more interest rate sensitive. We are also developing “Banco de Internet,” a redesigned version of our existing website to focus on Spanish speaking U.S. customers. During our fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, we opened 6,408 new deposit accounts, resulting in approximately $136.0 million in new deposits, and spent approximately $29,000 in external advertising targeted for deposit gathering. We intend to expand the volume and breadth of our deposit marketing over the Internet through websites and search engines such as Google.
 
  •  Increase Loan Originations and Purchases. As we increase our deposits, we intend to utilize the funds to originate multifamily and single family mortgage loans over the Internet. We offer single family mortgage loans in 50 states for sale, servicing released, to generate fee income. We also originate multifamily loans primarily in California, Arizona, Texas and Washington. We intend to increase single family and multifamily loan originations through our websites, including our “Broker Advantage” website, which we have developed to manage our relationships with loan brokers and our wholesale loan pipeline. We also plan to continue to purchase multifamily and, to a lesser extent, single family loans.

Lending and Investment Activities

      General. We originate single family mortgage loans on a nationwide basis, and currently originate multifamily loans primarily in California, Arizona, Texas and Washington. We currently sell substantially all of the single family loans that we originate and retain all of our multifamily loan originations. In addition, we purchase single family and multifamily mortgage loans from other lenders to hold in our portfolio. All originations and purchases are sourced, underwritten, processed, controlled and tracked primarily through our customized websites and software. We believe that, due to our automated systems, our lending business is highly scalable, allowing us to handle increasing volumes of loans and enter into new geographic lending markets with only a small increase in personnel, in accordance with our strategy of leveraging technology to lower our operating expenses.

      Loan Products. Our loans consist of first mortgage loans secured by single family and multifamily properties and, to a lesser extent, commercial properties. We also provide a limited amount of home equity financing and unsecured consumer loans. Further details regarding our loan programs are discussed below:

  •  Single Family Loans. We offer fixed and adjustable rate, single family mortgage loans in all 50 states, and provide both conforming and jumbo loans. We currently sell substantially all of the single family loans that we originate on a nonrecourse basis to wholesale lending institutions, typically with servicing rights released to the purchaser. Before we fund each loan, we obtain prior approval by a purchaser, who delivers a specific delivery and pricing commitment, which reduces our risk in funding the loan. In addition, while each loan is underwritten to our standard guidelines, we may also follow specific underwriting guidelines put in place by the purchaser of the loan.

51


Table of Contents

  •  Multifamily Loans. We currently originate adjustable rate multifamily mortgage loans primarily in California, Arizona, Texas and Washington, and we plan to expand in the future the states and geographic markets in which we originate new multifamily loans. In addition, we currently hold multifamily loans secured by property in 13 states. We typically hold all of the multifamily loans that we originate and perform the loan servicing directly on these loans. Our multifamily loans as of September 30, 2004 ranged in amount from approximately $64,000 to $2.9 million, and were secured by first liens on properties typically ranging from five to 70 units. We offer multifamily loans with interest rates that adjust based on a variety of industry standard indices, including U.S. Treasury security yields, LIBOR and Eleventh District Cost of Funds. Borrowers may obtain a fixed initial interest rate for a period of up to five years, which then floats based on a spread to the applicable index. Our loans typically have prepayment protection clauses, interest rate floors, ceilings and rate change caps.
 
  •  Commercial Loans. We originate a small volume of adjustable rate commercial real estate loans, primarily in California. We currently hold all of the commercial loans that we originate and perform the loan servicing on these loans. Our commercial loans as of September 30, 2004 ranged in amount from approximately $114,000 to $2.2 million, and were secured by first liens on mixed-use, shopping and retail centers, office buildings and multi-tenant industrial properties. We offer commercial loans on similar terms and interest rates as our multifamily loans.

      Loan Portfolio Composition. The following table sets forth the composition of our loan portfolio in amounts and percentages by type of loan at September 30, 2004 and at each fiscal year-end since inception of our operations:

                                                                                     
At June 30,

At September 30,
2004 2004 2003 2002 2001





(Dollars in thousands)
Residential real estate loans:
                                                                               
 
Single family (one to four units)
  $ 23,753       6.70 %   $ 21,753       6.14 %   $ 42,124       17.16 %   $ 32,763       19.67 %   $ 118,377       84.89 %
Multifamily (five units or more)
    318,888       89.98 %     320,971       90.55 %     191,426       77.99 %     125,303       75.22 %     12,878       9.23 %
 
Commercial real estate and land
    11,715       3.31 %     11,659       3.29 %     11,839       4.82 %     8,396       5.04 %     8,122       5.82 %
 
Consumer loans and other
    48       0.01 %     63       0.02 %     62       0.03 %     109       0.07 %     78       0.06 %
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
   
Total loans held for investment
  $ 354,404       100.00 %   $ 354,446       100.00 %   $ 245,451       100.00 %   $ 166,571       100.00 %   $ 139,455       100.00 %
             
             
             
             
             
 
Allowance for loan losses
    (1,060 )             (1,045 )             (790 )             (505 )             (310 )        
 
Unamortized premiums, net of deferred loan fees
    1,761               1,860               1,272               1,185               534          
     
             
             
             
             
         
 
Net loans held for investment
  $ 355,105             $ 355,261             $ 245,933             $ 167,251             $ 139,679          
     
             
             
             
             
         

      The following table sets forth the amount of loans maturing in our total loans held for investment at September 30, 2004 based on the contractual terms to maturity:

                                     
Term to Contractual Repayment or Maturity

Over Three
Less Months Over One
Than Three through One Year through Over Five
Months Year Five Years Years Total





(Dollars in thousands)
$ 42     $ 406     $ 4,072     $ 349,884     $ 354,404  

52


Table of Contents

      Our loans are secured by properties primarily located in the western United States. The following table shows the largest states and regions ranked by location of these properties at September 30, 2004:

Percent of Loan Principal Secured by Real Estate Located in State

                                 
Total Real
Estate Single
State Loans Family Multifamily Commercial and Land





California-south(1)
    54.82 %     40.46 %     54.57 %     90.92 %
California-north(2)
    8.72 %     30.73 %     7.40 %      
Colorado
    7.65 %           8.50 %      
Washington
    7.40 %           8.22 %      
Arizona
    5.22 %     1.66 %     5.68 %      
Oregon
    3.47 %           3.77 %      
All other states
    12.72 %     27.15 %     11.86 %     9.08 %
     
     
     
     
 
      100.00 %     100.00 %     100.00 %     100.00 %
     
     
     
     
 


(1)  Consists of loans secured by real property in California with zip code ranges from 90000 to 92999.
 
(2)  Consists of loans secured by real property in California with zip code ranges from 93000 to 96999.

      Another measure of credit risk is the ratio of the loan amount to the value of the property securing the loan (called loan-to-value ratio or LTV). The following table shows the LTVs of our loan portfolio on weighted average and median basis at September 30, 2004.

                                 
Total Real
Estate Single Commercial
Loans Family Multifamily and Land




Weighted Average LTV
    53.43%       59.87%       53.15%       48.11%  
Median LTV
    52.50%       59.55%       51.05%       39.68%  

53


Table of Contents

      Lending Activities. The following table summarizes the volumes of real estate loans originated, purchased and sold for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and for each fiscal year since inception of our operations:

                                             
For the
Three
Months
Ended For the Fiscal Years Ended June 30,
Sept. 30,
2004 2004 2003 2002 2001





(In thousands)
LOANS HELD FOR SALE:
                                       
Loan originations
                                       
 
Single family (one to four units)
  $ 2,514     $ 76,550     $ 124,739     $ 6,994     $ 3,317  
Loan sales
                                       
 
Proceeds from sale of loans held for sale
    (2,744 )     (80,081 )     (122,043 )     (6,932 )     (3,316 )
 
Gain on sales of loans held for sale
    11       364       778       67       21  
 
Other
                      (23 )      
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net change in loans held for sale
  $ (219 )   $ (3,167 )   $ 3,474     $ 106     $ 22  
     
     
     
     
     
 
LOANS HELD FOR INVESTMENT:
                                       
Loan originations
                                       
 
Single family (one to four units)
  $ 104     $ 1,641     $ 1,838     $ 3,595     $ 6,797  
 
Multifamily (five or more units)
    11,125       57,337       49,949       29,970       4,945  
 
Commercial real estate and land
    100       5,467       6,784       1,073       4,261  
 
Consumer loans and other
          33       38       21        
     
     
     
     
     
 
   
Total loan originations
  $ 11,329     $ 64,478     $ 58,609     $ 34,659     $ 16,003  
Loan purchases
                                       
 
Single family (one to four units)
  $ 5,301     $ 7,855     $ 32,919     $ 7,792     $ 127,340  
 
Multifamily (five or more units)
          120,264       48,267       123,349       7,965  
 
Commercial real estate and land
                            4,273  
 
Premiums paid for loans
    35       1,074       592       1,157       (13 )
     
     
     
     
     
 
   
Total loan purchases
  $ 5,336     $ 129,193     $ 81,778     $ 132,298     $ 139,565  
Other loan activity
                                       
 
Loan principal repayments
  $ (16,673 )   $ (83,603 )   $ (60,939 )   $ (138,708 )   $ (15,523 )
 
Amortization of premiums and deferred fees
    (133 )     (485 )     (481 )     (505 )     (57 )
 
Provision for loan losses
    (15 )     (255 )     (285 )     (195 )     (310 )
 
Other
                      23       1  
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net change in loans held for investment
  $ (156 )   $ 109,328     $ 78,682     $ 27,572     $ 139,679  
     
     
     
     
     
 

54


Table of Contents

      The following table summarizes the amount funded, the number and the size of real estate loans originated and purchased for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and for each fiscal year since inception of our operations:

                                             
For the Three
Months
Ended For the Fiscal Years Ended June 30,
September 30,
2004 2004 2003 2002 2001





(Dollars in thousands)
Type of Loan
                                       
Single family (one to four units):
                                       
 
Loans originated
                                       
   
Amount funded
  $ 2,618     $ 78,191     $ 126,577     $ 10,589     $ 10,114  
   
Number of loans
    12       317       560       46       38  
   
Average loan size
  $ 218     $ 247     $ 226     $ 230     $ 266  
 
Loans purchased
                                       
   
Amount funded
  $ 5,301     $ 7,855     $ 32,919     $ 7,792     $ 127,340  
   
Number of loans
    14       11       68       130       296  
   
Average loan size
  $ 379     $ 714     $ 484     $ 60     $ 430  
Multifamily (five or more units):
                                       
 
Loans originated
                                       
   
Amount funded
  $ 11,125     $ 57,337     $ 49,949     $ 29,970     $ 4,945  
   
Number of loans
    17       84       80       50       9  
   
Average loan size
  $ 654     $ 683     $ 624     $ 599     $ 549  
 
Loans purchased
                                       
   
Amount funded
        $ 120,264     $ 48,267     $ 123,349     $ 7,965  
   
Number of loans
          116       79       315       16  
   
Average loan size
        $ 1,037     $ 611     $ 392     $ 498  
Commercial real estate and land:
                                       
 
Loans originated
                                       
   
Amount funded
  $ 100     $ 5,467     $ 6,784     $ 1,073     $ 4,261  
   
Number of loans
    1       5       6       3       5  
   
Average loan size
  $ 100     $ 1,093     $ 1,131     $ 358     $ 852  
 
Loans purchased
                                       
   
Amount funded
                          $ 4,273  
   
Number of loans
                            16  
   
Average loan size
                          $ 267  

      Loan Marketing. We market our lending products through a variety of channels depending on the product. We market single family mortgage loans in all 50 states to Internet comparison shoppers through our purchase of advertising on search engines, such as Google and Yahoo, and popular product comparison sites, such as Bankrate.com. We market multifamily loans primarily in four states through Internet search engines and through traditional origination techniques, such as direct mail marketing, personal sales efforts and limited media advertising.

      Loan Originations. We originate loans through three different origination channels: online retail; online wholesale; and direct.

  •  Online Retail Loan Origination. We originate single family and multifamily mortgage loans directly online through our websites, where our customers can review interest rates and loan terms, enter their loan applications and lock in interest rates directly over the Internet.

55


Table of Contents

  •  Single Family Loan Website. Our primary website for single family loans is located at www.homeloansbankofinternet.com. We maintain and update the rate and other information on this website. Once a single family loan application is received, we outsource processing of the loan application to a third-party processor, which handles all of the tasks of underwriting and processing the loan. Customers seeking direct contact with a loan officer during the application process are directed to a loan officer at the third-party loan processor.
 
  •  Multifamily Loan Website. Our primary website for multifamily loans is located at www.ApartmentBank.com, where customers can obtain loan rates and terms, prequalify loan requests, submit loan applications, communicate with loan officers and monitor loan processing in a secure, online environment. Multifamily loan applications are underwritten and processed internally by our personnel. We designed our multifamily website and underlying software to expedite the origination, processing and management of multifamily loans. For example, customers can directly input or import loan application data electronically, or submit data by facsimile. Once a customer begins an online application, he or she can save the application and resume the process at a later date through a secure password. Our software determines which forms are needed, populates the forms and allows multiple parties, such as guarantors, to access the application.
 
  •  Online Wholesale Loan Origination. We have developed relationships with independent multifamily loan brokers in our four primary multifamily markets, and we manage these relationships and our wholesale loan pipeline through our “Broker Advantage” website located at www.broker.bofi.com. Through this password-protected website, our approved independent loan brokers can compare programs, terms and pricing on a real time basis and communicate with our staff. Additionally, through a secure loan pipeline management feature, brokers can submit prequalification requests, submit, edit and manage full loan applications, manage loans in process, track outstanding documents and obtain any necessary forms required for documentation. We do not allow brokers to perform any loan processing beyond acting as the originating broker of record. We handle all further loan processing, including verification of loan requests, underwriting, preparation of loan documents and obtaining third party reports and appraisals. We believe that the tools and services offered by Broker Advantage free loan brokers from much of the administrative tasks of loan processing and allow brokers to focus more of their time on local marketing and business development efforts.
 
  •  Direct Loan Origination. We employ a staff of three loan originators who directly originate multifamily and commercial loans and develop wholesale lending relationships with loan brokers on a regional basis. Our internal software, known as “Origination Manager,” allows each loan originator to have direct online access to our multifamily loan origination system and originate and manage their loan portfolios in a secure online environment from anywhere in the nation. Routine tasks are automated, such as researching loan program and pricing updates, prequalifying loans, submitting loan applications, viewing customer applications, credit histories and other application documents and monitoring the status of loans in process. We have three direct loan originators, located in Dallas/ Fort Worth, Phoenix and San Diego.

      Loan Purchases. We purchase selected single family and multifamily loans from other lenders, allowing us to utilize excess cash when direct originations are not available and diversify our loan portfolio geographically. We currently purchase loans primarily from three major banks or mortgage companies. We evaluate each purchased loan as an independent credit decision and apply the same lending policies as our originated loans. Each purchased loan is internally underwritten pursuant to our credit policies for the applicable loan type, and subject to the same loan credit quality scrutiny and approval levels as originated loans. As part of the underwriting and due diligence process for purchased multifamily loans, additional techniques are employed, including a full credit file review for each loan, on-site property inspection, acquisition of independent third party reports as needed, and compliance/documentation quality control audits. At September 30, 2004, approximately $160.7 million, or 45.4%, of our loan portfolio was acquired from other lenders who are servicing the loans on our behalf, 87.9% of which are multifamily loans and 12.1% are single family loans.

56


Table of Contents

      Loan Servicing. We typically retain servicing rights for all multifamily loans that we originate. We typically do not acquire servicing rights on purchased single family and multifamily loans, and we typically release servicing rights to the purchaser when we sell single family loans that we originate. At September 30, 2004, we serviced 295 mortgage loans with two full time employees.

      Loan Underwriting Process and Criteria. We individually underwrite all multifamily and commercial loans that we originate, and all loans that we purchase. We outsource to a third-party processor the underwriting of all single family loans that we originate, based on underwriting criteria that we establish and provide to the processor. Our loan underwriting policies and procedures are written and adopted by our board of directors and our loan committee, consisting of President and Chief Executive Officer Gary Lewis Evans and board members Thomas Pancheri and Robert Eprile. Each loan, regardless of how it is originated, must meet underwriting criteria set forth in our lending policies and the requirements of applicable lending regulations of the OTS.

      Our staff of loan underwriters operates independently of commissioned loan officers. Utilizing our required format, policies and procedures, the underwriters analyze the credit request and prepare credit memoranda and financial analyses for submission to the Chief Credit Officer and loan committee. Loans under $1.0 million require the approval of both the Chief Credit Officer and one loan committee member, while loans over $1.0 million require the approval of the Chief Credit Officer and two loan committee members.

      We have designed our loan application and review process so that much of the information that is required to underwrite and evaluate a loan is created electronically during the loan application process. Therefore we can automate many of the mechanical procedures involved in preparing underwriting reports and reduce the need for human interaction, other than in the actual credit decision process. We believe that our systems will allow us to handle increasing volumes of loans with only a small increase in personnel, in accordance with our strategy of leveraging technology to lower our operating expenses.

      We apply different underwriting criteria depending on the type of loan. Each single family loan is underwritten by our third-party processor based on standard FNMA/ FHLMC guidelines, and we may from time to time implement additional underwriting guidelines determined by the expected purchaser of the loan. For example, a purchaser may specify single family loans that meet additional underwriting criteria, such as loan size and type of property.

      We perform underwriting directly on all multifamily and commercial loans that we originate and purchase. We rely primarily on the cash flow from the underlying property as the expected source of repayment, but we also endeavor to obtain personal guarantees from all borrowers or substantial principals of the borrower. In evaluating multifamily and commercial loans, we review the value and condition of the underlying property, as well as the financial condition, credit history and qualifications of the borrower. In evaluating the borrower’s qualifications, we consider primarily the borrower’s other financial resources, experience in owning or managing similar properties and payment history with us or other financial institutions. In evaluating the underlying property, we consider primarily the net operating income of the property before debt service and depreciation, the ratio of net operating income to debt service and the ratio of the loan amount to the appraised value. We typically require a debt service coverage ratio, after operating expense adjustments, of at least 1.25 times for multifamily and 1.50 times for commercial loans, based on the actual operating history of the property over the prior two calendar years and assuming an interest rate equal to the greater of the contractual start rate or the fully indexed margin. We also prepare a pro forma debt service coverage ratio, which must also meet or exceed a 1.25 or 1.50 multiple, based on assumptions including current macro, regional and local economic trends, recent financial statements and current rent rolls. In evaluating multifamily and commercial properties securing loans we originate, we obtain third-party reports, including title and environmental risk reports, third-party appraisals and review appraisals. One of our employee underwriters typically visits each multifamily or commercial property before loan approval and may also visit related properties owned by the borrower or its affiliates or comparable properties in the area, to further our comfort with the loan.

57


Table of Contents

      Lending Limits. As a savings association, we generally are subject to the same lending limit rules applicable to national banks. With limited exceptions, the maximum amount that we may lend to any borrower, including related entities of the borrower, at one time may not exceed 15% of our unimpaired capital and surplus, plus an additional 10% of unimpaired capital and surplus for loans fully secured by readily marketable collateral. We are additionally authorized to make loans to one borrower, by order of the Director of the OTS, in an amount not to exceed the lesser of $30.0 million or 30% of our unimpaired capital and surplus for the purpose of developing residential housing, if certain specified conditions are met. See “Regulation — Regulation of Bank of Internet USA.”

      At September 30, 2004, Bank of Internet’s loans-to-one-borrower limit was $5.2 million, based upon the 15% of unimpaired capital and surplus measurement. At September 30, 2004, no single loan was larger than $2.9 million and our largest single lending relationship had an outstanding balance of $4.3 million. We expect that our lending limit will increase to approximately $           million immediately following this offering, assuming that $           million in net proceeds are raised in the offering, $           million are contributed to our bank, based on the assumptions set forth below the table in “Capitalization.”

      Asset Quality and Credit Risk. For every quarter from inception to June 30, 2004, we had no nonperforming assets or troubled debt restructurings. Since that time, one loan with a principal balance of approximately $152,000 at June 30, 2004 defaulted, but the loan was repaid in full. Since our history is limited, we expect in the future to have additional loans that default or become nonperforming. Nonperforming assets are defined as nonperforming loans and real estate acquired by foreclosure or deed-in-lieu thereof. Nonperforming loans are defined as nonaccrual loans and loans 90 days or more overdue but still accruing interest to the extent applicable. Troubled debt restructurings are defined as loans that we have agreed to modify by accepting below market terms either by granting interest rate concessions or by deferring principal or interest payments. Our policy in the event of nonperforming assets is to place such assets on nonaccrual status when, in the judgment of management, the probability of collection of interest is deemed to be insufficient to warrant further accrual. When a loan is placed on nonaccrual status, previously accrued but unpaid interest will be deducted from interest income. Our policy is to not accrue interest on loans past due 90 days or more.

      Investment Portfolio. In addition to loans, we invest available funds in investment grade fixed income securities, consisting mostly of federal agency securities. We also invest available funds in term deposits of other FDIC-insured financial institutions. Our investment policy, as established by our board of directors, is designed primarily to maintain liquidity and generate a favorable return on investment without incurring undue interest rate risk, credit risk or portfolio asset concentration. Our investment policy is currently implemented by an investment committee of the board of directors, comprised of Messrs. Evans, Allrich and Eprile, within overall parameters set by our board of directors. Under our investment policy, we are currently authorized to invest in obligations issued or fully guaranteed by the United States government, specific federal agency obligations, specific time deposits, negotiable certificates of deposit issued by commercial banks and other insured financial institutions, investment grade corporate debt securities and other specified investments.

58


Table of Contents

      The following table sets forth changes in our investment portfolio for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and for each fiscal year since 2002:

                                           
For the Three
Months Ended For the Fiscal Years Ended
September 30, June 30,


2004 2003 2004 2003 2002





(Dollars in thousands)
Securities at beginning of period
  $ 3,665     $ 441     $ 441     $ 726     $ 1,522  
 
Purchases
    52,808             3,409              
 
Sales
                                       
 
Repayments and prepayments
    (641 )     (64 )     (185 )     (285 )     (796 )
 
(Decrease) increase in unrealized gains/losses on available-for-sale securities(1)
    (130 )                        
     
     
     
     
     
 
Securities at end of period
  $ 55,702     $ 377     $ 3,665     $ 441     $ 726  
     
     
     
     
     
 


(1)  Through June 30, 2004, we did not have any securities designated as available-for-sale.

      The following table sets forth, at September 30, 2004, the dollar amount of our investment portfolio by type, based on the contractual terms to maturity and the weighted average yield for each range of maturities:

                                                                                 
Due within After One but After Five but
Total Amount One Year within Five Years within Ten Years After Ten Years





Amount Yield(1) Amount Yield(1) Amount Yield(1) Amount Yield(1) Amount Yield(1)










(Dollars in thousands)
Investment Securities Available-for-Sale:
                                                                               
GNMA MBS(2)
  $ 9,920       3.01 %   $ 214       2.95 %   $ 931       2.96 %   $ 1,346       2.96 %   $ 7,429       3.02 %
FNMA MBS(2)
    37,668       3.93 %     651       3.93 %     2,887       3.93 %     4,353       3.93 %     29,777       3.93 %
     
             
             
             
             
         
Total debt securities
  $ 47,588       3.74 %   $ 865       3.69 %   $ 3,818       3.69 %   $ 5,699       3.70 %   $ 37,206       3.75 %
     
             
             
             
             
         
Total fair value of debt securities
  $ 47,458       3.74 %   $ 865       3.69 %   $ 3,818       3.69 %   $ 5,699       3.70 %   $ 37,076       3.75 %
     
             
             
             
             
         
 
Investment Securities Held to Maturity:
                                                                               
U.S. Government and Agency
  $ 3,417       3.65 %   $           $ 3,417       3.65 %   $           $        
FHLMC MBS(2)
    4,595       4.11 %     78       4.11 %     349       4.11 %     529       4.11 %     3,639       4.11 %
FNMA MBS(2)
    232       2.32 %     6       2.32 %     26       2.32 %     38       2.32 %     162       2.32 %
     
             
             
             
             
         
Total debt securities
  $ 8,244       3.87 %   $ 84       3.98 %   $ 3,792       3.68 %   $ 567       3.99 %   $ 3,801       4.03 %
     
             
             
             
             
         
Total fair value of debt securities
  $ 8,227       3.87 %   $ 84       3.98 %   $ 3,815       3.68 %   $ 567       3.99 %   $ 3,761       4.03 %
     
             
             
             
             
         


(1)  Weighted average yield is based on amortized cost of the securities.
 
(2)  Mortgage-backed securities are allocated based on contractual principal maturities, assuming no prepayments.

      Allowance for Loan Losses. We maintain an allowance for loan losses in an amount that we believe is sufficient to provide adequate protection against probable losses in our loan portfolio. We evaluate quarterly the adequacy of the allowance based upon reviews of individual loans, recent loss experience, current economic conditions, risk characteristics of the various categories of loans and other pertinent factors. The evaluation is inherently subjective, as it requires estimates that are susceptible to significant revision as more information becomes available. The allowance is increased by the provision for loan losses, which is charged

59


Table of Contents

against current period operating results. The allowance is decreased by the amount of charge-offs of loans deemed uncollectible and increased by recoveries of loans previously charged off.

      Under our allowance for loan loss policy, impairment calculations are determined based on loan level data (specific reserves) and general portfolio data (general reserves). Specific loans are evaluated for impairment and are to be classified in accordance with OTS regulation when they are 90 days or more delinquent, nonperforming or in foreclosure. Under our allowance for loan loss policy, a loan is considered impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that we will be unable to collect the scheduled payments of principal or interest when due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Factors that we consider in determining impairment include payment status, collateral value and the probability of collecting scheduled principal and interest payments when due. Loans that experience insignificant payment delays and payment shortfalls generally are not classified as impaired. Impairment is measured on a loan by loan basis by either the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate or the fair value of the collateral if repayment of the loan is expected from the sale of collateral.

      Under our policies, specific reserves are to be calculated when an internal asset review of a loan identifies a significant adverse change in the financial position of the borrower or the value of the collateral. We calculate our general loan loss reserves by grouping each loan by collateral type ( e.g. , single family, multifamily) and by grouping the loan-to-value ratios of each loan within the collateral type. An estimated impairment rate for each loan-to-value group within each type of loan is multiplied by the total principal amount in the group to calculate the required general reserve attributable to that group. Our belief is that absent any other evidence of impairment ( e.g. , delinquent payments), the greater the loan-to-value ratio, the greater the risk the loan will be impaired. We have constructed a calculation methodology that provides a larger loss allowance for loans with greater loan-to-value ratios, measured at the time the loan was funded. The internal asset review committee of our board of directors reviews and approves the bank’s calculation methodology.

      For every quarter from inception to June 30, 2004, we had no loan defaults, foreclosures, nonperforming loans or specific loan loss allowances. Since that time, one loan with a principal balance of approximately $152,000 at June 30, 2004 defaulted, but the loan was repaid in full. Since our history is limited, we expect in the future to have additional loans that default or become nonperforming. We have provided general loan loss allowances as an estimate of the impairment inherent in our portfolio.

60


Table of Contents

      The following table sets forth the changes in our allowance for loan losses, by loan type, from inception through September 30, 2004. We have not recorded any specific loan loss reserves or any loan charge-offs or recoveries in the period from inception through September 30, 2004:

                                                 
Total
Allowance
as a
Commercial Percentage
Real Estate of Total
Single Family Multifamily and Land Consumer Total Loans






(Dollars in thousands)
Balance at July 6, 1999 (inception)
  $     $     $     $     $        
                                             
 
Provision for loan loss
                                     
     
     
     
     
     
         
Balance at June 30, 2000
                                   
                                             
 
Provision for loan losses
    198       76       33       3       310          
     
     
     
     
     
         
Balance at June 30, 2001
    198       76       33       3       310       0.22 %
                                             
 
Provision for loan losses
    (107 )     300       2             195          
     
     
     
     
     
         
Balance at June 30, 2002
    91       376       35       3       505       0.30 %
                                             
 
Provision for loan losses
    (14 )     302             (3 )     285          
     
     
     
     
     
         
Balance at June 30, 2003
    77       678       35             790       0.32 %
                                             
 
Provision for loan losses
    (35 )     284       6             255          
     
     
     
     
     
         
Balance at June 30, 2004
    42       962       41             1,045       0.29 %
                                             
 
Provision for loan loss
    (2 )     17                   15          
     
     
     
     
     
         
Balance at September 30, 2004
  $ 40     $ 979     $ 41     $     $ 1,060       0.30 %
     
     
     
     
     
     
 

Deposit Products and Services

      Deposit Products. We offer a full line of deposit products over the Internet to customers in all 50 states. Our deposit products consist of demand deposits (interest bearing and non-interest bearing), savings accounts and time deposits Our customers access their funds through ATMs, debit cards, Automated Clearing House funds (electronic transfers) and checks. We also offer the following additional services in connection with our deposit accounts:

  •  Online Bill Payment Service. Customers can pay their bills online through electronic funds transfer or a written check prepared and sent to the payee.
 
  •  Online Check Imaging. Online images of cancelled checks and deposit slips are available to customers 24 hours a day. Images of cancelled checks are available real time (at the time the check clears our bank) and may be printed or stored electronically.
 
  •  ATM Cards or VISA® Check Cards. Each customer may choose to receive a free ATM card or VISA® check card upon opening an account. Customers can access their accounts at ATMs and any other location worldwide that accept VISA® check cards. We do not charge a fee for ATM/ VISA® usage, and we reimburse our customers up to $10 per month for fees imposed by third-party operators of ATM/ VISA® locations.
 
  •  Overdraft Protection. Overdraft protection, in the form of an overdraft line of credit, is available to all checking account customers who request the protection and qualify.

61


Table of Contents

  •  Electronic Statements. Statements are produced and imaged automatically each month and may be printed or stored electronically by the customer.

      Deposit Marketing. We currently market to deposit customers through targeted, online marketing in all 50 states by purchasing “key word” advertising on Internet search engines, such as Google, and placement on product comparison sites, such as Bankrate.com. We target deposit customers based on demographics, such as age, income, geographic location and other criteria. For example, we recently opened our “Senior Banking Center” website to target seniors who tend to maintain relatively high balances but are also rate sensitive. This account offers greater interest rates and higher amounts of free bill paying, but lower amounts of ATM reimbursement. We also offer a “Boomers” account targeting baby-boomers, and are developing “Banco de Internet,” a redesigned version of our website to focus on Spanish speaking U.S. customers. We also plan to create in the future strategic alliances with financial and similar websites to target deposit-taking products to their customers.

      As part of our deposit marketing strategies, we actively manage deposit interest rates offered on our websites and displayed in our advertisements. Senior management is directly involved in executing overall growth and interest rate guidance established by ALCO. Within these parameters, management and staff survey our competitors’ interest rates and evaluate consumer demand for various products and our existing deposit mix. They then establish our marketing campaigns accordingly and monitor and adjust our marketing campaigns on an ongoing basis. Within minutes our management and staff can react to changes in deposit inflows and external events by altering interest rates reflected on our websites and in our advertising.

      During our fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, we opened 6,408 new deposit accounts, resulting in approximately $136.0 million in new deposits, and spent approximately $29,000 in external advertising costs for deposits.

      Deposit Composition. The following table sets forth the dollar amount of deposits by type and weighted average interest rates at September 30, 2004 and at each of June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002:

                                                                     
At June 30,

At September 30,
2004 2004 2003 2002




Amount Rate(1) Amount Rate(1) Amount Rate(1) Amount Rate(1)








(Dollars in thousands)
Noninterest-bearing
  $ 6,647           $ 2,279           $ 3,299           $ 1,405        
Interest-bearing:
                                                               
 
Demand
    27,221       1.38 %     26,725       1.35 %     29,902       1.38 %     34,283       3.07 %
 
Savings
    91,014       1.96 %     94,120       1.96 %     18,823       1.91 %     7,977       1.87 %
 
Time deposits:
                                                               
   
Under $100,000
    106,021       3.28 %     88,082       3.44 %     95,489       3.93 %     82,889       4.23 %
   
$100,000 or more
    64,774       3.16 %     58,635       3.20 %     46,479       3.96 %     41,064       4.18 %
     
             
             
             
         
 
Total time deposits
    170,795       3.23 %     146,717       3.35 %     141,968       3.94 %     123,953       4.21 %
     
             
             
             
         
Total interest-bearing
    289,030       2.66 %     267,562       2.66 %     190,693       3.34 %     166,213       3.86 %
     
             
             
             
         
Total deposits
  $ 295,677       2.60 %   $ 269,841       2.64 %   $ 193,992       3.28 %   $ 167,618       3.83 %
     
             
             
             
         


(1)  Annualized.

62


Table of Contents

      The following table shows the maturity dates of our certificates of deposit at September 30, 2004 and at each of June 30, 2004 and 2003:

                         
At
September 30, At June 30,


2004 2004 2003



(Dollars in thousands)
Within 12 months
  $ 101,045     $ 80,365     $ 71,147  
13 to 24 months
    27,176       23,018       35,465  
25 to 36 months
    22,563       14,760       11,116  
37 to 48 months
    5,090       14,309       10,803  
49 months and thereafter
    14,921       14,265       13,437  
     
     
     
 
Total
  $ 170,795     $ 146,717     $ 141,968  
     
     
     
 

      The following table shows maturities of our time deposits having principal amounts of $100,000 or more at September 30, 2004:

                                         
Term to Maturity

Over Three Over Six
Within Months Months
Three through Six through One Over One
Months Months Year Year Total





(Dollars in thousands)
Time deposits with balances of $100,000 or more
  $ 14,149     $ 15,053     $ 9,920     $ 25,652     $ 64,774  

Borrowings

      In addition to deposits, we have historically funded our asset growth through advances from the FHLB. Our bank can borrow up to 35.0% of its total assets from the FHLB, and borrowings are collateralized by mortgage loans and mortgage-backed securities pledged to the FHLB. Based on loans and securities pledged at September 30, 2004, we had a total borrowing capacity of approximately $158.7 million, of which $121.9 million was outstanding and $36.8 million was available. At September 30, 2004, we also had a $4.5 million unsecured Fed Funds purchase line of credit with a major bank, under which no borrowings were outstanding.

      On October 24, 2003, we entered into a $5.0 million loan facility with a commercial bank consisting of a one-year revolving line of credit plus a fully amortizing term loan of up to nine years. Interest is payable quarterly under this credit line at prime plus 1% per annum. Principal is payable in 36 equal quarterly installments starting on January 24, 2005. We may prepay all or a portion of the principal at anytime without a prepayment penalty. At November 30, 2004, the note payable balance was $5.0 million and the interest rate was 6.0% per annum. We intend to use a portion of the net proceeds from the offering to prepay in full the entire amount outstanding under the note payable. See “Use of Proceeds.”

      The loan facility is secured by our bank’s common stock held by BofI Holding, Inc. Under the terms of the loan facility, we are bound by a number of significant covenants that restrict our ability, out of the ordinary course of business, to dispose of assets, to incur additional debt or guarantees, to invest in or acquire any interest in another enterprise and to suffer a change in ownership of 51% or more of our common stock. The loan facility also requires us to maintain a debt coverage ratio of 1.50 as calculated by the lender. We were in compliance with all such covenants and restrictions at November 30, 2004, and do not anticipate that such covenants and restrictions will limit our operations.

63


Table of Contents

      The table below sets forth the amount of our borrowings, the maximum amount of borrowings in each category during any month-end during each reported period, the approximate average amounts outstanding during each reported period and the approximate weighted average interest rate thereon at or for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 and at or for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002:

                                             
At or For the
Three Months Ended At or For the Fiscal Years Ended
September 30, June 30,


2004 2003 2004 2003 2002





(Dollars in thousands)
Advances from the FHLB:
                                       
 
Average balance outstanding
  $ 99,961     $ 58,446     $ 69,932     $ 35,343     $ 22,764  
   
Maximum amount outstanding at any month-end during the period
    121,475       58,900       101,446       55,900       29,900  
 
Balance outstanding at end of period
    121,475       58,900       101,446       55,900       29,900  
 
Average interest rate at end of period
    3.20 %     3.92 %     3.19 %     4.40 %     5.05 %
 
Average interest rate during period
    3.47 %     4.11 %     3.79 %     4.86 %     5.02 %
Notes payable:
                                       
 
Average balance outstanding
  $ 1,343           $ 1,119              
   
Maximum amount outstanding at any month-end during the period
    3,300             3,060              
 
Balance outstanding at end of period
    3,300             1,300              
 
Average interest rate at end of period
    5.75 %           5.25 %            
 
Average interest rate during period
    5.96 %           5.36 %            
Notes payable — related party:
                                   
 
Average balance outstanding
                          $ 487  
   
Maximum amount outstanding at any month-end during the period
                            1,570  
 
Balance outstanding at end of period
                             
 
Average interest rate at end of period
                             
 
Average interest rate during period
                            9.45 %

Technology

      We have implemented customized software and hardware systems to provide products and services to our customers. Most of our key customer interfaces were designed by us specifically to address the needs of an Internet-only bank and its customers. Our website and CRM technology drive our customer self-service model, reducing the need for human interaction while increasing our overall operating efficiencies. Our CRM software enables us to collect customer data over our websites, which is automatically uploaded into our customer databases. The databases drive our workflow processes by automatically linking to third-party processors and storing all customer contract and correspondence data, including emails, hard copy images and telephone notes. With customer information readily accessible through our CRM software, our service personnel can respond to customers rapidly. We intend to continue to improve our systems and implement new systems, with the goal of providing for increased transaction capacity without materially increasing personnel costs.

      The following summarizes our current technology resources:

      Core Banking Systems. We use a major banking industry outsourcing company for substantially all our core banking systems. This company is responsible for all our basic core processing applications, including

64


Table of Contents

general ledger, loans, deposits, ATM networks, electronic fund transfers, item processing and imaging. These outsourced services for our core banking systems are located in California, Wisconsin and North Carolina, with a backup location in New York. Our bill pay system is outsourced to the processing subsidiary of a major bank. We use a variety of vendors to provide automated information for our customers, including credit, identity authentication, tax status and property appraisal.

      Internet and CRM Systems. We use our own customized software for our website interface with loan and deposit customers, including collection and initial processing of new customer information. We have also created customized software to manage workflow and fraud control and provide automated interfaces to our outsourced service providers. We directly host our primary web servers, which are located in San Diego, California, and fully control and manage the content of our websites with a staff of technology personnel. Web servers used by our customers to access real time account data are located in California and Kansas, with a backup location in Texas.

      Systems Architecture. Our Internet and CRM platforms have been developed using Microsoft software and Intel-based hardware. Our outsourced core processing system uses IBM hardware and software. We use a variety of specialized companies to provide hardware and software for firewalls, network routers, intrusion detection, load balancing, data storage and data backup. To aid in disaster recovery, customer access to our websites is supported by a fully redundant network and our servers are “mirrored” so that most hardware failures or software bugs should cause no more than a few minutes of service outage. “Mirroring” means that our server is backed up continuously so that all data is stored in two physical locations.

Security

      Because we operate almost exclusively through electronic means, we believe that we must be vigilant in detecting and preventing fraudulent transactions. We have implemented stringent computer security and internal control procedures to reduce our susceptibility to “identity theft,” “hackers,” theft and other types of fraud. We have implemented an automated approach to detecting identity theft that we believe is highly effective, and we have integrated our fraud detection processes into our CRM technology. For example, when opening new deposit accounts, our CRM programs automatically collect a customer’s personal and computer identification from our websites, send the data to internal and third-party programs which analyze the data for potential fraud, and quickly provide operating personnel with a summary report for final assessment and decision making during the account-opening process.

      We continually evaluate the systems, services and software used in our operations to ensure that they meet high standards of security. The following are among the security measures that are currently in place:

  •  Encrypted Transactions. All banking transactions and other appropriate Internet communications are encrypted so that sensitive information is not transmitted over the Internet in a form that can be read or easily deciphered.
 
  •  Secure Log-on. To protect against the possibility of unauthorized downloading of a customer’s password protected files, user identification and passwords are not stored on the Internet or our web server.
 
  •  Authenticated Session Integrity. An authenticated user is any user who signs onto our website with a valid user ID and password. To protect against fraudulent bank customers, our server is programmed to alert our core processing vendor of any attempted illegitimate entry so that its staff can quickly investigate and respond to such attempts.
 
  •  Physical Security. Our servers and network computers reside in secure facilities. Currently, computer operations supporting our outsourced core banking systems are based in Lenexa, Kansas with backup facilities in Houston, Texas. Only employees with proper photographic identification may enter the primary building. The computer operations are located in a secure area that can be accessed only by using a key card and further password identification. In addition, our marketing and account opening servers reside in a secure third-party location in San Diego with a mirror site at our corporate offices. These servers are physically separate from our outsourced core back-office processing system and

65


Table of Contents

  maintain the same level of security services as our outsourced core processing servers in Lenexa, Kansas.
 
  •  Service Continuity. The core processing vendor and our bank provide a fully redundant network. Our server is also “mirrored.” This network and server redundancy is designed to provide reliable access to our bank. However, if existing customers are not able to access their accounts over the Internet, customers retain access to their funds through paper checks, ATM cards, customer service by telephone and an automated telephone response system.
 
  •  Monitoring. All customer transactions on our server produce one or more entries into transaction logs, which we monitor for unusual or fraudulent activity. We are notified and log any attempt by an authenticated user to modify a command or request from our websites. Additionally, all financial transactions are logged, and these logs are constantly reviewed for abnormal or unusual activity.

Competition

      The market for banking and financial services is intensely competitive, and we expect competition to continue to intensify in the future. We believe that competition in our market is based predominantly on price, customer service and brand recognition. Our competitors include:

  •  large, publicly-traded, Internet-based banks, as well as smaller Internet-based banks;
 
  •  “brick and mortar” banks, including those that have implemented websites to facilitate online banking; and
 
  •  traditional banking institutions such as thrifts, finance companies, credit unions and mortgage banks.

      In real estate lending, we compete against traditional real estate lenders, including large and small savings banks, commercial banks, mortgage bankers and mortgage brokers. Many of our current and potential competitors have greater brand recognition, longer operating histories, larger customer bases and significantly greater financial, marketing and other resources and are capable of providing strong price and customer service competition. In order to compete profitably, we may need to reduce the rates we offer on loans and investments and increase the rates we offer on deposits, which actions may adversely affect our overall financial condition and earnings. We may not be able to compete successfully against current and future competitors.

Intellectual Property and Proprietary Rights

      We register our various Internet URL addresses with service companies, and work actively with bank regulators to identify potential naming conflicts with competing financial institutions. We also work with various regulators to shut down websites with names which may be misleading to our customers. Policing unauthorized use of proprietary information is difficult and litigation may be necessary to enforce our intellectual property rights.

      We own the Internet domain names “BankofInternet.com,” “BofI.com,” “ApartmentBank.com,” “InsuranceSales.com,” “InvestmentSales.com,” “BancodeInternet.com” and many other similar names. Domain names in the United States and in foreign countries are regulated, and the laws and regulations governing the Internet are continually evolving. Additionally, the relationship between regulations governing domain names and laws protecting intellectual property rights is not entirely clear. As a result, we may in the future be unable to prevent third parties from acquiring domain names that infringe or otherwise decrease the value of our trademark and other intellectual property rights.

Employees

      At September 30, 2004, we had one part-time and 24 full time employees. None of our employees is represented by a labor union or subject to a collective bargaining agreement. We have not experienced any work stoppage and consider our relations with our employees to be good.

66


Table of Contents

Facilities

      Our principal executive offices, which also serve as our bank’s main office and branch, are located at 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220, San Diego, California 92130, and our telephone number is (858) 350-6200. This facility occupies a total of approximately 8,000 square feet under a lease that expires in June 2005. We believe our facilities are adequate for our current needs.

Legal Proceedings

      We may from time to time become a party to legal proceedings arising in the ordinary course of our business. We are not currently a party to any material legal proceedings.

67


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT

Directors and Executive Officers

      The following table lists our directors and executive officers at September 30, 2004:

             
Name Age Position



Gary Lewis Evans
    55     Director; President and Chief Executive Officer of BofI Holding and Bank of Internet USA
Patrick A. Dunn
    39     Vice President and Chief Credit Officer of Bank of Internet USA
Andrew J. Micheletti
    47     Chief Financial Officer of BofI Holding; Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Bank of Internet USA
Michael J. Berengolts
    34     Vice President and Chief Technology Officer of Bank of Internet USA
Jerry F. Englert
    63     Chairman
Theodore C. Allrich
    58     Vice Chairman
Robert Eprile(1)(3)
    51     Director
Paul Grinberg(2)
    43     Director
Thomas J. Pancheri(1)(2)
    44     Director
Connie M. Paulus(3)
    44     Secretary and Director
Gordon L. Witter(1)(2)(3)
    69     Director


(1)  Member of the compensation committee.
 
(2)  Member of the audit committee.
 
(3)  Member of the nominating committee.

      Gary Lewis Evans. Mr. Evans has served as President and Chief Executive Officer of Bank of Internet USA since its formation and as a member of the board of directors of BofI Holding since April 2004. Mr. Evans has also served as President and Chief Executive Officer of BofI Holding since October 2004. Mr. Evans has over 30 years of experience in the operation and management of commercial and savings banks. He served as President of La Jolla Bank from June 1988 to June 1996. In June 1996, he formed an Internet marketing and development consulting company. Mr. Evans also co-authored the 1997 McGraw-Hill publication, The Financial Institutions Internet Sourcebook , and was a key participant in the educational video, The ABC’s of Internet Banking , American Bankers Association. Mr. Evans has published the “Investment Management and Tactics” chapter for the 1989 book, Savings and Loan Investment Management published by Sheshunoff and Company. Mr. Evans currently is a member of the CFA Institute and The Financial Analysts Society of San Diego. Mr. Evans holds a Bachelor of Science degree in Business Administration, as well as a Masters of Science degree in Finance, from California State University at Northridge.

      Patrick A. Dunn. Mr. Dunn has served as Vice President and Chief Credit Officer of Bank of Internet USA since its formation and is responsible for the bank’s credit administration, including portfolio management, compliance and origination management. Mr. Dunn joined Bank of Internet USA to organize and direct the bank’s lending operations, as part of the bank’s original management team. Prior to Bank of Internet, Mr. Dunn was an officer of La Jolla Bank, serving as Vice President and Chief Loan Officer from March 1994 to March 2000, and as Regional Loan Officer and Branch Manager from September 1989 to March 1994. Mr. Dunn holds a Bachelor of Science degree in Finance from Colorado State University.

      Andrew J. Micheletti. Mr. Micheletti has served as Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of BofI Holding and Bank of Internet USA since April 2001. Prior to joining our company, from June 1997 to March 2001, Mr. Micheletti was Vice President — Finance for TeleSpectrum Worldwide Inc., an international provider of outsourced telephone and Internet services. In July 1999, TeleSpectrum acquired International

68


Table of Contents

Data Response Corporation, where Mr. Micheletti had served as Vice President and Corporate Controller since 1997. From September 1990 to May 1997, Mr. Micheletti was Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Linsco/ Private Ledger Corporation, an independent contractor securities broker-dealer with offices throughout the United States. Starting as an internal auditor in 1985, Mr. Micheletti held various positions at Imperial Savings Association, including Vice President — Financial Reporting and, upon its receivership, Controller. Mr. Micheletti was also an auditor with Deloitte & Touche LLP from 1980 to 1985. Mr. Micheletti is licensed as a CPA in the State of California and has held various NASD securities licenses. He holds a Bachelor of Science degree from San Diego State University.

      Michael J. Berengolts. Mr. Berengolts has served as Vice President and Chief Technology Officer of Bank of Internet USA since April 1999. Mr. Berengolts joined Bank of Internet USA as part of the original management team to organize and direct its technology development. Mr. Berengolts is responsible for all hardware and software systems for the bank, including the development of our CRM system. Prior to joining the bank, from June 1997 to June 1999, Mr. Berengolts was the information systems manager for Benefit Management Systems, a software provider to the managed health care industry. In addition to Mr. Berengolts’ information systems experience, he founded a manufacturing company producing hockey equipment, operated it from November 1994 to June 1997 and then sold it to an industry competitor. Mr. Berengolts holds a Bachelor of Science degree in Business Administration from the University of San Diego.

      Jerry F. Englert. Mr. Englert has served as Chairman of the board of directors of BofI Holding since July 1999 and as President and Chief Executive Officer of BofI Holding from July 1999 to October 2004. Since May 2003, Mr. Englert has been Director of Strategic Planning and Financial Relations for Hollis-Eden Pharmaceuticals, Inc. In addition, Mr. Englert is the owner of Harvard Fair, a specialty supply company, and has been its Chairman and CEO since 1982. He was a founder of Bank Del Mar and its Vice Chairman from 1989 to 1994. Mr. Englert served as the President, Chief Executive Officer and a Director of Winfield Industries from 1972 until it was sold to Maxxim Medical in 1991. From 1968 to 1972, he was Vice President of Marketing for IVAC Corporation, and, from 1963 to 1968, he was a Regional Sales Manager for Baxter Health Care, Inc. Mr. Englert holds a Bachelor of Arts degree from Morris Harvey College. In addition, Mr. Englert received an honorary Ph.D. from the University of Charleston.

      Theodore C. Allrich. Mr. Allrich has served as Vice Chairman of the board of directors of BofI Holding since 1999. Mr. Allrich is the founder of the financial educational website, The Online Investor (www.theonlineinvestor.com), based on his book of the same name, and served as an investment advisor with his own firm, Allrich Investment Management, from June 1991 to June 2003. Prior to starting his own firm, Mr. Allrich spent 20 years with various Wall Street brokerage firms, where he was involved with investment banking, fixed income sales and management, specializing in mortgage-backed securities, institutional equity sales and trading. His last position with a brokerage firm was in 1990 as the regional manager for high grade fixed income investments with Drexel Burnham Lambert in San Francisco. Mr. Allrich holds a Bachelor of Arts degree from the University of California at Davis and a Master of Business Administration degree in Finance from Stanford University.

      Robert Eprile. Mr. Eprile has served as a member of the board of directors of BofI Holding since July 1999. Mr. Eprile is a founder of US Encode Corporation and has served as President since June 2002. US Encode develops and markets a proprietary authentication technology to secure credit card and other financial transactions over the Internet. Mr. Eprile also serves as an outside director on the board of Compliance Coach, an e -learning company that provides online compliance training to financial services companies. From October 1996 to May 1999, Mr. Eprile served as Chairman of the Ashton Technology Group, a developer of electronic commerce and electronic transactional systems for the financial services industry. Mr. Eprile was a founder of Universal Trading Technologies Corporation (UTTC), which develops and markets electronic trading systems, and served as its President and CEO from March 1995 to May 1999. Mr. Eprile holds a Bachelor of Arts degree from Oberlin College in Ohio and a Master of Business Administration degree from Stanford University.

      Paul Grinberg. Mr. Grinberg has served as a member of the board of directors of BofI Holding since April 2004. Since October 2004, Mr. Grinberg has served as the Senior Vice President-Finance of Encore

69


Table of Contents

Capital Group, a purchaser of charged-off, unsecured consumer loans. Mr. Grinberg has also served as the President and CEO of Brio Consulting Group, Inc., a company he founded that provides financial consulting services, primarily to small and mid-size private equity and venture-backed companies, since May 2003. From May 2000 to April 2003, Mr. Grinberg was the Chief Financial Officer of Stellcom, Inc., a systems integration firm focused on providing mobile and wireless technology solutions to Fortune 1000 companies. From July 1999 to April 2000, Mr. Grinberg was the Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer for TeleSpectrum Worldwide, Inc., a leading provider of direct marketing and multichannel CRM solutions to Fortune 1000 companies in the United States and Canada. In July 1999, TeleSpectrum acquired International Data Response Corporation, where Mr. Grinberg served as Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer since February 1997. From September 1983 to January 1997, Mr. Grinberg held several positions at Deloitte & Touche LLP, the most recent of which was as a partner in the firm’s Merger & Acquisition Services Group. Mr. Grinberg is licensed as a CPA in the state of New York. Mr. Grinberg holds a Bachelor of Science degree in accounting from Yeshiva University and a Masters of Business Administration degree in Finance from Columbia University’s Graduate School of Business.

      Thomas J. Pancheri. Mr. Pancheri has served as a member of the board of directors of BofI Holding since July 1999. Since July 1981, Mr. Pancheri has served as the President of San Diego Pension Consultants, Inc., a company specializing in the design and administration of retirement plans. San Diego Pension Consultants is the main division of Pen/Flex, Inc., which services qualified plans, primarily in the San Diego area. Mr. Pancheri is active in the National Institute of Pension Administrators and was the Charter President of the San Diego chapter. In addition, he has been a member of the Western Pension & Benefits Conference since 1980.

      Connie M. Paulus. Ms. Paulus has served as Secretary and a member of the board of directors of BofI Holding since July 1999 and as Secretary of Bank of Internet USA since July 2000. Ms. Paulus is a scientist specializing in transgenic technology and has more than 20 years of laboratory experience, including appointments at Washington State University, UC Irvine Medical Center, The Salk Institute for Biological Sciences and the University of California at San Diego. From January 1992 to December 1999, Ms. Paulus served as a research associate at the University of California at San Diego, managing the transgenic animal facility. She also participates in a family owned business specializing in residential and commercial land development and real estate lending. Ms. Paulus holds a Bachelor of Science degree from Western Washington University and a Masters of Science degree from Washington State University.

      Gordon L. Witter. Mr. Witter has served as a member of the board of directors of BofI Holding since July 1999. Following his retirement as a Chief Pilot for American Airlines, Captain Witter formed Witter Associates, a flight operations consulting firm, where he has been serving as President since April 1995. He is a co-founder of Air Carrier Associates, Inc., a firm specializing in risk management issues for airline and general aviation clients and has been its Managing Partner from July 1997 to the present. Mr. Witter serves as Treasurer of the Sharp Healthcare Foundation and as Chairman of the San Diego Aerospace Museum and is on the Greater San Diego Chamber of Commerce Military Affairs Council.

Board Composition

      Our board of directors is authorized to have up to nine members and is currently comprised of eight members. In accordance with the terms of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws, following the offering, our board of directors will be divided into three classes, class I, class II and class III, with each class serving staggered three-year terms. The members of the classes are divided as follows:

  •  the class I directors will be Messrs. Eprile and Allrich, and their terms will expire at the 2005 annual meeting of stockholders;
 
  •  the class II directors will be Messrs. Englert, Grinberg and Evans, and their terms will expire at the 2006 annual meeting of stockholders; and

70


Table of Contents

  •  the class III directors will be Messrs. Witter and Pancheri and Ms. Paulus, and their terms will expire at the 2007 annual meeting of stockholders.

      The authorized number of directors may be changed only by resolution of the board of directors. Any additional directorships resulting from an increase in the number of directors will be distributed between the three classes so that, as nearly as possible, each class will consist of one third of the directors. This classification of our board of directors may have the effect of delaying or preventing changes in our control or management. Our directors will hold office until their successors have been elected and qualified or until their earlier death, resignation, disqualification or removal for cause by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of our outstanding stock entitled to vote on election of directors.

Board Committees

      Our board of directors has an audit committee, a compensation committee and a nominating committee.

      Audit Committee. The audit committee consists of Messrs. Witter, Grinberg and Pancheri. Our board of directors has determined that Mr. Grinberg, who serves as chairperson of our audit committee, is an audit committee financial expert as defined under the applicable rules of the SEC and has the requisite financial sophistication as defined under the applicable Nasdaq stock market rules. We believe the composition of our audit committee meets the criteria for independence under, and the functioning of our audit committee complies with applicable requirements of, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the current rules of the Nasdaq Stock Market and SEC rules and regulations. We intend to comply with future audit committee requirements as they become applicable to us.

      Our audit committee oversees our accounting and financial reporting processes, internal systems of control, independent auditor relationships and the audits of our financial statements. This committee’s responsibilities include, among other things:

  •  selecting and hiring our independent auditors;
 
  •  evaluating the qualifications, independence and performance of our independent auditors;
 
  •  approving the audit and nonaudit services to be performed by our independent auditors;
 
  •  reviewing the design, implementation, adequacy and effectiveness of our internal controls and our critical accounting policies;
 
  •  overseeing and monitoring the integrity of our financial statements and our compliance with legal and regulatory requirements as they relate to financial statements or accounting matters; and
 
  •  reviewing with management and our auditors any earnings announcements and other public announcements regarding our results of operations.

      Our independent auditors and internal financial personnel regularly meet privately with our audit committee and have unrestricted access to this committee.

      Compensation Committee. The compensation committee consists of Messrs. Pancheri, Witter and Eprile. We believe the composition of our compensation committee meets the criteria for independence under, and the functioning of our compensation committee complies with applicable requirements of, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the current rules of the Nasdaq Stock Market and SEC rules and regulations. We intend to comply with future compensation committee requirements as they become applicable to us.

      Our compensation committee assists our board of directors in determining the development plans and compensation of our senior management, directors and employees and recommends these plans to our board of directors. This committee’s responsibilities include, among other things:

  •  reviewing the employee-wide compensation standards;
 
  •  reviewing and recommending compensation and benefit plans for our executive officers and directors;
 
  •  setting performance goals for our officers and reviewing their performance against these goals;

71


Table of Contents

  •  management succession planning; and
 
  •  administering our equity incentive plans.

      Nominating Committee. The nominating committee consists of Messrs. Eprile and Witter and Ms. Paulus. We believe the composition of our nominating committee meets the criteria for independence under, and the functioning of our nominating committee complies with applicable requirements of, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the current rules of the Nasdaq Stock Market and SEC rules and regulations. We intend to comply with future nominating committee requirements as they become applicable to us.

      Our nominating committee’s purpose is to assist our board of directors by identifying individuals qualified to become directors. This committee’s responsibilities include, among other things:

  •  evaluating the composition, size and governance of our board of directors and make recommendations regarding future planning and the appointment of directors;
 
  •  establishing a policy for considering stockholder nominees for election to our board of directors; and
 
  •  evaluating and recommending candidates for election to our board of directors.

      Bank of Internet USA Committees. In addition, Bank of Internet USA has an asset/liability committee, loan committee, investment committee, internal asset review committee and compliance committee.

      Our asset/liability committee, or ALCO, manages the sensitivity of net income to changing interest rates, consistent with the policies reviewed and approved annually by our board of directors. ALCO meets regularly to consider investment and financing alternatives with particular emphasis on duration and interest rate risk. Once a quarter, ALCO members report to our board of directors the status of our bank’s interest rate risk profile. The members of ALCO are board members Messrs. Allrich and Eprile, our President and Chief Executive Officer Gary Lewis Evans and our Chief Financial Officer Andrew J. Micheletti.

      Our loan committee oversees our underwriting policies and loan portfolio, and is primarily responsible for preparing and updating our loan underwriting policies and procedures. Members of our loan committee also review and approve specific credit requests in excess of specified dollar amounts. The members of our loan committee are Messrs. Evans, Eprile and Pancheri, who serves as the chairman.

      Our investment committee manages our investment portfolio consistent with the investment policy established by our board of directors. Our investment policy is designed primarily to provide and maintain liquidity and to generate a favorable return on investment without incurring undue interest rate risk, credit risk and investment portfolio asset concentrations. The members of our investment committee are Messrs. Evans, Allrich and Eprile,

      Our internal asset review committee monitors the credit quality of our loan portfolio on an ongoing basis and also monitors nonperforming assets and reviews our calculation of the allowance for loan and lease losses quarterly. The members of our internal asset review committee are Ms. Paulus, Mr. Witter and Chief Financial Officer Andrew J. Micheletti.

      Our compliance committee oversees all aspects of our bank’s compliance with applicable regulations, including the Community Reinvestment Act. The members of our compliance committee are Robert Eprile, who serves as chairman, and co-compliance officers Patrick Dunn and Barabara Fronek.

Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

      No member of our compensation committee serves as a member of the board of directors or compensation committee of any entity that has one or more executive officers serving as a member of our board of directors or compensation committee. There are no family relationships among any of our directors or executive officers.

72


Table of Contents

Director Compensation

      Our directors who are also employees of our company receive no additional compensation for their services as directors. Our nonemployee directors receive $2,000 per month for serving on our board and are reimbursed for travel expenses and other out-of-pocket costs of attending board and committee meetings. Our nonemployee and employee directors are eligible to receive options and shares of common stock directly under our 2004 stock incentive plan.

EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

Summary Compensation Table

      The following table sets forth information concerning the compensation we paid during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 to our Chief Executive Officer and each of our other most highly compensated executive officers who earned more than $100,000 during that fiscal year. We refer to these individuals in this prospectus as the “named executive officers.” In accordance with the rules of the SEC, the compensation described in this table does not include perquisites and other personal benefits received by the executive officers named in the table below that do not exceed the lesser of $50,000 or 10% of the total salary and bonus reported for these executed officers.

                                   
Long Term Compensation
Annual Compensation

Shares All Other
Name and Principal Position Salary Bonus Underlying Options Compensation





Gary Lewis Evans
  $ 170,700     $ 2,700       22,000        
  President and Chief Executive Officer of BofI Holding and Bank of Internet USA(1)                                
Jerry F. Englert
  $ 87,500             5,810     $ 9,750 (3)
  Former President and Chief Executive Officer of BofI Holding(2)                                
Patrick A. Dunn
  $ 151,885     $ 2,700       15,000        
  Vice President and Chief Credit Officer of Bank of Internet USA                                
Andrew J. Micheletti
  $ 132,908     $ 17,700       20,000        
  Chief Financial Officer of BofI Holding; Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Bank of Internet USA                                
Michael J. Berengolts
  $ 114,908     $ 2,700       6,000        
  Vice President and Chief Technology Officer of Bank of Internet USA                                


  (1)  Mr. Evans was appointed as President and Chief Executive Officer of BofI Holding in October 2004.
 
  (2)  Mr. Englert resigned as President and Chief Executive Officer of BofI Holding in October 2004.
 
  (3)  Represents fees earned for serving as a director of BofI Holding.

73


Table of Contents

Option Grants in Fiscal Year Ended June 30, 2004

      The following table sets forth information with respect to stock options granted to each of our named executive officers during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004. The percentage of total options set forth below is based on options to purchase an aggregate of 93,001 shares of common stock granted to employees during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004. All of these options were granted under our amended and restated 1999 stock option plan at an exercise price per share equal to the fair market value of our common stock at the time of grant, as determined by our board of directors. Potential realizable values are net of exercise price but before taxes associated with exercise. Amounts represent hypothetical gains that could be achieved for the options if exercised at the end of the option term. The assumed 5% and 10% rates of stock price appreciation are provided in accordance with the rules of the SEC and do not represent our estimate or projection of the future common stock price. Actual gains, if any, on stock option exercises will be dependent on the future performance of our common stock.

                                                 
Individual Grants Potential Realizable

Value at Assumed Annual
% of Rates of Stock
Number of Total Options Appreciation for
Shares Granted to Exercise Option Term
Underlying Employees in Price Per Expiration
Name Options Granted Fiscal Year Share Date 5% 10%







Gary Lewis Evans
    22,000       23.7 %   $ 10.00       6/30/14     $ 138,357     $ 350,623  
Jerry F. Englert
    5,810       6.2 %   $ 10.00       6/30/14     $ 36,539     $ 92,596  
Patrick A. Dunn
    15,000       16.1 %   $ 10.00       6/30/14     $ 94,334     $ 239,061  
Andrew J. Micheletti
    20,000       21.5 %   $ 10.00       6/30/14     $ 125,779     $ 318,748  
Michael J. Berengolts
    6,000       6.5 %   $ 10.00       6/30/14     $ 37,734     $ 95,625  

Aggregate Option Exercises in Last Fiscal Year and Fiscal Year-End Option Values

      The following table sets forth information concerning exercisable and unexercisable stock options held by each of the named executive officers at June 30, 2004. The value realized upon exercise is based on the estimated fair market value of our common stock at the time of exercise less the per share exercise price, multiplied by number of shares acquired upon exercise. The value of unexercised in-the-money options is based on the assumed initial public offering price of $           per share less the per share exercise price, multiplied by the number of number of shares underlying the options. All options were granted under our amended and restated 1999 stock option plan.

                                                 
Number of Shares Value of Unexercised
Underlying Unexercised In-the-Money
Options at June 30, 2004 Options at June 30, 2004
Shares Acquired

Name on Exercise Value Realized Exercisable Unexercisable Exercisable Unexercisable







Gary Lewis Evans
                85,116       48,893     $       $    
Jerry F. Englert
                93,361       7,645     $       $    
Patrick A. Dunn
                48,742       31,258     $       $    
Andrew J. Micheletti
                22,667       36,083     $       $    
Michael J. Berengolts
                28,342       15,658     $       $    

Employment Agreements

      In July 2003, Bank of Internet USA entered into employment agreements with each of our named executive officers, Messrs. Evans, Dunn, Micheletti and Berengolts. Under these agreements, if we terminate a protected officer’s employment for any reason other than for cause, then we must (a) pay that officer normal compensation in effect through the date of termination; (b) pay that officer a severance payment equal to twelve times his then-current base monthly salary, payable at the option of our board of directors either in one lump sum or in twelve equal installments; and (c) continue group insurance benefits for that officer for one

74


Table of Contents

year from termination or until that officer commences work with a new employer providing group medical insurance benefits to that officer. In addition, if a protected officer’s employment is terminated for any reason other than for cause, or that officer’s employment is terminated due to death or disability, then all stock options currently held by such officer will fully vest as of the termination date. Each agreement automatically renews in one year terms unless terminated by either Bank of Internet USA or the officer.

Employee Benefit Plans

 
1999 Stock Option Plan

      Our amended and restated 1999 stock option plan was approved by our board of directors and our stockholders in 2003. At September 30, 2004, a total of 749,406 shares of common stock were reserved for issuance under our 1999 stock option plan. For a period of eight years commencing with the annual stockholders meeting in 2001, the aggregate number of shares available for issuance under our 1999 stock option plan on any date will be automatically increased to that number of shares equal to the lesser of (a) 15% of the number of issued and outstanding shares of our common stock and (b) a lesser number of shares as determined by our board of directors. However, in no event shall the number of shares issuable under our 1999 stock option plan exceed 3,000,000 shares. At September 30, 2004, options to purchase 722,517 shares of common stock remain outstanding and 3,281 shares of common stock are available for grant under this plan.

      After the closing of the offering, all shares of common stock subject to options granted under our 1999 stock option plan that expire without having been exercised or are cancelled will become available for grant under the 2004 stock incentive plan. Awards under our 1999 stock option plan consist of incentive stock options, which are stock options that are intended to qualify under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code, and nonqualified stock options, which are stock options that do not qualify under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code.

      Our 1999 stock option plan provides for the grant of:

  •  incentive stock options to our employees, including officers and employee directors; and
 
  •  nonqualified stock options to our employees, employee and nonemployee directors and consultants.

      The compensation committee of our board of directors administers our 1999 stock option plan, including selecting the persons eligible to receive options under our 1999 stock option plan, determining the number of shares to be subject to each option grant, determining the exercise price of each option grant and determining the vesting and exercise periods of each option grant. The exercise price of all incentive stock options and nonqualified stock options granted under our 1999 stock option plan must be at least equal to the fair value of our common stock on the date of grant. With respect to any participant who owns stock possessing more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all our classes of stock or the stock of any parent or subsidiary of ours, the exercise price of any incentive stock option or nonqualified stock option granted must equal at least 110% of the fair value on the grant date. The maximum term of an incentive stock option or nonqualified stock option granted to any participant must not exceed ten years. The maximum term of an incentive stock option granted to any participant who owns stock possessing more than 10% of the voting power of all our classes of stock or the stock of any parent or subsidiary of ours must not exceed five years. The aggregate fair market value of stock for which incentive stock options are exercisable for the first time by an optionee in any calendar year may not exceed $100,000. If the value of the stock exceeds $100,000, the options for the amount in excess of $100,000 will be treated as nonqualified stock options.

      During an optionee’s lifetime, only the optionee can exercise his or her options. The optionee cannot transfer its option other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. If an optionee’s status as an employee, director or consultant terminates for any reason other than death or disability or for cause, the optionee may exercise his or her vested options within the three-month period following the termination, or for such other period of time (not less than 30 days) specified in the option agreement. In the event an optionee dies while an employee, director or consultant of our company, the options vested as of the date of death may be exercised within the twelve-month period following the date of the optionee’s death, or for such other period (not less than six months) specified in the option agreement. In the event an optionee becomes

75


Table of Contents

disabled, the options vested as of the date of disability may be exercised within the six-month period following date of the optionee’s disability. In the event an optionee’s employment is terminated for cause, all options held by such optionee shall terminate without the opportunity for exercise. In no event may an optionee exercise an option after the expiration date of the term of an option grant set forth in the option agreement.

      The type and maximum number of shares available under our 1999 stock option plan, as well as the number and type of shares subject to, and per share exercise price of, outstanding option grants under our 1999 stock option plan will be appropriately adjusted in the event of a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend, recapitalization, combination or reclassification involving our company.

      In the event of a change in control of our company, all options granted under our 1999 stock option plan will accelerate and become fully vested and exercisable. Under our 1999 stock option plan, a change in control occurs upon:

  •  any person becoming the beneficial owner of securities representing a majority of the voting power of our then outstanding securities; or
 
  •  a sale of all or substantially all of our assets, or a merger or consolidation involving our company in which the holders of our securities immediately prior to such event hold in the aggregate less than a majority of the securities of the surviving or resulting entity immediately after such event.

      Pursuant to requirements of the OTS, our 1999 stock option plan provides that, if our bank’s capital falls below minimum regulatory requirements, as determined by the OTS, we may require all optionees to exercise or forfeit their options. In such event, any options that are not exercised as so required by the OTS will terminate and be forfeited.

      Our 1999 stock option plan will terminate automatically in 2009 unless terminated earlier by our board of directors. Our board of directors has the authority to amend or terminate our 1999 stock option plan, subject to stockholder approval of some amendments. However, no action may be taken that will adversely affect any option previously granted under our 1999 stock option plan, without the optionee’s consent.

      We do not intend to make further grants under our 1999 stock option plan after the closing of the offering.

 
2004 Stock Incentive Plan

      Our board of directors approved our 2004 stock incentive plan in August 2004, and our stockholders approved our 2004 stock incentive plan in October 2004. The maximum number of shares of common stock available for issuance under our 2004 stock incentive plan, plus the number of shares available for issuance under outstanding stock options awarded under our 1999 stock option plan, will be equal to 14.8% of our outstanding common stock at any time. However, the number of shares available for issuance as restricted stock grants may not exceed 5.0% of our outstanding common stock at any time (subject to the overall maximum of 14.8% of our outstanding shares of common stock). Each share of restricted stock that is issued under our 2004 stock incentive plan and vests will be deemed to be the issuance of three shares for purposes of calculating the overall maximum number of shares of common stock available for issuance under our 2004 stock incentive plan but not for purposes of calculating the above 5.0% limit applicable to the issuance of restricted stock. No awards have yet been granted under our 2004 stock incentive plan. We anticipate that all future option grants will be made solely under our 2004 stock incentive plan.

      Our 2004 stock incentive plan provides for the grant of stock options, restricted stock, restricted stock units, stock appreciation rights and dividend equivalent rights, collectively referred to as “awards.” Awards may be granted to employees, directors and consultants.

      The compensation committee of our board of directors, referred to as the “plan administrator,” will administer our 2004 stock incentive plan, including selecting the grantees, determining the number of shares to be subject to each award, determining the exercise or purchase price of each award, determining the term of each award, and determining the vesting and exercise periods of each award.

76


Table of Contents

      Awards shall be transferable by will or by the laws of descent or distribution and to the extent provided in the award agreement. Our 2004 stock incentive plan permits the designation of beneficiaries by holders of awards.

      In the event a participant in our 2004 stock incentive plan terminates employment or is terminated by us without cause, any options which have become exercisable prior to the time of termination will remain exercisable for three months from the date of termination (unless a shorter or longer period of time is determined by the plan administrator). In the event a participant in our 2004 stock incentive plan is terminated by us for cause, any options which have become exercisable prior to the time of termination will immediately terminate. If termination was caused by death or disability, any options which have become exercisable prior to the time of termination, will remain exercisable for twelve months from the date of termination (unless a shorter or longer period of time is determined by the plan administrator). In no event may a participant exercise the option after the expiration date of the option.

      The plan administrator, which currently is our compensation committee, shall have discretion to provide for acceleration of vesting in connection with a corporate transaction. Under our 2004 stock incentive plan, a corporate transaction is generally defined as:

  •  acquisition of more than 40% of our stock through a reverse merger or series of related transactions culminating in a reverse merger including, but not limited to, a tender offer followed by a reverse merger (but excluding any such transaction that the plan administrator determines shall not be a corporate transaction);
 
  •  acquisition of more than 50% of our stock in a single or series of related transactions by any person or related group of persons (but excluding any such transaction that the plan administrator determines shall not be a corporate transaction);
 
  •  a sale, transfer or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of our company;
 
  •  a merger or consolidation in which our company is not the surviving entity; or
 
  •  a complete liquidation or dissolution.

      Unless terminated sooner, our 2004 stock incentive plan will automatically terminate ten years after stockholder approval of our 2004 stock incentive plan. Our board of directors will have authority to amend or terminate our 2004 stock incentive plan. No suspension or termination of our 2004 stock incentive plan shall adversely affect any rights under awards already granted to a participant unless agreed to by the affected participant. To the extent necessary to comply with applicable provisions of federal securities laws, state corporate and securities laws, the Internal Revenue Code, the rules of any applicable stock exchange or national market system, and the rules of any non-U.S. jurisdiction applicable to awards granted to residents therein, we shall obtain stockholder approval of any such amendment to our 2004 stock incentive plan in such a manner and to such a degree as required.

 
2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan

      Our board of directors approved our 2004 employee stock purchase plan in August 2004, and our stockholders approved our 2004 stock incentive plan in October 2004. Our 2004 employee stock purchase plan is intended to qualify as an “Employee Stock Purchase Plan” under Section 423 of the Internal Revenue Code in order to provide our employees with an opportunity to purchase common stock through payroll deductions. An aggregate of 500,000 shares of common stock has been reserved for issuance and will be available for purchase under our 2004 employee stock purchase plan, subject to adjustment for a stock split, or any future stock dividend or other similar change in our common stock or our capital structure.

      The compensation committee of our board of directors, referred to as the “plan administrator,” will administer our 2004 employee stock purchase plan. All of our employees who are regularly employed for more than five months in any calendar year and work more than 20 hours per week will be eligible to participate in our 2004 employee stock purchase plan, subject to a five day waiting period after hiring. Nonemployee directors, consultants and employees subject to the rules or laws of a non-U.S. jurisdiction that prohibit or

77


Table of Contents

make impractical their participation in an employee stock purchase plan will not be eligible to participate in our 2004 employee stock purchase plan.

      Our 2004 employee stock purchase plan will designate offer periods, purchase periods and exercise dates. Offer periods will generally be overlapping periods of 24 months. The first offer period under our 2004 employee stock purchase plan will begin on the date determined by our board of directors. Purchase periods will generally be six month periods. Exercise dates are the last day of each purchase period. In the event of a corporate transaction, the plan administrator may elect to either (a) shorten the offer periods then in progress and set a new exercise date for the purchase of shares or (b) pay each participant a cash amount in settlement of the participant’s purchase rights under the applicable offering periods.

      Under our 2004 employee stock purchase plan, a corporate transaction is generally defined as:

  •  acquisition of more than 40% of our stock through a reverse merger or series of related transactions culminating in a reverse merger including, but not limited to, a tender offer followed by a reverse merger (but excluding any such transaction that the plan administrator determines shall not be a corporate transaction);
 
  •  acquisition of more than 50% of our stock in a single or series of related transactions by any person or related group of persons (but excluding any such transaction that the plan administrator determines shall not be a corporate transaction);
 
  •  a sale, transfer or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of our company;
 
  •  a merger or consolidation in which our company is not the surviving entity; or
 
  •  a complete liquidation or dissolution.

      On the first day of each offer period, a participating employee will be granted a purchase right. A purchase right is a form of option to be automatically exercised on the forthcoming exercise dates within the offer period during which authorized deductions are to be made from the pay of participants and credited to their accounts under our 2004 employee stock purchase plan. When the purchase right is exercised, the participant’s withheld salary is used to purchase shares of common stock. The price per share at which shares of common stock are to be purchased under our 2004 employee stock purchase plan during any purchase period will be expressed as a percentage not less than the lower of (a) 85% of the fair market value of the common stock on the date of grant of the option (which is the commencement of the offer period or (b) 85% of the fair market value of the common stock on the date the purchase right is exercised, with such percentage (and any discount) to be determined by our board of directors.

      The participant’s purchase right is exercised in this manner on each exercise date arising in the offer period unless, on the first day of any purchase period, the fair market value of the common stock is lower than the fair market value of the common stock on the first day of the offer period. If so, the participant’s participation in the original offer period is terminated, and the participant is automatically enrolled in the new offer period effective the same date.

      Payroll deductions may range from 1% to 15% in whole percentage increments of a participant’s regular base pay. The plan administrator will determine the maximum number of shares of common stock that any employee may purchase under our 2004 employee stock purchase plan during a purchase period. The Internal Revenue Code imposes additional limitations on the amount of common stock that may be purchased during any calendar year.

      Unless terminated sooner, our 2004 employee stock purchase plan will terminate automatically ten years after stockholder approval of our 2004 employee stock purchase plan. The plan administrator will have authority to amend or terminate our 2004 employee stock purchase plan. The plan administrator may terminate any offer period on any exercise date or establish a new exercise date with respect to any offer period then in progress if the plan administrator determines that the termination of the offer period is in the best interests of our company and its stockholders. To the extent necessary to comply with applicable provisions of federal securities laws, state corporate and securities laws, the Internal Revenue Code, the rules of any

78


Table of Contents

applicable stock exchange or national market system, and the rules of any non-U.S. jurisdiction applicable to awards granted to residents therein, we shall obtain stockholder approval of any such amendment to the 2004 employee stock purchase plan in such a manner and to such a degree as required.
 
Retirement and Death Benefits

      During the quarter ended December 31, 2003, we purchased life insurance policies on the lives of our key employees. These policies, which are assets of our company, have been paid for in their entirety and are intended to offset obligations entered into by us in connection with the retirement, involuntary termination or disability of these executives.

 
Deferred Compensation Plan

      Effective January 1, 2003, we adopted the Bank of Internet USA Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan to provide designated key executive and management employees with an opportunity to defer additional compensation beyond the limitations imposed on our 401(k) plan by the Internal Revenue Code. Our deferred compensation plan allows eligible employees to elect to defer up to 100% of their compensation, including commissions and bonuses. Although the plan provides that we may make discretionary contributions to a participant’s account, no such discretionary contributions have been made to date. Participant deferrals are fully vested at all times, and discretionary contributions, if any, will be subject to a vesting schedule specified by us. The liabilities associated with the plan are unfunded and unsecured. All five of our currently eligible employees currently participate in the plan.

 
401(k) Plan

      We maintain a defined contribution plan intended to qualify as an eligible “cash or deferred arrangement” under Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code. Under our 401(k) plan, each participant (a) may contribute up to 15% of his or her pretax compensation, up to a statutory limit, and (b) is fully vested in his or her deferred salary contributions. Our 401(k) plan also permits us to make discretionary and matching contributions, subject to limitations specified by our board of directors. Participants are entitled to direct the trustee to invest their accounts in authorized investment alternatives selected by us. To date, we have not made any discretionary or matching contributions to our 401(k) plan on behalf of participants.

Limitations on Liability and Indemnification Matters

      Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws provide that we will indemnify all of our directors and officers to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law. Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws also authorize us to indemnify our employees and other agents, at our option, to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law. We have entered into agreements to indemnify our directors and officers, in addition to indemnification provided for in our charter documents. These agreements, among other things, provide for the indemnification of our directors and officers for expenses, including attorneys’ fees, judgments, fines and settlement amounts incurred by any person in any action or proceeding, including any action by or in the right of our company, arising out of that person’s services as a director or officer of our company or any other company or enterprise to which that person provides services at our request to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law. We believe that these provisions and agreements will assist us in attracting and retaining qualified persons to serve as directors and officers.

      Delaware law permits a corporation to provide in its certificate of incorporation that a director of the corporation shall not be personally liable to the corporation or its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary duty as a director, except for liability for any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to the corporation or its stockholders, for acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, for unlawful payments of dividends or unlawful stock repurchases or redemptions as provided in Section 174 of the Delaware General Corporation Law or for any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit. Our certificate of incorporation provides for the elimination of personal liability of a director for breach of fiduciary duty to the extent permitted by Delaware law.

79


Table of Contents

      The limitation of liability and indemnification provisions in our certificate of incorporation and bylaws may discourage stockholders from bringing a lawsuit against our directors for breach of their fiduciary duty. They may also reduce the likelihood of derivative litigation against our directors and officers, even though an action, if successful, might benefit us and our stockholders. Furthermore, a stockholder’s investment may be adversely affected to the extent that we pay the costs of settlement and damage awards against directors and officers as required by these indemnification provisions. At present, there is no pending litigation or proceeding involving any of our directors, officers or employees regarding which indemnification is sought, and we are not aware of any threatened litigation that may result in claims for indemnification.

      Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of our company in accordance with the provisions contained in our charter documents, Delaware law or otherwise, we have been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission this indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. If a claim for indemnification against these liabilities, other than the payment by us of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of our company in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding, is asserted by a director, officer or controlling person, we will, unless in the opinion of our counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by us is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act, and we will follow the court’s determination.

      We maintain insurance on behalf of our officers and directors, insuring them against liabilities that they may incur in such capacities or arising out of this status.

80


Table of Contents

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS

Common Stock and Warrant Issuances

      In September and October 2001, we issued and sold an aggregate of 587,200 shares of our common stock at $10.00 per share, including 27,500 shares to Jerry and Connie Englert, 100,000 shares to The Chipman First Family Limited Partnership, 6,500 shares to Robert Eprile, 25,000 shares to J. Gary Burke and 15,000 shares to Theodore Allrich. Messrs. Englert, Allrich and Eprile are members of our board of directors. Each of The Chipman First Family Limited Partnership and J. Gary Burke owns more than five percent of our outstanding common stock.

      In June and July 2002, we issued and sold an aggregate of 179,850 shares of our common stock, together with warrants to purchase up to an additional 59,950 shares of our common stock. Three shares of our common stock and a warrant to purchase one share of our common stock were sold as a single unit to investors at $36.00 per unit. Each warrant sold in the offering has an exercise price of $14.00 per share, is currently exercisable and terminates on July 31, 2005, subject to the right of our board of directors, in its sole discretion, to extend the purchase period of these warrants for up to two additional years. In the offering, The Chipman First Family Limited Partnership purchased 27,700 units, or 83,100 shares of our common stock and a warrant to purchase up to 27,700 shares of our common stock.

Preferred Stock Issuance

      Between October 2003 and June 2004, we issued and sold an aggregate of 675 shares of our preferred stock designated “Series A — 6% Cumulative Nonparticipating Perpetual Preferred Stock, Convertible through January 1, 2009” at $10,000 per share to 22 investors, including 100 shares to Jerry and Connie Englert and 200 shares to The Chipman First Family Limited Partnership.

Indebtedness of Management

      We in the past have made, and from time to time in the future may make, loans to our executive officers and directors in compliance with applicable laws. At September 30, 2004, we had outstanding to one of our directors one residential loan with a balance of approximately $950,000. The loan was, and any loan we may make to our directors or executives officers in the future will be, made in the ordinary course of business and on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with other persons. In addition, this loan did not, and any loan we may make to our directors or executives officers in the future will not, involve more than the normal risk of collectability or present other unfavorable features.

Loans to Us

      Since inception, we borrowed a total of $2.8 million from directors, officers and other organizers on an unsecured basis to provide capital to our bank, including $1.0 million from Chipman First Family Limited Partnership, $250,000 from J. Gary Burke and $275,000 from Jerry F. Englert. We believe these borrowings were made on terms prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with unaffiliated third parties. All of the loans were repaid in full during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002.

Consulting Arrangements

      Jerry F. Englert, our Chairman, and Theodore C. Allrich, our Vice Chairman, each served as a consultant to our company from February 2003 to January 2004 in connection with our capital raising efforts during that period. We paid each of them $12,500 per month, or an aggregate of $150,000 to each, for their consulting services to us.

81


Table of Contents

Indemnification Agreements

      We have entered into indemnification agreements with our each of our executive officers and directors. These indemnification agreements require us to indemnify these individuals to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law.

      We believe that all transactions set forth above were on terms no less favorable to us than could have been obtained from unaffiliated third parties. We intend that all future transactions between us and our officers, directors, principal stockholders and their affiliates will be approved by a majority the directors on our board, including a majority of the independent directors on our board of directors, and will be on terms no less favorable to us than could be obtained from unaffiliated third parties.

82


Table of Contents

PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS

      The table below provides information regarding the beneficial ownership of our common stock at November 30, 2004 by:

  •  each person known by us to own beneficially more than 5% of our common stock;
 
  •  each of our directors and named executive officers; and
 
  •  all of our directors and executive officers as a group.

      The information regarding beneficial ownership of our common stock has been presented according to the rules of the SEC and is not necessarily indicative of beneficial ownership for any other purpose. Under the rules of the SEC, beneficial ownership includes shares over which the indicated beneficial owner exercises voting or investment power. Shares of common stock subject to options or warrants that are currently exercisable or will become exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004 are deemed outstanding for the purpose of computing the percentage ownership of that person or group holding the options or warrants but are not treated as outstanding for the purpose of computing the percentage ownership of any other person or group. The percentages for beneficial ownership after the offering assume that the underwriters do not exercise their over-allotment option. Unless otherwise indicated in the footnotes below, we believe that the persons and entities named in the table have sole voting and investment power with respect to all shares beneficially owned, subject to applicable community property laws. Unless otherwise indicated, the following beneficial owners can be reached at our principal offices. Percentage ownership in the table is based on 4,559,024 shares of common stock outstanding at November 30, 2004, together with applicable options, warrants and shares of Series A preferred stock for each stockholder.

                         
Percentage of Shares
Beneficially Owned
Number of Shares
Name and Address of Beneficial Owner Beneficially Owned Before Offering After Offering




The Chipman First Family Limited Partnership(1)
    751,200       15.44 %        
Jerry F. Englert(2)
    620,396       12.79 %        
Robert Eprile(3)
    426,510       9.07 %        
J. Gary Burke(4)
    392,500       8.44 %        
Gary Lewis Evans(5)
    151,684       3.26 %        
Patrick A. Dunn(6)
    56,325       1.22 %        
Andrew J. Micheletti(7)
    29,688       *          
Michael Berengolts(8)
    37,512       *          
Theodore C. Allrich(9)
    63,583       1.38 %        
Paul Grinberg
          *          
Thomas J. Pancheri(10)
    141,078       3.05 %        
Connie M. Paulus(11)
    183,778       3.94 %        
Gordon L. Witter(12)
    96,349       2.09 %        
All directors and executive officers as a group (11 persons)(13)
    1,806,903       33.00 %        


  * Less than one percent.

  (1)  The address for The Chipman First Family Limited Partnership is P.O. Box 7216, Incline Village, Nevada 89452. Includes warrants to purchase 115,200 shares of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004. Also includes 190,400 shares of common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our Series A preferred stock, based on the current effective conversion price of $10.50 per share.

83


Table of Contents

  (2)  Includes options and warrants to purchase 95,196 and 100,625 shares, respectively, of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004. Also includes 95,200 shares of common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our Series A preferred stock, based on the current effective conversion price of $10.50 per share.
 
  (3)  Includes options and warrants to purchase 52,510 and 91,875 shares, respectively, of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004.
 
  (4)  The address for J. Gary Burke is P.O. Box 248, Hubbard, Ohio 44425. Includes warrants to purchase 91,875 shares of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004.
 
  (5)  Includes options to purchase 98,184 shares of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004.
 
  (6)  Includes options to purchase 56,325 shares of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004.
 
  (7)  Includes options to purchase 27,188 shares of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004.
 
  (8)  Includes options and warrants to purchase 32,775 and 450 shares, respectively, of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004.
 
  (9)  Includes options and warrants to purchase 32,658 and 3,981 shares, respectively, of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004.

(10)  Includes options and warrants to purchase 38,078 and 24,500 shares, respectively, of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004.
 
(11)  Includes options and warrants to purchase 38,078 and 23,275 shares, respectively, of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004. Also includes 47,600 shares of common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our Series A preferred stock, based on the current effective conversion price of $10.50 per share.
 
(12)  Includes options and warrants to purchase 38,078 and 10,938 shares, respectively, of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004. Also includes 9,520 shares of common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our Series A preferred stock, based on the current effective conversion price of $10.50 per share.
 
(13)  Includes options and warrants to purchase 509,070 and 255,644 shares, respectively, of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004. Also includes 152,320 shares of common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our Series A preferred stock, based on the current effective conversion price of $10.50 per share.

84


Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK

General

      Our authorized capital stock consists of 25,000,000 shares of common stock, $0.01 par value per share, and 1,000,000 shares of preferred stock, $0.01 par value per share. The following description of our capital stock is subject to, and qualified in its entirety by, the provisions of our certificate of incorporation, including any certificates of designation thereto, and bylaws, which are included as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part, and by the provisions of applicable law.

      Our capital stock does not represent nonwithdrawable capital, is not an account of an insurable type, and is not insured by the FDIC or any other government agency.

Common Stock

      Outstanding Shares. At September 30, 2004, there were 4,519,649 shares of our common stock outstanding that were held of record by 233 stockholders. After the offering, and based on the number of shares outstanding at September 30, 2004, there will be                      shares of our common stock outstanding, or shares if the underwriters’ over-allotment option is exercised in full.

      Dividends. Subject to preferences that may be applicable to any then outstanding shares of our preferred stock, and subject to compliance with limitations imposed by law, the holders of our common stock are entitled to receive ratably those dividends, if any, as may be declared from time to time by our board of directors out of legally available funds.

      Voting Rights. Each holder of our common stock is entitled to one vote for each share held of record on all matters submitted to a vote of the stockholders, including the election of directors. Under our certificate of incorporation and bylaws, our stockholders will not have cumulative voting rights. Because of this, the holders of a majority of the shares of our common stock entitled to vote in any election of directors can elect all of the directors standing for election, if they should so choose.

      Liquidation. In the event of our liquidation, dissolution or winding up, holders of our common stock will be entitled to share ratably in the net assets legally available for distribution to stockholders after the payment of all of our debts and other liabilities and the satisfaction of any liquidation preferences granted to the holders of any outstanding shares of our preferred stock.

      Rights and Preferences. Holders of our common stock have no preemptive, conversion or subscription rights, and there are no redemption or sinking fund provisions applicable to our common stock. The rights, preferences and privileges of the holders of our common stock are subject to, and may be adversely affected by, the rights of the holders of shares of any series of our preferred stock, including any which we may designate in the future.

      Fully Paid and Nonassessable. All outstanding shares of our common stock are, and the shares of our common stock to be issued in the offering will be, fully paid and nonassessable.

Preferred Stock

      Outstanding Shares. At September 30, 2004, 1,200 shares of our preferred stock were designated “Series A — 6% Cumulative Nonparticipating Perpetual Preferred Stock, Convertible through January 1, 2009,” which we refer to in this prospectus as Series A preferred stock, of which 675 shares of Series A preferred stock were issued and outstanding. The remaining 998,800 shares of our preferred stock has not be designated as a particular class.

      Cumulative Dividends. Subject to preferences that may be applicable to any then outstanding shares of our preferred stock, and subject to compliance with limitations imposed by law, the holders of our Series A preferred stock are entitled to receive, out of legally available funds, cumulative dividends at the annual rate of $600 per share, payable in quarterly installments of $150 on each of March 31, June 30, September 30 and December 31, when and as declared by our board of directors. No dividends or other distributions may be

85


Table of Contents

made with respect to our common stock until all accumulated dividends with respect to our Series A preferred stock have been paid in full or set apart.

      Voting Rights. Except for amendments to our certificate of incorporation that create or authorize the issuance of a series of preferred stock with liquidation preferences senior to our Series A preferred stock, which requires the approval of the holders of a majority of our Series A preferred stock, and except as otherwise provided by law, holders of our Series A preferred stock will not have any voting rights.

      Liquidation. In the event of our liquidation, dissolution or winding up, holders of our Series A preferred stock will be entitled to receive, in preference to any payment on our common stock, an amount equal to $10,000 per share plus all accumulated and unpaid dividends thereon.

      Redemption. We have the right (but are not obligated) to redeem, out of legally available funds, in whole or from time to time in part, our Series A preferred stock. The redemption price to be paid by us for our shares of Series A preferred stock will vary depending on when the shares are redeemed with the redemption price decreasing by $100 every calendar year from $10,500 per share (if redeemed on or before December 31, 2004) to $10,000 per share (if redeemed on or after January 1, 2009).

      Conversion. Holders of Series A preferred stock have the right (but are not obligated) to convert their Series A preferred stock into shares of our common stock. The number of shares of our common stock to be issued upon conversion of our Series A preferred stock will vary depending on when a holder elects to convert, with the number of shares of our common stock to issued upon conversion of a share of Series A preferred stock ranging from 952 shares (if converted between January 1, 2004 and January 1, 2006) and 555 shares (if converted between April 1, 2008 and January 1, 2009). Shares of our Series A preferred stock only may be converted on the first day of a calendar quarter and only through January 1, 2009. The following table sets forth the conversion price and the number of shares of common stock issuable upon conversion of one share of Series A preferred stock.

                 
Shares of Common Stock
Issuable Upon Conversion
of One Share of Series A
Conversion Date Conversion Price(1) Preferred Stock(2)



Current through January 1, 2006
  $ 10.50       952  
April 1, 2006 through January 1, 2007
  $ 13.00       769  
April 1, 2007 through January 1, 2008
  $ 15.50       645  
April 1, 2008 through January 1, 2009
  $ 18.00       555  


(1)  The conversion price is subject to adjustment for stock dividends, stock splits and similar events.
 
(2)  Does not include fractional shares.

      Preemptive Rights. Holders of our common stock have no preemptive or subscription rights.

      Fully Paid and Nonassessable. All of our outstanding shares of Series A preferred stock are fully paid and nonassessable.

      Undesignated Preferred Stock. We are authorized to issue up to an additional 998,800 shares of preferred stock that has not been designated as a particular class. Our board of directors has the authority to issue the undesignated preferred stock in one or more series and to determine the powers, preferences and rights and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions granted to or imposed upon any wholly unissued series of undesignated preferred stock and to fix the number of shares constituting any series and the designation of the series without any further vote or action by our stockholders. The issuance of preferred stock, while providing desirable flexibility in connection with possible acquisitions and other corporate purposes, could have the effect of making it more difficult for a third party to acquire, or of discouraging a third party from attempting to acquire, a majority of our outstanding voting stock. We have no present plans to issue any additional shares of preferred stock.

86


Table of Contents

Warrants

      At September 30, 2004, warrants to purchase an aggregate of 787,950 shares of our common stock were issued and outstanding. All of the warrants are currently exercisable. Warrants to purchase 59,950 shares of our common stock have an exercise price of $14.00 per share and terminate on July 31, 2005, subject to the right of our board of directors, in its sole discretion, to extend the exercise period of these warrants for up to an additional two years. The remaining warrants to purchase 728,000 shares of our common stock have an exercise price of $4.19 per share and will terminate immediately prior to the closing of the offering if not exercised prior to that time. We expect that the warrants to purchase 728,000 shares of our common stock with an exercise price of $4.19 per share will be exercised on a cash basis prior to the closing of the offering. Each warrant contains provisions for the adjustment of the exercise price and the aggregate number of shares issuable upon exercise of such warrant in the event of stock dividends, stock splits, reorganization, reclassifications and similar events.

Anti-Takeover Provisions

      Provisions of Delaware law and our certificate of incorporation and bylaws could make our acquisition by means of a tender offer, a proxy contest or otherwise, and the removal of incumbent officers and directors more difficult. These provisions are expected to discourage types of coercive takeover practices and inadequate takeover bids and to encourage persons seeking to acquire control to first negotiate with us. We believe that the benefits of increased protection of our potential ability to negotiate with the proponent of an unfriendly or unsolicited proposal to acquire or restructure us outweighs the disadvantages of discouraging proposals, including proposals that are priced above the then current market value of our common stock, because, among other things, negotiation of these proposals could result in an improvement of their terms. These provisions may also have the effect of preventing changes in our management. It is possible that these provisions could make it more difficult to accomplish transactions that stockholders may otherwise deem to be in their best interests.

 
Delaware Law

      We are subject to Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law. Under this provision, we may not engage in any business combination with any interested stockholder for a period of three years following the date the stockholder became an interested stockholder, unless:

  •  prior to that date our board of directors approved either the business combination or the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder;
 
  •  upon completion of the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, the interested stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock outstanding at the time the transaction began; or
 
  •  on or following that date, the business combination is approved by our board of directors and authorized at an annual or special meeting of stockholders by the affirmative vote of at least two-thirds of the outstanding voting stock that is not owned by the interested stockholder.

      Section 203 defines “business combination” to include:

  •  any merger or consolidation involving the corporation and the interested stockholder;
 
  •  any sale, transfer, pledge or other disposition of 10% or more of the assets of the corporation involving the interested stockholder;
 
  •  subject to some exceptions, any transaction that results in the issuance or transfer by the corporation of any stock of the corporation to the interested stockholder;
 
  •  any transaction involving the corporation that has the effect of increasing the proportionate share of the stock of any class or series of the corporation beneficially owned by the interested stockholder; or

87


Table of Contents

  •  the receipt by the interested stockholder of the benefit of any loans, advances, guarantees, pledges or other financial benefits provided by or through the corporation.

      In general, Section 203 defines an “interested stockholder” as any entity or person beneficially owning 15% or more of the outstanding voting stock of the corporation and any entity or person affiliated with or controlling or controlled by the entity or person.

 
Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws

      Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws contain provisions that could have the effect of discouraging potential acquisition proposals or tender offers or delaying or preventing a change in control of our company. In particular, our certificate of incorporation and bylaws, as applicable, among other things:

  •  provide that our board of directors will be divided into three classes of directors;
 
  •  provide that special meetings of our stockholders may be called only by our president, our chairman or our secretary;
 
  •  provide that our stockholders will not be permitted to act by written consent, which may lengthen the amount of time required to take stockholder actions;
 
  •  do not include a provision for cumulative voting in the election of directors. Under cumulative voting, a minority stockholder holding a sufficient number of shares may be able to ensure the election of one or more directors. The absence of cumulative voting may have the effect of limiting the ability of minority stockholders to effect changes in our board of directors;
 
  •  provide that vacancies on our board of directors may be filled by a majority of directors in office, although less than a quorum, and not by our stockholders; and
 
  •  allow us to issue up to 998,800 shares of undesignated preferred stock with rights senior to those of our common stock and that otherwise could adversely affect the rights and powers, including voting rights, of the holders of our common stock. In some circumstances, such an issuance could also have the effect of decreasing the market price of our common stock.

      The amendment of any of these provisions would require the approval of the holders of at least 75% of our then outstanding capital stock.

      These provisions are intended to enhance the likelihood of continuity and stability in the composition of our board and its policies and to discourage certain types of transactions that may involve an actual or threatened change in control of our company. These provisions are designed to reduce our vulnerability to an unsolicited acquisition proposal and to discourage certain tactics that may be used in proxy fights. However, these provisions could have the effect of discouraging others from making tender offers for our shares that could result from actual or rumored takeover attempts. These provisions also may have the effect of preventing changes in our management.

 
Banking Regulations

      The Change in Bank Control Act provides that no person, acting directly or indirectly or through or in concert with one or more other persons, may acquire control of a savings association unless the OTS has been given 60 days’ prior written notice. The HOLA provides that no company may acquire “control” of a savings association without the prior approval of the OTS. Any company that acquires such control becomes a savings and loan holding company subject to registration, examination and regulation by the OTS.

      Under federal law, acquisition of more than 10% of our common stock would result in a rebuttable presumption of control of our bank and the ownership of 25% of the voting stock would result in conclusive control of our bank. Depending on the circumstances, the foregoing banking regulations may prevent or frustrate a change in control of us, discourage bids at a premium over the market price of our common stock and adversely affect the market price of our common stock and the voting or other rights of our common stock.

88


Table of Contents

Nasdaq National Market Listing

      We have applied to have our common stock listed for quotation on the Nasdaq National Market under the symbol “BOFI.”

Transfer Agent and Registrar

      The transfer agent and registrar for our common stock is U.S. Stock Transfer Corporation. Its address is 1745 Gardena Avenue, Glendale, California 91204, and its telephone number is (818) 502-1404.

89


Table of Contents

REGULATION

General

      Savings and loan holding companies and savings associations are extensively regulated under both federal and state law. This regulation is intended primarily for the protection of depositors and the Savings Association Insurance Fund, or SAIF, and not for the benefit of our stockholders. The following information describes aspects of the material laws and regulations applicable to us and our subsidiary, and does not purport to be complete. The discussion is qualified in its entirety by reference to all particular applicable laws and regulations.

      Legislation is introduced from time to time in the U.S. Congress that may affect the operations of our company and Bank of Internet USA. In addition, the regulations governing us and Bank of Internet USA may be amended from time to time by the OTS. Any such legislation or regulatory changes in our future could adversely affect Bank of Internet USA. No assurance can be given as to whether or in what form any such changes may occur.

Regulation of BofI Holding, Inc.

      General. We are a savings and loan holding company subject to regulatory oversight by the OTS. As such, we are required to register and file reports with the OTS and are subject to regulation and examination by the OTS. In addition, the OTS has enforcement authority over us and our subsidiary, which also permits the OTS to restrict or prohibit activities that are determined to be a serious risk to Bank of Internet USA.

      Activities Restrictions. Our activities, other than through Bank of Internet USA or any other SAIF-insured savings association we may hold in the future, are subject to restrictions applicable to bank holding companies. Bank holding companies are prohibited, subject to exceptions, from engaging in any business or activity other than a business or activity that the Federal Reserve Board has determined to be closely related to banking. The Federal Reserve Board has by regulation determined that specified activities satisfy this closely-related-to-banking standard. Although we currently do not engage in these activities, the following include examples of FRB-approved activities:

  •  operating a mortgage company, finance company, credit card company, factoring company, trust company or savings association;
 
  •  performing specified data processing operations;
 
  •  providing limited securities brokerage services, acting as an investment or financial advisor;
 
  •  acting as an insurance agent for specified types of credit-related insurance; leasing personal property on a full-payout, non-operating basis;
 
  •  providing tax planning and preparation services;
 
  •  operating a collection agency; and
 
  •  providing specified courier services.

      The Federal Reserve Board also has determined that other specified activities, including real estate brokerage and syndication, land development, property management and underwriting of life insurance not related to credit transactions, are not closely related to banking nor a proper incident thereto. Legislation enacted in 1999 has expanded the types of activities that may be conducted by qualifying holding companies that register as “financial holding companies.”

Regulation of Bank of Internet USA

      General. As a federally chartered, SAIF-insured savings association, Bank of Internet USA is subject to extensive regulation by the OTS and the FDIC. Lending activities and other investments of Bank of Internet USA must comply with various statutory and regulatory requirements. Bank of Internet USA is also subject to

90


Table of Contents

reserve requirements promulgated by the Federal Reserve Board. The OTS, together with the FDIC, regularly examines Bank of Internet USA and prepares reports for Bank of Internet USA’s board of directors on any deficiencies found in the operations of Bank of Internet USA. The relationship between Bank of Internet USA and depositors and borrowers is also regulated by federal and state laws, especially in such matters as the ownership of savings accounts and the form and content of mortgage documents utilized by Bank of Internet USA.

      Bank of Internet USA must file reports with the OTS and the FDIC concerning its activities and financial condition, in addition to obtaining regulatory approvals prior to entering into specified transactions such as mergers with or acquisitions of other financial institutions or raising capital or issuing trust preferred securities. This regulation and supervision establishes a comprehensive framework of activities in which an institution can engage and is intended primarily for the protection of the SAIF and depositors. The regulatory structure also gives the regulatory authorities extensive discretion in connection with their supervisory and enforcement activities and examination policies, including policies with respect to the classification of assets and the establishment of adequate loan loss reserves for regulatory purposes. Any change in such regulations, whether by the OTS, the FDIC or the Congress, could have a material adverse effect on us, Bank of Internet USA and our operations.

      Insurance of Deposit Accounts. The SAIF, as administered by the FDIC, insures Bank of Internet USA’s deposit accounts up to the maximum amount permitted by law. The FDIC may terminate insurance of deposits upon a finding that Bank of Internet USA:

  •  has engaged in unsafe or unsound practices;
 
  •  is in an unsafe or unsound condition to continue operations; or
 
  •  has violated any applicable law, regulation, rule, order or condition imposed by the FDIC or the OTS.

      The FDIC charges an annual assessment for the insurance of deposits based on the risk a particular institution poses to its deposit insurance fund. Under this system, as of December 31, 2001, SAIF members pay zero to $0.27 per $100 of domestic deposits, depending upon the institution’s risk classification. This risk classification is based on an institution’s capital group and supervisory subgroup assignment. In addition, all FDIC-insured institutions are required to pay assessments to the FDIC at an annual rate for the third quarter of 2002 of approximately $0.0172 per $100 of assessable deposits to fund interest payments on bonds issued by the Financing Corporation, or FICO, an agency of the Federal government established to recapitalize the predecessor to the SAIF. These assessments will continue until the FICO bonds mature in 2017.

      Regulatory Capital Requirements and Prompt Corrective Action. The prompt corrective action regulation of the OTS requires mandatory actions and authorizes other discretionary actions to be taken by the OTS against a savings association that falls within undercapitalized capital categories specified in the regulation.

      Under the regulation, an institution is well capitalized if it has a total risk-based capital ratio of at least 10.0%, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of at least 6.0% and a leverage ratio of at least 5.0%, with no written agreement, order, capital directive, prompt corrective action directive or other individual requirement by the OTS to maintain a specific capital measure. An institution is adequately capitalized if it has a total risk-based capital ratio of at least 8.0%, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of at least 4.0% and a leverage ratio of at least 4.0% (or 3.0% if it has a composite rating of “1” and is not experiencing or anticipating significant growth). The regulation also establishes three categories for institutions with lower ratios: undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized and critically undercapitalized. At September 30, 2004, Bank of Internet USA met the capital requirements of a “well capitalized” institution under applicable OTS regulations.

      In general, the prompt corrective action regulation prohibits an insured depository institution from declaring any dividends, making any other capital distribution, or paying a management fee to a controlling person if, following the distribution or payment, the institution would be within any of the three undercapitalized categories. In addition, adequately capitalized institutions may accept brokered deposits only with a waiver from the FDIC and are subject to restrictions on the interest rates that can be paid on such deposits. Undercapitalized institutions may not accept, renew or roll-over brokered deposits.

91


Table of Contents

      If the OTS determines that an institution is in an unsafe or unsound condition, or if the institution is deemed to be engaging in an unsafe and unsound practice, the OTS may, if the institution is well capitalized, reclassify it as adequately capitalized; if the institution is adequately capitalized but not well capitalized, require it to comply with restrictions applicable to undercapitalized institutions; and, if the institution is undercapitalized, require it to comply with restrictions applicable to significantly undercapitalized institutions. Finally, pursuant to an interagency agreement, the FDIC can examine any institution that has a substandard regulatory examination score or is considered undercapitalized without the express permission of the institution’s primary regulator.

      OTS capital regulations also require savings associations to meet three additional capital standards:

  •  tangible capital equal to at least 1.5% of total adjusted assets;
 
  •  leverage capital (core capital) equal to 4.0% of total adjusted assets; and
 
  •  risk-based capital equal to 8.0% of total risk-weighted assets.

      These capital requirements are viewed as minimum standards by the OTS, and most institutions are expected to maintain capital levels well above the minimum. In addition, the OTS regulations provide that minimum capital levels greater than those provided in the regulations may be established by the OTS for individual savings associations upon a determination that the savings association’s capital is or may become inadequate in view of its circumstances. Bank of Internet USA is not subject to any such individual minimum regulatory capital requirement and our regulatory capital exceeded all minimum regulatory capital requirements as of September 30, 2004. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations — Liquidity and Capital Resources.”

      Loans-to-One-Borrower Limitations. Savings associations generally are subject to the lending limits applicable to national banks. With limited exceptions, the maximum amount that a savings association or a national bank may lend to any borrower, including related entities of the borrower, at one time may not exceed 15% of the unimpaired capital and surplus of the institution, plus an additional 10% of unimpaired capital and surplus for loans fully secured by readily marketable collateral. Savings associations are additionally authorized to make loans to one borrower by order of the Director of the OTS, in an amount not to exceed the lesser of $30.0 million or 30% of unimpaired capital and surplus for the purpose of developing residential housing, if specified conditions are met:

  •  the purchase price of each single family dwelling in the development does not exceed $500,000;
 
  •  the savings association is in compliance with its fully phased-in capital requirements;
 
  •  the loans comply with applicable loan-to-value requirements; and
 
  •  the aggregate amount of loans made under this authority does not exceed 150% of unimpaired capital and surplus.

      At September 30, 2004, Bank of Internet USA’s loans-to-one-borrower limit was $5.2 million based upon the 15% of unimpaired capital and surplus measurement. At September 30, 2004, no single loan was larger than $2.9 million and Bank of Internet USA’s largest single lending relationship had an outstanding balance of $4.3 million. We expect that our lending limit will increase to approximately $           million immediately following the offering, assuming $          million are raised in the offering and that $           million of the net proceeds are contributed to our subsidiary bank, based on the assumptions set forth below the table in “Capitalization.”

      Qualified Thrift Lender Test. Savings associations must meet a qualified thrift lender, or QTL, test. This test may be met either by maintaining a specified level of portfolio assets in qualified thrift investments as specified by the Home Owners Loan Act, or HOLA, or by meeting the definition of a “domestic building and loan association” under the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, or the Code. Qualified thrift investments are primarily residential mortgage loans and related investments, including mortgage related securities. Portfolio assets generally mean total assets less specified liquid assets, goodwill and other intangible assets and the value of property used in the conduct of Bank of Internet USA’s business. The required

92


Table of Contents

percentage of qualified thrift investments under the HOLA is 65% of portfolio. An association must be in compliance with the QTL test or the definition of domestic building and loan association on a monthly basis in nine out of every 12 months. Associations that fail to meet the QTL test will generally be prohibited from engaging in any activity not permitted for both a national bank and a savings association. At September 30, 2004, Bank of Internet USA was in compliance with its QTL requirement and met the definition of a domestic building and loan association.

      Liquidity Standard. Savings associations are required to maintain sufficient liquidity to ensure safe and sound operations.

      Affiliate Transactions. Transactions between a savings association and its affiliates are quantitatively and qualitatively restricted pursuant to OTS regulations. Affiliates of a savings association include, among other entities, the savings association’s holding company and companies that are under common control with the savings association. In general, a savings association or its subsidiaries are limited in their ability to engage in “covered transactions” with affiliates:

  •  to an amount equal to 10% of the association’s capital and surplus, in the case of covered transactions with any one affiliate; and
 
  •  to an amount equal to 20% of the association’s capital and surplus, in the case of covered transactions with all affiliates.

      In addition, a savings association and its subsidiaries may engage in covered transactions and other specified transactions only on terms and under circumstances that are substantially the same, or at least as favorable to the savings association or its subsidiary, as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with nonaffiliated companies. A “covered transaction” includes:

  •  a loan or extension of credit to an affiliate;
 
  •  a purchase of investment securities issued by an affiliate;
 
  •  a purchase of assets from an affiliate, with some exceptions;
 
  •  the acceptance of securities issued by an affiliate as collateral for a loan or extension of credit to any party; and
 
  •  the issuance of a guarantee, acceptance or letter of credit on behalf of an affiliate.

      In addition, under the OTS regulations:

  •  a savings association may not make a loan or extension of credit to an affiliate unless the affiliate is engaged only in activities permissible for bank holding companies;
 
  •  a savings association may not purchase or invest in securities of an affiliate other than shares of a subsidiary;
 
  •  a savings association and its subsidiaries may not purchase low-quality assets from an affiliate;
 
  •  covered transactions and other specified transactions between a savings association or its subsidiaries and an affiliate must be on terms and conditions that are consistent with safe and sound banking practices; and
 
  •  with some exceptions, each loan or extension of credit by a savings association to an affiliate must be secured by collateral with a market value ranging from 100% to 130% of the amount of the loan or extension of credit, depending on the type of collateral.

      The OTS regulations generally exclude all non-bank and non-savings association subsidiaries of savings associations from treatment as affiliates, except to the extent that the OTS or the Federal Reserve Board decides to treat these subsidiaries as affiliates. The regulations also require savings associations to make and retain records that reflect affiliate transactions in reasonable detail and provide that specified classes of savings associations may be required to give the OTS prior notice of affiliate transactions.

93


Table of Contents

      Capital Distribution Limitations. OTS regulations impose limitations upon all capital distributions by savings associations, like cash dividends, payments to repurchase or otherwise acquire its shares, payments to stockholders of another institution in a cash-out merger and other distributions charged against capital. Under these regulations, a savings association may, in circumstances described in those regulations:

  •  be required to file an application and await approval from the OTS before it makes a capital distribution;
 
  •  be required to file a notice 30 days before the capital distribution; or
 
  •  be permitted to make the capital distribution without notice or application to the OTS.

      The OTS regulations require a savings association to file an application if:

  •  it is ineligible for expedited treatment of its other applications under OTS regulations;
 
  •  the total amount of all of capital distributions, including the proposed capital distribution, for the applicable calendar year exceeds its net income for that year to date plus retained net income for the preceding two years;
 
  •  it would not be at least adequately capitalized under the prompt corrective action regulations of the OTS following the distribution, as described above; or
 
  •  the association’s proposed capital distribution would violate a prohibition contained in any applicable statute, regulation or agreement between the savings association and the OTS or the FDIC, or violate a condition imposed on the savings association in an OTS-approved application or notice.

      In addition, a savings association must give the OTS notice of a capital distribution if the savings association is not required to file an application, but:

  •  would not be well capitalized under the prompt corrective action regulations of the OTS following the distribution, as described above;
 
  •  the proposed capital distribution would reduce the amount of or retire any part of the savings association’s common or preferred stock or retire any part of its debt instruments like notes or debentures included in capital, other than regular payments required under a debt instrument approved by the OTS; or
 
  •  the savings association is a subsidiary of a savings and loan holding company.

      If neither the savings association nor the proposed capital distribution meet any of the above listed criteria, the OTS does not require the savings association to submit an application or give notice when making the proposed capital distribution. The OTS may prohibit a proposed capital distribution that would otherwise be permitted if the OTS determines that the distribution would constitute an unsafe or unsound practice.

      Community Reinvestment Act and the Fair Lending Laws. Savings associations have a responsibility under the Community Reinvestment Act and related regulations of the OTS to help meet the credit needs of their communities, including low- and moderate-income neighborhoods. In addition, the Equal Credit Opportunity Act and the Fair Housing Act prohibit lenders from discriminating in their lending practices on the basis of characteristics specified in those statutes. An institution’s failure to comply with the provisions of the Community Reinvestment Act could, at a minimum, result in regulatory restrictions on its activities and the denial of applications. In addition, an institution’s failure to comply with the Equal Credit Opportunity Act and the Fair Housing Act could result in the OTS, other federal regulatory agencies or the Department of Justice taking enforcement actions against the institution. Based on an examination commenced in June, 2001, Bank of Internet USA received a satisfactory rating with respect to its performance pursuant to the Community Reinvestment Act.

      Federal Home Loan Bank System. Bank of Internet USA is a member of the FHLB system. Among other benefits, each FHLB serves as a reserve or central bank for its members within its assigned region. Each FHLB is financed primarily from the sale of consolidated obligations of the FHLB system. Each FHLB makes

94


Table of Contents

available loans or advances to its members in compliance with the policies and procedures established by the board of directors of the individual FHLB. As an FHLB member, Bank of Internet USA is required to own capital stock in an FHLB in specified amounts based on either its aggregate outstanding principal amount of its residential mortgage loans, home purchase contracts and similar obligations at the beginning of each calendar year or its outstanding advances from the FHLB. At September 30, 2004, Bank of Internet USA had $5.7 million of the stock of the FHLB of San Francisco, which met the applicable required investment at that time.

      Federal Reserve System. The Federal Reserve Board requires all depository institutions to maintain noninterest-bearing reserves at specified levels against their transaction accounts (primarily checking, NOW, and Super NOW checking accounts) and nonpersonal time deposits. At September 30, 2004, Bank of Internet USA was in compliance with these requirements.

      Activities of Subsidiaries. A savings association seeking to establish a new subsidiary, acquire control of an existing company or conduct a new activity through a subsidiary must provide 30 days prior notice to the FDIC and the OTS and conduct any activities of the subsidiary in compliance with regulations and orders of the OTS. The OTS has the power to require a savings association to divest any subsidiary or terminate any activity conducted by a subsidiary that the OTS determines to pose a serious threat to the financial safety, soundness or stability of the savings association or to be otherwise inconsistent with sound banking practices.

Recent Legislation

      Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. In July 2002, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, or the SOX, was enacted. The stated goals of the SOX are to increase corporate responsibility, to provide for enhanced penalties for accounting and auditing improprieties at publicly traded companies and to protect investors by improving the accuracy and reliability of corporate disclosures pursuant to the securities laws.

      The SOX is the most far-reaching U.S. securities legislation enacted in some time. The SOX generally applies to all companies, both U.S. and non-U.S., that file or are required to file periodic reports with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the SEC, under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, or the Exchange Act.

      The SOX includes very specific additional disclosure requirements and new corporate governance rules, requires the SEC and securities exchanges to adopt extensive additional disclosure, corporate governance and other related rules and mandates further studies of specified issues by the SEC and the Comptroller General. The SOX represents significant federal involvement in matters traditionally left to state regulatory systems, such as the regulation of the accounting profession, and to state corporate law, such as the relationship between a board of directors and management and between a board of directors and its committees.

      The SOX and subsequently enacted SEC and other regulations address, among other matters:

  •  audit committees;
 
  •  implementation of disclosure controls and procedures and internal control and financial reporting;
 
  •  certification of financial statements by the chief executive officer and the chief financial officer;
 
  •  the forfeiture of bonuses or other incentive-based compensation and profits from the sale of an issuer’s securities by directors and senior officers in the twelve month period following initial publication of any financial statements that later require restatement;
 
  •  a prohibition on insider trading during pension plan black-out periods;
 
  •  disclosure of off-balance sheet transactions;
 
  •  a prohibition on personal loans to directors and officers subject to certain exceptions for loans made by insured depository institutions;
 
  •  expedited filing requirements for changes in beneficial ownership of securities owned by officers, directors and principal stockholders of publicly held companies;

95


Table of Contents

  •  disclosure of a code of ethics and filing a Form 8-K for a change or waiver of such code;
 
  •  “real time” filing of periodic reports;
 
  •  the formation of a public accounting oversight board;
 
  •  auditor independence; and
 
  •  various increased criminal penalties for violations of securities laws.

96


Table of Contents

SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

      Prior to the offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. No prediction can be made as to the effect, if any, that sales of common stock or the availability of common stock for sale will have on the market price of our common stock. The market price of our common stock could decline because of the sale of a large number of shares of our common stock or the perception that such sales could occur. These factors could also make it more difficult to raise funds through future offerings of common stock.

      After the offering, and based on the number of shares of our common stock outstanding at September 30, 2004 and on the assumptions set forth under the table in “Capitalization,”                      shares of our common stock will be outstanding, or                      shares if the underwriters over-allotment option is exercised in full. Of these shares, the shares sold in the offering, or                      shares if the underwriters’ over-allotment is exercised in full, will be freely tradable without restriction under the Securities Act, except that any shares held by our “affiliates” as defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act may be sold only in compliance with the limitations described below. The remaining                      shares of common stock are “restricted securities,” within the meaning of Rule 144 under the Securities Act. The restricted securities generally may not be sold unless they are registered under the Securities Act or are sold pursuant to an exemption from registration, such as the exemption provided by Rule 144 under the Securities Act.

      In connection with the offering, our existing officers, directors and certain holders of our common stock, who will beneficially own a total of                      shares of common stock after the offering, have entered into lock-up agreements pursuant to which they have agreed not to offer or sell any shares of common stock for a period of 180 days after the date of this prospectus without the prior written consent of WR Hambrecht + Co, LLC, who may, in its sole discretion, at any time and without notice, waive any of the terms of these lock-up agreements. In addition, certain other holders of our common stock, who will beneficially own a total of  shares of common stock after the offering, have entered into lock-up agreements pursuant to which they have agreed not to offer or sell any shares of common stock for a period of 90 days. The underwriters presently have no intention to allow any shares of common stock to be sold or otherwise offered by us prior to the expiration of these lock-up periods. Following these lock-up periods, these shares will not be eligible for sale in the public market without registration under the Securities Act unless such sale meets the conditions and restrictions of Rule 144 as described below.

      In general, under Rule 144, as currently in effect, any person or persons whose shares are required to be aggregated, including an affiliate of ours, who has beneficially owned shares for a period of at least one year is entitled to sell, within any three month period, commencing 90 days after the date of this prospectus, a number of shares that does not exceed the greater of:

  •  1% of the then outstanding shares of our common stock, or
 
  •  the average weekly trading volume in our common stock during the four calendar weeks immediately preceding the date on which the notice of such sale on Form 144 is filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

      Sales under Rule 144 are also subject to provisions relating to notice and manner of sale and the availability of current public information about us during the 90 days immediately preceding a sale. In addition, a person who is not an affiliate of ours during the 90 days preceding a sale and who has beneficially owned the shares proposed to be sold for at least two years would be entitled to sell such shares under Rule 144(k) without regard to the volume limitation and other conditions described above.

      Our directors or officers who purchased our shares in connection with a written compensatory plan or contract may be entitled to rely on the resale provisions of Rule 701. Rule 701 permits non-affiliates to sell their Rule 701 shares without having to comply with the public information, holding period, volume limitation or notice provisions of Rule 144. Affiliates may sell their Rule 701 shares without having to comply with Rule 144’s holding period restrictions. In each of these cases, Rule 701 allows the stockholders to sell 90 days after the date of this prospectus.

97


Table of Contents

      We intend to register on a registration statement on Form S-8 a total of                      shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options issued or reserved for future issuance under our amended and restated 1999 stock option plan, our 2004 stock incentive plan and our 2004 employee stock purchase plan. The Form S-8 will permit the resale in the public market of shares so registered by non-affiliates without restriction under the Securities Act.

98


Table of Contents

PLAN OF DISTRIBUTION

      In accordance with the terms of the underwriting agreement between WR Hambrecht + Co, LLC and The Seidler Companies Incorporated, as representatives of the underwriters, and us, each underwriter has agreed to purchase from us that number of shares of common stock set forth opposite the underwriter’s name below at the public offering price less the underwriting discounts and commissions described on the cover page of this prospectus.

           
Number of
Underwriters Shares


WR Hambrecht + Co, LLC
       
The Seidler Companies Incorporated
       
 
Total
       

      The underwriting agreement provides that the obligations of the underwriters are subject to conditions, including the absence of any material adverse change in our business, and the receipt of certificates, opinions and letters from us and counsel. Subject to those conditions, the underwriters are committed to purchase all of the shares of our common stock offered by this prospectus if any of the shares are purchased.

      The underwriters propose to offer the shares of our common stock directly to the public at the offering price set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, as this price is determined by the OpenIPO process described below, and to certain dealers at this price less a concession not in excess of $          per share. The underwriters may allow, and dealers may reallow, a concession not to exceed $           per share on sales to other dealers. Any dealers that participate in the distribution of our common stock may be deemed to be underwriters within the meaning of the Securities Act, and any discount, commission or concession received by them and any provided by the sale of the shares by them may be deemed to be underwriting discounts and commissions under the Securities Act. After completion of the initial public offering of the shares, the underwriters may change the public offering price and other selling terms.

      The following table shows the per share and total underwriting discount to be paid to the underwriters by us in connection with this offering. The underwriting discount has been determined through negotiations between us and the underwriters, and has been calculated as a percentage of the offering price. These amounts are shown assuming both no exercise and full exercise of the over-allotment option.

                         
Per Share No Exercise Full Exercise



Public Offering Price
  $       $       $    
Underwriting Discount
  $       $       $    
Proceeds, before expenses, to us
  $       $       $    

      The expenses of the offering, exclusive of the underwriting discounts, will be approximately $          . We have also agreed to reimburse the underwriters for certain fees and expenses. These fees and expenses are payable entirely by us. These fees include, among other things, our legal and accounting fees, printing expenses, expenses incurred in connection with meetings with potential investors, filing fees of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the National Association of Securities Dealers, Inc., fees of our transfer agent and registrar and the listing fees of the Nasdaq National Market.

      An electronic prospectus is available on the website maintained by WR Hambrecht + Co and The Seidler Companies Incorporated, two of the underwriters in this offering, and may also be made available on websites maintained by selected dealers and selling group members participating in this offering.

The OpenIPO Auction Process

      The distribution method being used in this offering is known as the OpenIPO auction, which differs from methods traditionally used in underwritten public offerings. In particular, the public offering price and the allocation of shares are determined primarily by an auction conducted by the underwriters. All qualified individual and institutional investors may place bids in an OpenIPO auction and investors submitting valid bids have an equal opportunity to receive an allocation of shares.

99


Table of Contents

      The following describes how the underwriters and some selected dealers conduct the auction process and confirm bids from prospective investors:

 
Prior to Effectiveness of the Registration Statement

      Before the registration statement relating to this offering becomes effective, the underwriters and participating dealers solicit bids from prospective investors through the Internet and by telephone and facsimile. The bids specify the number of shares of our common stock the potential investor proposes to purchase and the price the potential investor is willing to pay for the shares. These bids may be above or below the range set forth on the cover page of the prospectus. The minimum size of any bid is 100 shares.

      The shares offered by this prospectus may not be sold, nor may offers to buy be accepted, prior to the time that the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission becomes effective. A bid received by the underwriters or a dealer involves no obligation or commitment of any kind prior to the closing of the auction. Bids can be modified or revoked at any time prior to the closing of the auction.

      Approximately two business days prior to the registration statement being declared effective, prospective investors receive, by e-mail, telephone or facsimile, a notice indicating the proposed effective date Potential investors may at any time expressly request that all, or any specific, communications between them and the underwriters and participating dealers be made by specific means of communication, including e-mail, telephone and facsimile. The underwriters and participating dealers will contact the potential investors in the manner they request.

 
Effectiveness of the Registration Statement

      After the registration statement relating to this offering has become effective, potential investors who have submitted bids to the underwriters or a dealer are contacted by e-mail, telephone or facsimile. Potential investors are advised that the registration statement has been declared effective and that the auction may close in as little as one hour following effectiveness. Bids will continue to be accepted in the time period after the registration statement is declared effective but before the auction closes. Bidders may also withdraw their bids in the time period following effectiveness but before the close of the auction.

 
Reconfirmation of Bids

      We will require that bidders reconfirm the bids that they have submitted in the offering if any of the following events shall occur:

  •  More than 15 business days have elapsed since the bidder submitted his bid in the offering;
 
  •  There is a material change in the prospectus that requires recirculation of the prospectus by us and the underwriters; or
 
  •  The clearing price in the offering is more than 20% above the high end of the price range or more than 20% below the low end of the price range.

      If a reconfirmation of bids is required, we will send an electronic notice to everyone who has submitted a bid notifying them that they must reconfirm their bids by contacting the underwriters or participating dealers with which they have their brokerage accounts. Bidders will have the ability to cancel, modify or reconfirm their bid at any time until the auction closes. If bidders do not reconfirm their bids before the auction is closed, we and the underwriters will disregard their bids in the auction, and they will be deemed to have been withdrawn.

100


Table of Contents

 
Changes in the Price Range Prior to Effectiveness of the Registration Statement

      If, prior to the date on which the SEC declares our registration statement effective, there is a change in the price range or the number of shares to be sold in our offering, in each case in a manner that is not otherwise material to our offering, we and the underwriters will:

  •  Provide notice on our offering web site of the revised price range or number of shares to be sold in our offering, as the case may be.
 
  •  Issue a press release announcing the revised price range or number of shares to be sold in our offering, as the case may be.
 
  •  Send an electronic notice to everyone who has submitted a bid notifying them of the revised price range or number of shares to be sold in our offering, as the case may be.

      In these situations, the underwriters could accept your bid after the SEC declares the registration statement effective without requiring you to reconfirm. However, the underwriters may decide at any time to require you to reconfirm your bid, and if you fail to do so, your bid will be invalid.

 
Closing of the Auction and Pricing

      The auction will close and a public offering price will be determined after the registration statement becomes effective at a time agreed to by us and WR Hambrecht + Co, which we anticipate will be after the close of trading on the Nasdaq National Market on the same day on which the registration statement is declared effective. The auction may close in as little as one hour following effectiveness of the registration statement. However, the date and time at which the auction will close and a public offering price will be determined cannot currently be predicted and will be determined by us and WR Hambrecht + Co based on general market conditions during the period after the registration statement is declared effective. If we are unable to close the auction, determine a public offering price and file a final prospectus with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 15 days after the registration statement is initially declared effective, we will be required to file with the Securities and Exchange Commission and have declared effective a post-effective amendment to the registration statement before the auction may be closed and before any bids may be accepted.

      Once a potential investor submits its bid, the bid remains valid unless subsequently withdrawn by the potential investor. Potential investors are able to withdraw their bids at any time before the close of the auction by notifying the underwriters or a participating dealer.

      Following the closing of the auction, the underwriters determine the highest price at which all of the shares offered, including shares that may be purchased by the underwriters to cover any over-allotments, may be sold to potential investors. This price, which is called the “clearing price,” is determined based on the results of all valid bids at the time the auction is closed. The clearing price is not necessarily the public offering price, which is set as described in “Determination of Public Offering Price” below. The public offering price determines the allocation of shares to potential investors, with all valid bids submitted at or above the public offering price receiving a pro rata portion of the shares bid for.

      You will have the ability to withdraw your bid at any time until the closing of the auction. The underwriters will accept successful bids by sending notice of acceptance after the auction closes and a public offering price has been determined, and bidders who submitted successful bids will be obligated to purchase the shares allocated to them regardless of (1) whether such bidders are aware that the registration statement has been declared effective and that the auction has closed or (2) whether they are aware that the notice of acceptance of that bid has been sent. Once the auction has closed, a public offering price has been determined and notices of acceptance have been sent, the underwriters will not cancel or reject a valid bid.

      Once the auction closes and a clearing price is set as described below, the underwriters or a participating dealer accept the bids from those bidders whose bid is at or above the public offering price but may allocate to a prospective investor fewer shares than the number included in the investor’s bid, as described in “Allocation of Shares” below.

101


Table of Contents

Determination of Public Offering Price

      The public offering price for this offering is ultimately determined by negotiation between the underwriters and us after the auction closes and does not necessarily bear any direct relationship to our assets, current earnings or book value or to any other established criteria of value, although these factors are considered in establishing the initial public offering price. Prior to the offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. The principal factor in establishing the public offering price is the clearing price resulting from the auction. The clearing price is used by the underwriters and us as the principal benchmark in determining the public offering price for the stock that will be sold in this offering.

      The clearing price is the highest price at which all of the shares offered, including the shares that may be purchased by the underwriters to cover any over-allotments, may be sold to potential investors, based on the valid bids at the time the auction is run. The shares subject to the underwriters’ over-allotment option are used to calculate the clearing price whether or not the option is actually exercised.

      Depending on the outcome of negotiations between the underwriters and us, the public offering price may be lower, but will not be higher, than the clearing price. The bids received in the auction and the resulting clearing price are the principal factors used to determine the public offering price of the stock that will be sold in this offering. The public offering price may be lower than the clearing price depending on a number of additional factors, including general market trends or conditions, the underwriters’ assessment of our management, operating results, capital structure and business potential and the demand and price of similar securities of comparable companies. The underwriters and us may also agree to a public offering price that is lower than the clearing price in order to facilitate a wider distribution of the stock to be sold in the offering.

      The public offering price always determines the allocation of shares to potential investors. Therefore, if the public offering price is below the clearing price, all valid bids that are at or above the public offering price receive a pro rata portion of the shares bid for. If sufficient bids are not received, or if we do not consider the clearing price to be adequate, or if the underwriters and we are not able to reach agreement on the public offering price, then the underwriters and we will either postpone or cancel this offering. Alternatively, we may file with the SEC a post-effective amendment to the registration statement in order to conduct a new auction.

      The following simplified example illustrates how the public offering price is determined through the auction process:

      Company X offers to sell 1,000 shares in its public offering through the auction process. The underwriters, on behalf of Company X, receive five bids to purchase, all of which are kept confidential until the auction closes.

      The first bid is to pay $10.00 per share for 200 shares. The second bid is to pay $9.00 per share for 300 shares. The third bid is to pay $8.00 per share for 600 shares. The fourth bid is to pay $7.00 per share for 400 shares. The fifth bid is to pay $6.00 per share for 800 shares.

      Assuming that none of these bids are withdrawn or modified before the auction closes, and assuming that no additional bids are received, the clearing price used to determine the public offering price would be $8.00 per share, which is the highest price at which all 1,000 shares offered may be sold to potential investors who have submitted valid bids. However, the shares may be sold at a price below $8.00 per share based on negotiations between Company X and the underwriters.

      If the public offering price is the same as the $8.00 per share clearing price, the underwriters would accept bids at or above $8.00 per share. Because 1,100 shares were bid for at or above the clearing price, each of the three potential investors who bid $8.00 per share or more would receive approximately 90% of the shares for which bids were made. The two potential investors whose bids were below $8.00 per share would not receive any shares in this example.

      If the public offering price is $7.00 per share, the underwriters would accept bids that were made at or above $7.00 per share. No bids made at a price of less than $7.00 per share would be accepted. The four potential investors with the highest bids would receive a pro rata portion of the 1,000 shares offered, based on

102


Table of Contents

the 1,500 shares they requested, or two-thirds of the shares for which bids were made. The potential investor with the lowest bid would not receive any shares in this example.

      As described in “Allocation of Shares” below, because bids that are reduced on a pro rata basis may be rounded down to round lots, a potential investor may be allocated less than two-thirds of the shares bid for. Thus, the potential investor who bid for 200 shares may receive a pro rata allocation of 100 shares (one-half of the shares bid for), rather than receiving a pro rata allocation of 133 shares (two-thirds of the shares bid for).

      The following table illustrates the example described above, before rounding down any bids to the nearest round lot, assuming that the initial public offering price is set at $8.00 per share. The table also assumes that these bids are the final bids, and that they reflect any modifications that have been made to reflect any prior changes to the offering range, and to avoid the issuance of fractional shares.

Initial Public Offering of Company X

                                                           
Bid Information Auction Results


Approximate
Cumulative Allocated
Shares Shares Shares Requested Clearing Amount
Requested Requested Bid Price Allocated Shares Price Raised







      200       200     $ 10.00       180       90 %   $ 8.00     $ 1,440  
      300       500     $ 9.00       270       90 %   $ 8.00     $ 2,160  
Clearing Price
    600       1,100     $ 8.00       550       90 %   $ 8.00     $ 4,400  
      400       1,500     $ 7.00       0       0 %            
      800       2,300     $ 6.00       0       0 %            
                             
                     
 
 
Total:
                            1,000                     $ 8,000  
                             
                     
 

Allocation of Shares

      Bidders receiving a pro rata portion of the shares they bid for generally receive an allocation of shares on a round-lot basis, rounded to multiples of 100 or 1,000 shares, depending on the size of the bid. No bids are rounded to a round lot higher than the original bid size. Because bids may be rounded down to round lots in multiples of 100 or 1,000 shares, some bidders may receive allocations of shares that reflect a greater percentage decrease in their original bid than the average pro rata decrease. Thus, for example, if a bidder has confirmed a bid for 200 shares, and there is an average pro rata decrease of all bids of 30%, the bidder may receive an allocation of 100 shares (a 50% decrease from 200 shares) rather than receiving an allocation of 140 shares (a 30% decrease from 200 shares). In addition, some bidders may receive allocations of shares that reflect a lesser percentage decrease in their original bid than the average pro rata decrease. For example, if a bidder has submitted a bid for 100 shares, and there is an average pro rata decrease of all bids of 30%, the bidder may receive an allocation of all 100 shares to avoid having the bid rounded down to zero.

      Generally the allocation of shares in the offering will be determined in the following manner:

  •  Any bid with a price below the public offering price is allocated no shares.
 
  •  The pro-rata percentage is determined by dividing the number of shares offered (including the overallotment option) by the total number of shares bid at or above the public offering price. For example, if there are 200,000 shares bid for at or above the public offering price, and 150,000 shares offered in the offering, then the pro-rata percentage is 75%.
 
  •  All of the successful bids are then multiplied by the pro-rata percentage to determine the allocations before rounding. For example, three winning bids for 1,700 shares (Bid 1), 650 shares (Bid 2) and 100 shares (Bid 3) would be allocated 1,275 shares, 487 shares and 75 shares respectively, based on the pro rata percentage.

103


Table of Contents

  •  The bids are then rounded down to the nearest 100 share round lot, so the bids would be rounded to 1200, 400 and 0 shares respectively. This creates a stub of 237 unallocated shares.
 
  •  The 237 stub shares are then allocated to the bids. Continuing the example above, because Bid 3 for 100 shares was rounded down to 0 shares, 100 of the stub shares would be allocated to Bid 3. After allocation of these shares, 137 unallocated stub shares would remain.
 
  •  Because Bid 2 for 650 shares was reduced, as a result of rounding, by more total shares then Bid 1 for 1700 shares, Bid 2 would then be allocated stub shares up to the nearest 100 round lot (from 400 shares to 500 shares). This reduces the unallocated stub shares to 37 total shares.

      The remaining 37 stub shares are not enough shares to enable Bid 1 to be rounded up to a round lot of 100 shares. Therefore the remaining 37 unallocated stub shares would be allocated to smaller orders that are below their bid amounts. The table below illustrates the allocations in the example above.

Initial Public Offering of Company X

                                           
Initial Pro-Rata Allocation Initial Allocation of Final
Bid (75% of Initial Bid) Rounding Stub Shares Allocation





Bid 1
    1700       1275       1200       0       1200  
Bid 2
    650       487       400       100       500  
Bid 3
    100       75       0       100       100  
 
Total
    2450       1837       1600       200       1800  

Requirements for Valid Bids

      Valid bids are those that meet the requirements, including eligibility, account status and size, established by the underwriters or participating dealers. In order to open a brokerage account with WR Hambrecht + Co, a potential investor must deposit $2,000 in its account. This brokerage account will be a general account subject to WR Hambrecht + Co’s customary rules, and will not be limited to this offering. In addition, within one hour of the auction closing, a prospective investor submitting a bid through a WR Hambrecht + Co brokerage account must have an account balance equal to or in excess of the amount of its bid or WR Hambrecht + Co may not accept its bid. The auction may close in as little as one hour after the registration statement is declared effective. However, other than the $2,000 described above, prospective investors are not required to deposit any money into their accounts until after the registration statement becomes effective. No funds will be transferred to WR Hambrecht + Co, and any amounts in excess of $2,000 may be withdrawn at any time until the auction closes and the bid is accepted. Conditions for valid bids, including eligibility standards and account funding requirements of The Seidler Companies Incorporated and participating dealers other than WR Hambrecht + Co, may vary.

The Closing of the Auction and Allocation of Shares

      The auction will close on a date and at a time estimated and publicly disclosed in advance by the underwriters on the websites of WR Hambrecht + Co at www.wrhambrecht.com and www.openipo.com . The auction may close in as little as one hour following effectiveness of the registration statement. The                      shares offered by this prospectus, or                      shares if the underwriters’ over-allotment option is exercised in full, will be purchased from us by the underwriters and sold through the underwriters and participating dealers to investors who have submitted valid bids at or higher than the public offering price.

      The underwriters or a participating dealer notify successful bidders by sending a notice of acceptance by e-mail, telephone or facsimile or mail informing bidders that the auction has closed and that their bids have been accepted. The notice will indicate the price and number of shares that have been allocated to the successful bidder. Other bidders are notified that their bids have not been accepted.

      Each participating dealer has agreed with the underwriters to sell the shares it purchases from the underwriters in accordance with the auction process described above, unless the underwriters otherwise

104


Table of Contents

consent. The underwriters do not intend to consent to the sale of any shares in this offering outside of the auction process. The underwriters reserve the right in their sole discretion to reject any bids that they deem manipulative or disruptive in order to facilitate the orderly completion of this offering, and they reserve the right, in exceptional circumstances, to alter this method of allocation as they deem necessary to ensure a fair and orderly distribution of the shares of our common stock. For example, large orders may be reduced to ensure a public distribution and bids may be rejected or reduced by the underwriters or participating dealers based on eligibility or creditworthiness criteria. In addition, the underwriters or the participating dealers may reject or reduce a bid by a prospective investor who has engaged in practices that could have a manipulative, disruptive or otherwise adverse effect on the offering.

      Some dealers participating in the selling group may submit firm bids that reflect indications of interest from their customers that they have received at prices within the initial public offering price range. In these cases, the dealer submitting the bid is treated as the bidder for the purposes of determining the clearing price and allocation of shares.

      Price and volume volatility in the market for our common stock may result from the somewhat unique nature of the proposed plan of distribution. Price and volume volatility in the market for our common stock after the completion of this offering may adversely affect the market price of our common stock.

      We have granted to the underwriters an option, exercisable no later than 30 days after the date of this prospectus, to purchase up to an aggregate of                     additional shares of our common stock from us at the offering price, less the underwriting discounts and commissions set forth on the cover page of this prospectus. To the extent that the underwriters exercise this option, they will have a firm commitment to purchase the additional shares and we will be obligated to sell the additional shares to the underwriters. The underwriters may exercise the option only to cover over-allotments made in connection with the sale of shares offered. The underwriting agreement provides that we will indemnify the underwriters against specified liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act, or contribute to payments that the underwriters may be required to make.

      We have agreed not to offer, sell, contract to sell, pledge, grant any option to purchase, make any short sale or otherwise dispose of any shares of common stock, or any options or warrants to purchase common stock other than the shares of common stock or options to acquire common stock issued under our stock plans, for a period of 180 days after the date of this prospectus, except with the prior written consent of WR Hambrecht + Co. Each of our directors and executive officers and additional holders of approximately        % of our outstanding capital stock have agreed to restrictions on their ability to sell, offer, contract or grant any option to sell, pledge, transfer or otherwise dispose of shares of our common stock for a period of 180 days in the case of our directors and officers and certain holders of our common stock, and 90 days in the case of certain other holders of our common stock, after the date of this prospectus, without the prior written consent of WR Hambrecht + Co. The persons signing the lock-up agreements will be able to transfer their shares of common stock as a bona fide gift to immediate family members or to a trust or partnership or other business entity, or as a distribution without compensation to partners, members or shareholders of a business entity, subject to the transferees agreeing to enter into a lock-up agreement. In considering any request to release shares subject to a lock-up agreement, WR Hambrecht + Co will consider the possible impact of the release of the shares on the trading price of the stock sold in the offering.

      In connection with the offering, the underwriters may purchase and sell shares of common stock in the open market. These transactions may include short sales, stabilizing transactions and purchases to cover positions created by short sales. Any short sales made by the underwriters would be made at the public offering price. Short sales involve the sale by the underwriters of a greater number of shares than they are required to purchase in the offering. “Covered” short sales are sales made in an amount not greater than the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares from us in the offering. The underwriters may close out any covered short position by either exercising its option to purchase additional shares or purchasing shares in the open market. As described above, the number of shares that may be sold pursuant to the underwriters’ overallotment option is included in the calculation of the clearing price. In determining the source of shares to close out the covered short position, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of shares available for purchase in the open market as compared to the price at which they may purchase shares through

105


Table of Contents

the over-allotment option. “Naked” short sales are any sales in excess of such option. To the extent that the underwriters engage in any naked short sales, the naked short position would not be included in the calculation of the clearing price. The underwriters must close out any naked short position by purchasing shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that there may be downward pressure on the price of the common stock in the open market after pricing that could adversely affect investors who purchase in the offering. Stabilizing transactions consist of various bids for or purchases of common stock made by the underwriters in the open market prior to the completion of the offering.

      The underwriters may also impose a penalty bid. This occurs when a particular underwriter repays to the underwriters a portion of the underwriting discount received by it because one underwriter has repurchased shares sold by or for the account of the other underwriter in stabilizing or short covering transactions.

      These activities by the underwriters may stabilize, maintain or otherwise affect the market price of the common stock. As a result, the price of the common stock may be higher than the price that otherwise might exist in the open market. If these activities are commenced, the underwriters may discontinue them at any time. These transactions may be effected on the Nasdaq National Market, in the over-the-counter market or otherwise.

      WR Hambrecht + Co, LLC, The Seidler Companies Incorporated and at least one other selling group member currently intend to act as a market maker for the common stock following this offering. However, they are not obligated to do so and may discontinue any market making at any time.

Indemnity

      The underwriting agreement contains covenants of indemnity between the underwriter and us against certain civil liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act, and liabilities arising from breaches of representations and warranties contained in the underwriting agreement.

VALIDITY OF THE SECURITIES

      The validity of our common stock offered by this prospectus will be passed upon for us by Morrison & Foerster LLP, Los Angeles, California. The validity of the common stock offered by this prospectus will be passed upon for the underwriters by Manatt, Phelps & Phillips, LLP, Costa Mesa, California.

EXPERTS

      The consolidated financial statements of BofI Holding, Inc. included in this prospectus have been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report appearing herein, and has been so included in reliance upon the report of such firm given upon their authority as experts in accounting and auditing.

106


Table of Contents

WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION

      We have filed a registration statement on Form S-1 with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the SEC. This prospectus, which is part of the registration statement, does not contain all the information included in the registration statement. Because some information is omitted, you should refer to the registration statement and its exhibits. For copies of actual contracts of documents referred to in this prospectus, you should refer to the exhibits attached to the registration statement. You may review a copy of the registration statement, including the attached exhibits, at the SEC’s Public Reference Room:

Public Reference Room

Room 1024
450 Fifth Street, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20549

      You may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC also maintains an Internet site that contains reports, proxy statements, and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with the SEC. The address of the SEC’s website is http://www.sec.gov.

107


Table of Contents

BOFI HOLDING, INC.

 
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
         
Page

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
    F-2  
Consolidated Balance Sheets at September 30, 2004 (unaudited) and June 30, 2004 and 2003
    F-3  
Consolidated Statements of Income for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 (unaudited) and for each of the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002
    F-4  
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity and Comprehensive Income for the three months ended September 30, 2004 (unaudited) and for each of the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002
    F-5  
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 (unaudited) and for each of the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002
    F-6  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
    F-8  

F-1


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

Board of Directors and Stockholders
Bofl Holding, Inc.

      We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Bofl Holding, Inc. and subsidiary (the “Company”) as of June 30, 2004 and 2003, and the related consolidated statements of income, stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended June 30, 2004. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

      We conducted our audits in accordance with standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

      In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Bofl Holding, Inc. and subsidiary as of June 30, 2004 and 2003, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended June 30, 2004, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

  /s/ DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP

Los Angeles, California

October 13, 2004

F-2


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

(Dollars in thousands, except share data)
                             
June 30,
September 30,
2004 2004 2003



(unaudited)
ASSETS
 
Cash and due from banks
  $ 2,600     $ 1,838     $ 2,673  
 
Money market mutual funds
    521       519       514  
 
Federal funds sold
    18,010       22,502       3,275  
     
     
     
 
   
Total cash and cash equivalents
    21,131       24,859       6,462  
 
Time deposits in financial institutions
    8,909       9,503       11,872  
 
Investment securities available for sale
    47,458              
 
Investment securities held to maturity
    8,244       3,665       441  
 
Stock of the Federal Home Loan Bank, at cost
    5,729       4,789       2,795  
 
Loans held for investment — net of allowance for loan losses of $1,060 in September 2004, $1,045 in June 2004 and $790 in June 2003
    355,105       355,261       245,933  
 
Loans held for sale
    216       435       3,602  
 
Accrued interest receivable
    1,657       1,486       1,107  
 
Furniture, equipment and software — net
    157       181       214  
 
Deferred income tax
    453       407       461  
 
Bank-owned life insurance — cash surrender value
    3,934       3,893        
 
Other assets
    946       560       577  
     
     
     
 
TOTAL
  $ 453,939     $ 405,039     $ 273,464  
     
     
     
 
 
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Deposits:
                       
 
Non-interest bearing
  $ 6,647     $ 2,279     $ 3,299  
 
Interest bearing
    289,030       267,562       190,693  
     
     
     
 
   
Total deposits
    295,677       269,841       193,992  
Advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank
    121,475       101,446       55,900  
Note payable
    3,300       1,300        
Accrued interest payable
    324       283       272  
Income tax payable
    497              
Accounts payable and accrued liabilities
    370       410       415  
     
     
     
 
   
Total liabilities
    421,643       373,280       250,579  
COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES (Note 12) 
                       
STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY:
                       
 
Convertible preferred stock — $10,000 stated value; 1,000,000 shares authorized; 675 shares issued and outstanding
    6,637       6,637        
 
Common stock — $.01 par value; 10,000,000 shares authorized; 4,519,649 (September 2004), 4,506,524 (June 2004) and 4,474,351 (June 2003) shares issued and outstanding
    45       45       45  
 
Additional paid-in capital
    22,418       22,363       22,161  
 
Accumulated other comprehensive loss, net of tax
    (78 )            
 
Retained earnings
    3,274       2,714       679  
     
     
     
 
   
Total stockholders’ equity
    32,296       31,759       22,885  
     
     
     
 
TOTAL
  $ 453,939     $ 405,039     $ 273,464  
     
     
     
 

See notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-3


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME

(Dollars in thousands, except earnings per share)
                                               
Three Months Ended
September 30, Year Ended June 30,


2004 2003 2004 2003 2002





(unaudited)
INTEREST AND DIVIDEND INCOME:
                                       
 
Loans, including fees
  $ 4,472     $ 3,431     $ 15,177     $ 12,723     $ 10,765  
 
Investments
    354       150       595       791       876  
     
     
     
     
     
 
     
Total interest and dividend income
    4,826       3,581       15,772       13,514       11,641  
     
     
     
     
     
 
INTEREST EXPENSE:
                                       
 
Deposits
    1,851       1,576       6,534       6,708       6,955  
 
Advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank
    867       600       2,648       1,718       1,143  
 
Other borrowings
    20             60             46  
     
     
     
     
     
 
     
Total interest expense
    2,738       2,176       9,242       8,426       8,144  
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net interest income
    2,088       1,405       6,530       5,088       3,497  
Provision for loan losses
    15       15       255       285       195  
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net interest income, after provision for loan losses
    2,073       1,390       6,275       4,803       3,302  
     
     
     
     
     
 
NON-INTEREST INCOME:
                                       
   
Prepayment penalty fee income
    86       97       624       446       114  
   
Gain on sale of loans originated for sale
    11       164       364       778       67  
   
Banking service fees and other income
    72       27       202       125       116  
     
     
     
     
     
 
     
Total non-interest income
    169       288       1,190       1,349       297  
     
     
     
     
     
 
NON-INTEREST EXPENSE:
                                       
 
Salaries and employee benefits
    608       465       1,880       1,538       1,300  
 
Professional services
    85       32       166       152       172  
 
Occupancy and equipment
    65       60       245       205       161  
 
Data processing and internet
    90       78       328       278       210  
 
Advertising and promotional
    47       44       220       189       141  
 
Depreciation and amortization
    27       24       97       144       118  
 
Service contract termination
          197       197              
 
Other general and administrative
    217       177       686       652       906  
     
     
     
     
     
 
     
Total non-interest expense
    1,139       1,077       3,819       3,158       3,008  
     
     
     
     
     
 
INCOME BEFORE INCOME TAXES
    1,103       601       3,646       2,994       591  
INCOME TAXES (BENEFIT)
    442       247       1,471       1,264       (429 )
     
     
     
     
     
 
NET INCOME
  $ 661     $ 354     $ 2,175     $ 1,730     $ 1,020  
     
     
     
     
     
 
NET INCOME ATTRIBUTABLE TO COMMON STOCK
  $ 560     $ 354     $ 2,035     $ 1,730     $ 1,020  
     
     
     
     
     
 
Basic earnings per share
  $ 0.12     $ 0.08     $ 0.45     $ 0.39     $ 0.25  
Diluted earnings per share
    0.11       0.07       0.39       0.34       0.21  

See notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-4


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

(Dollars in thousands, except share data)
                                                                           
Accumulated
Convertible Retained Other
Preferred Stock Common Stock Additional Earnings Comprehensive


Paid-In (Accumulated Loss, Net of Comprehensive
Shares Amount Shares Amount Capital Deficit) Tax Income Total









BALANCE — July 1, 2001
        $       3,707,116     $ 37     $ 13,937     $ (2,071 )   $             $ 11,903  
 
Issuance of common stock
                    627,100       6       6,177                               6,183  
 
Exercise of common stock options
                    185               1                               1  
 
Extension of term to exercise common stock warrants
                                    394                               394  
 
Net income
                                            1,020             $ 1,020       1,020  
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
BALANCE — June 30, 2002
                    4,334,401       43       20,509       (1,051 )                   19,501  
 
Issuance of common stock
                    139,950       2       1,652                               1,654  
 
Net income
                                            1,730             $ 1,730       1,730  
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
BALANCE — June 30, 2003
                    4,474,351       45       22,161       679                     22,885  
 
Exercise of common stock options
                    23,423               165                               165  
 
Exercise of common stock warrants
                    8,750               37                               37  
 
Issuance of convertible preferred stock
    675       6,637                                                       6,637  
 
Cash dividends on convertible preferred stock
                                            (140 )                     (140 )
 
Net income
                                            2,175             $ 2,175       2,175  
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
BALANCE — June 30, 2004
    675       6,637       4,506,524       45       22,363       2,714                     31,759  
 
Comprehensive income:
                                                                       
 
Net income (unaudited)
                                            661             $ 661       661  
 
Net unrealized loss from investment securities (unaudited)
                                                    (78 )     (78 )     (78 )
                                                             
         
 
Total comprehensive income (unaudited)
                                                          $ 583          
                                                             
         
 
Cash dividends on convertible preferred stock (unaudited)
                                            (101 )                     (101 )
 
Exercise of common stock warrants (unaudited)
                    13,125               55                           55  
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
             
 
BALANCE — September 30, 2004 (unaudited)
    675     $ 6,637       4,519,649     $ 45     $ 22,418     $ 3,274     $ (78 )           $ 32,296  
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
             
 

See notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-5


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(Dollars in thousands)
                                                 
Three Months Ended
September 30, Year Ended June 30,


2004 2003 2004 2003 2002





(unaudited)
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:
                                       
 
Net income
  $ 661     $ 354     $ 2,175     $ 1,730     $ 1,020  
 
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:
                                       
   
Amortization of premiums on investment securities
    1       1             3       10  
   
Amortization of premiums and deferred loan fees
    133       146       485       481       505  
   
Provision for loan losses
    15       15       255       285       195  
   
Deferred income taxes
    6       41       54       (31 )     (430 )
   
Origination of loans held for sale
    (2,514 )     (35,010 )     (76,550 )     (124,739 )     (6,994 )
   
Gain on sales of loans held for sale
    (11 )     (164 )     (364 )     (778 )     (67 )
   
Proceeds from sale of loans held for sale
    2,744       37,806       80,081       122,042       6,932  
   
Depreciation and amortization
    27       24       97       144       118  
   
Amortization of borrowing costs
    29       23       110              
   
Stock dividends from the Federal Home Loan Bank
    (52 )     (23 )     (118 )     (89 )     (51 )
   
Extension of term to exercise common stock warrants
                            394  
   
Net changes in assets and liabilities which provide (use) cash:
                                       
     
Accrued interest receivable
    (171 )     14       (379 )     (139 )     (106 )
     
Other assets
    (427 )     120       (76 )     17       (534 )
     
Accrued interest payable
    41       (24 )     11       (111 )     (95 )
     
Accounts payable and accrued liabilities
    457       55       (5 )     203       (61 )
     
     
     
     
     
 
       
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities
    939       3,378       5,776       (982 )     836  
CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES:
                                       
 
Purchase of investment securities available for sale
    (48,214 )                        
 
Purchases of investment securities held to maturity
    (5,287 )     (199 )     (9,142 )     (14,355 )     (10,575 )
 
Proceeds from maturities of investments
    1,927       2,027       8,287       13,055       4,150  
 
Net increase in stock of the Federal Home Loan Bank
    (888 )     (150 )     (1,876 )     (1,005 )     (854 )
 
Origination of loans
    (11,329 )     (18,059 )     (64,478 )     (58,609 )     (34,659 )
 
Purchases of loans
    (5,336 )     (11,888 )     (129,193 )     (81,778 )     (132,298 )
 
Principal repayments on loans
    16,673       28,957       83,603       60,939       138,708  
 
Purchases of furniture, equipment and software
    (3 )     (4 )     (64 )     (58 )     (29 )
 
Premium paid for bank-owned life insurance
                (3,800 )            
     
     
     
     
     
 
       
Net cash provided by (used) in investing activities
    (52,457 )     684       (116,663 )     (81,811 )     (35,557 )

F-6


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS — (Continued)

(Dollars in thousands)
                                             
Three Months Ended
September 30, Year Ended June 30,


2004 2003 2004 2003 2002





(unaudited)
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES:
                                       
 
Net increase in deposits
  $ 25,836     $ 8,198     $ 75,849     $ 26,374     $ 40,414  
 
Proceeds from the Federal Home Loan Bank advances
    20,000       2,436       48,436       26,000       18,000  
 
Repayment of the Federal Home Loan Bank advance
                (3,000 )           (4,000 )
 
Proceeds from federal funds purchased
                            6,000  
 
Repayment of federal funds purchased
                            (6,000 )
 
Proceeds from issuance of notes payable to related parties
                            1,700  
 
Repayment of notes payable
                            (2,570 )
 
Proceeds from issuance of common stock
                      1,654       6,184  
 
Proceeds from revolving line term loan facility
    2,000             1,300              
 
Net proceeds from issuance of convertible preferred stock
                6,637              
 
Proceeds from exercise of common stock options and warrants
    55       112       202              
 
Cash dividends on convertible preferred stock
    (101 )           (140 )            
     
     
     
     
     
 
   
Net cash provided by financing activities
    47,790       10,746       129,284       54,028       59,728  
     
     
     
     
     
 
NET CHANGE IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
    (3,728 )     14,808       18,397       (28,765 )     25,007  
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS — Beginning of year
    24,859       6,462       6,462       35,227       10,220  
     
     
     
     
     
 
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS — End of year
  $ 21,131     $ 21,270     $ 24,859     $ 6,462     $ 35,227  
     
     
     
     
     
 
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION:
                                       
 
Interest paid on deposits and borrowed funds
  $ 2,671     $ 2,183     $ 9,686     $ 8,537     $ 8,238  
 
Income taxes paid
  $ 55     $     $ 1,364     $ 1,301     $ 2  

See notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-7


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002
 
1. Organizations and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

      Basis of Presentation and Consolidation  — The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of BofI Holding, Inc. and its wholly owned subsidiary, Bank of Internet USA (collectively, the “Company”). All significant intercompany balances have been eliminated in consolidation.

      BofI Holding, Inc. was incorporated in the State of Delaware on July 6, 1999 for the purpose of organizing and launching an Internet-based savings bank. The Bank of Internet USA (the “Bank”), which opened for business over the Internet on July 4, 2000, is subject to regulation and examination by the Office of Thrift Supervision (“OTS”), its primary regulator. The Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“FDIC”) insures the Bank’s deposit accounts up to the maximum allowable amount.

      During the year ended June 30, 2003, the Company changed its name from “BofI.com Holding, Inc.” to “BofI Holding, Inc.”

      Unaudited Interim Financial Information  — The accompanying unaudited interim consolidated balance sheet as of September 30, 2004, the consolidated statements of income for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003, the consolidated statements of cash flows for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 and the consolidated statement of stockholders’ equity for the three months ended September 30, 2004 are unaudited. These unaudited interim consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles. In the opinion of the Company’s management, the unaudited interim consolidated financial statements have been prepared on the same basis as the audited consolidated financial statements and include all adjustments necessary for the fair presentation of the Company’s statement of financial position at September 30, 2004, its results of operations and its cash flows for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003. The results for the three months ended September 30, 2004 are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected for the year ending June 30, 2005.

      Use of Estimates  — In preparing consolidated financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America, management is required to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the date of the balance sheet and reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results may differ from those estimates. Material estimates that are particularly susceptible to significant change in the near term relate to the determination of the allowance for loan losses and the valuation of deferred tax assets.

      Business  — The Bank provides financial services to consumers through the Internet. The Bank’s deposit products are demand accounts, savings accounts and time deposits marketed to consumers located in all fifty states. The Bank’s primary lending products are residential single family and multifamily mortgage loans.

      Cash Equivalents  — Cash and cash equivalents include cash and due from banks, money market mutual funds and federal funds sold, all of which have original maturities within ninety days.

      Federal Reserve Board regulations require depository institutions to maintain certain minimum reserve balances. Included in cash were balances maintained at the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco of $684 at September 30, 2004 and $770 and $1,037 at June 30, 2004 and 2003, respectively.

      Interest Rate Risk  — The Bank’s assets and liabilities are generally monetary in nature and interest rate changes have an effect on the Bank’s performance. The Bank decreases the effect of interest rate changes on its performance by striving to match maturities and interest sensitivity between loans and deposits. A significant change in interest rates could have a material effect on the Bank’s results of operations.

F-8


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

      Deferred Loan Fees and Costs  — Loan origination fees and certain direct origination costs for loans held for investment are capitalized and recognized as an adjustment to the interest yield of the related loans over their estimated lives.

      Loans Held for Sale  — Loans originated and intended for sale in the secondary market are carried at the lower of cost or estimated fair value in the aggregate. Net unrealized losses, if any, are recognized through a valuation allowance by charges to income.

      Allowance for Loan Losses  — The allowance for loan losses is maintained at a level estimated to provide for probable losses in the loan portfolio. Management determines the adequacy of the allowance based upon reviews of individual loans and pools of loans, recent loss experience, current economic conditions, the risk characteristics of the various categories of loans and other pertinent factors. This evaluation is inherently subjective and requires estimates that are susceptible to significant revision as more information becomes available. The allowance is increased by the provision for loan losses, net of recoveries of loans previously charged-off, which is charged against current period operating results. The allowance is decreased by the amount of charge-offs of loans deemed uncollectible.

      A loan is considered impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Bank will be unable to collect the scheduled payments of principal or interest when due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Factors considered by management in determining impairment include payment status, collateral value and the probability of collecting scheduled principal and interest payments when due. Loans that experience insignificant payment delays and payment shortfalls generally are not classified as impaired. Impairment is measured on a loan by loan basis by either the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate or the fair value of the collateral if repayment of the loan is expected primarily from the sale of the collateral.

      Investment Securities Available for Sale  — Securities available-for-sale are reported at estimated fair value, with unrealized gains and losses, net of the related tax effects, excluded from operations and reported as a separate component of accumulated other comprehensive income or loss. Amortization of premiums and accretion of discounts on securities are recorded as yield adjustments on such securities using the effective interest method. The specific identification method is used for purposes of determining cost in computing realized gains and losses on investment securities sold. At each reporting date, available-for-sale securities are assessed to determine whether there is an other-than-temporary impairment. Such impairment is required to be recognized in current earnings rather than other comprehensive income or loss.

      Investment Securities Held to Maturity  — Securities that management has the positive intent and ability to hold to maturity are classified as “held to maturity” and recorded at amortized cost. Purchase premiums and discounts are recognized in interest income using the interest method over the terms of the securities. Declines in the fair value of held-to-maturity securities below their cost that are deemed to be other-than-temporary are reflected in earnings as realized losses.

      Furniture, Equipment and Software  — Fixed asset purchases in excess of five hundred dollars are capitalized and recorded at cost. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets, which is three to seven years. Leasehold improvements are amortized over the lesser of the assets’ useful lives or the lease term.

      Interest Income on Loans  — Interest on loans is generally recorded over the terms of the loans based on the unpaid principal balances. Accrual of interest is discontinued when either principal or interest becomes 90 days past due or when, in management’s opinion, collectibility of such interest is doubtful. In addition, accrued but uncollected interest is reversed when a loan becomes 90 days past due.

F-9


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

      Premiums and Discounts on Loans Purchased  — Premiums and discounts on loans purchased from third parties are capitalized and amortized or accreted over the expected lives of the loans as an adjustment to yield. Such premiums and discounts are classified with the loan balance to which they relate for financial reporting purposes.

      Income Taxes  — Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are determined using the liability (or balance sheet) method. Under this method, the net deferred tax asset or liability is determined based on the tax effects of the temporary differences between the book and tax bases of the various balance sheet assets and liabilities and gives current recognition to changes in tax rates and laws. The Company records a valuation allowance when management believes it is more likely than not that deferred tax assets will not be realized.

      Earnings Per Share  — Earnings per share are presented under two formats: basic EPS and diluted EPS. Basic EPS is computed by dividing the net income (after deducting dividends on preferred stock) by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Diluted EPS is computed by dividing the net income (after deducting dividends on preferred stock) by the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the year, plus the impact of dilutive potential common shares, such as stock options and stock warrants. The impact on earnings per share from the convertible preferred stock is anti-dilutive.

      Stock Options  — The Company accounts for its stock-based employee compensation under the recognition and measurement principles of APB Opinion No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees, and related interpretations. No stock-based employee compensation cost is reflected in the income statements, as all options granted under those plans are granted with exercise prices not less than the fair market value of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant. The following table illustrates the effect on net income and net income per share had the Company applied the fair value recognition provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation, to stock-based employee compensation.

                                           
Three Months
Ended September 30, Year Ended June 30


2004 2003 2004 2003 2002





(unaudited)
(Amounts in thousands, except per share)
Net income attributable to common stock, as reported
  $ 560     $ 354     $ 2,035     $ 1,730     $ 1,020  
Deduct:
                                       
Total stock-based employee compensation expense determined under fair value based method for all awards, net of related tax effect
    (22 )     (22 )     (90 )     (112 )     (107 )
     
     
     
     
     
 
Pro forma net income
  $ 538     $ 332     $ 1,945     $ 1,618     $ 913  
     
     
     
     
     
 
Earnings per share
                                       
 
Basic — as reported
  $ 0.12     $ 0.08     $ 0.45     $ 0.39     $ 0.25  
 
Basic — pro forma
  $ 0.12     $ 0.07     $ 0.43     $ 0.36     $ 0.22  
 
Diluted — as reported
  $ 0.11     $ 0.07     $ 0.39     $ 0.34     $ 0.21  
 
Diluted — pro forma
  $ 0.10     $ 0.06     $ 0.38     $ 0.32     $ 0.19  

F-10


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

      The weighted-average grant-date fair values of options granted were calculated using the following assumptions:

                                 
Three Months
Ended Year Ended June 30
September 30,
2004 2004 2003 2002




(unaudited)
Risk-free interest rates
    3.9 %     4.2 %     4.3 %     5.1 %
Dividend yield
                       
Volatility
    0.0 %     0.0 %     0.0 %     0.0 %
Weighted average expected life
    7 years       7  years       7  years       7  years  

      The weighted-average fair value at grant date for the options granted during the three months ended September 30, 2004 was $2.37 and during the year ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $2.52, $1.83 and $2.97 per share, respectively.

      New Accounting Pronouncements  — In March 2004, Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 105 (“SAB 105”) was issued, which provides guidance regarding loan commitments that are accounted for as derivative instruments under FASB No. 133 (as amended), Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities. In this Bulletin, the SEC ruled that the amount of the expected servicing rights should not be included when determining the fair value of derivative interest rate lock commitments. This guidance must be applied to rate locks initiated after March 31, 2004. The adoption of SAB 105 did not have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

      In December 2003, the FASB issued Interpretation No. 46R (“FIN 46R”), which revised the January 2003, Interpretation No. 46 (“FIN 46”), Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an interpretation of Accounting Research Bulletin No. 51. The revision clarifies how variable interest entities should be identified and evaluated for consolidation purposes. The Company adopted FIN 46R as of June 30, 2004. The adoption of FIN 46R did not have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

      In December 2003, the Accounting Standards Executive Committee of the AICPA issued Statement of Position No. 03-3 (“SOP 03-3”), Accounting for Certain Loans or Debt Securities Acquired in a Transfer. SOP 03-3 addresses the accounting for differences between contractual cash flows and the cash flows expected to be collected from purchased loans or debt securities if those differences are attributable, in part, to credit quality. SOP 03-3 requires purchased loans and debt securities to be recorded initially at fair value based on the present value of the cash flows expected to be collected with no carryover of any valuation allowance previously recognized by the seller. Interest income should be recognized based on the effective yield from the cash flows expected to be collected. To the extent that the purchased loans or debt securities experience subsequent deterioration in credit quality, a valuation allowance would be established for any additional cash flows that are not expected to be received. However, if more cash flows subsequently are expected to be received than originally estimated, the effective yield would be adjusted on a prospective basis. SOP 03-3 will be effective for loans and debt securities acquired after December 31, 2004. Management does not expect the adoption of this statement to have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

      In March 2004, the Emerging Issues Task Force (“EITF”) reached consensus on the guidance provided in EITF Issue No. 03-1, The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and its Application to Certain Investments (“EITF 03-1”), as applicable to debt and equity securities that are within the scope of SFAS No. 115, Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and Equity Securities and equity securities that are accounted for using the cost method specified in Accounting Policy Board Opinion No. 18 The Equity Method of Accounting for Investments in Common Stock. An investment is impaired if the fair value of the

F-11


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

investment is less than its cost. EITF 03-1 outlines an impairment would be considered other-than-temporary unless: a) the investor has the ability and intent to hold an investment for a reasonable period of time sufficient for the recovery of the fair value up to (or beyond) the cost of the investment, and b) evidence indicating that the cost of the investment is recoverable within a reasonable period of time outweighs evidence to the contrary. Although not presumptive, a pattern of selling investments prior to the forecasted recovery of fair value may call into question the investor’s intent. In addition, the severity and duration of the impairment should also be considered in determining whether the impairment is other-than-temporary. In September 2004, the FASB staff issued a proposed Board-directed FASB Staff Position, FSP EITF Issue 03-1-a, Implementation Guidance for the Application of Paragraph 16 of EITF Issue No. 03-1. The proposed FSP would provide implementation guidance with respect to debt securities that are impaired solely due to interest rates and/or sector spreads and analyzed for other-than-temporary impairment under paragraph 16 of Issue 03-1. The Board also issued FSP EITF Issue 03-1-b, which delays the effective date for the measurement and recognition guidance contained in paragraphs 10-20 of EITF 03-1. The delay does not suspend the requirement to recognize other-than-temporary impairments as required by existing authoritative literature. Adoption of this standard may cause the Company to recognize impairment losses in the Consolidated Statements of Income which would not have been recognized under the current guidance or to recognize such losses in earlier periods, especially those due to increases in interest rates. Since fluctuations in the fair value for available-for-sale securities are already recorded in Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss, adoption of this standard is not expected to have a significant impact on stockholders’ equity.

      Reclassifications  — Certain amounts in the prior-period financial statements have been reclassified to conform to the current-period presentation.

 
2. Time Deposits in Financial Institutions

      The Company had insured time deposits at various financial institutions totaling $8,909 at September 30, 2004 and $9,503 and $11,872 at June 30, 2004 and 2003, respectively. The carrying amounts of such investments as shown in the balance sheets are at cost. Time deposits of $6,034 will mature within one year and $2,875 will mature within one to five years.

3.     Investment Securities

      Available-for-sale  — Amortized costs and fair value of investment securities available-for-sale are summarized as follows:

                                 
September 30, 2004

Amortized Unrealized Unrealized
Available-for-sale Cost Gains Losses Fair Value





(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
Mortgage-backed securities — (unaudited)
  $ 47,588     $ 29     $ (159 )   $ 47,458  
     
     
     
     
 
    $ 47,588     $ 29     $ (159 )   $ 47,458  
     
     
     
     
 

F-12


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

      Fair values of available-for-sale securities by contractual maturity are as follows:

                                                                                 
September 30, 2004

Due After One After Five After
Total Yield Within Yield But Within Yield But Within Yield Ten Yield
Amount (1) One Year (1) Five Years (1) Ten Years (1) Years (1)










(unaudited)
(Amounts in thousands, except percentages)
GNMA MBS(2)
  $ 9,920       3.01 %   $ 214       2.95 %   $ 931       2.96 %   $ 1,346       2.96 %   $ 7,429       3.02 %
FNMA MBS(2)
    37,668       3.93 %     651       3.93 %     2,887       3.93 %     4,353       3.93 %     29,777       3.93 %
     
             
             
             
             
         
Total debt securities
  $ 47,588       3.74 %   $ 865       3.69 %   $ 3,818       3.69 %   $ 5,699       3.70 %   $ 37,206       3.75 %
     
             
             
             
             
         
Total fair value of debt securities
  $ 47,458       3.74 %   $ 865       3.69 %   $ 3,818       3.69 %   $ 5,699       3.70 %   $ 37,076       3.75 %
     
             
             
             
             
         

      Held to maturity  — Amortized costs and fair values of investment securities held to maturity are summarized as follows:

                                 
September 30, 2004

Amortized Unrealized Unrealized
Held to maturity Cost Gains Losses Fair Value





(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
Mortgage-backed securities — (unaudited)
  $ 4,827     $     $ (40 )   $ 4,787  
U.S. Government security — (unaudited)
    3,417       23             3,440  
     
     
     
     
 
    $ 8,244     $ 23     $ (40 )   $ 8,227  
     
     
     
     
 
 
    June 30, 2004
   
 
Mortgage-backed securities
  $ 256     $ 2     $     $ 258  
U.S. Government security
    3,409       7             3,416  
     
     
     
     
 
    $ 3,665     $ 9     $     $ 3,674  
     
     
     
     
 
 
    June 30, 2003
   
 
Mortgage-backed securities
  $ 441     $ 8     $     $ 449  
U.S. Government security
                       
     
     
     
     
 
    $ 441     $ 8     $     $ 449  
     
     
     
     
 

F-13


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

      Fair values of held to maturity securities by contractual maturity are as follows:

                                                                                 
September 30, 2004

Due After One After Five After
Total Yield Within Yield But Within Yield But Within Yield Ten Yield
Amount (1) One Year (1) Five Years (1) Ten Years (1) Years (1)










(unaudited)
(Amounts in thousands, except percentages)
U.S. Government and Agency
  $ 3,417       3.65 %   $           $ 3,417       3.65 %   $           $        
FHLMC MBS(2)
    4,595       4.11 %     78       4.11 %     349       4.11 %     529       4.11 %     3,639       4.11 %
FNMA MBS(2)
    232       2.32 %     6       2.32 %     26       2.32 %     38       2.32 %     162       2.32 %
     
             
             
             
             
         
Total debt securities
  $ 8,244       3.87 %   $ 84       3.98 %   $ 3,792       3.68 %   $ 567       3.99 %   $ 3,801       4.03 %
     
             
             
             
             
         
Total fair value of debt securities
  $ 8,227       3.87 %   $ 84       3.98 %   $ 3,815       3.68 %   $ 567       3.99 %   $ 3,761       4.03 %
     
             
             
             
             
         
                                                                                 
June 30, 2004

Due After One After Five After
Total Yield Within Yield But Within Yield But Within Yield Ten Yield
Amount (1) One Year (1) Five Years (1) Ten Years (1) Years (1)










U.S. Government and Agency
  $ 3,409       3.64%     $           $ 3,409       3.64%     $           $        
Mortgage-backed security
    256       2.64%       6       2.64%       26       2.64%       38       2.64%       186       2.64%  
     
             
             
             
             
         
Total investment securities
  $ 3,665       3.57%     $ 6       2.64%     $ 3,435       3.63%     $ 38       2.64%     $ 186       2.64%  
     
             
             
             
             
         
Total fair value of investment securities
  $ 3,674       3.57%     $ 6       2.64%     $ 3,442       3.63%     $ 38       2.64%     $ 188       2.64%  
     
             
             
             
             
         


(1)  Weighted average yield at end of year is based on the amortized cost of the securities. The weighted average yield excludes principal-only strips.
 
(2)  Mortgage-backed securities were allocated based on contractual principal maturities assuming no prepayments.

F-14


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)
 
4. Loans

      The composition of the portfolio of loans held for investment is as follows:

                             
June 30
September 30,
2004 2004 2003



(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
Mortgage loans on real estate:
                       
 
Residential single family (one to four units)
  $ 23,753     $ 21,753     $ 42,124  
 
Residential multifamily (five units or more)
    318,888       320,971       191,426  
 
Commercial and land
    11,715       11,659       11,839  
 
Consumer
    48       63       62  
     
     
     
 
   
Total
    354,404       354,446       245,451  
 
Allowance for loan losses
    (1,060 )     (1,045 )     (790 )
 
Unamortized premiums, net of deferred loan fees
    1,761       1,860       1,272  
     
     
     
 
    $ 355,105     $ 355,261     $ 245,933  
     
     
     
 

      An analysis of the allowance for loan losses is as follows:

                                         
For the Three
Months Ended
September 30, Year Ended June 30


2004 2003 2004 2003 2002





(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
Balance — beginning of period
  $ 1,045     $ 790     $ 790     $ 505     $ 310  
Provision for loan loss
    15       15       255       285       195  
Amounts charged off
                             
Recoveries
                             
     
     
     
     
     
 
Balance — end of period
  $ 1,060     $ 805     $ 1,045     $ 790     $ 505  
     
     
     
     
     
 

      At September 30, 2004 and June 30, 2004 and 2003, approximately 63.5%, 64.5% and 70.0%, respectively, of the Company’s loans are collaterialized with real-property collateral located in California and therefore exposed to economic conditions within this market region.

      In the ordinary course of business, the Company has granted loans collaterialized by real property to principal officers, directors and their affiliates and employees with interest rates ranging from 4.5% to 7.875%. New loans granted to principal officers, directors and their affiliates and employees were none, none and $1,230 during the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively. Total principal payments were $413, $2,007 and $26 during the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively. At September 30, 2004 and June 30, 2004 and 2003, these loans amounted to $950, $953 and $1,366, respectively, and are included in loans held for investment. Interest earned on these loans was $9, $13, $52, $123 and $176 during the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 and the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively.

      The Company had no loans on nonaccrual and no impaired loans as of September 30, 2004 and 2003 and June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002.

F-15


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

      The Company’s loan portfolio consists of approximately 8% fixed interest rate loans and 92% adjustable interest rate loans as of September 30, 2004. The Company’s adjustable rate loans are generally based upon indices using U.S. Treasuries, LIBOR, and 11 th District cost of funds.

      As of September 30, 2004, June 30, 2004 and 2003, purchased loans serviced by others were $160,726 or 45%, $168,035 or 47%, and $119,887 or 49%, respectively, of the loan portfolio.

 
5. Furniture, Equipment and Software

      A summary of the cost and accumulated depreciation for furniture, equipment and software is as follows:

                           
June 30
September 30,
2004 2004 2003



(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
Leasehold improvements
  $ 10     $ 10     $ 10  
Furniture and fixtures
    162       161       127  
Computer hardware and equipment
    312       310       291  
Software
    165       165       154  
     
     
     
 
 
Total
    649       646       582  
Less accumulated depreciation and amortization
    (492 )     (465 )     (368 )
     
     
     
 
Furniture, equipment and software — net
  $ 157     $ 181     $ 214  
     
     
     
 

      Depreciation and amortization expense for the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002 amounted to $97, $144 and $118, respectively. Depreciation expense for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 was $27 and $24, respectively.

F-16


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)
 
6. Deposits

      Deposits accounts are summarized as follows:

                                                   
June 30

September 30,
2004 2004 2003



Amount Rate* Amount Rate* Amount Rate*






(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
Non-interest bearing
  $ 6,647       0.00%     $ 2,279       0.00%     $ 3,299       0.00%  
Interest bearing:
                                               
 
Demand
    27,221       1.38%       26,725       1.35%       29,902       1.38%  
 
Savings
    91,014       1.96%       94,120       1.96%       18,823       1.91%  
Time deposits:
                                               
 
Under $100,000
    106,021       3.28%       88,082       3.44%       95,489       3.93%  
 
$100,000 or more
    64,774       3.16%       58,635       3.20%       46,479       3.96%  
     
             
             
         
Total time deposits
    170,795       3.23%       146,717       3.35%       141,968       3.94%  
     
             
             
         
Total interest bearing
    289,030       2.66%       267,562       2.66%       190,693       3.34%  
     
             
             
         
Total deposits
  $ 295,677       2.60%     $ 269,841       2.64%     $ 193,992       3.28%  
     
             
             
         


Based on weighted average stated interest rates.

      The scheduled maturities of time deposits are as follows as of June 30, 2004:

         
Within 12 months
  $ 80,365  
13 to 24 months
    23,018  
25 to 36 months
    14,760  
37 to 48 months
    14,309  
49 months and thereafter
    14,265  
     
 
Total
  $ 146,717  
     
 
 
7. Advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank

      At September 30, 2004, the Company’s fixed-rate advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”) had interest rates that ranged from 1.94% to 5.03% with a weighted-average of 3.20%. At June 30, 2004 and 2003, the Company’s fixed-rate FHLB advances had interest rates that ranged from 1.42% to 5.03% with a weighted average of 3.19% and ranged from 2.56% to 5.21% with a weighted average of 4.40%, respectively.

F-17


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

      Fixed rate advances from FHLB are scheduled to mature as follows:

                                                 
September 30, 2004 June 30, 2004 June 30, 2003



Weighted- Weighted- Weighted-
Amount Average Rate Amount Average Rate Amount Average Rate






(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
Within one year
  $ 23,000       1.99 %   $ 3,000       1.42 %   $ 15,900       5.21 %
After one but within two years
    24,500       2.34 %     20,500       2.36 %           0.00 %
After two but within three years
    39,279       3.90 %     36,500       3.66 %     3,000       2.56 %
After three but within four years
    23,785       3.70 %     22,768       3.35 %     14,000       4.86 %
After four but within five years
    3,000       3.31 %     10,770       2.80 %     18,000       3.70 %
After five years
    7,911       4.32 %     7,908       3.94 %     5,000       4.17 %
     
             
             
         
    $ 121,475       3.20 %   $ 101,446       3.19 %   $ 55,900       4.40 %
     
             
             
         

      FHLB advances have been reduced by debt issuance costs of $425 at September 30, 2004. Debt issuance costs are amortized using the interest method over the life of the FHLB advance. Amortization of $29 for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and $110 for the year ended June 30, 2004 is included in interest expense.

      The Company’s advances from FHLB were collateralized by certain real estate loans with an aggregate unpaid balance of $149,525, $154,700 and $89,792 at September 30, 2004, June 30, 2004 and 2003, respectively, by the Company’s investment in capital stock of FHLB of San Francisco and by its investment in mortgage-backed securities.

      The maximum amounts advanced from the FHLB were $121,900 during the three months ended September 30, 2004. The maximum amounts advanced from the FHLB were $101,446, $55,900 and $29,900 during the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively. As of September 30, 2004, the Company had $36,813 available for advances from the FHLB for terms up to seven years and $4,500 available under a federal funds line of credit with a major bank.

 
8. Note Payable and Borrowings

      On October 24, 2003, the Company entered into a $5,000 loan facility with a commercial bank consisting of a one-year revolving line of credit plus a fully amortizing term loan of up to nine years. Under the terms of the loan facility, a one-time loan fee of 1% ($50) was paid at commencement and interest is payable quarterly at prime plus 1% per annum. Principal is payable in 36 equal quarterly installments starting on January 24, 2005. The Company may prepay all or a portion of the principal at any time without a prepayment penalty. At September 30, 2004, the note payable balance was $3,300 and the interest rate was 5.75%.

      The loan facility is collateralized by the Bank’s common stock. Under the terms of the loan facility, the Company is bound by a number of significant covenants that restrict the Company’s ability, out of the ordinary course of business, to dispose of assets, to incur additional debt or guarantees, to invest in or acquire any interest in another enterprise and a change in the Company ownership by 51% or more. The credit agreement also requires the Company to maintain a debt coverage ratio of 1.50 times. At September 30, 2004 and

F-18


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

June 30, 2004, management believes the Company was in compliance with all such covenants and restrictions and does not anticipate that such covenants and restrictions will limit its operations.

      On December 13, 2004, the Company entered into an agreement to form a trust and to establish $5,000 of trust preferred securities in a transaction expected to close on December 16, 2004. When consummated, the net proceeds from the offering will be used to purchase a like amount of junior subordinated debentures (“Debentures”) of the Company. The Debentures will be the sole assets of the trust. The trust preferred securities are expected to be mandatorily redeemable upon maturity, or upon earlier redemption as provided in the indenture. The Company will have the right to redeem the Debentures in whole (but not in part) on or after specific dates, at a redemption price specified in the indenture plus any accrued but unpaid interest through the redemption date. When consummated, the Company expects the principal balance of the Debentures to be $5,155, with a stated maturity of 30 years. Interest will accrue at the rate of three-month LIBOR plus 2.4%, with interest to be distributed quarterly starting in February 2005.

 
9. Income Taxes

      The provision (benefit) for income taxes is as follows:

                                           
Three Months Ended
September 30, Year Ended June 30


2004 2003 2004 2003 2002





(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
Current:
                                       
 
Federal
  $ 323     $ 240     $ 1,046     $ 950     $  
 
State
    113       85       371       345       1  
     
     
     
     
     
 
      436       325       1,417       1,295       1  
Deferred:
                                       
 
Federal
    3       (57 )     40       (21 )     (317 )
 
State
    3       (21 )     14       (10 )     (113 )
     
     
     
     
     
 
      6       (78 )     54       (31 )     (430 )
     
     
     
     
     
 
Total
  $ 442     $ 247     $ 1,471     $ 1,264     $ (429 )
     
     
     
     
     
 

      The differences between the statutory federal income tax rate and the effective tax rates are summarized as follows:

                                           
Three Months
Ended September 30, Year Ended June 30


2004 2003 2004 2003 2002





(unaudited)
Statutory federal tax rate
    34.00 %     34.00 %     34.00 %     34.00 %     34.00 %
Increase (decrease) resulting from:
                                       
 
State taxes — net of federal tax benefit
    6.92 %     7.20 %     7.00 %     7.19 %     11.73 %
 
Valuation allowance
                            (139.16 )%
 
Extension of organizer warrants
                            22.64 %
 
Other
    (0.85 )%     (0.10 )%     (0.65 )%     1.03 %     (1.80 )%
     
     
     
     
     
 
Effective tax rate
    40.07 %     41.10 %     40.35 %     42.22 %     (72.59 )%
     
     
     
     
     
 

F-19


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

      The components of the net deferred tax asset are as follows:

                           
June 30,
September 30,
2004 2004 2003



(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
Deferred tax assets:
                       
 
Allowance for loan losses
  $ 279     $ 273     $ 160  
 
Start-up costs
    65       86       172  
 
Deferred loan fees
    140       123       109  
 
Net operating loss carryforwards
    34       34       34  
 
State taxes
    117       111       114  
 
Unrealized loss on investment securities available for sale
    52              
     
     
     
 
      687       627       589  
     
     
     
 
Deferred tax liabilities:
                       
 
State taxes
    (36 )     (37 )     (42 )
 
FHLB stock dividend
    (161 )     (137 )     (76 )
 
Other
    (37 )     (46 )     (10 )
     
     
     
 
      (234 )     (220 )     (128 )
     
     
     
 
Net deferred tax asset
  $ 453     $ 407     $ 461  
     
     
     
 

      As of September 30, 2004, the Company has a state net operating loss carryforward available to offset future state tax liabilities of $312. Such state net operating loss carryforward expires at various dates beginning in 2008.

      The Company establishes a valuation allowance if, based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. As of September 30, 2004 and June 30, 2004 and 2003, the Company believes that it will have sufficient earnings to realize its deferred tax asset and has not provided an allowance.

 
10. Stockholders’ Equity

      Stock Dividend  — The Company declared a 2.5 to 1 common stock split, effected in the form of a 150% stock dividend, to shareholders of record as of July 4, 2001 and paid on August 15, 2001. The capital accounts, all share data and earnings per share data in these financial statements give effect to the stock split, applied retroactively, to all periods presented.

      1999 Stock Option Plan  — In July 1999, the Company’s Board of Directors approved the 1999 Stock Option Plan (the “Plan”) as amended in May 2000. Under the Plan, 553,875 shares are reserved for issuance as incentive stock options and nonqualified stock options to employees and directors of the Company. In August 2001, the Company’s shareholders approved an amendment to the Plan such that 15% of the outstanding shares of the Company would always be available for grants under the Plan (749,406 and 746,125 shares at September 30, 2004 and June 30, 2004, respectively). The Plan is designed to encourage selected employees and directors to improve operations and increase profits, to accept or continue employment or association with the Company through participation in the growth in the value of the common stock. Plan provisions require that option exercise prices be not less than fair market value per share of common stock on the option grant date for incentive and nonqualified options. Option expiration dates are established by the plan administrator but may not be later than ten years after the date of the grant. As of June 30, 2004 there

F-20


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

were 2,000 options available for grant. The plan administrator determines vesting, which may not be less than three years nor exceed five years. Stock option activity during the period July 1, 2001 to June 30, 2004 is presented below.

                   
Weighted-Average
Number of Exercise Price
Shares Per Share


Outstanding at July 1, 2001
    509,596     $ 4.19  
 
Granted
    111,790     $ 10.00  
 
Exercised
    (185 )   $ 4.19  
 
Forfeited/ cancelled
    (1,171 )   $ 7.66  
     
         
Outstanding at June 30, 2002
    620,030     $ 5.23  
 
Granted
    1,750     $ 11.00  
 
Forfeited/ cancelled
    (3,322 )   $ 6.98  
     
         
Outstanding at June 30, 2003
    618,458     $ 5.24  
 
Granted
    132,036     $ 10.00  
 
Exercised
    (23,423 )   $ 4.74  
 
Forfeited/ cancelled
    (6,554 )   $ 8.22  
     
         
Outstanding at June 30, 2004
    720,517     $ 6.10  
 
Granted (unaudited)
    2,000     $ 10.00  
     
         
Outstanding at September 30 2004 — (unaudited)
    722,517     $ 6.11  
     
         
Options exercisable at June 30, 2002
    335,276     $ 4.19  
Options exercisable at June 30, 2003
    444,642     $ 4.71  
Options exercisable at June 30, 2004
    499,705     $ 4.94  
Options exercisable at September 30, 2004 (unaudited)
    517,702     $ 4.99  

      The following table summarizes information concerning currently outstanding and exercisable options:

                                             
September 30, 2004 (unaudited)

Options Outstanding Options Exercisable


Weighted-Average
Remaining
Range of Number Contractual Weighted-Average Number Weighted-Average
Exercise Prices Outstanding Life (Yrs) Exercise Price Exercisable Exercise Price






$ 4.19       483,945       5.4     $ 4.19       446,881     $ 4.19  
$ 10.00       237,072       8.7     $ 10.00       70,146     $ 10.00  
$ 11.00       1,500       7.8     $ 11.00       675     $ 11.00  
         
                     
         
          722,517                       517,702          
         
                     
         

F-21


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)
                                             
June 30, 2004

Options Outstanding Options Exercisable


Weighted-Average
Remaining
Range of Number Contractual Weighted-Average Number Weighted-Average
Exercise Prices Outstanding Life (Yrs) Exercise Price Exercisable Exercise Price






$ 4.19       483,945       5.6     $ 4.19       435,432     $ 4.19  
$ 10.00       235,072       8.9     $ 10.00       63,673     $ 10.00  
$ 11.00       1,500       8.0     $ 11.00       600     $ 11.00  
         
                     
         
          720,517                       499,705          
         
                     
         

      2004 Stock Incentive Plan  — In October 2004, the Company’s Board of Directors and the stockholders approved the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan, which provides for the grant of stock options, restricted stock, restricted stock units, stock appreciation rights and dividend equivalent rights to employees, directors and consultants. The maximum number of shares of common stock available for issuance under the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan, plus the number of shares of common stock available for issuance under the 1999 Stock Option Plan will be equal to 14.8% of the Company’s outstanding common stock at any time. However, the number of shares available for issuance as restricted stock grants may not exceed 5% of the Company’s outstanding common stock (subject to the overall maximum of 14.8% of the outstanding shares of common stock). Each share of restricted stock that is issued under the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan and vests will be deemed to be issuance of three shares for purposes of calculating the overall maximum number of shares of common stock available for issuance under the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan but not for purposes of calculating the above 5% limit applicable to the issuance of restricted stock.

      2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan  — In October 2004, the Company’s Board of Directors and stockholders approved the 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan, which is intended to qualify as an “Employee Stock Purchase Plan” under Section 423 of the Internal Revenue Code. An aggregate of 500,000 shares of the Company’s common stock has been reserved for issuance and will be available for purchase under the 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan.

      Common Stock and Common Stock Warrants  — During the year ended June 30, 2000, the Company closed a private placement of 3,694,031 shares of common stock, which were issued for net proceeds of $13,923. In conjunction with the private placement offering, the Company issued organizer warrants to the founders of the Company to purchase an additional 657,998 shares of common stock at a purchase price of $4.19 per share.

      In connection with the private placement, on August 1, 2000 the Company issued an additional 13,125 shares of common stock for proceeds of $50,000, with organizer warrants to purchase an additional 4,375 shares at a purchase price of $4.19 per share. During the year ended June 30, 2002, the Company closed its second private placement and opened a third private placement of common stock and equity units. The second private placement commenced on September 3, 2001 and closed on November 16, 2001 after issuing 587,200 shares of common stock at $10.00 per share for total proceeds of $5,769, net of issue costs. On March 25, 2002, in order to plan for the Company’s future capital funding needs, the Company extended the expiration date of the organizer warrants which permit the holders to acquire 749,875 shares of our common stock at a strike price of $4.19 by two years with all other terms remaining the same. One of the holders of the organizer warrants to purchase 13,125 shares of common stock was an employee of the Company and as a result of the two year extension of the expiration date the Company recorded salary and employee benefits expense of $76. The remaining organizer warrants to acquire 736,750 shares of common stock were held by non employees and the Company recorded other general and administrative expense of $318 as a result of the

F-22


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

two year extension of the expiration date. The Company recorded a corresponding $394 increase to additional paid-in capital to recognize the accounting consequences of extending the expiration of all of the organizer warrants. All organizer warrants now expire in July 2005 or upon the Company’s initial public offering. On June 3, 2002, the Company commenced its third private placement by offering units of three shares of common and one warrant for $36.00 per unit. Each warrant entitles the holder to purchase one share of the Company’s common stock at $14.00 per share any time during the next three years. These warrants expire three years from the date of the termination of the third private placement. As of June 30, 2002 the Company had issued 13,300 units representing 39,900 shares of common stock and 13,300 warrants to purchase common stock for total proceeds of $414, net of issue costs. Also during the year ended June 30, 2002, the Company issued 185 shares of common stock for $1 from the exercise of stock options.

      During the year ended June 30, 2003, the Company closed its third private placement on July 15, 2003. During July 2003, the Company issued 46,650 units representing 139,950 shares of common stock and 46,650 warrants to purchase common stock for total proceeds of $1,654, net of issue costs.

      During the year ended June 30, 2004, the Company issued 23,423 shares of common stock for $165 (including $55 income tax benefit) from the exercise of nonqualified stock options and issued 8,750 shares of common stock for $37 from the exercise of warrants.

      At September 30, 2004, the Company had deferred $418 of costs associated with its planned initial public offering. In December 2004, the Company recorded a charge of $59 for unrecoverable costs associated with the termination of an agreement with one of its financial advisors during the three months ended December 31, 2004 relating to its planned initial public offering.

      Convertible Preferred Stock  — On October 28, 2003, the Company commenced a private placement of Series A–6% Cumulative Nonparticipating Perpetual Preferred Stock, Convertible through January 1, 2009 (the “Convertible Preferred Stock”). The rights, preferences and privileges of the Convertible Preferred Stock were established in a certificate filed by the Company with the State of Delaware on October 27, 2003, and generally include the holder’s right to a six percent (6%) per annum cumulative dividend payable quarterly, the Company’s right to redeem some or all of the outstanding shares at par after five years and the holders’ right to convert all or part of the face value of his Convertible Preferred Stock into the Company’s common stock at $10.50 per share, increasing in three increments to $18.00 per share after January 1, 2008. The Company’s right to redeem the Convertible Preferred Stock is perpetual and starts immediately after issuance (with a premium payable to the holder starting at 5% in the first year and declining to 1% in the fifth year). The holder’s right to convert to the Company’s common stock starts immediately after purchase and expires on January 1, 2009.

      During the year ended June 30, 2004, the Company issued $6,750 of Convertible Preferred Stock representing 675 shares at $10,000 face value, less issuance costs of $113. For the three quarters ended June 30, 2004, the Company has declared and paid dividends to holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock totaling $140. For the three month period ended September 30, 2004, the Company declared and paid dividends totaling $101 to the holders of the convertible preferred stock.

F-23


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

      Warrant activity during the period June 30, 2001 to September 30, 2004 is presented below:

                   
Weighted-Average
Number of Exercise Price
Shares Per Share


Outstanding at June 30, 2001
    749,875     $ 4.19  
 
Issued
    13,300     $ 14.00  
     
         
Outstanding at June 30, 2002
    763,175     $ 4.36  
 
Issued
    46,650     $ 14.00  
     
         
Outstanding at June 30, 2003
    809,825     $ 4.92  
 
Exercised
    (8,750 )   $ 4.19  
     
         
Outstanding at June 30, 2004
    801,075     $ 4.93  
 
Exercised (unaudited)
    (13,125 )   $ 4.19  
     
         
Outstanding at September 30, 2004 (unaudited)
    787,950     $ 4.94  
     
         
 
11. Earnings Per Share

      Information used to calculate earnings per share for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 and the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002, was as follows:

                                           
Three Months
Ended September 30, Year Ended June 30


2004 2003 2004 2003 2002





(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands, except per share data)
Net income
  $ 661     $ 354     $ 2,175     $ 1,730     $ 1,020  
Dividends on preferred stock
    101             140              
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net income attributable to common
  $ 560     $ 354     $ 2,035     $ 1,730     $ 1,020  
     
     
     
     
     
 
Weighted-average shares:
                                       
 
Basic weighted-average number of common shares outstanding
    4,508,664       4,490,136       4,502,284       4,468,296       4,128,051  
 
Dilutive effect of stock options
    221,901       224,521       222,556       231,002       231,708  
 
Dilutive effect of warrants
    434,398       435,641       435,642       435,642       435,642  
     
     
     
     
     
 
Dilutive weighted-average number of common shares outstanding
    5,164,963       5,150,298       5,160,482       5,134,940       4,795,401  
     
     
     
     
     
 
Net income per common share:
                                       
 
Basic
  $ 0.12     $ 0.08     $ 0.45     $ 0.39     $ 0.25  
 
Diluted
  $ 0.11     $ 0.07     $ 0.39     $ 0.34     $ 0.21  
 
12. Commitments and Contingencies

      Operating Leases  — The Company leases office space under an operating lease agreement scheduled to expire in June 2005. The Company pays property taxes, insurance and maintenance expenses related to this lease. Rent expense under this lease agreement for the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $213,

F-24


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

$169 and $131, respectively. Rent expense for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 was $55 and $53, respectively.

      Future minimum lease payments under this noncancelable lease as of September 30, 2004 are $166 payable during the year ended June 30, 2005.

      Legal Contingencies  — Various legal claims also arise from time to time in the normal course of business, which in the opinion of management after discussion with legal counsel will have no material effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

 
13. Off-Balance Sheet Activities

      Credit-Related Financial Instruments  — The Company is a party to credit-related financial instruments with off-balance-sheet risk in the normal course of business to meet the financing needs of its customers. These financial instruments are commitments to extend credit. Such commitments involve, to varying degrees, elements of credit and interest rate risk in excess of the amount recognized in the consolidated balance sheets.

      The Company’s exposure to credit loss is represented by the contractual amount of these commitments. The Company follows the same credit policies in making commitments as it does for on-balance-sheet instruments.

      At September 30, 2004, the Company had commitments to fund or purchase loans of $10,771.

      Commitments to extend credit are agreements to lend to a customer so long as there is no violation of any condition established in the contract. Commitments generally have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses and may require payment of a fee. The commitments for equity lines of credit may expire without being drawn upon. Therefore, the total commitment amounts do not necessarily represent future cash requirements. The amount of collateral obtained, if it is deemed necessary by the Company, is based on management’s credit evaluation of the customer.

 
14. Minimum Regulatory Capital Requirements

      The Bank is subject to various regulatory capital requirements administered by the federal banking agencies. Failure to meet minimum capital requirements can initiate certain mandatory and possibly additional discretionary actions by regulators that, if undertaken, could have a direct material effect on the Bank’s financial statements. Under capital adequacy guidelines and the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action, the Bank must meet specific capital guidelines that involve quantitative measures of its assets, liabilities and certain off-balance-sheet items as calculated under regulatory accounting practices. The capital amounts and classification are also subject to qualitative judgments by the regulators about components, risk weightings and other factors.

      Quantitative measures established by regulation to ensure capital adequacy require the Bank to maintain minimum amounts and ratios (set forth in the following table) of total and Tier 1 capital (as defined in the regulations) to risk-weighted assets (as defined) and of Tier 1 capital (as defined) to tangible assets (as defined). As of June 30, 2004, that the Bank met all capital adequacy requirements to which it is subject.

F-25


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

      As of September 30, 2004, the most recent notification from the OTS categorized the Bank as “well capitalized” under the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action. To be categorized as “well capitalized,” an institution must maintain minimum total risk-based, Tier 1 risk-based and Tier 1 leverage ratios as set forth in the following table. There are no conditions or events since the notification that management believes have changed the Bank’s categorization. The Bank’s actual capital amounts and ratios as of September 30, 2004 and June 30, 2004 and 2003 are presented in the table.

                                                 
To Be Well
For Capital Capitalized Under
Adequacy Prompt Corrective
Actual Purposes Action Provisions



September 30, 2004 — (unaudited) Amount Ratio Amount Ratio Amount Ratio







Tier 1 Leverage (core) capital (to
adjusted tangible assets) (unaudited)
  $ 34,447       7.60 %   $ 18,142       4.00 %   $ 22,677       5.00 %
Tier I capital (to risk-weighted assets) (unaudited)
  $ 34,447       12.03 %     N/A       N/A     $ 17,180       6.00 %
Total capital (to risk-weighted assets) (unaudited)
  $ 35,507       12.40 %   $ 22,907       8.00 %   $ 28,634       10.00 %
Tangible capital (to tangible assets) (unaudited)
  $ 34,447       7.60 %   $ 6,803       1.50 %     N/A       N/A  
 
June 30, 2004
                                               

                                               
Tier 1 Leverage (core) capital (to
adjusted tangible assets)
  $ 31,748       7.84 %   $ 16,193       4.00 %   $ 20,241       5.00 %
Tier I capital (to risk-weighted assets)
  $ 31,748       11.11 %     N/A       N/A     $ 17,146       6.00 %
Total capital (to risk-weighted assets)
  $ 32,793       11.48 %   $ 22,861       8.00 %   $ 28,577       10.00 %
Tangible capital (to tangible assets)
  $ 31,748       7.84 %   $ 6,072       1.50 %     N/A       N/A  
 
June 30, 2003
                                               

                                               
 
Tier 1 Leverage (core) capital (to
adjusted tangible assets)
  $ 21,108       8.09 %   $ 10,928       4.00 %   $ 13,660       5.00    %
Tier I capital (to risk-weighted assets)
  $ 21,108       11.40 %     N/A       N/A     $ 11,635       6.00    %
Total capital (to risk-weighted assets)
  $ 22,898       11.81 %   $ 15,514       8.00 %   $ 19,392       10.00    %
Tangible capital (to tangible assets)
  $ 21,108       8.09 %   $ 4,098       1.50 %     N/A       N/A  
 
15. Employment Agreements and Employee Benefit Plans

      Employment Agreements  — In July 2003, the Company entered into employment agreements with four executive officers. Under these agreements, if the Company terminates one or more of the executive officers for any reason other than cause, then the Company must (a) pay that officer normal compensation in effect through the date of termination; (b) pay that officer a severance payment equal to twelve times his then-current base monthly salary, payable at the option of the Board of Directors either in one lump sum or in twelve equal installments; and (c) continue group insurance benefits for that officer for one year from termination or until that officer commences work with a new employer providing group medical insurance benefits to that officer. In addition, if the executive officer’s employment is terminated for any reason other than for cause, or that officer’s employment is terminated due to death or disability, then all stock options currently held by such officer will fully vest as of the termination date. Each agreement automatically renews in one-year terms unless terminated by either Bank of Internet USA or the officer. In addition, each

F-26


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

agreement specifies bonuses for each executive officer, which are contingent upon the Company’s financial performance and the executive officer’s continued employment with the Company. The Company accrued bonus expense of $33 for the year ended June 30, 2004 in connection with these executive officer bonuses.

      401(k) Plan  — The Company has a 401(k) Plan whereby substantially all of its employees participate in the Plan. Employees may contribute up to 15% of their compensation subject to certain limits based on federal tax laws. For the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002 expense attributable to the Plan amounted to $2, $2 and $2, respectively.

      Deferred Compensation Plans  — Effective August 1, 2003, the Company adopted the Bank of Internet USA Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plans (“Deferred Compensation Plans”) which cover designated key management employees and directors who elect to participate. The Deferred Compensation Plans allow eligible employees and directors to elect to defer up to 100% of their compensation, including commissions, bonuses and director fees. Although the Deferred Compensation Plans provide that the Company may make discretionary contributions to a participant’s account, no such discretionary contributions have been made through the period ending June 30, 2004. Participant deferrals are fully vested at all times, and discretionary contributions, if any, will be subject to a vesting schedule specified by the Company. Participants in the Deferred Compensation Plans may elect to invest their accounts in either of two accounts: (1) which earns interest based upon the prime rate; or (2) which mirrors the performance of the book value of the Company’s common stock. The Deferred Compensation Plans are administrated by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors. At September 30, 2004, there were $67 deferred in connection with the Deferred Compensation Plans.

 
16. Related Party Transactions

      From February 2003 to January 2004, the Company paid two members of the Board of Directors $175 and $125 during the years ended June 30, 2004 and 2003, respectively, to assist in raising capital for the Company. The amounts are included in salary and employee benefits expense.

      In the ordinary course of business, the Company has granted loans to principal officers and directors and their affiliates more fully described in Note 3.

 
17. Fair Value of Financial Instruments

      The fair value of a financial instrument is the current amount that would be exchanged between willing parties, other than in a forced liquidation. Fair value is best determined based upon quoted market prices. However, in many instances, there are no quoted market prices for the Company’s various financial instruments. In cases where quoted market prices are not available, fair values are based on estimates using present value or other valuation techniques. Those techniques are significantly affected by the assumptions used, including the discount rate and estimates of future cash flows. Accordingly, the fair value estimates may not be realized in an immediate settlement of the instrument. SFAS No. 107 excludes certain financial instruments and all nonfinancial instruments from its disclosure requirements. Accordingly, the aggregate fair value amounts presented may not necessarily represent the underlying fair value of the Company.

      The Company in estimating fair value disclosures for financial instruments used the following methods and assumptions:

        Cash and Cash Equivalents  — The carrying amounts of cash and short term instruments approximate fair values.

F-27


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

        Time Deposits in Financial Institutions  — The carrying amount of time deposits in financial institutions approximates fair value.
 
        Investment Securities  — Fair values for securities, excluding Federal Home Loan Bank stock, are based on quoted market prices. The carrying value of Federal Home Loan Bank stock approximates fair value based on the redemption provisions of the Federal Home Loan Bank.
 
        Loans Held for Investment and Held for Sale  — For adjustable rate loans held for investment that reprice frequently with no significant change in credit risk, fair values are based on carrying values.
 
        Fair values for fixed rate loans held for sale are estimated using discounted cash flow analyses, assuming interest rates currently being offered for loans with similar terms to borrowers of similar credit. Fair values of loans held for sale are based on commitments from investors or prevailing market prices.
 
        Deposits  — The fair values disclosed for demand deposits (interest and non-interest checking, savings, and certain types of money market accounts) are equal to the amount payable on demand at the reporting date (i.e., their carrying amounts). Fair values for fixed rate certificates of deposit are estimated using a discounted cash flow calculation that applies interest rates currently being offered on certificates to a schedule of aggregated expected monthly maturities on time deposits.
 
        Advances from FHLB  — The fair values of the FHLB advance are estimated using discounted cash flow analyses based on the Company’s current incremental borrowing rates for similar types of borrowing arrangements.
 
        Accrued Interest  — The carrying amounts of accrued interest approximate fair value.
 
        Note Payable  — The carrying amount of the note payable approximates fair value, as the rate is based on current market rates.
 
        Off-Balance-Sheet Instruments  — Fair values for off-balance-sheet, credit-related financial instruments are based on fees currently charged to enter into similar agreements, taking into account the remaining terms of the agreements and the counterparties’ credit standing and are not material.

F-28


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

      The estimated fair values, and related carrying or notional amounts, of the Company’s financial instruments are as follows:

                                                   
June 30,

September 30,
2004 2004 2003



Carrying Fair Carrying Fair Carrying Fair
Amount Value Amount Value Amount Value






(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
Financial assets:
                                               
 
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 21,131     $ 21,131     $ 24,859     $ 24,859     $ 6,462     $ 6,462  
 
Investment securities available for sale
    47,458       47,458                          
 
Investment securities held to maturity — MBS
    4,827       4,787       256       258       441       449  
 
Investment securities held to maturity — FHLB Agency
    3,417       3,440       3,409       3,416              
 
Time deposits in financial institutions
    8,909       8,909       9,503       9,503       11,872       11,872  
 
Stock of the Federal Home Loan Bank
    5,729       5,729       4,789       4,789       2,795       2,795  
 
Loans held for investment — net
    355,105       358,851       355,261       355,932       245,933       252,300  
 
Loans held for sale
    216       216       435       435       3,602       3,602  
 
Accrued interest receivable
    1,657       1,657       1,486       1,486       1,107       1,107  
Financial liabilities:
                                               
 
Demand deposits and savings
    124,882       124,882       123,124       123,124       52,024       52,024  
 
Time deposits
    170,795       171,771       146,717       147,469       141,968       145,079  
 
Advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank
    121,475       121,119       101,446       99,251       55,900       58,839  
 
Note payable
    3,300       3,300       1,300       1,300              
 
Accrued interest payable
    324       324       283       283       272       272  

      The fair value estimates as of September 30, 2004 and June 30, 2004 and 2003 are based on pertinent information available to management as of the respective dates. Although management is not aware of any factors that would significantly affect the estimated fair value amounts, such amounts have not been comprehensively revalued for purposes of these financial statements since those dates and, therefore, current estimates of fair value may differ significantly from the amounts presented herein.

F-29


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)
 
18. Parent-Only Financial Information

      The following BofI Holding, Inc. (Parent company only) financial information should be read in conjunction with the other notes to the consolidated financial statements:

Balance Sheets

                   
June 30,

2004 2003


(Dollars in thousands)
ASSETS
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 1,118     $ 516  
Other assets
    218       256  
Due from subsidiary
    85       156  
Investment in subsidiary
    31,749       22,108  
     
     
 
TOTAL ASSETS
  $ 33,170     $ 23,036  
     
     
 
 
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Note payable
  $ 1,300     $  
Accrued interest payable
    12        
Accounts payable and accrued liabilities
    99       151  
     
     
 
 
Total liabilities
    1,411       151  
     
     
 
STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY:
               
 
Convertible preferred stock $10,000 stated value; 1,000,000 shares authorized; 675 shares issued and outstanding
    6,637        
 
Common stock — $.01 par value; 10,000,000 shares authorized; 4,519,649 (September 2004), 4,506,524 (June 2004) and 4,474,351 (June 2003) shares issued and outstanding
    45       45  
 
Additional paid-in capital
    22,363       22,161  
 
Accumulated other comprehensive loss, net of tax
           
 
Retained earnings
    2,714       679  
     
     
 
 
Total stockholders’ equity
    31,759       22,885  
     
     
 
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
  $ 33,170     $ 23,036  
     
     
 

F-30


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)

Statements of Income

                         
Year Ended June 30,

2004 2003 2002



(Dollars in thousands)
Interest income
  $ 2     $ 3     $ 2  
Interest expense
    60             46  
     
     
     
 
Net interest income (expense)
    (58 )     3       (44 )
Non-interest expense — general and administrative
    478       323       565  
     
     
     
 
Total non-interest expense
    478       323       565  
     
     
     
 
Loss before income tax benefit, dividends from subsidiary and equity in undistributed income of subsidiary
    (536 )     (320 )     (609 )
     
     
     
 
Income tax expense (benefit)
          215       (213 )
Dividends from subsidiary
    71              
Equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiary
    2,640       2,265       1,416  
     
     
     
 
Net income
  $ 2,175     $ 1,730     $ 1,020  
     
     
     
 

Statement of Cash Flows

                               
Year Ended June 30,

2004 2003 2002



(Dollars in thousands)
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:
                       
 
Net income
  $ 2,175     $ 1,730     $ 1,020  
 
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash used in operating activities:
                       
   
Equity in earnings of subsidiary
    (2,640 )     (2,265 )     (1,416 )
   
Deferred income taxes
          214       (214 )
   
Extension of terms to exercise common stock warrants
                394  
   
Decrease (increase) in other assets
    109       (393 )     (4 )
   
Increase (decrease) in other liabilities
    (40 )     121       (15 )
     
     
     
 
     
Net cash used in operating activities
    (396 )     (593 )     (235 )
     
     
     
 
CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES:
                       
 
Investment in subsidiary
    (7,072 )     (1,051 )     (4,600 )
 
Dividends received from subsidiary
    71              
     
     
     
 
     
Net cash used in investing activities
    (7,001 )     (1,051 )     (4,600 )
     
     
     
 

F-31


Table of Contents

BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2004 AND 2003 (UNAUDITED) AND
THE YEARS ENDED JUNE 30, 2004, 2003 AND 2002 — (Continued)
                             
Year Ended June 30,

2004 2003 2002



(Dollars in thousands)
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES:
                       
 
Proceeds from issuance of common stock
          1,654       6,184  
 
Net proceeds from issuance of convertible preferred stock
    6,637              
 
Proceeds from issuance of notes payable to related parties
                1,700  
 
Repayment of notes payable
                (2,570 )
 
Proceeds from note payable
    1,300              
 
Proceeds from exercise of common stock options and warrants
    202              
 
Cash dividends on convertible preferred stock
    (140 )            
     
     
     
 
   
Net cash provided by financing activities
    7,999       1,654       5,314  
     
     
     
 
NET INCREASE IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
    602       10       479  
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS — Beginning of year
    516       506       27  
     
     
     
 
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS — End of year
  $ 1,118     $ 516     $ 506  
     
     
     
 

* * * * * *

F-32


Table of Contents

B OF I LOGO

                             Shares

BofI Holding, Inc.

Common Stock

Dealer Prospectus Delivery Obligation

      Until                     , 2005 (25 days after the date of the offering), all dealers that effect transactions in these securities, whether or not participating in the offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to the dealers’ obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as underwriters and with respect to their unsold allotments or subscriptions.


Table of Contents

PART II

Information Not Required in Prospectus

Item 13.      Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution.

      The expenses to be paid by the Registrant in connection with the distribution of the securities being registered, other than underwriting discounts and commissions, are as follows:

           
Amount*

Securities and Exchange Commission Filing Fee
  $ 2,707.10  
NASD Filing Fee
       
Nasdaq National Market Listing Fee
       
Accounting Fees and Expenses
       
Blue Sky Fees and Expenses
       
Legal Fees and Expenses
       
Transfer Agent and Registrar Fees and Expenses
       
Printing Expenses
       
Miscellaneous Expenses
       
 
Total
  $    


All amounts are estimates except the SEC filing fee, the NASD filing fee and the Nasdaq National Market listing fee.

 
Item 14. Indemnification of Directors and Officers.

      Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law authorizes a court to award, or a corporation’s board of directors to grant, indemnity to officers, directors and other corporate agents under certain circumstances and subject to certain limitations. The Registrant’s certificate of incorporation and bylaws provide that the Registrant shall indemnify its directors, officers, employees and agents to the full extent permitted by Delaware General Corporation Law, including in circumstances in which indemnification is otherwise discretionary under Delaware law. In addition, the Registrant intends to enter into separate indemnification agreements with its directors, officers and certain employees that would require the Registrant, among other things, to indemnify them against certain liabilities which may arise by reason of their status as directors, officers or certain other employees. The Registrant also intends to maintain director and officer liability insurance, if available on reasonable terms.

      These indemnification provisions and the indemnification agreement to be entered into between the Registrant and its officers and directors may be sufficiently broad to permit indemnification of the Registrant’s officers and directors for liabilities (including reimbursement of expenses incurred) arising under the Securities Act.

      The underwriting agreement, which is Exhibit 1.1 to this registration statement, provides for indemnification by our underwriters and their officers and directors for certain liabilities arising under the Securities Act or otherwise.

 
Item 15. Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities.

      Since July, 1, 2001, the Registrant has issued and sold the following unregistered securities:

        1. Between July 1, 2001 and September 30, 2004, the Registrant granted options to purchase a total of 839,172 shares of its common stock at prices ranging from $4.19 to $11.00 per share to employees, directors and consultants pursuant to its amended and restated 1999 stock option plan. These issuances were made in reliance on Rule 701 of the Securities Act.

II-1


Table of Contents

        2. In September 2001 and October 2001, the Registrant issued and sold an aggregate of 587,200 shares of its common stock for an aggregate purchase price of $5,872,000. These sales were made in reliance on Section 4(2) of the Securities Act.
 
        3. In June 2002 and July 2002, the Registrant issued and sold an aggregate of 179,850 shares of its common stock, together with warrants to purchase up to an additional 59,950 shares of its common stock, for an aggregate purchase price of $2,158,200. These sales were made in reliance on Section 4(2) of the Securities Act.
 
        4. Between October 2003 and June 2004, the Registrant issued and sold an aggregate of 675 shares of its Series A — 6% Cumulative Nonparticipating Perpetual Preferred Stock, Convertible through January 1, 2009 for an aggregate purchase price of $6,750,000. These sales were made in reliance on Section 4(2) of the Securities Act.

      The issuances of the securities in the transactions above were deemed to be exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance on Section 4(2) of the Securities Act promulgated thereunder as transactions by an issuer not involving a public offering, where the purchasers represented their intention to acquire the securities for investment only and not with a view to distribution and received or had access to adequate information about the Registrant, or Rule 701 promulgated under the Securities Act as transactions pursuant to a compensatory benefit plan or a written contract relating to compensation.

      Appropriate legends were affixed to the stock certificates issued in the above transactions. Similar legends were imposed in connection with any subsequent sales of any such securities. No underwriters were employed in any of the above transactions.

 
Item 16. Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.

      (a) Exhibits

      The exhibits are as set forth in the Exhibit Index.

      (b) Financial Statement Schedules.

      All schedules have been omitted because they are not required or are not applicable or the required information is shown in the financial statements or related notes.

 
Item 17. Undertakings.

      The Registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the Underwriting Agreement certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

      Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the Registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the Registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the Registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

      The Registrant hereby undertakes that:

      (1) For purposes of any liability under the Securities Act, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of

II-2


Table of Contents

prospectus filed by the Registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.

      (2) For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

II-3


Table of Contents

Signatures

      Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the Registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of San Diego, State of California on the 16th day of December 2004.

  BOFI HOLDING, INC.

  By:  /s/ GARY LEWIS EVANS
 
  Gary Lewis Evans
  President and Chief Executive Officer

Power of Attorney

      KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that each person whose signature appears below constitutes and appoints Gary Lewis Evans and Andrew J. Micheletti, and each of them, as his true and lawful attorneys-in-fact and agents, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, for him and in his name, place and stead, in any and all capacities, to sign any and all amendments (including post-effective amendments) to this Registration Statement, and to sign any registration statement for the same offering covered by the Registration Statement that is to be effective upon filing pursuant to Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 and to file the same, with all exhibits thereto, and other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, granting unto said attorneys-in-fact and agents, and each of them, full power and authority to do and perform each and every act and thing requisite and necessary to be done in connection therewith and about the premises, as fully to all intents and purposes as he might or could do in person, hereby ratifying and confirming all that said attorneys-in-fact and agents, or any of them, or their or his substitute or substitutes, may lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.

      Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated:

             
Signature Title Date



 
/s/ GARY LEWIS EVANS

Gary Lewis Evans
  President, Chief Executive Officer and Director (Principal
Executive Officer)
  December 16, 2004
 
/s/ ANDREW J. MICHELETTI

Andrew J. Micheletti
  Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)   December 16, 2004
 
/s/ JERRY F. ENGLERT

Jerry F. Englert
  Chairman   December 16, 2004
 
/s/ THEODORE C. ALLRICH

Theodore C. Allrich
  Vice Chairman   December 16, 2004
 
/s/ PAUL GRINBERG

Paul Grinberg
  Director   December 16, 2004
 
/s/ ROBERT EPRILE

Robert Eprile
  Director   December 16, 2004

II-4


Table of Contents

             
Signature Title Date



 
/s/ THOMAS J. PANCHERI

Thomas J. Pancheri
  Director   December 16, 2004
 
/s/ CONNIE M. PAULUS

Connie M. Paulus
  Director   December 16, 2004
 
/s/ GORDON L. WITTER

Gordon L. Witter
  Director   December 16, 2004

II-5


Table of Contents

Exhibit Index

         
Exhibit
Number Document


   1 .1*   Form of Underwriting Agreement
   3 .1*   Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant
   3 .2*   Certificate of Amendment of Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant
   3 .3*   Certificate of Designation of the Registrant
   3 .4   Bylaws of the Registrant
   4 .1*   Reference is made to Exhibits 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 and 3.4
   4 .2*   Specimen Stock Certificate of the Registrant
   5 .1*   Opinion of Morrison & Foerster LLP as to the legality of the common stock
  10 .1*   Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Registrant and each of its executive officers and directors
  10 .2   Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan, as amended
  10 .3   2004 Stock Incentive Plan
  10 .4   2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan, including forms of agreements thereunder
  10 .5   Assignment and Assumption Agreement and Consent to Assignment, dated as of September 22, 1999, by and among the Registrant, as assignee, Conti Receivables Management LLC (“Tenant”), Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P. (“Landlord”) and Contifincial Corporation, together with Lease, dated March 16, 1998, between Landlord and Tenant, as amended by the First Amendment to Lease, dated November 15, 2002, between Landlord and Tenants
  10 .6   Employment Agreement, dated as of July 1, 2003, between Bank of Internet USA and Gary Lewis Evans
  10 .7   Employment Agreement, dated as of July 1, 2003, between Bank of Internet USA and Patrick A. Dunn
  10 .8   Employment Agreement, dated as of July 1, 2003, between Bank of Internet USA and Andrew J. Micheletti
  10 .9   Employment Agreement, dated as of July 1, 2003, between Bank of Internet USA and Michael J. Berengolts
  23 .1*   Consent of Morrison & Foerster LLP. Reference is made to Exhibit 5.1
  23 .2   Consent of Deloitte & Touche LLP, Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
  24 .1   Powers of Attorney. Reference is made to Page II-4


To be filed by amendment.

EXHIBIT 3.4

BYLAWS

OF

BOI.COM HOLDING, INC.

AS IN EFFECT ON JULY 7, 1999


ARTICLE I

OFFICES

Section 1. Registered Office. The initial registered office of the corporation shall be at such place as is designated in the Certificate of Incorporation (herein, as amended from time to time, so called), or thereafter the registered office may be at such other place as the Board of Directors may from time to time designate by resolution.

Section 2. Other Offices. The corporation may also have offices at such other places, both within and without the State of Delaware, as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine or the business of the corporation may require.

ARTICLE II

STOCKHOLDERS

Section 1. Meetings. All meetings of the stockholders for the election of directors shall be held at the principal office of the corporation, or at such other place, within or without the State of Delaware, as may be fixed from time to time by the Board of Directors. Meetings of stockholders for any other purpose may be held at such time and place, within or without the State of Delaware, as shall be stated in the notice of the meeting or in a duly executed waiver of notice thereof.

Section 2. Annual Meeting. An annual meeting of the stockholders shall be held on such date in each fiscal year of the corporation as the Board of Directors shall select, at which meeting the stockholders shall elect members of the Board of Directors and transact such other business as may properly be brought before the meeting. To be properly brought before an annual meeting, business must be (a) specified in the notice of meeting (or any supplement thereto) given by or at the direction of the Board of Directors, (b) otherwise properly brought before the meeting by or at the direction of the Board of Directors, or (c) otherwise properly brought before the meeting by a stockholder. For business to be properly brought before an annual meeting by a stockholder, the stockholder must have given timely notice thereof in writing to the Secretary of the corporation. To be timely, a stockholder's notice must be delivered or mailed to and received at the principal executive offices of the corporation not less than sixty calendar days prior to the meeting; provided, however, that in the event that less than sixty-five calendar days' notice or prior public disclosure of the date of the meeting is given or made to stockholders, notice by the stockholder to be timely must be so received not later than the close of business on the tenth calendar day following the date on which such notice of the date of the annual meeting was mailed or such public disclosure was made. A stockholder's notice to the Secretary shall set forth as to each matter the stockholder proposes to bring before the annual meeting (i) a brief description of the business desired to be brought before the annual meeting, (ii) the name and address, as they appear on the corporation's books, of the stockholder proposing such business, (iii) the class and number of shares of the corporation which are beneficially owned by the stockholder and (iv) any material interest of the stockholder in such

1

business. In addition, a stockholder intending to nominate one or more persons for election as a director at an annual meeting must comply with Section 2, Article III of these Bylaws for such nomination or nominations to be properly brought before such meeting. No business shall be conducted at an annual meeting except in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Section 2. The presiding officer of an annual meeting shall, if the facts warrant, determine that business was not properly brought before the meeting and in accordance with the provisions of this Section 2 and, if such presiding officer should so determine, such presiding officer shall so declare to the meeting and any such business not properly brought before the meeting shall not be transacted.

Section 3. List of Stockholders. At least ten days before each meeting of stockholders, a complete list of the stockholders entitled to vote at said meeting, arranged in alphabetical order, with the address of and the number of voting shares registered in the name of each stockholder, shall be prepared by the officer or agent having charge of the stock transfer books. Such list shall be kept on file either at a place within the city where the meeting is to be held, which place shall be specified in the notice of the meeting, or, if not so specified at the place where the meeting is to be held for a period of ten days prior to such meeting and shall be subject to inspection by any stockholder at any time during usual business hours. Such list shall be produced and kept open at the time and place of the meeting during the whole time thereof, and shall be subject to the inspection of any stockholder who may be present. The Board of Directors may fix in advance a record date for the purpose of determining stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders, such record date to be not less than ten nor more than sixty days prior to such meeting, or the Board of Directors may close the stock transfer books for such purpose for a period of not less than ten nor more than sixty days prior to such meeting. In the absence of any action by the Board of Directors, the close of business on the date next preceding the day on which the notice is given shall be the record date.

Section 4. Special Meetings. Special meetings of the stockholders, for any purpose or purposes, unless otherwise prescribed by the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware (herein called the "Act"), or by the Certificate of Incorporation, may be called only (i) by the Chairman of the Board, (ii) the President, or (iii) by the Secretary, within ten calendar days after receipt of a written request of a majority of the total number of directors then in office. Business transacted at any special meeting shall be confined to the purposes stated in the notice of the meeting and no stockholder shall have the right to bring any additional business (whether similar or dissimilar in nature) before, or to propose or nominate any person for appointment or election to any position or office at, any special meeting unless all stockholders entitled to vote are present and affirmatively consent thereto.

Section 5. Notice. Written or printed notice stating the place, day and hour of any meeting of the stockholders and, in case of a special meeting, the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called, shall be delivered not less than ten nor more than sixty days before the date of the meeting, either personally or by mail, by or at the direction of the Chairman of the Board, the President, or the Secretary, to each stockholder of record entitled to vote at the meeting.

2

Section 6. Quorum. At all meetings of the stockholders, the presence in person or by proxy of the holders of a majority of the shares issued and outstanding and entitled to vote shall be necessary and sufficient to constitute a quorum for the transaction of business except as otherwise provided by the Act, by the Certificate of Incorporation or by these Bylaws. If such quorum shall not be present or represented at any meeting of the stockholders, the stockholders entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy, shall have power to adjourn the meeting from time to time, without notice other than announcement at the meeting, until a quorum shall be present or represented. At such adjourned meeting at which a quorum shall be present or represented, any business may be transacted at the meeting as originally notified.

Section 7. Voting. When a quorum is present at any meeting, the vote of the holders of a majority of the shares having voting power present in person or represented by proxy at such meeting shall decide any question brought before such meeting, unless the question is one upon which, by express provision of the Act or of the Certificate of Incorporation or of these Bylaws, a different vote is required, in which case such express provision shall govern and control the decision of such question. The stockholders present in person or by proxy at a duly convened meeting at which a quorum initially is present may continue to transact business until the adjournment of such meeting, notwithstanding any withdrawal of stockholders that results in a quorum ceasing to be present.

Section 8. Proxy. Each outstanding share, regardless of class, shall be entitled to one vote on each matter submitted to a vote at a meeting of stockholders, except to the extent that the voting rights of the shares of any class or classes are limited or denied by the Certificate of Incorporation. At any meeting of the stockholders, every stockholder having the right to vote shall be entitled to vote in person or by proxy, but no such proxy shall be voted after three years from its date unless it provides for a longer period. Another person may be authorized to act as proxy for a stockholder by an instrument in writing subscribed by such stockholder or his or her duly authorized attorney in fact or by any other means authorized under the Act as from time to time in effect. Any such proxy shall be filed with the Secretary prior to or at the time of the meeting.

A duly executed proxy shall be irrevocable if, and only as long as, it is coupled with an interest sufficient in law to support an irrevocable power. A proxy may be made irrevocable regardless of whether the interest with which it is coupled is an interest in the stock itself or an interest in the corporation generally.

ARTICLE III

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Section 1. Board of Directors. The business and affairs of the corporation shall be managed by its Board of Directors, which may exercise all such powers of the corporation and do all such lawful acts and things as are not by the Act or by the

3

Certificate of Incorporation or by these Bylaws directed or required to be exercised or done by the stockholders.

Section 2. Number of Directors. Except as otherwise fixed pursuant to the provisions of Article IV of the Certificate of Incorporation relating to the rights of the holders of any class or series of stock having a preference over the Common Stock as to dividends or upon liquidation to elect additional directors under specified circumstances, the number of directors (none of whom need be stockholders or residents of the State of Delaware) shall be fixed by resolution of the Board of Directors from time to time. Except as otherwise set forth in the Certificate of Incorporation, the directors, other than those who may be elected by the holders of any class or series of stock having a preference over the Common Stock as to dividends or upon liquidation, shall be classified, with respect to the time for which they severally hold office, into three classes, as nearly equal in number as possible, as determined by the Board of Directors, one class to hold office initially for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2000, another class to hold office initially for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2001, and another class to hold office initially for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2002, with members of each class to hold office until their successors are elected and qualified. At each annual meeting of the stockholders of the corporation, the successors to the class of directors whose term expires at that meeting shall be elected to hold office for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders held in the third year following the year of their election.

Subject to the rights of holders of any class or series of stock having a preference over the Common Stock as to dividends or upon liquidation, nominations for the election of directors may be made by the Board of Directors or a committee appointed by the Board of Directors or, solely in the case of any election that is to be held at an annual meeting of stockholders, by any stockholder entitled to vote in the election of directors generally. Any stockholder entitled to vote in the election of directors generally may nominate one or more persons for election as directors at an annual meeting of stockholders only if written notice of such stockholder's intent to make such nomination or nominations has been given, either by personal delivery or by United States mail, postage prepaid, to the Secretary not later than ninety days prior to the anniversary date of the immediately preceding annual meeting. Each such notice shall set forth: (i) the name and address of the stockholder who intends to make the nomination and of the person or persons to be nominated;
(ii) a representation that the stockholder is a holder of record of stock in the corporation entitled to vote at such meeting and intends to appear in person or by proxy at the meeting to nominate the person or persons specified in the notice; (iii) a description of all arrangements or understandings between the stockholder and each nominee and any other person or persons (naming such person or persons) pursuant to which the nomination or nominations are to be made by the stockholder; (iv) such other information regarding each nominee proposed by such stockholder as would be required to be included in a proxy statement filed pursuant to the proxy rules of the Securities and Exchange Commission; and (v) the consent of each nominee to serve as a director of the corporation if so elected. The presiding officer of the meeting may refuse

4

to acknowledge the nomination of any person not made in compliance with the foregoing procedure.

Section 3. Newly Created Directorships and Vacancies. Subject to the rights, if any, of the holders of any class or series of stock having a preference over the Common Stock as to dividends or upon liquidation to elect additional directors under specified circumstances, newly created directorships resulting from any increase in the number of directors and any vacancies on the Board of Directors resulting from death, resignation, disqualification, removal or other cause shall be filled solely by the affirmative vote of a majority of the remaining directors then in office, even though less than a quorum of the Board of Directors, by a sole remaining director, or, if there is no remaining director, by the stockholders. Any director elected in accordance with the preceding sentence shall hold office for the remainder of the full term of the class of directors in which the new directorship was created or the vacancy occurred and until such director's successor has been elected and qualified. No decrease in the number of directors constituting the Board of directors may shorten the term of any incumbent director.

Section 4. Removal. Except as otherwise set forth in the Certificate of Incorporation and subject to the rights, if any, of the holders of any class or series of stock having a preference over the Common Stock as to dividends or upon liquidation in respect of the election of additional directors under specified circumstances, any director may be removed from office by the stockholders only for cause and only in the manner provided in the Certificate of Incorporation.

ARTICLE IV

MEETINGS OF THE BOARD

Section 1. Meetings. The directors of the corporation may hold their meetings, both regular and special, at such times and places as are fixed from time to time by resolution of the Board of Directors.

Section 2. Annual Meeting. A meeting of the Board of Directors shall be held without further notice immediately following the annual meeting of stockholders, and at the same place, unless by unanimous consent of the directors then elected and serving, such time or place shall be changed.

Section 3. Regular Meetings. Regular meetings of the Board of Directors may be held without notice at such time and place as shall from time to time be determined by resolution of the Board of Directors.

Section 4. Special Meetings. Special meetings of the Board of Directors may be called by the Chairman of the Board, the President or by a majority of the total number of directors then in office. The purpose of any special meeting shall be specified in the notice or any waiver of notice. Each notice of a meeting of the Board of Directors may be delivered personally or by telephone to a director not later than the day before the day on which the meeting is to be held; sent to a director at his or her residence or usual place

5

of business, or at any other place of which he or she shall have notified the corporation, by telegram, telex, cable, wireless, facsimile or similar means at least twenty-four hours before the time at which the meeting is to be held; or posted to him or her at such place by prepaid first-class or air mail, as appropriate, at least three days before the day on which the meeting is to be held. Notice of a meeting of the Board of Directors need not be given to any director who submits a signed waiver of notice, whether before or after the meeting, or who attends the meeting without protesting, prior to or at its commencement, the lack of notice to him or her.

Section 5. Quorum. At all meetings of the Board of Directors the presence of a majority of the total number of directors then in office shall be necessary and sufficient to constitute a quorum for the transaction of business, and the affirmative vote of at least a majority of the directors present at any meeting at which there is a quorum shall be the act of the Board of Directors except as may be otherwise specifically provided by the Act or by the Certificate of Incorporation or by these Bylaws. If a quorum shall not be present at any meeting of directors, the directors present thereat may adjourn the meeting from time to time without notice other than announcement at the meeting, until a quorum shall be present.

Section 6. Executive Committee. The Board of Directors may, by resolution passed by a majority of the total number of directors then in office, designate an Executive Committee, to consist of two or more directors of the corporation, one of whom shall be designated as chairman, who shall preside at all meetings of such committee. To the extent provided in the resolution of the Board of Directors, the Executive Committee shall have and may exercise all of the authority of the Board of Directors in the management of the business and affairs of the corporation, except where action of the Board of Directors as a whole is expressly required by the Act or by the Certificate of Incorporation, and shall have power to authorize the seal of the corporation to be affixed to all papers which may require it. The Executive Committee shall keep regular minutes of its proceedings and report the same to the Board of Directors when required. Any member of the Executive Committee may be removed, with or without cause, by the affirmative vote of a majority of the total number of directors then in office. If any vacancy or vacancies occur in the Executive Committee caused by death, resignation, retirement, disqualification, removal or other cause, the vacancy shall be filled by the affirmative vote of a majority of the total number of directors then in office.

Section 7. Other Committees. The Board of Directors may, by resolution passed by a majority of the total number of directors then in office, designate other committees, each committee to consist of two or more directors of the corporation, which committees shall have such power and authority and shall perform such functions as may be provided in such resolution. Such committee or committees shall have such name or names as may be designated by the Board of Directors and shall keep regular minutes of their proceedings and report the same to the Board of Directors when required.

Section 8. Action by Consent. Any action required or permitted to be taken at any meeting of the Board of Directors, the Executive Committee or any other committee of the Board of Directors may be taken without such a meeting if a consent in

6

writing, setting forth the action so taken, is signed by all the members of the Board of Directors or the Executive Committee or such other committee, as the case may be, and the writing or writings are filed with the minutes of the proceedings of the Board of Directors, the Executive Committee or such other committee.

Section 9. Compensation of Directors. Directors, as such, shall not receive any stated salary for their services, but may receive such compensation and reimbursements as may be determined from time to time by resolution of the Board of Directors; provided that nothing herein contained shall be construed to preclude any director from serving the corporation in any other capacity and receiving compensation therefor.

ARTICLE V

NOTICE OF MEETINGS

Section 1. Form of Notice. Whenever notice is required to be given to any director or stockholder under the provisions of the Act or of the Certificate of Incorporation or of these Bylaws, and no provision is made as to how such notice shall be given, it shall not be construed to mean personal notice, but any such notice may be given in writing, by mail, postage prepaid, addressed to such director or stockholder at such address as appears on the books of the corporation. Any notice required or permitted to be given by mail shall be deemed to be given at the time when the same is deposited in the United States mail.

Section 2. Waiver. Whenever any written notice is required to be given to any director or stockholder under the provisions of the Act or of the Certificate of Incorporation or of these Bylaws, a waiver thereof in writing signed by the person or persons entitled to such notice, whether before or after the time stated in such notice, shall be deemed equivalent to the giving of such notice.

Section 3. Telephone Meetings. Stockholders, members of the Board of Directors or members of any committee designated by the Board of Directors may participate in and hold meetings of such stockholders, Board of Directors or committee by means of conference telephone or similar communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other.

ARTICLE VI

OFFICERS

Section 1. In General. The officers of the corporation shall be elected by the Board of Directors and shall consist of a Chairman of the Board, a President, a Vice President, a Secretary and a Treasurer. The Board of Directors may also elect a Vice Chairman of the Board, additional Vice Presidents, Assistant Vice Presidents, a Controller, and one or more Assistant Secretaries and Assistant Treasurers and such other

7

officers as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine. Any two or more offices may be held by the same person.

Section 2. Election. The Board of Directors, at the meeting thereof held after each annual meeting of stockholders, shall elect from its members a Chairman of the Board. At such meeting the Board of Directors shall also elect a President, one or more Vice Presidents, a Secretary and a Treasurer, none of whom need be a member of the Board of Directors.

Section 3. Salaries. The salaries of all officers and agents of the corporation shall be fixed by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee or another committee, if so authorized by the Board of Directors; provided that the Board of Directors may delegate to an officer of the Company the power to fix the compensation of other officers and agents.

Section 4. Term of Office and Removal. Each officer of the corporation shall hold office until his or her death, or his or her resignation or removal from office, or the election or appointment and qualification of his or her successor, whichever shall first occur. Any officer or agent elected or appointed by the Board of Directors may be removed by the Board of Directors, whenever in its judgment the best interests of the corporation will be served thereby. If the office of any officer becomes vacant for any reason, the vacancy may be filled by the Board of Directors.

Section 5. Chairman of the Board. The Chairman of the Board, if any, shall preside at all meetings of the Board of Directors at which he or she may be present and shall perform such other duties as may be assigned to him or her by the Board of Directors.

Section 6. Vice Chairman of the Board. The Vice Chairman of the Board, if any, shall have such powers and perform such duties as the Board of Directors or the Executive Committee may from time to time prescribe or as the Chairman of the Board may from time to time delegate to him. In the absence or disability of the Chairman of the Board, the Vice Chairman of the Board shall perform the duties and exercise the powers of the Chairman of the Board.

Section 7. President. The President shall be the chief executive officer of the corporation and shall preside at all meetings of the stockholders. In the absence of the Chairman of the Board and the Vice Chairman of the Board, if any, he or she shall preside at all meetings of the Board of Directors. The President shall perform such other duties as from time to time may be assigned to him by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee of the corporation. Without limiting the generality or effect of the foregoing, the President shall have full power and authority, except as otherwise required by law or directed by the Board of Directors, (a) to execute, on behalf of the corporation, all duly authorized contracts, agreements, promissory notes, deeds, assignments, conveyances, applications, consents, proxies, powers of attorney and other documents and instruments to which the corporation may be a party, and (b) to vote and otherwise act on behalf of the corporation, in person or by proxy, at any meeting of stockholders (or

8

with respect to any action of such stockholders) of any other corporation in which the corporation may hold securities and otherwise to exercise any and all rights and powers which the corporation may possess by reason of its ownership of securities of any such other corporation.

Section 8. Vice Presidents. Each Vice President shall have such powers and perform such duties as the Board of Directors or the Executive Committee may from time to time prescribe, or as the President may from time to time delegate to him or her. In the absence or disability of the President, a Vice President designated by the Board of Directors shall perform the duties and exercise the powers of the President. Without limiting the generality or effect of the foregoing, each Vice President, if any, designated as an "Executive Vice President" shall have full power and authority, except as otherwise required by law or directed by the Board of Directors, (a) to execute, on behalf of the corporation, all duly authorized contracts, agreements, promissory notes, deeds, assignments, conveyances, applications, consents, proxies, powers of attorney and other documents and instruments to which the corporation may be a party, and
(b) to vote and otherwise act on behalf of the corporation, in person or by proxy, at any meeting of stockholders (or with respect to any action of such stockholders) of any other corporation in which the corporation may hold securities and otherwise to exercise any and all rights and powers which the corporation may possess by reason of its ownership of securities of any such other corporation.

Section 9. Secretary. The Secretary shall attend all meetings of the stockholders and record all votes and the minutes of all proceedings in a book to be kept for that purpose. The Secretary shall perform like duties for the Board of Directors and the Executive Committee when required. He or she shall give, or cause to be given, notice of all meetings of the stockholders and special meetings of the Board of Directors and shall perform duties as may be prescribed by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee. He or she shall keep in safe custody the seal of the corporation.

Section 10. Assistant Secretaries. Each Assistant Secretary shall have such powers and perform such duties as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe. Unless otherwise provided by the Board of Directors, in the absence or disability of the Secretary, any Assistant Secretary may perform the duties and exercise the powers of the Secretary.

Section 11. Treasurer. The Treasurer shall have the custody of all corporate funds and securities, shall keep full and accurate accounts of receipts and disbursements of the corporation, and shall deposit all moneys and other valuable effects in the name and to the credit of the corporation in such depositories as may be designated by the Board of Directors. He or she shall disburse the funds of the corporation as may be ordered by the Board of Directors, taking proper vouchers for such disbursements, shall render to the President and directors, at the regular meetings of the Board, or whenever they may require it, an account of all his or her transactions as Treasurer and of the financial condition of the corporation, and shall perform such other duties as the Board of Directors or the Executive Committee may prescribe.

9

Section 12. Assistant Treasurers. Each Assistant Treasurer shall have such powers and perform such duties as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe. Unless otherwise provided by the Board of Directors, in the absence or disability of the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer may perform and exercise the powers of the Treasurer.

Section 13. Controller. The Controller shall share with the Treasurer responsibility for the financial and accounting books and records of the corporation, shall report to the Treasurer, and shall perform such other duties as the Board of Directors, the Executive Committee or the President may from time to time prescribe.

Section 14. Bonding. If required by the Board of Directors, all or certain of the officers shall give the corporation a bond, in such form, in such sum, and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the Board of Directors, for the faithful performance of the duties of their office and for the restoration to the corporation, in case of their death, resignation, retirement or removal from office, of all books, papers, vouchers, money and other property of whatever kind in their possession or under their control belonging to the corporation.

ARTICLE VII

CERTIFICATES OF SHARES

Section 1. Form of Certificates. Certificates representing shares of stock of the corporation will be in such form as may be determined by the Board of Directors, subject to applicable legal requirements. Such certificates shall be consecutively numbered and shall be entered in the stock book of the corporation as they are issued. Each certificate shall state on the face thereof the holder's name, the number, class of shares, and the par value of such shares or a statement that such shares are without par value. Each certificate shall be signed by the President or a Vice President and the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, and may be sealed with the seal of the corporation or a facsimile thereof. All signatures upon such certificates may be facsimiles. In case any officer or officers who have signed, or whose facsimile signature or signatures have been used on such certificates, shall cease to be such officer or officers of the corporation, whether because of death, resignation or otherwise, before such certificates have been delivered by the corporation or its agents, such certificates may nevertheless be issued and delivered as though the person or persons who signed such certificates or whose facsimile signature or signatures have been used thereon had not ceased to be such officer or officers of the corporation.

Section 2. Lost Certificates. The Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may direct that a new certificate be issued in place of any certificate theretofore issued by the corporation alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed, upon the making of an affidavit of that fact, satisfactory to the Secretary or such Assistant Secretary, by the person claiming the certificate to have been lost, stolen or destroyed, and the Secretary or such Assistant Secretary may require the owner of such lost, stolen or destroyed certificate, or his or her legal representative, to give the corporation a bond, in such form, in such sum,

10

and with such surety or sureties as the Secretary or such Assistant Secretary may approve as indemnity against any claim that may be made against the corporation with respect to the certificate alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed.

Section 3. Transfer of Shares. Shares of stock shall be transferable only on the books of the corporation by the holder thereof in person or by his or her duly authorized attorney, lawfully constituted in writing.

Section 4. Registered Stockholders. The corporation shall be entitled to treat the holder of record of any share or shares of stock as the holder in fact thereof and, accordingly, shall not be bound to recognize any equitable or other claim to or interest in such share or shares on the part of any other person, whether or not it shall have express or other notice thereof, except as otherwise provided by law.

ARTICLE VIII

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section 1. Dividends. Dividends upon the outstanding shares of the corporation, subject to the provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation, if any, may be declared by the Board of Directors at any regular or special meeting. Dividends may be declared and paid in cash, in property, or in shares of the corporation, subject to the provisions of the Act and the Certificate of Incorporation. The Board of Directors may fix in advance a record date for the purpose of determining stockholders entitled to receive payment of any dividend, such record date to be not more than sixty days prior to the payment date of such dividend, or the Board of Directors may close the stock transfer books for such purpose for a period of not more than sixty days prior to the payment date of such dividend. In the absence of any action by the Board of Directors, the date upon which the Board of Directors adopts the resolution declaring such dividend shall be the record date.

Section 2. Reserves. There may be created by resolution of the Board of Directors out of the net profits of the corporation such reserve or reserves as the directors from time to time, in their discretion, think proper to provide for contingencies, or to equalize dividends, or to repair or maintain any property of the corporation, or for such other purpose as the directors shall think beneficial to the corporation, and the directors may modify or abolish any such reserve in the manner in which it was created.

Section 3. Fiscal Year. The fiscal year of the corporation shall be fixed by resolution of the Board of Directors.

Section 4. Seal. The corporation shall have a seal, and said seal may be used by causing it or a facsimile thereof to be impressed or affixed or reproduced or otherwise. Any officer of the corporation shall have authority to affix the seal to any document requiring it.

11

ARTICLE IX

INDEMNITY

Section 1. Damages and Expenses. Without limiting the generality or effect of Article IX of the Certificate of Incorporation, the corporation shall to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law as then in effect indemnify any director or officer of the corporation (each, an "Indemnitee") who is or was or is threatened to be made to become involved in any manner (including without limitation as a party or a witness) in any threatened, pending or completed investigation, claim, action, suit or proceeding, whether of a civil, criminal, administrative or investigative nature (including without limitation any action, suit or proceeding by or in the right of the corporation to procure a judgment in its favor) (each, a "Proceeding") by reason of the fact that such person is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the Board of Directors or an officer of the corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise (whether or not for profit), or by reason of anything actually or allegedly done or not done by such person in any such capacity, against any and all expenses (including attorneys' fees) actually and reasonably incurred by, and any and all judgments, fines and penalties entered or assessed against, and any and all amounts reasonably paid or payable in settlement by, such person in connection with such Proceeding. Such indemnification shall be a contract right and shall include the right to receive payment in advance of any expenses incurred by an Indemnitee in connection with such Proceeding upon receipt of an undertaking (which may be accepted by the corporation without any security for the performance thereof and without regard to the financial capacity of such person to perform its obligations thereunder) by or on behalf of such person to repay such amount if it shall ultimately be determined that he or she is not entitled to be indemnified by the corporation as authorized by this Article IX or otherwise.

The indemnification and advancement of expenses provided by, or granted pursuant to, this Article IX shall not be exclusive of any other rights to which any person seeking indemnification may otherwise be entitled.

The rights to indemnification and advancement of expenses provided by, or granted pursuant to, this Article IX shall continue as to a person who has ceased to be a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation or any other enterprise and shall inure to the benefit of the heirs, executors, administrators and estate of such person.

In addition to the mandatory indemnification of directors and officers of the corporation provided by this Article IX, the corporation may, if and to the extent authorized by the Board of Directors and permitted by the Act, indemnify any person or entity against any liability whatsoever.

Section 2. Insurance, Contracts and Funding. The corporation may purchase and maintain insurance to protect itself or any Indemnitee or other person against any expenses, judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement or incurred by any Indemnitee or other person in connection with any Proceeding referred to in Article IX or otherwise,

12

to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law as then in effect. The corporation may enter into contracts with any person entitled to indemnification under Article IX or otherwise, and may create a trust fund, grant a security interest, or use other means (including without limitation procuring one or more letters of credit) to ensure the payment of such amounts as may be necessary to effect indemnification as provided in this Article IX.

ARTICLE X

AMENDMENTS

Section 1. By Stockholders. Except as otherwise provided by law or by the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, these Bylaws may be amended or repealed by the affirmative vote of the holders of at least a majority of the voting power of all shares of the corporation entitled to vote thereon, at any regular or special meeting of the stockholders, duly convened after notice to the stockholders of that purpose.

Section 2. By the Board of Directors. Except as otherwise provided by law or by the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, these Bylaws may also be amended or repealed by the Board of Directors by the vote of a majority of directors.

13

EXHIBIT 10.2

AMENDED AND RESTATED
1999 STOCK OPTION PLAN
OF
BOFI.COM HOLDING, INC.

1. PURPOSES OF PLAN

The purposes of the 1999 Stock Option Plan ("PLAN") of BofI.com Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the "COMPANY"), are to:

(a) Encourage selected employees and directors to improve operations and increase profits of the Company;

(b) Encourage selected employees and directors to accept or continue employment or association with the Company or its Affiliates; and

(c) Increase the interest of selected employees and directors in the Company's welfare through participation in the growth in value of the common stock, par value $0.01 per share, of the Company (the "COMMON STOCK").

Options granted under this Plan ("OPTIONS") may be "incentive stock options" ("ISOS") intended to satisfy the requirements of Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "CODE"), or "nonqualified options" ("NQOS").

2. ELIGIBLE PERSONS

Every person who at the date of grant of an Option is an employee of the Company or of any Affiliate (as defined below) of the Company is eligible to receive NQOs or ISOs under this Plan. Every person who at the date of grant is a nonemployee director of the Company or any Affiliate (as defined below) of the Company is eligible to receive NQOs under this Plan. The term "AFFILIATE" as used in this Plan means a parent or subsidiary corporation as defined in the applicable provisions (currently Sections 424(e) and (f), respectively) of the Code. The term "EMPLOYEE" includes an officer or director who is an employee of the Company.

3. STOCK SUBJECT TO THIS PLAN

(a) SHARE RESERVE. Subject to the provisions of Section 6.1.1 relating to adjustments upon changes in Common Stock and subsection (b), below, the Common Stock that may be issued pursuant to Options shall not exceed in aggregate 553,875 shares of Common Stock, which amount reflects the amount of shares of Common Stock originally reserved for issuance under this Plan (211,000), adjusted in accordance with Section 6.1.1 for two stock splits effected by the Company in 2001.

(b) EVERGREEN SHARE RESERVE INCREASE. Notwithstanding Section 3(a) hereof and subject to the provisions of Section 6.1.1 relating to adjustments upon changes


in Common Stock, for a period of eight (8) years, commencing with the annual meeting of stockholders in 2001, the aggregate number of shares of Common Stock that is available for issuance under the Plan on any date shall automatically be increased to that number of shares equal to the lesser of: (1) fifteen percent (15%) of the Shares Outstanding; or (2) such lesser number of shares as determined by the Board; provided, however, that in no event shall the number of shares of Common Stock which may be issued under this Plan exceed 3,000,000 shares. As used herein, "Shares Outstanding" shall mean the sum of:
(i) the number of issued and outstanding shares of Common Stock of the Company on the date Options are issued, plus (ii) the number of shares of Common Stock of the Company into which any convertible securities of the Company (whether debt or equity) ("Convertible Securities") may be converted ("Conversion Shares"), computed in accordance with the procedures described below. When computing the number of Conversion Shares (a) Conversion Shares shall be counted as Shares Outstanding as of the date of issuance of the underlying Convertible Securities; (b) assume that the Convertible Securities are converted into Conversion Shares at the price per share equal to the weighted average conversion price in accordance with the terms of the Convertible Securities, regardless of the actual conversion experience (for example, if the Convertible Securities may be converted at $10 per share for three years, $15 per share for two years and $20 per share for one year, assume that all Conversion Shares are converted at $13.33 per share conversion rate [[(3 years "times" $15] + (2 years "times" $15) + (1 year "times" $20)]/"divided by" 6 years]); and (c) assume that Conversion Shares are issued in perpetuity, regardless of any expiration of the Convertible Securities, any redemption or repurchase of such securities and regardless of whether any such Convertible Securities are converted.

(c) REVERSION OF SHARES TO THE SHARE RESERVE. If any Option shall for any reason expire or otherwise terminate, in whole or in part, without having been exercised in full, the shares of Common Stock not acquired under such Option shall revert to and again become available for issuance under the Plan.

(d) SOURCE OF SHARES. The shares of Common Stock subject to the Plan may be unissued shares or reacquired shares bought on the market or otherwise.

4. ADMINISTRATION

4.1 GENERAL. This Plan shall be administered by the Board of Directors of the Company (the "BOARD") or, either in its entirety or only insofar as required pursuant to Section 4.2 hereof, by a committee (the "COMMITTEE") of at least two Board members to which administration of this Plan, or of part of this Plan, is delegated (in either case, the "ADMINISTRATOR"). If the Committee is comprised of two Board members, both members comprising the Committee shall be "non-employee directors" as that term is defined in Rule 16b-3 promulgated by the Securities and Exchange Commission ("RULE 16B-3"), or any successor rule thereto.

4.2 PUBLIC COMPANY. From and after such time as the Company registers a class of equity securities under Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of

2

1934 (the "EXCHANGE ACT"), it is intended that this Plan shall be administered in accordance with the disinterested administration requirements of Rule 16b-3.

4.3 AUTHORITY OF ADMINISTRATOR. Subject to the other provisions of this Plan, the Administrator shall have the authority, in its discretion, to grant Options under the Plan and to determine the persons (each an "OPTIONEE") to whom Options are to be granted. The Administrator shall have the authority (subject to the provisions of this Plan) to establish such rules and regulations as it deems appropriate for the proper administration of this Plan and to make such determinations and interpretations concerning this Plan and Options granted under this Plan as it deems necessary or advisable. The Administrator shall have the authority to authorize any person to execute on behalf of the Company any instrument evidencing the grant of an Option. The Administrator may delegate nondiscretionary administrative duties to such employees of the Company as it deems proper.

4.4 INTERPRETATION BY ADMINISTRATOR. All questions of interpretation, implementation, and application of this Plan shall be determined by the Administrator. Such determinations shall be final and binding on all persons.

4.5 RULE 16B-3. With respect to persons subject to Section 16 of the Exchange Act, if any, transactions under this Plan are intended to comply with the applicable conditions of Rule 16b-3, or any successor rule thereto. To the extent any provision of this Plan or action by the Administrator fails to so comply, it shall be deemed null and void, to the extent permitted by law and deemed advisable by the Administrator. Notwithstanding the above, it shall be the responsibility of such persons, not of the Company or the Administrator, to comply with the requirements of Section 16 of the Exchange Act; and neither the Company nor the Administrator shall be liable if this Plan or any transaction under this Plan fails to comply with the applicable conditions of Rule 16b-3 or any successor rule thereto, or if any such person incurs any liability under
Section 16 of the Exchange Act.

5. GRANTING OF OPTIONS; OPTION AGREEMENT

5.1 TERMINATION OF PLAN. No options shall be granted under this Plan after ten years from the date of adoption of this Plan by the Board.

5.2 STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT. Each Option shall be evidenced by a written stock option agreement (the "OPTION AGREEMENT"), in form satisfactory to the Company, executed by the Company and the person to whom such Option is granted; provided, however, that the failure by the Company, the Optionee, or both, to execute the Option Agreement shall not invalidate the granting of an Option, although the exercise of each option shall be subject to Section 6.1.3.

5.3 TYPE OF OPTION. The Option Agreement shall specify whether each Option it evidences is an NQO or an ISO.

3

6. TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF OPTIONS

Each Option granted under this Plan shall be subject to the terms and conditions set forth in Section 6.1. NQOs shall be also subject to the terms and conditions set forth in Section 6.2, but not those set forth in Section 6.3. ISOs shall also be subject to the terms and conditions set forth in Section 6.3, but not those set forth in Section 6.2.

6.1 TERMS AND CONDITIONS TO WHICH ALL OPTIONS ARE SUBJECT. Options granted under this Plan shall be subject to the following terms and conditions:

6.1.1 CHANGES IN CAPITAL STRUCTURE. Subject to Section 6.1.2, if the stock of the Company is changed by reason of a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend, or recapitalization, combination or reclassification, appropriate adjustments shall be made by the Board in (a) the number and class of shares of stock subject to this Plan and each Option outstanding under this Plan, and (b) the exercise price of each outstanding Option; provided, however, that the Company shall not be required to issue fractional shares as a result of any such adjustments. Each such adjustment shall be subject to approval by the Board in its absolute discretion.

6.1.2 CORPORATE TRANSACTIONS.

(a) DISSOLUTION OR LIQUIDATION. In the event of the proposed dissolution or liquidation of the Company, the Administrator shall notify each Optionee at least 30 days prior to such proposed action. To the extent not previously exercised, all Options will terminate immediately prior to the consummation of such proposed action.

(b) In the event of a "change in control" of the Company, options granted pursuant to the Plan shall automatically be accelerated in full so as to become fully exercisable. In such event, the Administrator shall notify each Optionee at least 30 days prior to such proposed action that the options shall be fully exercisable for a period of 30 days from the date of such notice, and all such options shall terminate upon the expiration of such 30-day period.

For purposes of the foregoing, a change in control means the occurrence of either of the following:

(i) any "person" (as used in Section 13(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and the rules promulgated thereunder) becomes the "beneficial owner" (as defined in Rule 13d-3) of securities representing a majority of the voting power of the then outstanding securities of the Company; or

(ii) a sale of assets involving all or substantially all of the assets of the Company, or a merger or consolidation of the Company in which the holders of securities of the Company immediately prior to such event hold in the aggregate less than a majority of the securities of the Company or any other surviving or resulting entity immediately after such event.

4

6.1.3 TIME OF OPTION EXERCISE. Subject to Section 5 and
Section 6.3.3, Options granted under this Plan shall be exercisable commencing in accordance with a schedule related to the date of the grant of the Option, the date of first employment, or such other date as may be set by the Administrator (in any case, the "VESTING BASE DATE") and specified in the Option Agreement relating to such Option; provided that the right to exercise an Option must vest at the rate of (a) at least 20% per year over five years from the date the Option was granted and (b) not more than 33.33% per year over three years from the date the Option was granted. In any case, no Option shall be exercisable until a written Option Agreement in form satisfactory to the Company is executed by the Company and the Optionee.

6.1.4 OPTION GRANT DATE. The date of grant of an Option under this Plan shall be the date as of which the Administrator approves the grant.

6.1.5 NONTRANSFERABILITY OF OPTION RIGHTS.

(a) INCENTIVE STOCK OPTIONS. No ISOs granted under this Plan may be sold, transferred, pledged, assigned, encumbered or otherwise alienated or hypothecated, other than by will or by the laws of descent and distribution; provided that the deceased Optionee's beneficiary or the representative of the Optionee's estate acknowledges and agrees in writing, in a form reasonably acceptable to the Company, to be bound by the provisions of this Plan (including the exercise procedures described in Section 7) and the Option Agreement covering such Options as if such beneficiary or estate were the Optionee. All rights with respect to ISOs granted to an Optionee under this Plan shall be exercisable during the Optionee's life-time by such Optionee only. Following an Optionee's death, all rights with respect to ISOs that were exercisable at the time of such Optionee's death and have not terminated shall be exercised by the Optionee's designated beneficiary or by the Optionee's estate.

(b) NON-QUALIFIED STOCK OPTIONS. No NQO is assignable or transferable by Optionee except by will or by the laws of descent and distribution. During the life of Optionee, the NQO is exercisable only by the Optionee. Any attempt to assign, pledge, transfer, hypothecate or otherwise dispose of this NQO in a manner not herein permitted, and any levy of execution, attachment, or similar process on this NQO, shall be null and void. All rights with respect to such NQO that were exercisable at the time of the Optionee's death and have not terminated shall be exercised by the Optionee's designated beneficiary or by the Optionee's estate.

6.1.6 PAYMENT. Except as provided below, payment in full, in cash, shall be made for all stock purchased at the time written notice of exercise of an Option is given to the Company, and proceeds of any payment shall constitute general funds of the Company. At the time an Option is granted or exercised, the Administrator, in the exercise of its absolute discretion after considering any tax or accounting consequences, may authorize as an additional method of payment the delivery by the Optionee of Common Stock already owned by the Optionee for all or part of the Option price, provided the value (determined as set forth in Section 6.1.10) of such Common Stock is equal on the date of exercise to the Option exercise price, or such portion thereof

5

as the Optionee is authorized to pay by delivery of such stock; provided, however, that if an Optionee has exercised any portion of any Option granted by the Company by delivery of Common Stock, the Optionee may not, within six months following such exercise, exercise any Option granted under this Plan by delivery of Common Stock without the consent of the Administrator.

6.1.7 TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT.

(a) If, for any reason other than death, disability or "cause" (as defined below), an Optionee ceases to be employed by the Company or any of its Affiliates (such event being called a "TERMINATION"), Options held at the date of Termination (to the extent then exercisable) may be exercised in whole or in part at any time within three months of the date of such Termination, or such other period of not less than 30 days after the date of such Termination as is specified in the Option Agreement (but in no event after the Expiration Date); provided, that if such exercise of the Option would result in liability for the Optionee under Section 16(b) of the Exchange Act, then such 90-day period automatically shall be extended until the tenth day following the last date upon which Optionee has any liability under Section 16(b) (but in no event after the Expiration Date).

(b) If an Optionee dies while employed by the Company or an Affiliate or within the period that the Option remains exercisable after Termination, Options then held (to the extent then exercisable) may be exercised, in whole or in part, by the Optionee, by the Optionee's personal representative, or by the person to whom the Option is transferred by devise or the laws of descent and distribution, at any time within 12 months after the death of the Optionee, or such other period of not less than six months from the date of Termination as is specified in the Option Agreement (but in no event after the Expiration Date).

(c) If an Optionee ceases to be employed by the Company as a result of his or her disability, the Optionee may, but only within six months after the date of Termination (and in no event after the Expiration Date), exercise the Option to the extent otherwise entitled to exercise it at the date of Termination; provided, however, that if such disability is not a "disability" as such term is defined in Section 22(e)(3) of the Code, in the case of an ISO such ISO shall automatically convert to a NQO on the day three months and one day following such Termination. To the extent that the Optionee was not entitled to exercise the Option at the date of Termination or if the Optionee does not exercise such Option to the extent so entitled within the time specified herein, the Option shall terminate, and the shares covered by such Option shall revert to this Plan.

(d) If an Optionee is terminated for "cause" all Options then held by such Optionee shall terminate and no longer be exercisable as of the date of Termination.

(e) For purposes of this Section 6.1.7, "EMPLOYMENT" includes service as an employee or a director.

6

(f) For purposes of this Section 6.1.7, an Optionee's employment shall not be deemed to terminate by reason of sick leave, military leave or other leave of absence approved by the Administrator, if the period of any such leave does not exceed three months or, if longer, if the Optionee's right to reemployment by the Company or any Affiliate is guaranteed either contractually or by statute.

(g) For purposes of this Section 6.1.7, "CAUSE" shall mean Termination (i) by reason of Optionee's commission of a felony, misdemeanor or other illegal conduct involving dishonesty, fraud or personal injury to others,
(ii) by reason of Optionee's dishonesty towards, fraud upon, or deliberate injury or attempted injury to the Company or any of its Affiliates, or (iii) by reason of Optionee's willfully engaging in misconduct which is materially and demonstrably injurious to the Company or any of its Affiliates.

6.1.8 WITHHOLDING AND EMPLOYMENT TAXES. At the time of exercise of an Option or at such other time as the amount of such obligations becomes determinable (the "TAX DATE"), the Optionee shall remit to the Company in cash all applicable federal and state withholding and employment taxes. If authorized by the Administrator in its absolute discretion, after considering any tax or accounting consequences, an Optionee may elect to (i) tender to the Company previously owned shares of Stock or other securities of the Company, or
(ii) have shares of Common Stock which are acquired upon exercise of the Option withheld by the Company to pay some or all of the amount of tax that is required by law to be withheld by the Company as a result of the exercise of such Option, subject to the following limitations:

(a) Any election pursuant to clause (i) above by an Optionee subject to Section 16 of the Exchange Act shall either (x) be made at least six months before the Tax Date and shall be irrevocable; or (y) shall be made in (or made earlier to take effect in) any ten-day period beginning on the third business day following the date of release for publication of the Company's quarterly or annual summary statements of earnings and shall be subject to approval by the Administrator, which approval may be given at any time after such election has been made. In addition, in the case of (y), the Option shall be held at least six months prior to the Tax Date.

(b) Any election pursuant to clause (ii) above, where the Optionee is tendering Common Stock issued pursuant to the exercise of an Option, shall require that such shares be held at least six months prior to the Tax Date.

Any of the foregoing limitations may be waived (or additional limitations may be imposed) by the Administrator, in its absolute discretion, if the Administrator determines that such foregoing limitations are not required (or that such additional limitations are required) in order that the transaction shall be exempt from Section 16(b) of the Exchange Act pursuant to Rule 16b-3, or any successor rule thereto. In addition, any of the foregoing limitations may be waived by the Administrator, in its sole discretion, if the Administrator determines that Rule 16b-3, or any successor rule thereto, is not applicable to the exercise of the Option by the Optionee or for any other reason.

7

Any securities tendered or withheld in accordance with this Section 6.1.8 shall be valued by the Company as of the Tax Date.

6.1.9 OTHER PROVISIONS. Each Option granted under this Plan may contain such other terms, provisions, and conditions not inconsistent with this Plan as may be determined by the Administrator, and each ISO granted under this Plan shall include such provisions and conditions as are necessary to qualify the Option as an "incentive stock option" within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code. If Options provide for a right of first refusal in favor of the Company with respect to stock acquired by employees or directors, such Options shall provide that the right of first refusal shall terminate upon the earlier of (i) the closing of the Company's initial public offering of Common Stock, or
(ii) the date ten years after the grant date as set forth in Section 6.1.4.

6.1.10 DETERMINATION OF VALUE. For purposes of this Plan, the fair market value of Common Stock or other securities of the Company shall be determined as follows:

(a) If the stock of the Company is listed on any established stock exchange or a national market system, including without limitation the National Market System of the National Association of Securities Dealers, Inc. Automated Quotation System, its fair market value shall be the closing sales price for such stock or the closing bid if no sales were reported, as quoted on such system or exchange (or the largest such exchange) for the date the value is to be determined (or if there are no sales for such date, then for the last preceding business day on which there were sales), as reported in the Wall Street Journal or similar publication.

(b) If the stock of the Company is regularly quoted by a recognized securities dealer but selling prices are not reported, its fair market value shall be the mean between the high bid and low asked prices for the stock on the date the value is to be determined (or if there are no quoted prices for such date, then for the last preceding business day on which there were quoted prices).

(c) In the absence of an established market for the stock, the fair market value thereof shall be determined in good faith by the Administrator, by consideration of such factors as the Administrator in its discretion deems appropriate among the recent issue price of other securities of the Company, the Company's net worth, prospective earning power, dividend-paying capacity, and other relevant factors, including the goodwill of the Company, the economic outlook in the Company's industry, the Company's position in the industry and its management, and the values of stock of other corporations in the same or a similar line of business.

6.1.11 OPTION TERM. Subject to Section 6.3.4, no Option shall be exercisable more than ten years after the date of grant, or such lesser period of time as is set forth in the Option Agreement (the end of the maximum exercise period stated in the stock option agreement is referred to in this Plan as the "EXPIRATION DATE").

8

6.1.12 EXERCISE PRICE. The exercise price of any Option granted to any person who owns, directly or by attribution under the Code (currently Section 424(d)), stock possessing more than ten percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or of any Affiliate (a "TEN PERCENT STOCKHOLDER") shall in no event be less than 110% of the fair market value (determined in accordance with Section 6.1.10) of the stock covered by the Option at the time the Option is granted.

6.1.13 CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS OF BANKING SUBSIDIARY. The Office of Thrift Supervision (the "OTS"), the primary regulator of the Bank of Internet, USA, a federal banking subsidiary of the Company, may direct the Company to require all Optionees who are employed by, or are directors of, such bank to exercise or forfeit their Options if such bank's capital falls below the minimum regulatory requirements as determined by the OTS. In such event, any Options which are so directed by the OTS to be exercised, but which are not exercised, shall terminate and be forfeited by the Optionees.

6.2 EXERCISE PRICE OF NQOS. The exercise price of any NQO granted under this Plan shall in no event be less than the fair market value (determined in accordance with Section 6.1.10) of the stock subject to the Option at the time the Option is granted.

6.3 TERMS AND CONDITIONS TO WHICH ONLY ISOS ARE SUBJECT. Options granted under this Plan which are designated as ISOs shall be subject to the following terms and conditions:

6.3.1 EXERCISE PRICE. Except as set forth in Section 6.1.12, the exercise price of an ISO shall be determined in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Code and shall in no event be less than the fair market value (determined in accordance with Section 6.1.10) of the stock subject to the Option at the time the Option is granted.

6.3.2 DISQUALIFYING DISPOSITIONS. If stock acquired by exercise of an ISO granted pursuant to this Plan is disposed of in a "disqualifying disposition" within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code, the holder of the stock immediately before the disposition shall promptly notify the Company in writing of the date and terms of the disposition and shall provide such other information regarding the Option as the Company may reasonably require.

6.3.3 VESTING. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan, ISOs granted to any single Optionee under all incentive stock option plans of the Company and its subsidiaries may not "vest" for more than $100,000 in fair market value of stock (measured on the grant date(s)) in any calendar year. For purposes of the preceding sentence, an option "vests" when it first becomes exercisable. If, by their terms, such ISOs held by an Optionee taken together would vest to a greater extent in a calendar year, and unless otherwise provided by the Administrator, the vesting limitation described above shall be applied by deferring the exercisability of those ISOs or portions of ISOs which have the highest per share exercise prices; but in no event shall more than

9

$100,000 in fair market value of stock (measured on the grant date(s)) vest in any calendar year. The ISOs or portions of ISOs whose exercisability is so deferred shall become exercisable on the first day of the first subsequent calendar year during which they may be exercised, as determined by applying these same principles and all other provisions of this Plan including those relating to the expiration and termination of ISOs. In no event, however, will the operation of this Section 6.3.3 cause an ISO to vest before its terms or, having vested, cease to be vested.

6.3.4 TERM. Notwithstanding Section 6.1.11, no ISO granted to any Ten Percent Stockholder shall be exercisable more than five years after the date of grant.

7. MANNER OF EXERCISE

7.1 WRITTEN NOTICE; PAYMENT. An Optionee wishing to exercise an Option shall give written notice to the Company at its principal executive office, to the attention of the officer of the Company designated by the Administrator, accompanied by payment of the exercise price as provided in
Section 6.1.6. The date the Company receives written notice of an exercise hereunder accompanied by payment of the exercise price will be considered as the date such Option was exercised.

7.2 DELIVERY OF STOCK. Promptly after receipt of written notice of exercise of an Option, the Company shall, without stock issue or transfer taxes to the Optionee or other person entitled to exercise the Option, deliver to the Optionee or such other person a certificate or certificates for the requisite number of shares of stock. An Optionee or permitted transferee of an Optionee shall not have any privileges as a stockholder with respect to any shares of stock covered by the Option until the date of issuance (as evidenced by the appropriate entry on the books of the Company or a duly authorized transfer agent) of such shares.

8. EMPLOYMENT RELATIONSHIP

Nothing in this Plan or any Option granted thereunder shall interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company or of any of its Affiliates to terminate any Optionee's employment or director relationship at any time, nor confer upon any Optionee any right to continue in the employ of, or consult with, the Company or any of its Affiliates, nor interfere in any way with provisions in the Company's charter documents or applicable law relating to the election, appointment, terms of office, and removal of members of the Board.

9. FINANCIAL INFORMATION

The Company shall provide to each Optionee during the period such Optionee holds an outstanding Option, and to each holder of Common Stock acquired upon exercise of Options granted under this Plan for so long as such person is a holder of such Common Stock, annual financial statements of the Company as prepared either by the Company or independent certified public accountants of the Company. Such financial statements shall include, at a minimum, a balance sheet and an income

10

statement, and shall be delivered as soon as practicable following the end of the Company's fiscal year. The provisions of this Section 9 shall not apply with respect to Optionees who are key employees of the Company whose duties in connection with the Company assures them access to information equivalent to the information provided in the financial statements.

10. CONDITIONS UPON ISSUANCE OF SHARES

Shares of Common Stock shall not be issued pursuant to the exercise of an Option unless the exercise of such Option and the issuance and delivery of such shares pursuant thereto shall comply with all relevant provisions of law, including, without limitation, the Securities Act of 1933 (the "SECURITIES ACT").

11. NONEXCLUSIVITY OF PLAN

The adoption of this Plan shall not be construed. as creating any limitations on the power of the Company to adopt such other incentive arrangements as it may deem desirable, including, without limitation, the granting of stock options other than under this Plan.

12. MARKET STANDOFF

Each Optionee, if so requested by the Company or any representative of the underwriters in connection with any registration of the offering of any securities of the Company under the Securities Act shall not sell or otherwise transfer any shares of Common Stock acquired upon exercise of Options during a period not to exceed 180 days following the effective date of a registration statement of the Company filed under the Securities Act; provided, however, that such restriction shall apply only to the first two registration statements of the Company to become effective under the Securities Act which include securities to be sold on behalf of the Company to the public in an underwritten public offering under the Securities Act. The Company may impose stop-transfer instructions with respect to securities subject to the foregoing restriction until the end of the above period.

13. AMENDMENTS TO PLAN

The Board may at any time amend, alter, suspend or discontinue this Plan. Without the consent of an Optionee, no amendment, alteration, suspension or discontinuance may adversely affect outstanding Options except to conform this Plan and ISOs granted under this Plan to the requirements of federal or other tax laws relating to incentive stock options. No amendment, alteration, suspension or discontinuance shall require stockholder approval unless (a) such amendment materially alters the terms of the Plan, (b) stockholder approval is required to preserve incentive stock option treatment for federal income tax purposes, or (c) the Board otherwise concludes that stockholder approval is advisable.

11

14. EFFECTIVE DATE OF PLAN

This Plan shall become effective upon adoption by the Board, provided, however, that no Option shall be exercisable unless and until written consent of the stockholders of the Company, or approval of stockholders of the Company voting at a validly called stockholders' meeting, is obtained within 12 months after adoption by the Board. If such stockholder approval is not obtained within such time, Options granted hereunder shall terminate and be of no force and effect from and after expiration of such 12-month period. Options may be granted and exercised under this Plan only after there has been compliance with all applicable federal and state securities laws.

12

EXHIBIT 10.3

BOFI HOLDING, INC.

2004 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

1. Purposes of the Plan. The purposes of this Plan are to attract and retain the best available personnel, to provide additional incentives to Employees, Directors and Consultants and to promote the success of the Company's business.

2. Definitions. The following definitions shall apply as used herein and in the individual Award Agreements except as defined otherwise in an individual Award Agreement. In the event a term is separately defined in an individual Award Agreement, such definition shall supercede the definition contained in this Section 2.

(a) "Administrator" means the Board or any of the Committees appointed to administer the Plan.

(b) "Affiliate" and "Associate" shall have the respective meanings ascribed to such terms in Rule 12b-2 promulgated under the Exchange Act.

(c) "Applicable Laws" means the legal requirements relating to the Plan and the Awards under applicable provisions of federal securities laws, state corporate and securities laws, the Code, the rules of any applicable stock exchange or national market system, and the rules of any non-U.S. jurisdiction applicable to Awards granted to residents therein.

(d) "Assumed" means that pursuant to a Corporate Transaction either (i) the Award is expressly affirmed by the Company or (ii) the contractual obligations represented by the Award are expressly assumed (and not simply by operation of law) by the successor entity or its Parent in connection with the Corporate Transaction with appropriate adjustments to the number and type of securities of the successor entity or its Parent subject to the Award and the exercise or purchase price thereof which at least preserves the compensation element of the Award existing at the time of the Corporate Transaction as determined in accordance with the instruments evidencing the agreement to assume the Award.

(e) "Award" means the grant of an Option, SAR, Dividend Equivalent Right, Restricted Stock, Restricted Stock Unit or other right or benefit under the Plan.

(f) "Award Agreement" means the written agreement evidencing the grant of an Award executed by the Company and the Grantee, including any amendments thereto.

(g) "Board" means the Board of Directors of the Company.

(h) "Cause" means, with respect to the termination by the Company or a Related Entity of the Grantee's Continuous Service, that such termination is for "Cause" as such term is expressly defined in a then-effective written agreement between the Grantee and the Company or such Related Entity, or in the absence of such then-effective written agreement and definition, is based on, in the determination of the Administrator, the Grantee's: (i) performance of any act or failure to perform any act in bad faith and to the detriment of the Company or a Related Entity; (ii) dishonesty, intentional misconduct or material breach of any agreement with

1

the Company or a Related Entity; or (iii) commission of a crime involving dishonesty, breach of trust, or physical or emotional harm to any person.

(i) "Change in Control" means a change in ownership or control of the Company after the Registration Date effected through either of the following transactions:

(i) the direct or indirect acquisition by any person or related group of persons (other than an acquisition from or by the Company or by a Company-sponsored employee benefit plan or by a person that directly or indirectly controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with, the Company) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 of the Exchange Act) of securities possessing more than fifty percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities pursuant to a tender or exchange offer made directly to the Company's stockholders which a majority of the Continuing Directors who are not Affiliates or Associates of the offeror do not recommend such stockholders accept, or

(ii) a change in the composition of the Board over a period of thirty-six (36) months or less such that a majority of the Board members (rounded up to the next whole number) ceases, by reason of one or more contested elections for Board membership, to be comprised of individuals who are Continuing Directors.

(j) "Code" means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

(k) "Committee" means any committee composed of members of the Board appointed by the Board to administer the Plan.

(l) "Common Stock" means the common stock of the Company.

(m) "Company" means BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation, or any successor entity that adopts the Plan in connection with a Corporate Transaction.

(n) "Consultant" means any person (other than an Employee or a Director, solely with respect to rendering services in such person's capacity as a Director) who is engaged by the Company or any Related Entity to render consulting or advisory services to the Company or such Related Entity.

(o) "Continuing Directors" means members of the Board who either
(i) have been Board members continuously for a period of at least thirty-six
(36) months or (ii) have been Board members for less than thirty-six (36) months and were elected or nominated for election as Board members by at least a majority of the Board members described in clause (i) who were still in office at the time such election or nomination was approved by the Board.

(p) "Continuous Service" means that the provision of services to the Company or a Related Entity in any capacity of Employee, Director or Consultant is not interrupted or terminated. In jurisdictions requiring notice in advance of an effective termination as an Employee, Director or Consultant, Continuous Service shall be deemed terminated upon the actual cessation of providing services to the Company or a Related Entity notwithstanding any required notice period that must be fulfilled before a termination as an Employee, Director or

2

Consultant can be effective under Applicable Laws. A Grantee's Continuous Service shall be deemed to have terminated either upon an actual termination of Continuous Service or upon the entity for which the Grantee provides services ceasing to be a Related Entity. Continuous Service shall not be considered interrupted in the case of (i) any approved leave of absence, (ii) transfers among the Company, any Related Entity, or any successor, in any capacity of Employee, Director or Consultant, or (iii) any change in status as long as the individual remains in the service of the Company or a Related Entity in any capacity of Employee, Director or Consultant (except as otherwise provided in the Award Agreement). An approved leave of absence shall include sick leave, military leave, or any other authorized personal leave.

(q) "Corporate Transaction" means any of the following transactions, provided, however, that the Administrator shall determine under parts (iv) and (v) whether multiple transactions are related, and its determination shall be final, binding and conclusive:

(i) a merger or consolidation in which the Company is not the surviving entity, except for a transaction the principal purpose of which is to change the state in which the Company is incorporated;

(ii) the sale, transfer or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company;

(iii) the complete liquidation or dissolution of the Company;

(iv) any reverse merger or series of related transactions culminating in a reverse merger (including, but not limited to, a tender offer followed by a reverse merger) in which the Company is the surviving entity but (A) the shares of Common Stock outstanding immediately prior to such merger are converted or exchanged by virtue of the merger into other property, whether in the form of securities, cash or otherwise, or (B) in which securities possessing more than forty percent (40%) of the total combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities are transferred to a person or persons different from those who held such securities immediately prior to such merger or the initial transaction culminating in such merger, but excluding any such transaction or series of related transactions that the Administrator determines shall not be a Corporate Transaction; or

(v) acquisition in a single or series of related transactions by any person or related group of persons (other than the Company or by a Company-sponsored employee benefit plan) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 of the Exchange Act) of securities possessing more than fifty percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities but excluding any such transaction or series of related transactions that the Administrator determines shall not be a Corporate Transaction.

(r) "Covered Employee" means an Employee who is a "covered employee" under Section 162(m)(3) of the Code.

(s) "Director" means a member of the Board or the board of directors of any Related Entity.

3

(t) "Disability" means as defined under the long-term disability policy of the Company or the Related Entity to which the Grantee provides services regardless of whether the Grantee is covered by such policy. If the Company or the Related Entity to which the Grantee provides service does not have a long-term disability plan in place, "Disability" means that a Grantee is unable to carry out the responsibilities and functions of the position held by the Grantee by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment for a period of not less than ninety (90) consecutive days. A Grantee will not be considered to have incurred a Disability unless he or she furnishes proof of such impairment sufficient to satisfy the Administrator in its discretion.

(u) "Dividend Equivalent Right" means a right entitling the Grantee to compensation measured by dividends paid with respect to Common Stock.

(v) "Employee" means any person, including an Officer or Director, who is in the employ of the Company or any Related Entity, subject to the control and direction of the Company or any Related Entity as to both the work to be performed and the manner and method of performance. The payment of a director's fee by the Company or a Related Entity shall not be sufficient to constitute "employment" by the Company.

(w) "Exchange Act" means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

(x) "Fair Market Value" means, as of any date, the value of Common Stock determined as follows:

(i) If the Common Stock is listed on one or more established stock exchanges or national market systems, including without limitation The Nasdaq National Market or The Nasdaq SmallCap Market of The Nasdaq Stock Market, its Fair Market Value shall be the closing sales price for such stock (or the closing bid, if no sales were reported) as quoted on the principal exchange or system on which the Common Stock is listed (as determined by the Administrator) on the date of determination (or, if no closing sales price or closing bid was reported on that date, as applicable, on the last trading date such closing sales price or closing bid was reported), as reported in The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the Administrator deems reliable;

(ii) If the Common Stock is regularly quoted on an automated quotation system (including the OTC Bulletin Board) or by a recognized securities dealer, its Fair Market Value shall be the closing sales price for such stock as quoted on such system on the date of determination, but if selling prices are not reported, the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock shall be the mean between the high bid and low asked prices for the Common Stock on the date of determination (or, if no such prices were reported on that date, on the last date such prices were reported), as reported in The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the Administrator deems reliable; or

(iii) In the absence of an established market for the Common Stock of the type described in (i) and (ii), above, the Fair Market Value thereof shall be determined by the Administrator in good faith.

4

(y) "Grantee" means an Employee, Director or Consultant who receives an Award under the Plan.

(z) "Non-Qualified Stock Option" means an Option not intended to qualify as an incentive stock option within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code.

(aa) "Officer" means a person who is an officer of the Company or a Related Entity within the meaning of Section 16 of the Exchange Act and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.

(bb) "Option" means a Non-Qualified Stock Option to purchase Shares pursuant to an Award Agreement granted under the Plan.

(cc) "Parent" means a "parent corporation", whether now or hereafter existing, as defined in Section 424(e) of the Code.

(dd) "Performance-Based Compensation" means compensation qualifying as "performance-based compensation" under Section 162(m) of the Code.

(ee) "Plan" means this 2004 Stock Incentive Plan.

(ff) "Registration Date" means the first to occur of (i) the closing of the first sale to the general public pursuant to a registration statement filed with and declared effective by the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, of (A) the Common Stock or (B) the same class of securities of a successor corporation (or its Parent) issued pursuant to a Corporate Transaction in exchange for or in substitution of the Common Stock; and (ii) in the event of a Corporate Transaction, the date of the consummation of the Corporate Transaction if the same class of securities of the successor corporation (or its Parent) issuable in such Corporate Transaction shall have been sold to the general public pursuant to a registration statement filed with and declared effective by the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, on or prior to the date of consummation of such Corporate Transaction.

(gg) "Related Entity" means any Parent or Subsidiary of the Company and any business, corporation, partnership, limited liability company or other entity in which the Company or a Parent or a Subsidiary of the Company holds a substantial ownership interest, directly or indirectly.

(hh) "Replaced" means that pursuant to a Corporate Transaction the Award is replaced with a comparable stock award or a cash incentive program of the Company, the successor entity (if applicable) or Parent of either of them which preserves the compensation element of such Award existing at the time of the Corporate Transaction and provides for subsequent payout in accordance with the same (or a more favorable) vesting schedule applicable to such Award. The determination of Award comparability shall be made by the Administrator and its determination shall be final, binding and conclusive.

(ii) "Restricted Stock" means Shares issued under the Plan to the Grantee for such consideration, if any, and subject to such restrictions on transfer, rights of first refusal,

5

repurchase provisions, forfeiture provisions, and other terms and conditions as established by the Administrator.

(jj) "Restricted Stock Units" means an Award which may be earned in whole or in part upon the passage of time or the attainment of performance criteria established by the Administrator and which may be settled for cash, Shares or other securities or a combination of cash, Shares or other securities as established by the Administrator.

(kk) "Rule 16b-3" means Rule 16b-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act or any successor thereto.

(ll) "SAR" means a stock appreciation right entitling the Grantee to Shares or cash compensation, as established by the Administrator, measured by appreciation in the value of Common Stock.

(mm) "Share" means a share of the Common Stock.

(nn) "Subsidiary" means a "subsidiary corporation", whether now or hereafter existing, as defined in Section 424(f) of the Code.

3. Stock Subject to the Plan.

(a) Subject to the provisions of Section 10, below, the maximum aggregate number of Shares which may be issued pursuant to (i) all Awards plus
(ii) awards under the Company's 1999 Stock Option Plan may not exceed 14.8% of the number of Shares outstanding from time to time; provided, however, that the maximum aggregate number of Shares which may be issued pursuant to Awards of Restricted Stock under the Plan may not exceed 5.0% of the number of Shares outstanding from time to time (subject to the overall maximum of 14.8% of outstanding Shares); provided, further, that each Share of Restricted Stock that is issued under the Plan and vests will be deemed to be the issuance of three
(3) Shares for purposes of calculating the overall maximum aggregate number of Shares that may be issued under the Plan but not for purposes of calculating the above 5.0% limit applicable to Awards of Restricted Stock.

(b) Any Shares covered by an Award (or portion of an Award) which is forfeited, canceled or expires (whether voluntarily or involuntarily) shall be deemed not to have been issued for purposes of determining the maximum aggregate number of Shares which may be issued under the Plan. Shares that actually have been issued under the Plan pursuant to an Award shall not be returned to the Plan and shall not become available for future issuance under the Plan, except that if unvested Shares are forfeited, or repurchased by the Company at the lower of their original purchase price or their Fair Market Value at the time of repurchase, such Shares shall become available for future grant under the Plan. To the extent not prohibited by the listing requirements of The Nasdaq National Market (or other established stock exchange or national market system on which the Common Stock is traded) and Applicable Law, any Shares covered by an Award which are surrendered (i) in payment of the Award exercise or purchase price or (ii) in satisfaction of tax withholding obligations incident to the exercise of an Award shall be deemed not to have been issued for purposes of determining the maximum number of

6

Shares which may be issued pursuant to all Awards under the Plan, unless otherwise determined by the Administrator.

4. Administration of the Plan.

(a) Plan Administrator.

(i) Administration with Respect to Directors and Officers. With respect to grants of Awards to Directors or Employees who are also Officers or Directors of the Company, the Plan shall be administered by (A) the Board or (B) a Committee designated by the Board, which Committee shall be constituted in such a manner as to satisfy the Applicable Laws and to permit such grants and related transactions under the Plan to be exempt from Section 16(b) of the Exchange Act in accordance with Rule 16b-3. Once appointed, such Committee shall continue to serve in its designated capacity until otherwise directed by the Board.

(ii) Administration With Respect to Consultants and Other Employees. With respect to grants of Awards to Employees or Consultants who are neither Directors nor Officers of the Company, the Plan shall be administered by (A) the Board or (B) a Committee designated by the Board, which Committee shall be constituted in such a manner as to satisfy the Applicable Laws. Once appointed, such Committee shall continue to serve in its designated capacity until otherwise directed by the Board. The Board may authorize one or more Officers to grant such Awards and may limit such authority as the Board determines from time to time.

(iii) Administration With Respect to Covered Employees. Notwithstanding the foregoing, as of and after the date that the exemption for the Plan under Section 162(m) of the Code expires, as set forth in Section 18 below, grants of Awards to any Covered Employee intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation shall be made only by a Committee (or subcommittee of a Committee) which is comprised solely of two or more Directors eligible to serve on a committee making Awards qualifying as Performance-Based Compensation. In the case of such Awards granted to Covered Employees, references to the "Administrator" or to a "Committee" shall be deemed to be references to such Committee or subcommittee.

(iv) Administration Errors. In the event an Award is granted in a manner inconsistent with the provisions of this subsection (a), such Award shall be presumptively valid as of its grant date to the extent permitted by the Applicable Laws.

(b) Powers of the Administrator. Subject to Applicable Laws and the provisions of the Plan (including any other powers given to the Administrator hereunder), and except as otherwise provided by the Board, the Administrator shall have the authority, in its discretion:

(i) to select the Employees, Directors and Consultants to whom Awards may be granted from time to time hereunder;

(ii) to determine whether and to what extent Awards are granted hereunder;

7

(iii) to determine the number of Shares or the amount of other consideration to be covered by each Award granted hereunder;

(iv) to approve forms of Award Agreements for use under the Plan;

(v) to determine the terms and conditions of any Award granted hereunder;

(vi) to amend the terms of any outstanding Award granted under the Plan, provided that (A) any amendment that would adversely affect the Grantee's rights under an outstanding Award shall not be made without the Grantee's written consent, (B) the reduction of the exercise price of any Option awarded under the Plan shall be subject to stockholder approval and (C) canceling an Option at a time when its exercise price exceeds the Fair Market Value of the underlying Shares, in exchange for another Option, Restricted Stock, or other Award shall be subject to stockholder approval, unless the cancellation and exchange occurs in connection with a Corporate Transaction;

(vii) to construe and interpret the terms of the Plan and Awards, including without limitation, any notice of award or Award Agreement, granted pursuant to the Plan;

(viii) to grant Awards to Employees, Directors and Consultants employed outside the United States on such terms and conditions different from those specified in the Plan as may, in the judgment of the Administrator, be necessary or desirable to further the purpose of the Plan;

(ix) to take such other action, not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan, as the Administrator deems appropriate.

(c) Indemnification. In addition to such other rights of indemnification as they may have as members of the Board or as Officers or Employees of the Company or a Related Entity, members of the Board and any Officers or Employees of the Company or a Related Entity to whom authority to act for the Board, the Administrator or the Company is delegated shall be defended and indemnified by the Company to the extent permitted by law on an after-tax basis against all reasonable expenses, including attorneys' fees, actually and necessarily incurred in connection with the defense of any claim, investigation, action, suit or proceeding, or in connection with any appeal therein, to which they or any of them may be a party by reason of any action taken or failure to act under or in connection with the Plan, or any Award granted hereunder, and against all amounts paid by them in settlement thereof (provided such settlement is approved by the Company) or paid by them in satisfaction of a judgment in any such claim, investigation, action, suit or proceeding, except in relation to matters as to which it shall be adjudged in such claim, investigation, action, suit or proceeding that such person is liable for gross negligence, bad faith or intentional misconduct; provided, however, that within thirty (30) days after the institution of such claim, investigation, action, suit or proceeding, such person shall offer to the Company, in writing, the opportunity at the Company's expense to defend the same.

8

5. Eligibility. Awards may be granted to Employees, Directors and Consultants. An Employee, Director or Consultant who has been granted an Award may, if otherwise eligible, be granted additional Awards. Awards may be granted to such Employees, Directors or Consultants who are residing in non-U.S. jurisdictions as the Administrator may determine from time to time.

6. Terms and Conditions of Awards.

(a) Types of Awards. The Administrator is authorized under the Plan to award any type of arrangement to an Employee, Director or Consultant that is not inconsistent with the provisions of the Plan and that by its terms involves or might involve the issuance of (i) Shares, (ii) cash or (iii) an Option, a SAR, or similar right with a fixed or variable price related to the Fair Market Value of the Shares and with an exercise or conversion privilege related to the passage of time, the occurrence of one or more events, or the satisfaction of performance criteria or other conditions. Such awards include, without limitation, Options, SARs, sales or bonuses of Restricted Stock, Restricted Stock Units or Dividend Equivalent Rights, and an Award may consist of one such security or benefit, or two (2) or more of them in any combination or alternative.

(b) Designation of Award. Each Award shall be designated in the Award Agreement.

(c) Conditions of Award. Subject to the terms of the Plan, the Administrator shall determine the provisions, terms, and conditions of each Award including, but not limited to, the Award vesting schedule, repurchase provisions, rights of first refusal, forfeiture provisions, form of payment (cash, Shares, or other consideration) upon settlement of the Award, payment contingencies, and satisfaction of any performance criteria. The performance criteria established by the Administrator may be based on any one of, or combination of, the following: (i) increase in share price, (ii) earnings per share, (iii) total stockholder return, (iv) operating margin, (v) gross margin,
(vi) return on equity, (vii) return on assets, (viii) return on investment, (ix) operating income, (x) net operating income, (xi) pre-tax profit, (xii) cash flow, (xiii) revenue, (xiv) expenses, (xv) earnings before interest, taxes and depreciation, (xvi) economic value added, (xvii) market share and (xviii) personal management objectives. The performance criteria may be applicable to the Company, Related Entities and/or any individual business units of the Company or any Related Entity. Partial achievement of the specified criteria may result in a payment or vesting corresponding to the degree of achievement as specified in the Award Agreement.

(d) Acquisitions and Other Transactions. The Administrator may issue Awards under the Plan in settlement, assumption or substitution for, outstanding awards or obligations to grant future awards in connection with the Company or a Related Entity acquiring another entity, an interest in another entity or an additional interest in a Related Entity whether by merger, stock purchase, asset purchase or other form of transaction.

(e) Deferral of Award Payment. The Administrator may establish one or more programs under the Plan to permit selected Grantees the opportunity to elect to defer receipt of consideration upon exercise of an Award, satisfaction of performance criteria, or other event that absent the election would entitle the Grantee to payment or receipt of Shares or other

9

consideration under an Award. The Administrator may establish the election procedures, the timing of such elections, the mechanisms for payments of, and accrual of interest or other earnings, if any, on amounts, Shares or other consideration so deferred, and such other terms, conditions, rules and procedures that the Administrator deems advisable for the administration of any such deferral program.

(f) Separate Programs. The Administrator may establish one or more separate programs under the Plan for the purpose of issuing particular forms of Awards to one or more classes of Grantees on such terms and conditions as determined by the Administrator from time to time.

(g) Individual Limitations on Awards. Following the date that the exemption from application of Section 162(m) of the Code described in Section 18 (or any exemption having similar effect) ceases to apply to Awards, the following limitations shall apply.

(i) Individual Limit for Options and SARs. The maximum number of Shares with respect to which Options and SARs may be granted to any Grantee in any fiscal year of the Company shall be 100,000 Shares. In connection with a Grantee's commencement of Continuous Service, a Grantee may be granted Options or SARs for up to an additional 100,000 Shares which shall not count against the limit set forth in the previous sentence. The foregoing limitations shall be adjusted proportionately in connection with any change in the Company's capitalization pursuant to Section 10, below. To the extent required by Section 162(m) of the Code or the regulations thereunder, in applying the foregoing limitations with respect to a Grantee, if any Option or SAR is canceled, the canceled Option or SAR shall continue to count against the maximum number of Shares with respect to which Options and SARs may be granted to the Grantee. For this purpose, the repricing of an Option (or in the case of a SAR, the base amount on which the stock appreciation is calculated is reduced to reflect a reduction in the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock) shall be treated as the cancellation of the existing Option or SAR and the grant of a new Option or SAR.

(ii) Individual Limit for Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units. For awards of Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units that are intended to be Performance-Based Compensation, the maximum number of Shares with respect to which such Awards may be granted to any Grantee in any fiscal year of the Company shall be 100,000 Shares. The foregoing limitation shall be adjusted proportionately in connection with any change in the Company's capitalization pursuant to Section 10, below. In connection with a Grantee's commencement of Continuous Service, a Grantee may be granted Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units for up to an additional 100,000 Shares which shall not count against the limit set forth in the previous sentence.

(iii) Deferral. If the vesting or receipt of Shares under an Award is deferred to a later date, any amount (whether denominated in Shares or cash) paid in addition to the original number of Shares subject to such Award will not be treated as an increase in the number of Shares subject to the Award if the additional amount is based either on a reasonable rate of interest or on one or more predetermined actual investments such that the amount payable by the Company at the later date will be based on the actual rate of return of a specific investment (including any decrease as well as any increase in the value of an investment).

10

(h) Early Exercise. The Award Agreement may, but need not, include a provision whereby the Grantee may elect at any time while an Employee, Director or Consultant to exercise any part or all of the Award prior to full vesting of the Award. Any unvested Shares received pursuant to such exercise may be subject to a repurchase right in favor of the Company or a Related Entity or to any other restriction the Administrator determines to be appropriate.

(i) Term of Award. The term of each Award shall be the term stated in the Award Agreement. The specified term of any Award shall not include any period for which the Grantee has elected to defer the receipt of the Shares or cash issuable pursuant to the Award.

(j) Transferability of Awards. Awards shall be transferable (i) by will and by the laws of descent and distribution and (ii) during the lifetime of the Grantee, to the extent and in the manner authorized by the Administrator. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Grantee may designate one or more beneficiaries of the Grantee's Award in the event of the Grantee's death on a beneficiary designation form provided by the Administrator.

(k) Time of Granting Awards. The date of grant of an Award shall for all purposes be the date on which the Administrator makes the determination to grant such Award, or such other date as is determined by the Administrator.

7. Award Exercise or Purchase Price, Consideration and Taxes.

(a) Exercise or Purchase Price. The exercise or purchase price, if any, for an Award shall be as follows:

(i) In the case of an Option, the per Share exercise price shall be not less than eighty-five percent (85%) of the Fair Market Value per Share on the date of grant unless otherwise determined by the Administrator.

(ii) In the case of Options or SARs intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation, the exercise or base appreciation amount shall be not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the Fair Market Value per Share on the date of grant.

(iii) In the case of other Awards, such price as is determined by the Administrator.

(iv) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section
7(a), in the case of an Award issued pursuant to Section 6(d), above, the exercise or purchase price for the Award shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of the relevant instrument evidencing the agreement to issue such Award.

(b) Consideration. Subject to Applicable Laws, the consideration to be paid for the Shares to be issued upon exercise or purchase of an Award including the method of payment, shall be determined by the Administrator. In addition to any other types of consideration the Administrator may determine, the Administrator is authorized to accept as consideration for Shares issued under the Plan the following, provided that the portion of the consideration equal to the par value of the Shares must be paid in cash or other legal consideration permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law:

11

(i) cash;

(ii) check;

(iii) if the exercise or purchase occurs on or after the Registration Date, surrender of Shares or delivery of a properly executed form of attestation of ownership of Shares as the Administrator may require which have a Fair Market Value on the date of surrender or attestation equal to the aggregate exercise price of the Shares as to which said Award shall be exercised, provided, however, that Shares acquired under the Plan or any other equity compensation plan or agreement of the Company must have been held by the Grantee for a period of more than six (6) months (and not used for another Award exercise by attestation during such period);

(iv) with respect to Options, if the exercise occurs on or after the Registration Date, payment through a broker-dealer sale and remittance procedure pursuant to which the Grantee (A) shall provide written instructions to a Company designated brokerage firm to effect the immediate sale of some or all of the purchased Shares and remit to the Company sufficient funds to cover the aggregate exercise price payable for the purchased Shares and (B) shall provide written directives to the Company to deliver the certificates for the purchased Shares directly to such brokerage firm in order to complete the sale transaction; or

(v) any combination of the foregoing methods of payment.

The Administrator may at any time or from time to time, by adoption of or by amendment to the standard forms of Award Agreement described in Section
4(b)(iv), or by other means, grant Awards which do not permit all of the foregoing forms of consideration to be used in payment for the Shares or which otherwise restrict one or more forms of consideration.

(c) Taxes. No Shares shall be delivered under the Plan to any Grantee or other person until such Grantee or other person has made arrangements acceptable to the Administrator for the satisfaction of any non-U.S., federal, state, or local income and employment tax withholding obligations, including, without limitation, obligations incident to the receipt of Shares. Upon exercise or vesting of an Award the Company shall withhold or collect from Grantee an amount sufficient to satisfy such tax obligations, including, but not limited too, by surrender of the whole number of Shares covered by the Award sufficient to satisfy the minimum applicable tax withholding obligations incident to the exercise or vesting of an Award.

8. Exercise of Award.

(a) Procedure for Exercise; Rights as a Stockholder.

(i) Any Award granted hereunder shall be exercisable at such times and under such conditions as determined by the Administrator under the terms of the Plan and specified in the Award Agreement.

(ii) An Award shall be deemed to be exercised when written notice of such exercise has been given to the Company in accordance with the terms of the Award by the

12

person entitled to exercise the Award and full payment for the Shares with respect to which the Award is exercised, including, to the extent selected, use of the broker-dealer sale and remittance procedure to pay the purchase price as provided in Section 7(b)(iv).

(b) Exercise of Award Following Termination of Continuous Service.

(i) An Award may not be exercised after the termination date of such Award set forth in the Award Agreement and may be exercised following the termination of a Grantee's Continuous Service only to the extent provided in the Award Agreement.

(ii) Where the Award Agreement permits a Grantee to exercise an Award following the termination of the Grantee's Continuous Service for a specified period, the Award shall terminate to the extent not exercised on the last day of the specified period or the last day of the original term of the Award, whichever occurs first.

9. Conditions Upon Issuance of Shares.

(a) Shares shall not be issued pursuant to the exercise of an Award unless the exercise of such Award and the issuance and delivery of such Shares pursuant thereto shall comply with all Applicable Laws, and shall be further subject to the approval of counsel for the Company with respect to such compliance.

(b) As a condition to the exercise of an Award, the Company may require the person exercising such Award to represent and warrant at the time of any such exercise that the Shares are being purchased only for investment and without any present intention to sell or distribute such Shares if, in the opinion of counsel for the Company, such a representation is required by any Applicable Laws.

10. Adjustments Upon Changes in Capitalization. Subject to any required action by the stockholders of the Company, the number of Shares covered by each outstanding Award, and the number of Shares which have been authorized for issuance under the Plan but as to which no Awards have yet been granted or which have been returned to the Plan, the exercise or purchase price of each such outstanding Award, the maximum number of Shares with respect to which Awards may be granted to any Grantee in any fiscal year of the Company, as well as any other terms that the Administrator determines require adjustment shall be proportionately adjusted for (i) any increase or decrease in the number of issued Shares resulting from a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend, combination or reclassification of the Shares, or similar transaction affecting the Shares, (ii) any other increase or decrease in the number of issued Shares effected without receipt of consideration by the Company, or (iii) as the Administrator may determine in its discretion, any other transaction with respect to Common Stock including a corporate merger, consolidation, acquisition of property or stock, separation (including a spin-off or other distribution of stock or property), reorganization, liquidation (whether partial or complete) or any similar transaction; provided, however that conversion of any convertible securities of the Company shall not be deemed to have been "effected without receipt of consideration." Such adjustment shall be made by the Administrator and its determination shall be final, binding and conclusive. Except as the Administrator determines, no issuance by the Company of shares of stock of any class, or securities convertible into shares of stock of any class, shall affect, and no

13

adjustment by reason hereof shall be made with respect to, the number or price of Shares subject to an Award.

11. Corporate Transactions and Changes in Control.

(a) Termination of Award to Extent Not Assumed in Corporate Transaction. Effective upon the consummation of a Corporate Transaction, all outstanding Awards under the Plan shall terminate. However, all such Awards shall not terminate to the extent they are Assumed in connection with the Corporate Transaction.

(b) Acceleration of Award Upon Corporate Transaction or Change in Control. The Administrator shall have the authority, exercisable either in advance of any actual or anticipated Corporate Transaction or Change in Control or at the time of an actual Corporate Transaction or Change in Control and exercisable at the time of the grant of an Award under the Plan or any time while an Award remains outstanding, to provide for the full or partial automatic vesting and exercisability of one or more outstanding unvested Awards under the Plan and the release from restrictions on transfer and repurchase or forfeiture rights of such Awards in connection with a Corporate Transaction or Change in Control, on such terms and conditions as the Administrator may specify. The Administrator also shall have the authority to condition any such Award vesting and exercisability or release from such limitations upon the subsequent termination of the Continuous Service of the Grantee within a specified period following the effective date of the Corporate Transaction or Change in Control. The Administrator may provide that any Awards so vested or released from such limitations in connection with a Change in Control, shall remain fully exercisable until the expiration or sooner termination of the Award.

12. Effective Date and Term of Plan. The Plan shall become effective upon its approval by the stockholders of the Company. It shall continue in effect for a term of ten (10) years unless sooner terminated. Subject to Section 17, below, and Applicable Laws, Awards may be granted under the Plan upon its becoming effective.

13. Amendment, Suspension or Termination of the Plan.

(a) The Board may at any time amend, suspend or terminate the Plan; provided, however, that no such amendment shall be made without the approval of the Company's stockholders to the extent such approval is required by Applicable Laws, or if such amendment would change any of the provisions of
Section 4(b)(vi) or this Section 13(a).

(b) No Award may be granted during any suspension of the Plan or after termination of the Plan.

(c) No suspension or termination of the Plan (including termination of the Plan under Section (a), above) shall adversely affect any rights under Awards already granted to a Grantee.

14

14. Reservation of Shares.

(a) The Company, during the term of the Plan, will at all times reserve and keep available such number of Shares as shall be sufficient to satisfy the requirements of the Plan.

(b) The inability of the Company to obtain authority from any regulatory body having jurisdiction, which authority is deemed by the Company's counsel to be necessary to the lawful issuance and sale of any Shares hereunder, shall relieve the Company of any liability in respect of the failure to issue or sell such Shares as to which such requisite authority shall not have been obtained.

15. No Effect on Terms of Employment/Consulting Relationship. The Plan shall not confer upon any Grantee any right with respect to the Grantee's Continuous Service, nor shall it interfere in any way with his or her right or the right of the Company or any Related Entity to terminate the Grantee's Continuous Service at any time, with or without Cause, and with or without notice. The ability of the Company or any Related Entity to terminate the employment of a Grantee who is employed at will is in no way affected by its determination that the Grantee's Continuous Service has been terminated for Cause for the purposes of this Plan.

16. No Effect on Retirement and Other Benefit Plans. Except as specifically provided in a retirement or other benefit plan of the Company or a Related Entity, Awards shall not be deemed compensation for purposes of computing benefits or contributions under any retirement plan of the Company or a Related Entity, and shall not affect any benefits under any other benefit plan of any kind or any benefit plan subsequently instituted under which the availability or amount of benefits is related to level of compensation. The Plan is not a "Retirement Plan" or "Welfare Plan" under the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.

17. Stockholder Approval. The Plan shall be subject to approval by the stockholders of the Company. Such stockholder approval shall be obtained in the degree and manner required under Applicable Laws.

18. Effect of Section 162(m) of the Code. Section 162(m) of the Code does not apply to the Plan prior to the Registration Date. Following the Registration Date, the Plan, and all Awards issued thereunder, are intended to be exempt from the application of Section 162(m) of the Code, which restricts under certain circumstances the Federal income tax deduction for compensation paid by a public company to named executives in excess of $1 million per year. The exemption is based on Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(f), in the form existing on the effective date of the Plan, with the understanding that such regulation generally exempts from the application of Section 162(m) of the Code compensation paid pursuant to a plan that existed before a company becomes publicly held. Under such Treasury Regulation, this exemption is available to the Plan for the duration of the period that lasts until the earlier of (i) the expiration of the Plan, (ii) the material modification of the Plan, (iii) the exhaustion of the maximum number of shares of Common Stock available for Awards under the Plan, as set forth in Section 3(a), (iv) the first meeting of shareholders at which directors are to be elected that occurs after the close of the third calendar year following the calendar year in which the Company first becomes subject to the reporting obligations of Section 12 of the Exchange Act, or (v) such other

15

date required by Section 162(m) of the Code and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder. To the extent that the Administrator determines as of the date of grant of an Award that (i) the Award is intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation and (ii) the exemption described above is no longer available with respect to such Award, such Award shall not be effective until any stockholder approval required under Section 162(m) of the Code has been obtained.

19. Unfunded Obligation. Grantees shall have the status of general unsecured creditors of the Company. Any amounts payable to Grantees pursuant to the Plan shall be unfunded and unsecured obligations for all purposes, including, without limitation, Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended. Neither the Company nor any Related Entity shall be required to segregate any monies from its general funds, or to create any trusts, or establish any special accounts with respect to such obligations. The Company shall retain at all times beneficial ownership of any investments, including trust investments, which the Company may make to fulfill its payment obligations hereunder. Any investments or the creation or maintenance of any trust or any Grantee account shall not create or constitute a trust or fiduciary relationship between the Administrator, the Company or any Related Entity and a Grantee, or otherwise create any vested or beneficial interest in any Grantee or the Grantee's creditors in any assets of the Company or a Related Entity. The Grantees shall have no claim against the Company or any Related Entity for any changes in the value of any assets that may be invested or reinvested by the Company with respect to the Plan.

20. Construction. Captions and titles contained herein are for convenience only and shall not affect the meaning or interpretation of any provision of the Plan. Except when otherwise indicated by the context, the singular shall include the plural and the plural shall include the singular. Use of the term "or" is not intended to be exclusive, unless the context clearly requires otherwise.

16

EXHIBIT 10.4

BOFI HOLDING, INC.

2004 EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN

The following constitute the provisions of the 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan of BofI Holding, Inc.

1. Purpose. The purpose of the Plan is to provide Employees of the Company and its Designated Parents or Subsidiaries with an opportunity to purchase Common Stock of the Company through accumulated payroll deductions. It is the intention of the Company to have the Plan qualify as an "Employee Stock Purchase Plan" under Section 423 of the Code and the applicable regulations thereunder. The provisions of the Plan, accordingly, shall be construed so as to extend and limit participation in a manner consistent with the requirements of that Section 423 of the Code.

2. Definitions. As used herein, the following definitions shall apply:

(a) "Administrator" means either the Board or a committee of the Board that is responsible for the administration of the Plan as is designated from time to time by resolution of the Board.

(b) "Applicable Laws" means the legal requirements relating to the administration of employee stock purchase plans, if any, under applicable provisions of federal securities laws, state corporate and securities laws, the Code and the applicable regulations thereunder, the rules of any applicable stock exchange or national market system, and the rules of any foreign jurisdiction applicable to participation in the Plan by residents therein.

(c) "Board" means the Board of Directors of the Company.

(d) "Code" means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

(e) "Common Stock" means the common stock of the Company.

(f) "Company" means BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation.

(g) "Compensation" means an Employee's base salary from the Company or one or more Designated Parents or Subsidiaries, including such amounts of base salary as are deferred by the Employee (i) under a qualified cash or deferred arrangement described in Section 401(k) of the Code, or (ii) to a plan qualified under Section 125 of the Code. Compensation does not include overtime, bonuses, annual awards, other incentive payments, reimbursements or other expense allowances, fringe benefits (cash or noncash), moving expenses, deferred compensation, contributions (other than contributions described in the first sentence) made on the Employee's behalf by the Company or one or more Designated Parents or Subsidiaries under any employee benefit or welfare plan now or hereafter established, and any other payments not specifically referenced in the first sentence.

(h) "Corporate Transaction" means any of the following transactions:

1

(1) a merger or consolidation in which the Company is not the surviving entity, except for a transaction the principal purpose of which is to change the state in which the Company is incorporated;

(2) the sale, transfer or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company (including the capital stock of the Company's subsidiary corporations);

(3) the complete liquidation or dissolution of the Company;

(4) any reverse merger or series of related transactions culminating in a reverse merger (including, but not limited to, a tender offer followed by a reverse merger) in which the Company is the surviving entity but (A) the shares of Common Stock outstanding immediately prior to such merger are converted or exchanged by virtue of the merger into other property, whether in the form of securities, cash or otherwise, or (B) in which securities possessing more than forty percent (40%) of the total combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities are transferred to a person or persons different from those who held such securities immediately prior to such merger or the initial transaction culminating in such merger, but excluding any such transaction or series of related transactions that the Administrator determines shall not be a Corporate Transaction; or

(5) acquisition in a single or series of related transactions by any person or related group of persons (other than the Company or by a Company-sponsored employee benefit plan) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 of the Exchange Act) of securities possessing more than fifty percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities but excluding any such transaction or series of related transactions that the Administrator determines shall not be a Corporate Transaction.

(i) "Designated Parents or Subsidiaries" means the Parents or Subsidiaries that have been designated by the Administrator from time to time as eligible to participate in the Plan.

(j) "Effective Date" means the date determined by the Board. However, should any Parent or Subsidiary become a Designated Parent or Subsidiary after such date, then the Administrator, in its discretion, shall designate a separate Effective Date with respect to the employee-participants of such Designated Parent or Subsidiary.

(k) "Employee" means any individual, including an officer or director, who is an employee of the Company or a Designated Parent or Subsidiary for purposes of Section 423 of the Code. For purposes of the Plan, the employment relationship shall be treated as continuing intact while the individual is on sick leave or other leave of absence approved by the individual's employer. Where the period of leave exceeds three (3) months and the individual's right to reemployment is not guaranteed either by statute or by contract, the employment relationship will be deemed to have terminated on the day three (3) months and one (1) day after the commencement of such leave, for purposes of determining eligibility to participate in the Plan.

(l) "Enrollment Date" means the first day of each Offer Period.

2

(m) "Exchange Act" means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

(n) "Exercise Date" means the last day of each Purchase Period.

(o) "Fair Market Value" means, as of any date, the value of Common Stock determined as follows:

(1) If the Common Stock is listed on one or more established stock exchanges or national market systems, including without limitation The Nasdaq National Market or The Nasdaq SmallCap Market of The Nasdaq Stock Market, its Fair Market Value shall be the closing sales price for such stock (or the closing bid, if no sales were reported) as quoted on the principal exchange or system on which the Common Stock is listed (as determined by the Administrator) on the date of determination (or, if no closing sales price or closing bid was reported on that date, as applicable, on the last trading date such closing sales price or closing bid was reported), as reported in The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the Administrator deems reliable;

(2) If the Common Stock is regularly quoted on an automated quotation system (including the OTC Bulletin Board) or by a recognized securities dealer, its Fair Market Value shall be the closing sales price for such stock as quoted on such system or by such securities dealer on the date of determination, but if selling prices are not reported, the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock shall be the mean between the high bid and low asked prices for the Common Stock on the date of determination (or, if no such prices were reported on that date, on the last date such prices were reported), as reported in The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the Administrator deems reliable; or

(3) In the absence of an established market for the Common Stock of the type described in (1) and (2), above, the Fair Market Value thereof shall be determined by the Administrator in good faith.

(p) "Offer Period" means an Offer Period established pursuant to
Section 4 hereof.

(q) "Parent" means a "parent corporation" of the Company, whether now or hereafter existing, as defined in Section 424(e) of the Code.

(r) "Participant" means an Employee of the Company or Designated Parent or Subsidiary who has completed a subscription agreement as set forth in
Section 5(a) and is thereby enrolled in the Plan.

(s) "Plan" means this Employee Stock Purchase Plan.

(t) "Purchase Period" means a period of approximately six months, commencing on May 15 and November 15 of each year and terminating on the next following November 14 or May 14, respectively; provided, however, that the first Purchase Period shall commence on the Effective Date and shall end on May 14, 2005.

3

(u) "Purchase Price" shall mean an amount, as determined by the Board prior to the Enrollment Date of a particular Offer Period, equal to no less than 85% of the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock on the Enrollment Date or on the Exercise Date, whichever is lower.

(v) "Reserves" means, as of any date, the sum of (1) the number of shares of Common Stock covered by each then outstanding option under the Plan which has not yet been exercised and (2) the number of shares of Common Stock which have been authorized for issuance under the Plan but not then subject to an outstanding option.

(w) "Subsidiary" means a "subsidiary corporation" of the Company, whether now or hereafter existing, as defined in Section 424(f) of the Code.

3. Eligibility.

(a) General. Any individual who is an Employee on a given Enrollment Date shall be eligible to participate in the Plan for the Offer Period commencing with such Enrollment Date. No individual who is not an Employee shall be eligible to participate in the Plan.

(b) Limitations on Grant and Accrual. Any provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, no Employee shall be granted an option under the Plan (i) if, immediately after the grant, such Employee (taking into account stock owned by any other person whose stock would be attributed to such Employee pursuant to Section 424(d) of the Code) would own stock and/or hold outstanding options to purchase stock possessing five percent (5%) or more of the total combined voting power or value of all classes of stock of the Company or of any Parent or Subsidiary, or (ii) which permits the Employee's rights to purchase stock under all employee stock purchase plans of the Company and its Parents or Subsidiaries to accrue at a rate which exceeds Twenty-Five Thousand Dollars (US$25,000) worth of stock (determined at the Fair Market Value of the shares at the time such option is granted) for each calendar year in which such option is outstanding at any time. The determination of the accrual of the right to purchase stock shall be made in accordance with Section 423(b)(8) of the Code and the regulations thereunder.

(c) Other Limits on Eligibility. Notwithstanding SubSection (a), above, the following Employees shall not be eligible to participate in the Plan for any relevant Offer Period: (i) Employees whose customary employment is 20 hours or less per week; (ii) Employees whose customary employment is for not more than 5 months in any calendar year; (iii) Employees who have been employed for fewer than 5 days; and (iv) Employees who are subject to rules or laws of a foreign jurisdiction that prohibit or make impractical the participation of such Employees in the Plan.

4. Offer Periods.

(a) The Plan shall be implemented through overlapping or consecutive Offer Periods until such time as (i) the maximum number of shares of Common Stock available for issuance under the Plan shall have been purchased or
(ii) the Plan shall have been sooner terminated in accordance with Section 19 hereof. The maximum duration of an Offer Period shall be twenty-seven (27) months. Initially, the Plan shall be implemented through overlapping

4

Offer Periods of twenty-four (24) months' duration commencing each May 15 and November 15 following the Effective Date (except that the initial Offer Period shall commence on the Effective Date and shall end on May 14, 2006).

(b) A Participant shall be granted a separate option for each Offer Period in which he or she participates. The option shall be granted on the Enrollment Date and shall be automatically exercised in successive installments on the Exercise Dates ending within the Offer Period.

(c) If on the first day of any Purchase Period in an Offer Period in which an Employee is a Participant, the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock is less than the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the Enrollment Date of the Offer Period (after taking into account any adjustment during the Offer Period pursuant to Section 18(a)), the Offer Period shall be terminated automatically and the Participant shall be enrolled automatically in the new Offer Period which has its first Purchase Period commencing on that date, provided the Employee is eligible to participate in the Plan on that date and has not elected to terminate participation in the Plan.

(d) Except as specifically provided herein, the acquisition of Common Stock through participation in the Plan for any Offer Period shall neither limit nor require the acquisition of Common Stock by a Participant in any subsequent Offer Period.

5. Participation.

(a) An eligible Employee may become a Participant in the Plan by completing a subscription agreement authorizing payroll deductions in the form of Exhibit A to this Plan (or such other form or method (including electronic forms) as the Administrator may designate from time to time) and filing it with the designated payroll office of the Company at least five (5) business days prior to the Enrollment Date for the Offer Period in which such participation will commence, unless a later time for filing the subscription agreement is set by the Administrator for all eligible Employees with respect to a given Offer Period.

(b) Payroll deductions for a Participant shall commence with the first partial or full payroll period beginning on the Enrollment Date and shall end on the last complete payroll period during the Offer Period, unless sooner terminated by the Participant as provided in Section 10.

6. Payroll Deductions.

(a) At the time a Participant files a subscription agreement, the Participant shall elect to have payroll deductions made during the Offer Period in amounts between one percent (1%) and not exceeding fifteen percent (15%) of the Compensation which the Participant receives during the Offer Period.

(b) All payroll deductions made for a Participant shall be credited to the Participant's account under the Plan and will be withheld in whole percentages only. A Participant may not make any additional payments into such account.

5

(c) A Participant may discontinue participation in the Plan as provided in Section 10, or may increase or decrease the rate of payroll deductions during the Offer Period by completing and filing with the Company a change of status notice in the form of Exhibit B to this Plan (or such other form or method (including electronic forms) as the Administrator may designate from time to time) authorizing an increase or decrease in the payroll deduction rate. Any increase or decrease in the rate of a Participant's payroll deductions shall be effective with the first full payroll period commencing five (5) business days after the Company's receipt of the change of status notice unless the Company elects to process a given change in participation more quickly. A Participant's subscription agreement (as modified by any change of status notice) shall remain in effect for successive Offer Periods unless terminated as provided in Section 10. The Administrator shall be authorized to limit the number of payroll deduction rate changes during any Offer Period.

(d) Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent necessary to comply with Section 423(b)(8) of the Code and Section 3(b) herein, a Participant's payroll deductions shall be decreased to 0%. Payroll deductions shall recommence at the rate provided in such Participant's subscription agreement, as amended, at the time when permitted under Section 423(b)(8) of the Code and Section 3(b) herein, unless such participation is sooner terminated by the Participant as provided in Section 10.

7. Grant of Option. On the Enrollment Date, each Participant shall be granted an option to purchase (at the applicable Purchase Price) a number of shares of the Common Stock as determined by the Administrator, subject to adjustment as provided in Section 18 hereof; provided that such option shall be subject to the limitations set forth in Sections 3(b), 6 and 12 hereof. The Administrator shall also determine the maximum number of shares of Common Stock that a Participant may purchase on each Exercise Date within the particular Offer Period. Exercise of the option shall occur as provided in Section 8, unless the Participant has withdrawn pursuant to Section 10, and the option, to the extent not exercised, shall expire on the last day of the Offer Period with respect to which such option was granted. Notwithstanding the foregoing, shares subject to the option may only be purchased with accumulated payroll deductions credited to a Participant's account in accordance with Section 6 of the Plan. In addition, to the extent an option is not exercised on each Exercise Date, the option shall lapse and thereafter cease to be exercisable.

8. Exercise of Option. Unless a Participant withdraws from the Plan as provided in Section 10, below, the Participant's option for the purchase of shares of Common Stock will be exercised automatically on each Exercise Date, by applying the accumulated payroll deductions in the Participant's account to purchase the number of full shares subject to the option by dividing such Participant's payroll deductions accumulated prior to such Exercise Date and retained in the Participant's account as of the Exercise Date by the applicable Purchase Price. No fractional shares will be purchased; any payroll deductions accumulated in a Participant's account which are not sufficient to purchase a full share shall be carried over to the next Purchase Period or Offer Period, whichever applies, or returned to the Participant, if the Participant withdraws from the Plan. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any amount remaining in a Participant's account on the Exercise Date due to the application of Section 423(b)(8) of the Code or Section 7, above, shall be returned to the Participant and shall not be carried over to the

6

next Offer Period or Purchase Period. During a Participant's lifetime, a Participant's option to purchase shares hereunder is exercisable only by the Participant.

9. Delivery. Upon receipt of a request from a Participant after each Exercise Date on which a purchase of shares occurs, the Company shall arrange the delivery to such Participant, as promptly as practicable, of a certificate representing the shares purchased upon exercise of the Participant's option.

10. Withdrawal; Termination of Employment.

(a) A Participant may either (i) withdraw all but not less than all the payroll deductions credited to the Participant's account and not yet used to exercise the Participant's option under the Plan or (ii) terminate future payroll deductions, but allow accumulated payroll deductions to be used to exercise the Participant's option under the Plan at any time by giving written notice to the Company in the form of Exhibit B to this Plan (or such other form or method (including electronic forms) as the Administrator may designate from time to time). If the Participant elects withdrawal alternative
(i) described above, all of the Participant's payroll deductions credited to the Participant's account will be paid to such Participant as promptly as practicable after receipt of notice of withdrawal, such Participant's option for the Offer Period will be automatically terminated, and no further payroll deductions for the purchase of shares will be made during the Offer Period. If the Participant elects withdrawal alternative (ii) described above, no further payroll deductions for the purchase of shares will be made during the Offer Period, all of the Participant's payroll deductions credited to the Participant's account will be applied to the exercise of the Participant's option on the next Exercise Date (subject to Sections 3(b), 6, 7 and 12), and after such Exercise Date, such Participant's option for the Offer Period will be automatically terminated and all remaining accumulated payroll deduction amounts shall be returned to the Participant. If a Participant withdraws from an Offer Period, payroll deductions will not resume at the beginning of the succeeding Offer Period unless the Participant delivers to the Company a new subscription agreement.

(b) Upon termination of a Participant's employment relationship (as described in Section 2(k)) at a time more than three (3) months from the next scheduled Exercise Date, the payroll deductions credited to such Participant's account during the Offer Period but not yet used to exercise the option will be returned to such Participant or, in the case of his/her death, to the person or persons entitled thereto under Section 14, and such Participant's option will be automatically terminated without exercise of any portion of such option. Upon termination of a Participant's employment relationship (as described in Section 2(k)) within three (3) months of the next scheduled Exercise Date, the payroll deductions credited to such Participant's account during the Offer Period but not yet used to exercise the option will be applied to the purchase of Common Stock on the next Exercise Date, unless the Participant (or in the case of the Participant's death, the person or persons entitled to the Participant's account balance under Section 14) withdraws from the Plan by submitting a change of status notice in accordance with subSection
(a) of this Section 10. In such a case, no further payroll deductions will be credited to the Participant's account following the Participant's termination of employment and the Participant's option under the Plan will be automatically terminated after the purchase of Common Stock on the next scheduled Exercise Date.

7

11. Interest. No interest shall accrue on the payroll deductions credited to a Participant's account under the Plan.

12. Stock.

(a) Subject to adjustment upon changes in capitalization of the Company as provided in Section 18, the maximum number of shares of Common Stock which shall be made available for sale under the Plan shall be Five Hundred Thousand (500,000) shares. With respect to any amendment to increase the total number of shares of Common Stock under the Plan, the Administrator shall have discretion to disallow the purchase of any increased shares of Common Stock for Offer Periods in existence prior to such increase. If the Administrator determines that on a given Exercise Date the number of shares with respect to which options are to be exercised may exceed (x) the number of shares then available for sale under the Plan or (y) the number of shares available for sale under the Plan on the Enrollment Date(s) of one or more of the Offer Periods in which such Exercise Date is to occur, the Administrator may make a pro rata allocation of the shares remaining available for purchase on such Enrollment Dates or Exercise Date, as applicable, in as uniform a manner as shall be practicable and as it shall determine to be equitable, and shall either continue all Offer Periods then in effect or terminate any one or more Offer Periods then in effect pursuant to Section 19, below. Any amount remaining in a Participant's payroll account following such pro rata allocation shall be returned to the Participant and shall not be carried over to any future Purchase Period or Offer Period, as determined by the Administrator.

(b) A Participant will have no interest or voting right in shares covered by the Participant's option until such shares are actually purchased on the Participant's behalf in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Plan. No adjustment shall be made for dividends, distributions or other rights for which the record date is prior to the date of such purchase.

(c) Shares to be delivered to a Participant under the Plan will be registered in the name of the Participant or in the name of the Participant and his or her spouse, as designated in the Participant's subscription agreement.

13. Administration. The Plan shall be administered by the Administrator which shall have full and exclusive discretionary authority to construe, interpret and apply the terms of the Plan, to determine eligibility and to adjudicate all disputed claims filed under the Plan. Every finding, decision and determination made by the Administrator shall, to the full extent permitted by Applicable Law, be final and binding upon all persons.

14. Designation of Beneficiary.

(a) Each Participant will file a written designation of a beneficiary who is to receive any shares and cash, if any, from the Participant's account under the Plan in the event of such Participant's death. If a Participant is married and the designated beneficiary is not the spouse, spousal consent shall be required for such designation to be effective.

(b) Such designation of beneficiary may be changed by the Participant (and the Participant's spouse, if any) at any time by written notice. In the event of the death of a

8

Participant and in the absence of a beneficiary validly designated under the Plan who is living (or in existence) at the time of such Participant's death, the Company shall deliver such shares and/or cash to the executor or administrator of the estate of the Participant, or if no such executor or administrator has been appointed (to the knowledge of the Administrator), the Administrator shall deliver such shares and/or cash to the spouse (or domestic partner, as determined by the Administrator) of the Participant, or if no spouse (or domestic partner) is known to the Administrator, then to the issue of the Participant, such distribution to be made per stirpes (by right of representation), or if no issue are known to the Administrator, then to the heirs at law of the Participant determined in accordance with Section 27.

15. Transferability. No payroll deductions credited to a Participant's account, options granted hereunder, or any rights with regard to the exercise of an option or to receive shares under the Plan may be assigned, transferred, pledged or otherwise disposed of in any way (other than by will, the laws of descent and distribution, or as provided in Section 14 hereof) by the Participant. Any such attempt at assignment, transfer, pledge or other disposition shall be without effect, except that the Administrator may, in its sole discretion, treat such act as an election to withdraw funds from an Offer Period in accordance with Section 10.

16. Use of Funds. All payroll deductions received or held by the Company under the Plan may be used by the Company for any corporate purpose, and the Company shall not be obligated to segregate such payroll deductions or hold them exclusively for the benefit of Participants. All payroll deductions received or held by the Company may be subject to the claims of the Company's general creditors. Participants shall have the status of general unsecured creditors of the Company. Any amounts payable to Participants pursuant to the Plan shall be unfunded and unsecured obligations for all purposes, including, without limitation, Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended. The Company shall retain at all times beneficial ownership of any investments, including trust investments, which the Company may make to fulfill its payment obligations hereunder. Any investments or the creation or maintenance of any trust or any Participant account shall not create or constitute a trust or fiduciary relationship between the Administrator, the Company or any Designated Parent or Subsidiary and a Participant, or otherwise create any vested or beneficial interest in any Participant or the Participant's creditors in any assets of the Company or a Designated Parent or Subsidiary. The Participants shall have no claim against the Company or any Designated Parent or Subsidiary for any changes in the value of any assets that may be invested or reinvested by the Company with respect to the Plan.

17. Reports. Individual accounts will be maintained for each Participant in the Plan. Statements of account will be given to Participants at least annually, which statements will set forth the amounts of payroll deductions, the Purchase Price, the number of shares purchased and the remaining cash balance, if any.

18. Adjustments Upon Changes in Capitalization; Corporate Transactions.

(a) Adjustments Upon Changes in Capitalization. Subject to any required action by the stockholders of the Company, the Reserves, the Purchase Price, the maximum number of shares that may be purchased in any Offer Period or Purchase Period, as well as any other terms that the Administrator determines require adjustment shall be proportionately

9

adjusted for (i) any increase or decrease in the number of issued shares of Common Stock resulting from a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend, combination or reclassification of the Common Stock, (ii) any other increase or decrease in the number of issued shares of Common Stock effected without receipt of consideration by the Company, or (iii) as the Administrator may determine in its discretion, any other transaction with respect to Common Stock including a corporate merger, consolidation, acquisition of property or stock, separation (including a spin-off or other distribution of stock or property), reorganization, liquidation (whether partial or complete) or any similar transaction; provided, however that conversion of any convertible securities of the Company shall not be deemed to have been "effected without receipt of consideration." Such adjustment shall be made by the Administrator and its determination shall be final, binding and conclusive. Except as the Administrator determines, no issuance by the Company of shares of stock of any class, or securities convertible into shares of stock of any class, shall affect, and no adjustment by reason hereof shall be made with respect to, the Reserves and the Purchase Price.

(b) Corporate Transactions. In the event of a proposed Corporate Transaction, each option under the Plan shall be assumed by such successor corporation or a parent or subsidiary of such successor corporation, unless the Administrator, in the exercise of its sole discretion and in lieu of such assumption, determines to shorten the Offer Period then in progress by setting a new Exercise Date (the "New Exercise Date"). If the Administrator shortens the Offer Period then in progress in lieu of assumption in the event of a Corporate Transaction, the Administrator shall notify each Participant in writing at least ten (10) business days prior to the New Exercise Date, that the Exercise Date for the Participant's option has been changed to the New Exercise Date and that either:

(1) the Participant's option will be exercised automatically on the New Exercise Date, unless prior to such date the Participant has withdrawn from the Offer Period as provided in Section 10; or

(2) the Company shall pay to the Participant on the New Exercise Date an amount in cash, cash equivalents, or property as determined by the Administrator that is equal to the difference in the Fair Market Value of the shares subject to the option and the Purchase Price due had the Participant's option been exercised automatically under SubSection (b)(i) above.

For purposes of this Subsection, an option granted under the Plan shall be deemed to be assumed if, in connection with the Corporate Transaction, the option is replaced with a comparable option with respect to shares of capital stock of the successor corporation or Parent thereof. The determination of option comparability shall be made by the Administrator prior to the Corporate Transaction and its determination shall be final, binding and conclusive on all persons.

19. Amendment or Termination.

(a) The Administrator may at any time and for any reason terminate or amend the Plan. Except as provided in Section 18, no such termination can affect options previously granted, provided that the Plan or any one or more Offer Periods may be terminated by the

10

Administrator on any Exercise Date or by the Administrator establishing a new Exercise Date with respect to any Offer Period and/or any Purchase Period then in progress if the Administrator determines that the termination of the Plan or such one or more Offer Periods is in the best interests of the Company and its stockholders. Except as provided in Section 18 and this Section 19, no amendment may make any change in any option theretofore granted which adversely affects the rights of any Participant without the consent of affected Participants. To the extent necessary to comply with Section 423 of the Code (or any successor rule or provision or any other Applicable Law), the Company shall obtain stockholder approval in such a manner and to such a degree as required.

(b) Without stockholder consent and without regard to whether any Participant rights may be considered to have been "adversely affected," the Administrator shall be entitled to limit the frequency and/or number of changes in the amount withheld during Offer Periods, change the length of Purchase Periods within any Offer Period, determine the length of any future Offer Period, determine whether future Offer Periods shall be consecutive or overlapping, establish the exchange ratio applicable to amounts withheld in a currency other than U.S. dollars, establish additional terms, conditions, rules or procedures to accommodate the rules or laws of applicable foreign jurisdictions, permit payroll withholding in excess of the amount designated by a Participant in order to adjust for delays or mistakes in the Company's processing of properly completed withholding elections, establish reasonable waiting and adjustment periods and/or accounting and crediting procedures to ensure that amounts applied toward the purchase of Common Stock for each Participant properly correspond with amounts withheld from the Participant's Compensation, and establish such other limitations or procedures as the Administrator determines in its sole discretion advisable and which are consistent with the Plan.

20. Notices. All notices or other communications by a Participant to the Company under or in connection with the Plan shall be deemed to have been duly given when received in the form specified by the Administrator at the location, or by the person, designated by the Administrator for the receipt thereof.

21. Conditions Upon Issuance of Shares. Shares shall not be issued with respect to an option unless the exercise of such option and the issuance and delivery of such shares pursuant thereto shall comply with all Applicable Laws and shall be further subject to the approval of counsel for the Company with respect to such compliance. As a condition to the exercise of an option, the Company may require the Participant to represent and warrant at the time of any such exercise that the shares are being purchased only for investment and without any present intention to sell or distribute such shares if, in the opinion of counsel for the Company, such a representation is required by any of the aforementioned Applicable Laws. In addition, no options shall be exercised or shares issued hereunder before the Plan shall have been approved by stockholders of the Company as provided in Section 23.

22. Term of Plan. The Plan shall become effective upon its approval by the stockholders of the Company. It shall continue in effect for a term of ten
(10) years unless sooner terminated under Section 19.

11

23. Stockholder Approval. The Plan shall be subject to approval by the stockholders of the Company. Such stockholder approval shall be obtained in the degree and manner required under Applicable Laws.

24. No Employment Rights. The Plan does not, directly or indirectly, create any right for the benefit of any employee or class of employees to purchase any shares under the Plan, or create in any employee or class of employees any right with respect to continuation of employment by the Company or a Designated Parent or Subsidiary, and it shall not be deemed to interfere in any way with such employer's right to terminate, or otherwise modify, an employee's employment at any time.

25. No Effect on Retirement and Other Benefit Plans. Except as specifically provided in a retirement or other benefit plan of the Company or a Designated Parent or Subsidiary, participation in the Plan shall not be deemed compensation for purposes of computing benefits or contributions under any retirement plan of the Company or a Designated Parent or Subsidiary, and shall not affect any benefits under any other benefit plan of any kind or any benefit plan subsequently instituted under which the availability or amount of benefits is related to level of compensation. The Plan is not a "Retirement Plan" or "Welfare Plan" under the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.

26. Effect of Plan. The provisions of the Plan shall, in accordance with its terms, be binding upon, and inure to the benefit of, all successors of each Participant, including, without limitation, such Participant's estate and the executors, administrators or trustees thereof, heirs and legatees, and any receiver, trustee in bankruptcy or representative of creditors of such Participant.

27. Governing Law. The Plan is to be construed in accordance with and governed by the internal laws of the State of California without giving effect to any choice of law rule that would cause the application of the laws of any jurisdiction other than the internal laws of the State of California to the rights and duties of the parties, except to the extent the internal laws of the State of California are superseded by the laws of the United States. Should any provision of the Plan be determined by a court of law to be illegal or unenforceable, the other provisions shall nevertheless remain effective and shall remain enforceable.

28. Administration and Interpretation. Any question or dispute regarding the administration or interpretation of the Plan shall be submitted by the Participant or by the Company to the Administrator. The resolution of such question or dispute by the Administrator shall be final and binding on all persons.

29. Venue and Waiver of Jury Trial. The parties agree that any suit, action, or proceeding arising out of or relating to the Notice, the Plan or this Option Agreement shall be brought in the United States District Court for the Southern District of California (or should such court lack jurisdiction to hear such action, suit or proceeding, in a California state court in the County of San Diego) and that the parties shall submit to the jurisdiction of such court. The parties irrevocably waive, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any objection the party may have to the laying of venue for any such suit, action or proceeding brought in such court. THE PARTIES ALSO EXPRESSLY WAIVE ANY RIGHT THEY HAVE OR MAY HAVE TO A

12

JURY TRIAL OF ANY SUCH SUIT, ACTION OR PROCEEDING. If any one or more provisions of this Section 29 shall for any reason be held invalid or unenforceable, it is the specific intent of the parties that such provisions shall be modified to the minimum extent necessary to make it or its application valid and enforceable.

13

EXHIBIT A

BofI Holding, Inc. 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan

SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT

Effective with the Offer Period beginning on:

[ ] ESPP Effective Date [ ] May 15, 2005 or [ ] November 15, 2005

1. PERSONAL INFORMATION [MODIFY DATA REQUESTED AS APPROPRIATE]

Legal Name (Please Print) _________________________   __________  ___________
                           (Last)  (First)  (MI)      Location    Department

Street Address_____________________________________   _______________________
                                                      Daytime Telephone

City, State/Country, Zip____________________________  _______________________
                                                      E-Mail Address

Social                                       Employee
 Security No. __ __ __ - __ __ - __ __ __ __  I.D. No. ______________________

Manager Mgr.Location

2. ELIGIBILITY. Any Employee whose customary employment is more than 20 hours per week and more than 5 months per calendar year and who does not hold (directly or indirectly) five percent (5%) or more of the combined voting power of the Company, a parent or a subsidiary, whether in stock or options to acquire stock is eligible to participate in the BofI Holding, Inc. 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (the "ESPP"); provided, however, that Employees who are subject to the rules or laws of a foreign jurisdiction that prohibit or make impractical the participation of such Employees in the ESPP are not eligible to participate.

3. DEFINITIONS. Each capitalized term in this Subscription Agreement shall have the meaning set forth in the ESPP.

4. SUBSCRIPTION. I hereby elect to participate in the ESPP and subscribe to purchase shares of the Company's Common Stock in accordance with this Subscription Agreement and the ESPP. I have received a complete copy of the ESPP and a prospectus describing the ESPP and understand that my participation in the ESPP is in all respects subject to the terms of the ESPP. The effectiveness of this Subscription Agreement is dependent on my eligibility to participate in the ESPP.

5. PAYROLL DEDUCTION AUTHORIZATION. I hereby authorize payroll deductions from my Compensation during the Offer Period in the percentage specified below (payroll reductions may not exceed 15% of Compensation nor the limitation under Section 423(b)(8) of the Code and the regulations thereunder):

Percentage to be Deducted (circle one)  1%    2%      3%      4%      5%      6%      7%
                                 8%     9%   10%     11%     12%     13%     14%     15%

6. ESPP ACCOUNTS AND PURCHASE PRICE. I understand that all payroll deductions will be credited to my account under the ESPP. No additional payments may be made to my account. No interest will be credited on funds held in the account at any time including any refund of the account caused by withdrawal from the ESPP. All payroll deductions shall be accumulated for the purchase of Company Common Stock at the applicable Purchase Price determined in accordance with the ESPP.

7. WITHDRAWAL AND CHANGES IN PAYROLL DEDUCTION. I understand that I may discontinue my participation in the ESPP at any time prior to an Exercise Date as provided in Section 10 of the

A-1

ESPP, but if I do not withdraw from the ESPP, any accumulated payroll deductions will be applied automatically to purchase Company Common Stock. I may increase or decrease the rate of my payroll deductions in whole percentage increments to not less than one percent (1%) on one occasion during any Purchase Period by completing and timely filing a Change of Status Notice. Any increase or decrease will be effective for the full payroll period occurring after five (5) business days from the Company's receipt of the Change of Status Notice.

8. PERPETUAL SUBSCRIPTION. I understand that this Subscription Agreement shall remain in effect for successive Offer Periods until I withdraw from participation in the ESPP, or termination of the ESPP.

9. TAXES. I have reviewed the ESPP prospectus discussion of the federal tax consequences of participation in the ESPP and consulted with tax consultants as I deemed advisable prior to my participation in the ESPP. I hereby agree to notify the Company in writing within thirty (30) days of any disposition (transfer or sale) of any shares purchased under the ESPP if such disposition occurs within two (2) years of the Enrollment Date (the first day of the Offer Period during which the shares were purchased) or within one (1) year of the Exercise Date (the date I purchased such shares), and I will make adequate provision to the Company for foreign, federal, state or other tax withholding obligations, if any, which arise upon the disposition of the shares. In addition, the Company may withhold from my Compensation any amount necessary to meet applicable tax withholding obligations incident to my participation in the ESPP, including any withholding necessary to make available to the Company any tax deductions or benefits contingent on such withholding.

10. ADMINISTRATION AND INTERPRETATION. Any question or dispute regarding the administration or interpretation of the Plan shall be submitted to the Administrator. The resolution of such question or dispute by the Administrator shall be final and binding on all persons.

11. DESIGNATION OF BENEFICIARY. In the event of my death, I hereby designate the following person or trust as my beneficiary to receive all payments and shares due to me under the ESPP:

[ ] I am single [ ] I am married

Beneficiary
(please print) _______________________ Relationship to Beneficiary (if any)

(Last) (First) (MI)

Street Address ________________________________ ____________________________

City, State/Country, Zip ______________________

12. TERMINATION OF ESPP I understand that the Company has the right, exercisable in its sole discretion, to amend or terminate the ESPP at any time, and a termination may be effective as early as an Exercise Date, including the establishment of an alternative date for an Exercise Date within each outstanding Offer Period.

Date: _________________ Employee Signature:_____________________________


Spouse's signature (if beneficiary is other than spouse)

A-2

EXHIBIT B

BofI Holding, Inc. 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan

CHANGE OF STATUS NOTICE


Participant Name (Please Print)


Social Security Number

WITHDRAWAL FROM ESPP

I hereby withdraw from the BofI Holding, Inc. 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (the "ESPP") and agree that my option under the applicable Offer Period will be automatically terminated and all accumulated payroll deductions credited to my account will be refunded to me or applied to the purchase of Common Stock depending on the alternative indicated below. No further payroll deductions will be made for the purchase of shares in the applicable Offer Period and I shall be eligible to participate in a future Offer Period only by timely delivery to the Company of a new Subscription Agreement.

[ ] WITHDRAWAL AND PURCHASE OF COMMON STOCK

Payroll deductions will terminate, but your account balance will be applied to purchase Common Stock on the next Exercise Date. Any remaining balance will be refunded.

[ ] WITHDRAWAL WITHOUT PURCHASE OF COMMON STOCK

Entire account balance will be refunded to me and no Common Stock will be purchased on the next Exercise Date provided this notice is submitted to the Company ten (10) business days prior to the next Exercise Date.


[ ] CHANGE IN PAYROLL DEDUCTION

I hereby elect to change my rate of payroll deduction under the ESPP as follows (select one):

Percentage to be Deducted (circle one)        1%      2%      3%      4%      5%      6%     7%
                              8%       9%    10%     11%     12%     13%     14%     15%

An increase or a decrease in payroll deduction will be effective for the first full payroll period commencing no fewer than five (5) business days following the Company's receipt of this notice, unless this change is processed more quickly.


B-1


[ ] CHANGE OF BENEFICIARY [ ] I am single [ ]I am married

This change of beneficiary shall terminate my previous beneficiary designation under the ESPP. In the event of my death, I hereby designate the following person or trust as my beneficiary to receive all payments and shares due to me under the ESPP:

Beneficiary

(please print) __________________________ Relationship to Beneficiary (if any)

(Last) (First) (MI)

Street Address __________________________________________ _____________________

City, State/Country, Zip ________________________________


Date: _____________________ Employee Signature:_____________________________


Spouse's signature (if new beneficiary is other than spouse)

B-2

Exhibit 10.5

ASSIGNMENT AND ASSUMPTION AGREEMENT
AND CONSENT TO ASSIGNMENT

EXECUTIVE CENTER DEL MAR

This Assignment and Assumption Agreement and Consent to Assignment (this "AGREEMENT") is made as of September 22, 1999, by and among PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION PARTNERS, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership ("LANDLORD") and CONTIASSET RECEIVABLES MANAGEMENT LLC, a Delaware limited liability company ("TENANT"), and BOFI.COM HOLDING, INC., a Delaware corporation ("ASSIGNEE"), and CONTIFINANCIAL CORPORATION, a Delaware corporation ("GUARANTOR").

R E C I T A L S :

A. Reference is hereby made to that certain Lease dated March 16, 1999, by and between Landlord and Tenant (the "LEASE"), for space on a portion of the second (2nd) floor commonly known as Suite 220 (the "PREMISES") in that certain office building located at 12220 El Camino Real, San Diego, California (the "BUILDING").

B. Pursuant to the terms of Article VIII of the Lease, Tenant has requested Landlord's consent with respect to the assignment (the" ASSIGNMENT") by Tenant of its rights, title, interest and obligations under the Lease to Assignee. Landlord is willing to consent to the Assignment on the terms and conditions contained herein.

C. All defined terms not otherwise expressly defined herein shall have the respective meanings given in the Lease.

A G R E E M E N T :

1. Landlord's Consent. Landlord hereby consents to the Assignment; provided, however, such consent is granted by Landlord only upon the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement. This Agreement shall not be construed to modify, waive or amend any of the terms, covenants and conditions of the Lease or to waive any breach thereof or any of Landlord's rights or remedies thereunder or to enlarge or increase any obligations of Landlord under the Lease. Any terms of the Assignment which are inconsistent with the terms of the Lease or this Agreement shall be of no force or effect.

2. Non-Release of Tenant and Guarantor; Further Transfers. Neither the Assignment nor this consent thereto shall release or discharge Tenant and Guarantor from any liability, whether past, present or future, under the Lease or alter the primary liability


of the Tenant to pay the rent and perform and comply with all of the obligations of Tenant to be performed under the Lease. Neither the Assignment nor this consent thereto shall be construed as a waiver of Landlord's right to consent to any subletting by the Assignee or to any assignment by the Assignee of its rights, title, interest and obligations under the Lease, or as a consent to any portion of the Premises being used or occupied by any other party. Landlord may consent to subsequent sublettings and assignments of the Lease or any amendments or modifications thereto without notifying Tenant or Guarantor or anyone else liable under the Lease and without obtaining their consent. No such action by Landlord shall relieve such persons from any liability to Landlord or otherwise with regard to the Premises.

3. Assignment and Assumption of Lease and Indemnification.

a. Assumption. Without limiting Tenant's and Guarantor's continuing liability under the Lease, Tenant hereby assigns to Assignee, as of 12:01 a.m. on September 22, 1999 (the "EFFECTIVE DATE"), all of its right, title, and interest in and to the Lease, subject to the execution and delivery of this Agreement by all the parties hereto. Further, without limiting Tenant's and Guarantor's continuing liability under the Lease, Assignee hereby accepts the above assignment from Tenant, and assumes all of Tenant's obligations and duties under the Lease as of the Effective Date. Assignee agrees fully and timely to satisfy, uphold, and perform all duties and obligations of Tenant pursuant to the Lease, including, but not limited to, the payment of Rent as referenced therein, accruing from the Effective Date forward. Assignee shall have no liability to Tenant or to any other party (including Landlord) for any payments due or other obligations which accrued or were required to be performed under the Lease prior to the Effective Date. Upon execution of this Agreement by all of the parties thereto, Assignee hereby agrees to deliver a check payable to the order of Tenant in an amount equal to Three Thousand Three Hundred Sixty-Eight and 70/100 Dollars ($3.368.70), which represents Assignee's pro rata portion of the monthly rent due under the Lease for September, 1999. As of October 1, 1999, Assignee shall pay all monthly rent due under the Lease directly to Landlord. In addition to the above, commencing as of October l, 1999, Assignee shall pay to Landlord any additional charges for supplemental air conditioning to the extent supplied to the Premises, which charges are currently approximately Three Hundred Dollars ($300.00) per month; Landlord hereby acknowledges and agrees that Tenant has paid such supplemental air conditioning charges owing through September 30, 1999.

b. Representations and Warranties of Tenant. Tenant represents and warrants to Assignee that, to its knowledge (i) the Lease is in full force and effect, covers the Premises, and has not been amended or modified by any agreements, whether written or oral, except this Assignment, (ii) Tenant has not assigned the Lease, or sublet any portion of the Premises, to any other party, and (iii) Tenant is not in default under, or


breach of, any provision of the Lease, and no event or circumstance has occurred that upon notice or the lapse of time, or both, would, constitute a default under, or breach of, any provision of the Lease.

c. Operating Costs. Tenant hereby agrees to pay Landlord its prorata share of all Operating Costs and Additional Rent set forth in the Lease for the portion of the calendar year 1999 ending on the Effective Date within thirty (30) days of the date hereof. If such amount can only be estimated by Landlord as of the date of such payment, Tenant shall pay such estimated amount within said thirty (30)-day period and Assignee and Tenant shall settle any overpayment or deficiency within thirty (30) days after Landlord bills Assignee for such items for the full year.

d. Indemnification by Tenant. Tenant for itself, its (past and present) partners, officers, directors, shareholders, attorneys, legal representatives, and constituent parent, subsidiary and affiliate corporations, including but not limited to Guarantor, and each of their past and present partners, officers, agents and employees, and each of their successors and assigns (collectively, the "TENANT PARTIES") hereby indemnifies, defends and holds Assignee (and/or any one (1) or more of the "ASSIGNEE PARTIES" (as defined below)) wholly free and harmless from and against any and all claims, demands, obligations, duties, liabilities, damages, expenses, indebtedness, debts, breaches of contract, duty or relationship, acts, omissions, misfeasance, malfeasance, causes of action, sums of money, accounts, compensation, contracts, controversies, promises, damages, costs, losses and remedies therefore, causes of action, rights of indemnity or liability of any type, kind, nature, description or character whatsoever, and irrespective of how, why or by reason of what facts, whether known or unknown, whether heretofore existing or hereafter arising, whether liquidated or unliquidated related to the Lease or the Premises (collectively, "CLAIMS") which Assignee may incur or which may be asserted against Assignee by reason of any breach of any representation or warranty of Tenant set forth herein, or any alleged obligation or undertaking of Tenant as lessee under the Lease, which Claims arise from events occurring or circumstances existing prior to the Effective Date.

e. Indemnification by Assignee. Assignee for itself, its (past and present) partners, officers, directors, shareholders, attorneys, legal representatives, and constituent parent, subsidiary and affiliate corporations and each of their past and present partners, officers. agents and employees, and each of their successors and assigns (collectively, the "ASSIGNEE PARTIES") hereby indemnifies, defends and holds Tenant (and/or any one (1) or more of the "TENANT PARTIES") wholly free and harmless from and against any and all Claims (as defined above) which Tenant and/or Guarantor may incur or which may be asserted against Tenant and/or Guarantor by reason of any alleged obligation or undertaking of Assignee as Lessee under the Lease, which Claims arise from events occurring on or after the Effective Date.


4. Security Deposit. Upon execution of this Agreement by all of the parties thereto, Assignee shall deliver a check payable to the order of Landlord in an amount equal to Thirty Three Thousand Six Hundred Eighty Nine and 70/100 Dollars ($33,689.70) as a security deposit (the "SECURITY DEPOSIT"). Landlord shall release an amount equal to Twenty Two Thousand Four Hundred Fifty Nine and 80/100 Dollars ($22.459.80) from the Security Deposit (and the Security Deposit shall thereafter be deemed to have been reduced by such amount released) within thirty (30) days after authorization by notice from Assignee's counsel, Heller Ehrman White & McAuliffe, certifying that the following conditions have been satisfied. Landlord is hereby authorized, and agrees, to release the aforementioned amount upon the satisfaction of both of the following conditions:
(i) Assignee is authorized to commence operations as a newly chartered federal savings association by the Office of Thrift Supervision; and (ii) Assignee receives irrevocable investor subscriptions in the amount of at least Thirteen Million Dollars ($13,000,000.00). The Security Deposit shall be treated as security for the performance of this Agreement and the Lease by the Assignee and shall be held by Landlord in accordance with Article XXI of the Lease. The receipt of the aforementioned investor subscriptions, and the issuance of shares of Assignee's stock represented thereby, shall not constitute an "assignment" for purposes of the Lease.

5. Notice and Cure Period. Assignee shall provide written notice of any Event of Default (as defined in the Lease) to Tenant and Guarantor within five
(5) days of its occurrence. Upon the occurrence of an Event of Default, Landlord agrees that it will not exercise any of its remedies under the Lease if Tenant and/or Guarantor takes all action and pays all amounts necessary to cure such Event of Default within the time periods specified in Article XIII of the Lease after Landlord delivers notice to Tenant and/or Guarantor as, and if, required in accordance with Article XIII of the Lease.

6. General Provisions.

6.1 Brokerage Commission. Assignee hereby agrees that under no circumstances shall Landlord, Tenant or Guarantor be liable for any brokerage commission or other charge or expense in connection with the Assignment and Assignee agrees to protect, defend, indemnify and hold Landlord, Tenant and Guarantor harmless from the same and from any cost or expense (including, but not limited to, attorney's fees) incurred by Landlord, Tenant and/or Guarantor in resisting any claim for any such brokerage commission. Upon execution of, this Agreement by all of the parties thereto, Assignee hereby agrees to deliver a check payable to the order, of Colliers International in an amount equal to Twenty Two Thousand and 00/100 Dollars ($22.000.00) in full and complete satisfaction of Colliers International's commission and other charges and expenses due in connection with the assignment of lease contemplated hereby.


6.2 Controlling Law. The terms and provisions of this Agreement shall be construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of California.

6.3 Binding Effect. This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the parties hereto, their heirs, successors and assigns. As used herein, the singular number includes the plural and the masculine gender includes the feminine and neuter.

6.4 Captions. The paragraph captions utilized herein are in no way intended to interpret or limit the terms and conditions hereof; rather, they are intended for purposes of convenience only.

6.5 Partial Invalidity. If any term, provision or condition contained in this Agreement shall, to any extent, be invalid or unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement, or the application of such term, provision or condition to persons or circumstances other than those with respect to which it is invalid or unenforceable, shall not be affected thereby, and each and every other term, provision and condition of this Agreement shall be valid and enforceable to the fullest extent possible permitted by law.

6.6 Attorney's Fees. If either party commences litigation against the other for the specific performance of this Agreement, for damages for the breach hereof or otherwise for enforcement of any remedy hereunder, the parties hereto agree to and hereby do waive any right to a trial by jury and, in the event of any such commencement of litigation, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover from the other party such costs and reasonable attorneys' fees as may have been incurred.

6.7 Landlord's Costs. Within thirty (30) days after written request by Landlord, Tenant shall, in accordance with Section 8.4 of the Lease, pay to Landlord any costs and reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by Landlord in connection with the Assignment.

6.8 Guarantor's Consent. By its execution below, Guarantor consents to the Assignment and acknowledges and agrees that the Lease Guaranty (of even date with the Lease (and attached thereto as Exhibit "E")) shall remain in full force and effect during the initial Term of the Lease. Further, the parties hereto agree and acknowledge that the Option granted to Tenant in accordance with Section 3.6 of the Lease shall not apply to Assignee, in accordance with the terms of the Lease.

6.9 Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which shall constitute an original and all of which shall be one and the same Agreement.


6.10 Tenant's Costs. Within thirty (30) days after written request by Tenant, Assignee shall pay to Tenant any costs and reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by Landlord in connection with the Assignment, including, but not limited to, Landlord's costs under Section 6.7 above; provided that nothing in this Section 6.10 shall relieve Tenant of its obligation to pay Landlord's costs as set forth in Section 6.7 above.

6.11 Addresses for Notice. Any notices required to be sent to Tenant and Guarantor or Assignee pursuant to the Lease or this Agreement shall be sent to the following addresses:

To Tenant:            ContiAsset Receivables Management LLC
                      C/o ContiFinancial Corporation
                      277 Park Avenue
                      New York, New York 10172
                      Attn: President
                      Phone #: (212) 207-2800
                      Fax #: (212) 207-5251

To Guarantor:         ContiFinancial Corporation
                      277 Park Avenue
                      New York, New York 10172
                      Attn: President
                      Phone #: (212) 207-2800
                      Fax #: (212) 207-5251

(provided that one (1) notice sent to the above address shall satisfy the notice requirement for both Tenant and Guarantor)

With a copy To:

                      ContiFinancial Corporation
                      277 Park Avenue
                      New York, New York 10172
                      Attn: General Counsel
                      Phone #: (212) 207-2800
                      Fax #: (212) 207-2937

To Assignee:          BofI.com Holding, Inc.
                      12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220
                      San Diego, California 92130
                      Attn: President


Phone #: (858) 350-6200 Fax #: (858) 350-9870

With a copy to:

Heller, Ehrman, White & McAuliffe 4250 Executive Square, 7th Floor La Jolla, California 92037-9103 Attn: Alan Jacobs, Esq.

Phone #: (858) 450-8400
Fax #: (858) 450-8499

6.12 Tenant's Bill of Sale. Upon execution of this Agreement by all of the parties thereto, Assignee hereby agrees to deliver a check payable to the order of Tenant in an amount equal to Ten Thousand and 00/100 Dollars ($10,000.00) for the purchase of all of Tenant's office furnishings, fixtures, computers, servers, software, licenses and artwork as further detailed in that certain Bill of Sale, dated September 21, 1999, which shall be contemporaneously executed and delivered by Tenant.

6.13 Further Assurances. The parties hereto shall execute and deliver such further documents and instruments as any party hereto shall reasonably request to carry out the purpose and intent of this Agreement and to acknowledge and affirm the transfer and assignment of the leasehold interest conveyed hereby.

[The remainder of this page was intentionally left blank]


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Consent to Assignment Agreement as of the day and year first above written.

"LANDLORD" PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION

PARTNERS, L.P.,
a Delaware limited partnership

By: Prentiss Properties I, Inc.
a Delaware corporation
its sole general partner

                                       By:      /s/ Christopher M. Hipps
                                                --------------------------------
                                                Name:  Christopher M. Hipps
                                                Title:  Senior Vice President

"TENANT"                      CONTIASSET RECEIVABLES MANAGEMENT, LLC,
                              a Delaware limited liability company


                              By: /s/ Mitch Bonilla
                                  ----------------------
                                  MITCH BONILLA
                                  Its:  Vice President


                              By: /s/ Glenn Goldman
                                  ----------------------
                                  GLENN GOLDMAN
                                  Its:  Chairman

"ASSIGNEE"                    BOFI.COM HOLDING, INC.,
                              a Delaware corporation


                              By: /s/ Jerry Englert
                                  ----------------------
                                  JERRY ENGLERT
                                  Its:  President


"GUARANTOR"                   CONTIFINANCIAL CORPORATION,
                              a Delaware corporation

                              By: /s/ Glenn Goldman
                                  --------------------------
                                  GLENN GOLDMAN
                                  Its:  Authorized Signatory


LEASE AGREEMENT

BETWEEN

PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION PARTNERS, L.P.,

A DELAWARE LIMITED PARTNERSHIP

(LANDLORD)

AND

CONTIASSET RECEIVABLES MANAGEMENT LLC,

A DELAWARE LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY

(TENANT)

EXECUTIVE CENTER DEL MAR

SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA

Dated: March 16, 1998


TABLE OF CONTENTS

                                                                                                       PAGE

ARTICLE I                      BASIC LEASE INFORMATION AND CERTAIN DEFINITIONS..........................1
ARTICLE II                     PREMISES AND QUIET ENJOYMENT.............................................4
ARTICLE III                    TERM; COMMENCEMENT DATE DELIVERY AND ACCEPTANCE OF PREMISES..............4
ARTICLE IV                     RENT.....................................................................8
ARTICLE V                      OPERATING COSTS..........................................................9
ARTICLE VI                     PARKING.................................................................13
ARTICLE VII                    UTILITIES AND SERVICES..................................................14
ARTICLE VIII                   ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING...............................................17
ARTICLE IX                     REPAIRS.................................................................19
ARTICLE X                      ALTERATIONS.............................................................21
ARTICLE XI                     LIENS...................................................................22
ARTICLE XII                    ARTICLE XU USE AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS.................................23
ARTICLE XIII                   DEFAULT AND REMEDIES....................................................24
ARTICLE XIV                    INSURANCE...............................................................26
ARTICLE XV                     DAMAGE BY FIRE OR OTHER CAUSE...........................................28
ARTICLE XVI                    CONDEMNATION............................................................29
ARTICLE XVII                   INDEMNIFICATION.........................................................31
ARTICLE XVIII                  SUBORDINATION AND ESTOPPEL CERTIFICATES.................................32
ARTICLE XIX                    SURRENDER OF THE PREMISES...............................................34
ARTICLE XX                     LANDLORD'S RIGHT TO INSPECT.............................................34
ARTICLE XXI                    SECURITY DEPOSIT........................................................35
ARTICLE XXII                   BROKERAGE...............................................................35
ARTICLE XXIII                  OBSERVANCE OF RULES AND REGULATIONS.....................................36
ARTICLE XXIV                   NOTICES.................................................................36
ARTICLE XXV                    MISCELLANEOUS...........................................................36
ARTICLE XXVI                   SUBSTITUTION SPACE......................................................40
ARTICLE XXVII                  OTHER DEFINITIONS.......................................................42
ARTICLE XXVIII                 RIGHT OF FIRST OFFER....................................................44

                               EXHIBIT AND RIDERS

EXHIBIT A             -             FLOOR PLAN OF THE PREMISES
EXHIBIT B             -             THE LAND
EXHIBIT C             -             WORK LETTER AGREEMENT
EXHIBIT D             -             FORM OF COMMENCEMENT NOTICE
EXHIBIT E             -             LEASE GUARANTY
EXHIBIT F             -             SUBORDINATION, NON-DISTURBANCE AND ATTORNMENT AGREEMENT
RIDER NO. 1           -             RULES AND REGULATIONS

i

INDEX OF DEFINED TERMS

Definitions of certain terms used in this Lease are found in the following sections:

TERM                                                                      LOCATION OF DEFINITION
Additional Rent.................................................................Section 1.1N
Bankruptcy Code ................................................................Section 8.6
Base Rent.......................................................................Section 1.1M
Basic Lease Information and Certain Definitions.................................Article 1
Broker(s).......................................................................Section 1.1S
Building........................................................................Section 1.1B
Building Standard...............................................................Exhibit C
Business Days...................................................................Article 27
Central Areas...................................................................Article 27
Central Systems.................................................................Exhibit C
Commencement Date...............................................................Section 1.1F
Common Areas....................................................................Article 27
Comparison Area.................................................................Section 7.1A
control.........................................................................Section 8.3
Controllable Operating Costs....................................................Section 5.1
days............................................................................Article 27
Economic Terms..................................................................Section 28.2
Events of Default ..............................................................Section 13.1
Expiration Date.................................................................Section 3.4
First Offer Notice..............................................................Section 28.1
First Offer Space...............................................................Article 28
Guarantor(s)....................................................................Section 1.1W
herein, hereof, hereby, hereunder and words of similar import...................Article 27
Holidays........................................................................Article 27
include and including...........................................................Article 27
Interest Rate...................................................................Section 4.2
Land............................................................................Section 1.1C
Landlord........................................................................Preamble
Landlord's Address for Notice...................................................Section 1.1T
Landlord's Address for Payment..................................................Section 1.1U
Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate.............................................Section 5.1
Leasehold Improvements..........................................................Exhibit C
Net Rentable Area...............................................................Article 27
Net Rentable Area of the Building...............................................Section 1.1J
Net Rentable Area of the Premises...............................................Section 1.1I
Non-Disturbance Agreement.......................................................Section 18.4
Operating Costs.................................................................Section 5.2A
Original Tenant.................................................................Section 3.7
Parking Facility................................................................Section 1.1D
Parking Permits.................................................................Section 1.1P
Project.........................................................................Section 1.1E

-ii-

Premises .......................................................................Section 1.1A
Rent............................................................................Section 1.1L
repair..........................................................................Article 27
Security Deposit................................................................Section 1.1R
Service Areas...................................................................Article 27
Space Availability Notice.......................................................Section 28.1
Substitution Space..............................................................Section 26.1
Successor Landlord..............................................................Section 18.2
Superior Leases.................................................................Article 28
Superior Rights.................................................................Article 28
Taxes...........................................................................Section 5.2
Tenant .........................................................................Preamble & Article 27
Tenant Delay ...................................................................Exhibit C
Tenant's Address for Notice ....................................................Section 1.1V
Tenant's Operating Costs Payment................................................Section 5.1
Tenant's Permitted Uses.........................................................Section 1.1Q
Tenant's Property...............................................................Section 14.1A(a)
Tenant's Share..................................................................Section 1.1K
Term............................................................................Section 1.1H
Termination Effective Date......................................................Article 3
Termination Notice..............................................................Article 3
termination of this Lease and words of like import..............................Article 27
terms of this Lease.............................................................Article 27
Trustee.........................................................................Section 8.6A
Usable Area of Premises.........................................................Section 1.1G
year............................................................................Article 27

-iii-

COMMENCEMENT NOTICE

This Commencement Notice is delivered this 22nd day of June, 1998, by Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership ("LANDLORD") to ContiAsset Receivables Management LLC, a Delaware limited liability company ("TENANT"), pursuant to the provisions of Section 3.3 of that certain Lease Agreement (the "LEASE") dated March 16, 1998, by and between Landlord and Tenant covering certain space in the Building known as 12220 EI Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130. All terms used herein with their initial letter capitalized shall have the meaning assigned to such terms in the Lease.

W I T N E S S E T H:

1. The Building, the Premises, the Parking Facility, and all other improvements required to be constructed and furnished by Landlord in accordance with the terms of the Lease have been satisfactorily completed by the Landlord and accepted by the Tenant.

2. The Premises have been delivered to, and accepted by, the Tenant, subject to the completion of "punch list" items.

3. The Commencement Date of the Lease is the 15th day of June, 1998, and the Expiration Date is the 30th day of June, 2003.

4. The Premises consist of 5,478 square feet of Net Rentable Area on the second (2nd) floor of the Building.

5. The Base Rent is $131,472.00 per annum, payable in monthly installments of $10,956.00, subject, however, to the provisions of the Lease relating to adjustments of Tenant's Base Rent and Operating Costs Payment.

6. Remittance of the foregoing payments shall be made on the first day of each month in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Lease at the following address:

Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P.

P.O. Box 100435
Pasadena, California 91189-0435


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by Landlord as of the date first written above.

LANDLORD: Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership

By: Prentiss Properties I, Inc., general partner

By:      /s/ Louay Alsadek
         -------------------------
         Louay Alsadek
         Vice President


By:      /s/ J. Kevan Dilbeck
         -------------------------
         J. Kevan Dilbeck
         Vice President


LEASE AGREEMENT

THIS LEASE AGREEMENT ("this Lease") is made and entered into by and between PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION PARTNERS, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership ("Landlord"), and CONTIASSET RECEIVABLES MANAGEMENT LLC, a Delaware limited liability company ("Tenant"), upon all the terms set forth in this Lease and in all Exhibits and Riders hereto, to each and all of which terms Landlord and Tenant hereby mutually agree.

ARTICLE I
BASIC LEASE INFORMATION AND CERTAIN DEFINITIONS

1.1 Each reference in this Lease to information and definitions contained in !he Basic Lease Information and Certain Definitions and each use of the terms capitalized and defined in this Section 1.1 shall be deemed to refer to, and shall have the respective meaning set forth in, this Section 1.1.

A.       Premises:                              That certain space identified by diagonal lines or
                                                shaded area on the floor plan attached hereto as
                                                Exhibit "A," commonly known as Suite 220 on the second
                                                (2nd) floor of the Building.

B.       Building:                              The building to be constructed at 12220 EI Camino
                                                Real, San Diego, California 92130

C.       Land:                                  Those certain parcels of land underlying the Project.

D.       Parking Facility:                      The parking structure located on the Land.

E.       Project:                               The Land and all improvements thereon, including the
                                                Building, the Parking Facility, and all Common
                                                Areas, initially and substantially as shown on Exhibit
                                                "B" attached hereto.

F.       Commencement Date:                     The date defined in Section 3.1 hereof.

G.       Usable Area of the Premises:           4,729 square feet.

H.       Term:                                  Five (5) years, unless this Lease is sooner terminated
                                                as provided herein, beginning on the Commencement Date.

I.       Net Rentable Area of the Premises:     5,478 square feet


J.       Net Rentable Area of the Building:     56,551 square feet.

K.       Tenant's Share:                        9.68%, representing a fraction, the numerator of which
                                                is the Net Rentable Area of the Premises and the
                                                denominator of which is the Net Rentable Area of the
                                                Building, subject to future adjustment pursuant to the
                                                provisions of Section 5.4 hereof.

L.       Rent:                                  The Base Rent and the Additional Rent.

M.       Base Rent:                             The Base Rent shall be as shown in this Section 1.l(M)
                                                below.  Base Rent includes Base Year Operating Costs.

                                                  Month of     Monthly Base Rent    Monthly Base Rent
                                                 Lease Term                         per Square Foot of
                                                                                    Net Rentable Area
                                                    1-12          $ 10,956.00             $2.00
                                                    13-24         $ 11,229.90             $2.05
                                                    25-36         $ 11,503.80             $2.10
                                                    37-48         $ 11,777.70             $2.15
                                                    49-60         $ 12,051.60             $2.20


N.       Additional Rent:                       The Additional Rent shall be all other sums due and
                                                payable by Tenant under the Lease, including, but not
                                                limited to, Tenant's Share of Operating Costs.

O.       Base Year Operating Costs:             The grossed up (to 95% occupancy) Operating Costs for
                                                the calendar year 1998.

P.       Parking Permits:                       Tenant shall be entitled to take, at no charge during
                                                the initial Term, twenty-four (24) Parking Permits
                                                consisting of (i) nineteen (19) unassigned parking
                                                spaces to be used in common with others in the Parking
                                                Facility and (ii) five (5) reserved parking spaces in
                                                the Parking Facility.

Q.       Tenant's Permitted Uses:               Tenant may use the Premises for general office use and
                                                for no other purpose.

R.       Security Deposit:                      None.

-2-

 S.       Broker(s):                             Colliers Iliff Thorn representing Tenant and Business
                                                 Real Estate Brokerage Company representing Landlord.

 T.       Landlord's Address for Notice:         Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P.
                                                 3890 West Northwest Highway, Suite 400
                                                 Dallas, Texas 75220
                                                 Attention: Thomas F. August

                                                 With a copy to:

                                                 Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P.
                                                 970 West 190th Street, Suite 550
                                                 Torrance, California 90502
                                                 Attention: Louay Alsadek

U.       Landlord's Address for Payment:        Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P.
                                                 P.O. Box 100435
                                                 Pasadena, California 91189-0435

V.       Tenant's Address for Notice:           ContiAsset Receivables Management LLC
                                                 l2220 El Camino Real, Suite 220
                                                 San Diego, California 92130
                                                 Attention:        Mitchell J. Bonilla, Vice President
                                                                   and General Manager

                                                 with a copy to:

                                                 ContiFinancial Corporation
                                                 277 Park Avenue
                                                 New York, NY 10172
                                                 Attention:        Michael Valentino, Director
                                                                   Alan Langus, General Counsel

 W.       Guarantor(s):                          ContiFinancial Corporation, a Delaware corporation

 X.       Extension Option(s):                   See Section 3.6 hereof.

 Y.       Allowance for Leasehold Improvements:  See Exhibit "C"

-3-

ARTICLE II
PREMISES AND QUIET ENJOYMENT

2.1 Landlord hereby leases the Premises to Tenant, and Tenant hereby rents and hires the Premises from Landlord, for the Term. During the Term, Tenant shall have the right to use, in common with others and in accordance with the Rules and Regulations, the Common Areas.

2.2 Provided that Tenant fully and timely performs all the terms of this Lease on Tenant's part to be performed, including payment by Tenant of all Rent, Tenant shall have, hold and enjoy the Premises during the Term without hindrance or disturbance from or by Landlord; subject., however, to all of the terms, conditions and provisions of any and all ground leases, deeds to secure debt, mortgages, restrictive covenants, easements, and other encumbrances now or hereafter affecting the Premises or the Project.

ARTICLE III
TERM; COMMENCEMENT DATE
DELIVERY AND ACCEPTANCE OF PREMISES

3.1 The Commencement Date shall be the earlier of (a) the date the Premises are deemed available for occupancy pursuant to Section 3.2 hereof or
(b) the date Tenant, or anyone claiming by, through or under Tenant, occupies any portion of the Premises for the purpose of the conduct of Tenant's (or such other person's) business therein.

3.2 A. The Premises shall be deemed available for occupancy as soon as the following conditions have been met: (a) the Leasehold Improvements (as defined in Exhibit "C" to the Lease) have been substantially completed as determined by Landlord's architect or space planner; (b) either a certificate of occupancy (temporary or final) or other certificate permitting the lawful occupancy of the Premises has been issued for the Premises, or such portion of the Premises, as the case may be, by the appropriate governmental authority; and
(c) at least three (3) Business Days' notice of the anticipated occurrence of the conditions in clauses (a) and (b) above has been given to Tenant.

B. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, if there is a delay in the availability for occupancy of the Premises as provided in Section 3.2.A. above due to Tenant Delays (as defined in Exhibit "C" to the Lease), then the Premises shall be deemed available for occupancy on the date on which the Premises would have been available for occupancy but for such Tenant Delay, even though a certificate of occupancy or other certificate permitting the lawful occupancy of the Premises has not been issued or the Leasehold Improvements have not been commenced or completed.

C. In the event that the Premises is not available for occupancy by the "Outside Date," which shall be July 1, 1998, as such July 1, 1998 date may be extended by the number of days of Tenant Delays and by the number of days of "Force Majeure Delays" (as defined below), then the sole remedy of Tenant shall be the right to deliver a notice to Landlord (the "Termination Notice") electing to terminate this Lease effective upon receipt of the Termination Notice by Landlord (the "Termination Effective Date"). Except as provided hereinbelow, the Termination Notice must be delivered by Tenant to Landlord, if at all, not

-4-

earlier than the Outside Date and not later than five (5) business days after the Outside Date. If Tenant delivers the Termination Notice to Landlord, then Landlord shall have the right to suspend the Termination Effective Date for a period ending thirty (30) days after the original Termination Effective Date. In order to suspend the Termination Effective Date, Landlord must deliver to Tenant, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Termination Notice, a certificate of the general contractor certifying that it is such contractor's best good faith judgment that the Premises will be available for occupancy within thirty (30) days after the original Termination Effective Date. If the Premises is available for occupancy within said thirty (30) day suspension period, then the Termination Notice shall be of no further force and effect; if, however, the Premises is not available for occupancy within said thirty (30) day suspension period, then this Lease shall terminate as of the date of expiration of such thirty (30) day period. If prior to the Outside Date Landlord determines that the Premises will not be available for occupancy by the Outside Date, Landlord shall have the right to deliver a written notice to Tenant stating Landlord's opinion as to the date by which the Premises will be available for occupancy and Tenant shall be required, within five (5) business days after receipt of such notice, to either deliver the Termination Notice (which will mean that this Lease shall thereupon terminate and shall be of no further force and effect) or agree to extend the Outside Date to that date which is set by Landlord. Failure of Tenant to so respond in writing within said five (5) business day period shall be deemed to constitute Tenant's agreement to extend the Outside Date to that date which is set by Landlord. If the Outside Date is so extended, Landlord's right to request Tenant to elect to either terminate or further extend the Outside Date shall remain and shall continue to remain, with each of the notice periods and response periods set forth above, until the Premises is available for occupancy or until this Lease is terminated. For purposes of this Section 3.2C, "Force Majeure Delays" shall mean and refer to a period of delay or delays encountered by Landlord affecting the work of construction of the Leasehold Improvements because of delays due to excess time in obtaining governmental permits or approvals beyond the time period normally required to obtain such permits or approvals for similar space, similarly improved, in first-class office buildings in the San Diego County area; fire, earthquake or other acts of God; acts of the public enemy; riot; insurrection; governmental regulations of the sales of materials or supplies or the transportation thereof; strikes or boycotts; shortages of material or labor or any other cause beyond the reasonable control of Landlord.

3.3 The Net Rentable Area of the Premises and the Building are as stated in Sections 1.1I and J, respectively. By written instrument substantially in the form of Exhibit "D" attached hereto, Landlord shall notify Tenant of the Commencement Date, the Net Rentable Area of the Premises and all other matters stated therein. The Commencement Notice shall be conclusive and binding on Tenant as to all matters set forth therein, unless within ten (10) days following delivery of such Commencement Notice, Tenant contests any of the matters contained therein by notifying Landlord in writing of Tenant's objections. The foregoing notwithstanding, Landlord's failure to deliver any Commencement Notice to Tenant shall not affect Landlord's determination of the Commencement Date.

3.4 Except as otherwise provided in Section 9 of Exhibit "C," Tenant may not enter or occupy the Premises prior to the Commencement Date without Landlord's express written consent and any entry by Tenant shall be subject to all of the terms of this Lease; provided however, that no such early entry shall change the Commencement Date or the date on which the Term expires (the "Expiration Date").

-5-

3.5 Occupancy of the Premises or any portion thereof by Tenant or anyone claiming through or under Tenant for the conduct of Tenant's or such other person's business therein shall be conclusive evidence that Tenant and all parties claiming through or under Tenant (a) have accepted the Premises or such portion as suitable for the purposes for which the Premises are leased hereunder, (b) have accepted the Common Areas as being in a good and satisfactory condition, and (c) have waived any defects in the Premises and the Project; provided however, that, if any Leasehold Improvements have been constructed and installed to prepare the Premises for Tenant's occupancy, Tenant's acceptance of the Premises, and waiver of any defect therein, shall occur upon Landlord's substantial completion of the Leasehold Improvements in accordance with the terms of Exhibit "C" hereof, subject only to Landlord's completion of items on Landlord's punchlist and latent defects of which Tenant has given Landlord notice within forty five (45) days following the date on which Landlord first makes the Premises available to Tenant for any work in the Premises to be undertaken by Tenant.

3.6 A. Subject to the terms of this Section 3.6 and Section 3.7, Landlord hereby grants to Tenant an option (the "Extension Option") to extend the Term of this Lease with respect to the entire Premises for one (1) additional period of five (5) years (the "Option Term"), on the same terms, covenants and conditions as provided for in this Lease during the initial Lease Term, except that all economic terms such as, without limitation, monthly Base Rent, a new Base Year for Operating Costs, if appropriate, parking charges, etc., shall be established based on the "fair market rental rate" for the Premises for the Option Term as defined and determined in accordance with the provisions of this Section 3.6 below.

B. The Extension Option must be exercised, if at all, by written notice ("Extension Notice") delivered by Tenant to Landlord no earlier than the date which is twelve (12) months, and no later than the date which is six (6) months, prior to the expiration of the then current Term of this Lease.

C. The term "fair market rental rate" as used herein shall mean the annual amount per rentable square foot, projected during the relevant period, that a willing, comparable, non-equity tenant (excluding sublease and assignment transactions) would pay, and a willing, comparable landlord of a comparable quality building located in the Comparison Area would accept, at arm's length (what Landlord is accepting in current transactions for the Building may be considered), for space comparable in size, quality and floor height as the leased area at issue taking into account the age, quality and layout of the existing improvements in the leased area at issue and taking into account items that professional real estate brokers customarily consider, including, but not limited to, rental rates, office space availability, tenant size, tenant improvement allowances, operating expenses and allowance, parking charges, and any other amounts then being charged by Landlord or the lessors of such similar office buildings.

D. Landlord's determination of fair market rental rate shall be delivered to Tenant in writing not later than thirty (30) days following Landlord's receipt of Tenant's Extension Notice. Tenant will have thirty (30) days ("Tenant's Review Period") after receipt of Landlord's notice of the fair market rental rate within which to accept such fair market rental rate or to object thereto in writing. Tenant's failure to accept the fair market rental rate submitted by Landlord in writing within Tenant's Review Period will conclusively be deemed Tenant's disapproval thereof if Tenant objects to the fair market rental rate submitted by Landlord within

-6-

Tenant's Review Period, then Landlord and Tenant win attempt in good faith to agree upon such fair market rental rate using their best good faith efforts. If Landlord and Tenant fail to reach agreement on such fair market rental rate within fifteen (15) days following the expiration of Tenant's Review Period (the "Outside Agreement Date"), then Tenant may, within five (5) business days following the Outside Agreement Date, demand by written notice to Landlord that each party's determination be submitted to appraisal in accordance with the provisions below. Tenant's failure to timely demand appraisal will constitute Tenant's rescission of its Extension Notice and the Extension Option will be void and of no further force or effect.

E. (1) Landlord and Tenant shall each appoint one independent, unaffiliated appraiser who shall by profession be a real estate broker who has been active over the five (5) year period ending on the date of such appointment in the leasing of high-rise office space in the Comparison Area. Each such appraiser will be appointed within thirty (30) days after the Outside Agreement Date.

(2) The two (2) appraisers so appointed will within fifteen (15) days of the date of the appointment of the last appointed appraiser agree upon and appoint a third appraiser who shall be qualified under the same criteria set forth herein above for qualification of the initial two (2) appraisers.

(3) The determination of the appraisers shall be limited solely to the issue of whether Landlord's or Tenant's last proposed (as of the Outside Agreement Date) new monthly Base Rent for the Premises is the closest to the actual new monthly Base Rent for the Premises as determined by the appraisers, taking into account the requirements of Paragraph C and this Paragraph E regarding same.

(4) The three (3) appraisers shall within thirty (30) days of the appointment of the third appraiser reach a decision as to whether the parties shall use Landlord's or Tenant's submitted new monthly Base Rent, and shall notify Landlord and Tenant thereof.

(5) The decision of the majority of the three (3) appraisers shall be binding upon Landlord and Tenant. The cost of each party's appraiser shall be the responsibility of the party selecting such appraiser, and the cost of the third appraiser (or arbitration, if necessary) shall be shared equally by Landlord and Tenant.

(6) If either Landlord or Tenant fails to appoint an appraiser within the time period in Paragraph E(l) herein above, the appraiser appointed by one of them shall reach a decision, notify Landlord and Tenant thereof and such appraiser's decision shall be binding upon Landlord and Tenant.

(7) If the two (2) appraisers fail to agree upon and appoint a third appraiser, both appraisers shall be dismissed and the matter to be decided shall be forthwith submitted to arbitration under the provisions of the American Arbitration Association.

(8) In the event that the new Monthly Base Rent is not established prior to end of the initial Term of the Lease, the monthly Base Rent immediately payable at the commencement of such Option Term shall be the monthly Base Rent payable in the immediately preceding month. Notwithstanding the above, once the fair market rental is determined in

-7-

accordance with this section, the parties shall settle any underpayment on the next monthly Base Rent payment date falling not less than thirty (30) days after such determination.

3.7 A. As used in this Section, the word "Option" means the Extension Option pursuant to Section 3.6 herein.

B. The Option is personal to the original Tenant executing this Lease ("Original Tenant") or any successor by merger or acquisition of all or substantially all of Tenant's assets (the "Permitted Transferee") and may be exercised only by the original Tenant executing this Lease or a Permitted Transferee while occupying the entire Premises and without the intent of thereafter assigning this Lease or subletting the Premises and may not be exercised or be assigned, voluntarily or involuntarily, by any person or entity other than the original Tenant executing this Lease or a Permitted Transferee. The Option is not assignable separate and apart from this Lease, nor may the Option be separated from this Lease in any manner, either by reservation or otherwise.

C. Tenant shall have no right to exercise the Option, notwithstanding any provision of the grant of Option to the contrary, and Tenant's exercise of the Option may be nullified by Landlord and deemed of no further force or effect, if (i) Tenant shall be in default of any monetary obligation or material non-monetary obligation under the terms of this Lease as of Tenant's exercise of the Option or at any time after the exercise of such Option and prior to the commencement of the Option event, or (ii) Landlord has given Tenant two (2) or more notices of monetary default, whether or not such defaults are subsequently cured, during any twelve (12) consecutive month period of the Lease.

ARTICLE IV
RENT

4.1 Tenant shall pay to Landlord, without notice, demand, offset or deduction, in lawful money of the United States of America, at Landlord's Address for Payment, or at such other place as Landlord shall designate in writing from time to time: (a) the Base Rent in equal monthly installments, in advance, on the first day of each calendar month during the Term, and (b) the Additional Rent, at the respective times required hereunder. The first monthly installment of Base Rent and the Additional Rent payable under Article 5 hereof shall be paid in advance on the date of Tenant's execution of this Lease and applied to the first installments of Base Rent and such Additional Rent coming due under this Lease. Payment of Rent shall begin on the Commencement Date; provided, however, that, if either the Commencement Date or the Expiration Date falls on a date other than the first day of a calendar month, the Rent due for such fractional month shall be prorated on a per diem basis between Landlord and Tenant so as to charge Tenant only for the portion of such fractional month falling within the Term.

4.2 All installments of Rent not paid within five (5) days after notice that such amount is due shall be subject to a late charge of five percent (5%) of the amount of the late payment and shall further bear interest until paid at a rate per annum (the "Interest Rate") equal to the greater of fifteen percent (15%) or four percent (4%) above the prime rate of interest from time to time publicly announced by Bank of America, a national banking association, or any successor thereof; provided, however, that, if at the time such interest is sought to be imposed the

-8-

rate of interest exceeds the maximum rate permitted under federal law or under the laws of the State of California, the rate of interest on such past due installments of Rent shall be the maximum rate of interest then permitted by applicable law.

ARTICLE V
OPERATING COSTS

5.1 Tenant shall pay to Landlord, as Additional Rent, for each year or fractional year during the Term, an amount ("Tenant's Operating Costs Payment") of money equal to Tenant's Share of Operating, Costs, for such year in excess of Tenant's Share of Base Year Operating Costs, such amount to be calculated and paid as follows:

A. Beginning on January 1st of the year following the year in which the Commencement Date occurs, and on the first day of January of each year during the Term thereafter, or as soon thereafter as is practicable, Landlord shall furnish Tenant with a statement ("Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate") setting forth Landlord's reasonable estimate of grossed up Operating Costs for the forthcoming year and Tenant's Operating Costs Payment for such year. On the first day of each calendar month during such year, Tenant shall pay to Landlord one-twelfth (1/12th) of Tenant's Operating Costs Payment as estimated on Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate. If for any reason Landlord has not provided Tenant with Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate on the first day of January of any year during the Term, then (a) until the first day of the calendar month following the month in which Tenant is given Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate, Tenant shall continue to pay to Landlord on the first day of each calendar month the sum, if any, payable by Tenant under this Section 5.1 for the month of December of the preceding year, and (b) promptly after Landlords' Operating Costs Estimate is furnished to Tenant, Landlord shall give notice to Tenant stating whether the installments of Tenant's Operating Costs Payments previously made for such year were greater or less than the installments of Tenant's Operating Costs Payments to be made for such year, and (i) if there shall be a deficiency, Tenant shall pay the amount thereof to Landlord within ten (10) days after the delivery of Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate, or (ii) if there shall have been an overpayment, Landlord shall apply such overpayment as a credit against the next accruing monthly installment(s) of Tenant's Operating Costs Payment due from Tenant until fully credited to Tenant (or pay such amount to Tenant if this Lease has expired or terminated), and (iii) on the first day of the calendar month following the month in which Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate is given to Tenant and on the first day of each calendar month throughout the remainder of such year, Tenant shall pay to Landlord an amount equal to one twelfth (1/12th) of Tenant's Operating Costs Payment.

B. On the first day of March of each year during the Term (beginning on the first day of March of the second year following the year in which the Commencement Date occurs), or as soon thereafter as is practicable, Landlord shall furnish Tenant with a statement of the grossed up Operating Costs for the preceding year. Within thirty (30) days after Landlord's giving of such statement, Tenant shall make a lump sum payment to Landlord in the amount, if any, by which Tenants' Operating Costs Payment for such preceding year as shown on such Landlord's statement, exceeds the aggregate of the monthly installments of Tenant's Operating Costs Payments paid during such preceding year. If Tenant's Operating Costs Payment, as shown on such Landlord's statement, is less than the aggregate of the monthly installments of

-9-

Tenant's Operating Costs Payment actually paid by Tenant during such preceding year, then Landlord shall apply such amount to the next accruing monthly installment(s) of Tenant's Operating Costs Payment due from Tenant until fully credited to Tenant.

C. If the Term ends on a date other than the last day of December, the actual Operating Costs for the year in which the Expiration Date occurs shall be prorated so that Tenant shall pay that portion of Tenant's Operating Costs Payment for such year represented by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be the number of days during such fractional year falling within the Term, and the denominator of which is 365 (or 366, in the case of a leap year). The provisions of this Section 5.1 shall survive the Expiration Date or any sooner termination provided for in this Lease.

D. The term "Controllable Operating Costs" shall mean those Operating Costs described in subsections 5.2(A)(a) and 5.2(A)(b) below. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the aggregate Controllable Operating Costs for any year after the 1998 Base Year shall not increase more than seven percent (7%) over the maximum permitted Controllable Operating Costs for the immediately preceding year. There shall be no maximum permitted Controllable Operating Costs for the 1995 Base Year and the maximum permitted Controllable Operating Costs for the calendar year 1999 shall be one hundred seven percent (107%) of the actual Controllable Operating Costs for the 1998 Base Year (all calculated on a grossed up basis). By way of example only, not as a limitation upon the foregoing, the following chart illustrates maximum Controllable Operating Costs:

Year           Actual Operating Costs        Maximum Controllable
               (per Square Foot of Net    Operating Costs (Per Square
                   Rentable Area)         Foot of Net Rentable Area)
1998                    $3.00                        $3.00
1999                    $3.25                        $3.11
2000                    $3.40                        $3.43
2001                    $3.70                        $3.68
2001                    $3.83                        $3.93

5.2 A. For purposes of this Lease, the term "Operating Costs" shall mean any and all expenses, costs and disbursements of every kind which Landlord pays, incurs or becomes obligated to pay in connection with the operation, management, repair and maintenance of all portions of the Project. All Operating Costs shall be determined according to generally accepted accounting principles which shall be consistently applied. Operating Costs include the following: (a) Wages, salaries, benefits and fees (including all reasonable education, travel and professional fees) of all personnel or entities to the extent engaged in the operation, repair, maintenance, management, or safekeeping of the Project, including taxes, insurance, and benefits relating thereto and tile costs of all supplies and materials (including work clothes and uniforms) used in the operation, repair, maintenance and security of tile Project; (b) Cost of performance by Landlord's personnel of, or of all service agreements for, maintenance, janitorial services, access control, alarm service, window cleaning, elevator maintenance and landscaping for the Project. Such cost shall include the rental of personal property used by Landlord's personnel in the

-10-

maintenance and repair of the Project; (c) Cost of utilities for the Project, including water, sewer, power, electricity for common areas, gas, fuel, lighting and all air-conditioning, heating and ventilating costs; (d) Cost of all insurance, including casualty and liability insurance applicable to the Project and to Landlord's equipment, fixtures and personal property used in connection therewith, business interruption or rent insurance against such perils as are commonly insured against by prudent landlords, such other insurance as may be required by any lessor or mortgagee of Landlord, and such other insurance which Landlord considers reasonably necessary in the operation of the Project, together with all appraisal and consultants' fees in connection with such insurance; (e) All Taxes. For purposes hereof, the term "Taxes" shall mean, all taxes, assessments, and other governmental charges, applicable to or assessed against the Project or any portion thereof, or applicable to or assessed against Landlord's personal property used in connection therewith, whether federal, state, county or municipal and whether assessed by taxing districts or authorities presently taxing the Project or the operation thereof or by other taxing authorities subsequently created, or otherwise, and any other taxes and assessments attributable to or assessed against all or any part of the Project or its operation: including any reasonable expenses, including fees and disbursements of attorneys, tax consultants, arbitrators, appraisers, experts and other witnesses, incurred by Landlord in contesting any taxes or the assessed valuation of all or any part of the Project. If at any time during the Term there shall be levied, assessed, or imposed on Landlord or all or any part of the Project by any governmental entity any general or special ad valorem or other charge or tax directly upon rents received under leases, or if any fee, tax, assessment, or other charge is imposed which is measured by or based, in whole or in part, upon such rents, or if any charge or tax is made based directly or indirectly upon the transactions represented by leases or the occupancy or use of the Project or any portion thereof, such taxes, fees, assessments or other charges shall be deemed to be Taxes; provided, however, that any (a) franchise, corporation, income or net profits tax, unless substituted for real estate taxes or imposed as additional charges in connection with the ownership of the Project, which may be assessed against Landlord or the Project or both, (b) transfer taxes assessed against Landlord or the Project or both, (c) penalties or interest on any late payments of Landlord, and (d) personal property taxes of Tenant or other tenants in the Project, shall be excluded from Taxes. If, as of the Commencement Date, the Project has not been fully assessed as a completed project, for purposes of computing the Operating Costs (including the Operating Costs for the Base Year), Taxes shall be adjusted to reflect full completion and occupancy of the Project. If any or all of the Taxes paid hereunder are by law permitted to be paid in installments, notwithstanding how Landlord pays the same, then, for purposes of calculating Operating Costs, such Taxes shall be deemed to have been divided and paid in the maximum number of installments permitted by law, and there shall be included in Operating Costs for each year only such installments as are required by law to be paid within such year, together with interest thereon and on future such installments as provided by law; (f) Legal and accounting costs incurred by Landlord or paid by Landlord to third parties (exclusive of legal fees with respect to disputes with individual tenants, negotiations of tenant leases, or with respect to the ownership rather than the operation of the Project), appraisal fees, consulting fees, all other professional fees and disbursements and all association dues; (g) Cost of non-capitalized repairs and general maintenance for the Project (excluding repairs and general maintenance paid by proceeds of insurance or by Tenant, other tenants of the Project or other third parties); (h) Amortization of the cost of improvements or equipment which are capital in nature and which (i) are for the purpose of reducing Operating Costs for the Project, up to the amount saved as a result of the

-11-

installation thereof, as reasonably estimated by Landlord, or (ii) are required by any governmental authority, or (iii) replace any Building equipment needed to operate the Project at the same quality levels as prior to the replacement. All such costs, including interest thereon, shall be amortized on a straight-line basis over the useful life of the capital investment items, as reasonably determined by Landlord, but in no event beyond the reasonable useful life of the Project as a first class office project; (i) the Project management office rent or rental value; (j) a management fee of three percent (3%) of revenues from the Building (whether or not Landlord engages a manager for the Project or manages the Project with Landlord's personnel) and all items reimbursable to the Project manager, if any, pursuant to any management contract for the Project; and (k) amounts payable to any associations created under any instruments of record affecting the Building or the Land, as amended from time to time.

B. "Operating Costs" shall not include (a) specific costs for any capital repairs, replacements or improvements, except as provided above; (b) expenses for which Landlord is reimbursed or indemnified (either by an insurer, condemnor, tenant, warrantor or otherwise), to the extent of funds received by Landlord; (c) expenses incurred in leasing or procuring tenants (including lease commissions, advertising expenses and expenses of renovating space for tenants);
(d) payments for rented equipment, the cost of which would constitute a capital expenditure not permitted pursuant to the foregoing if the equipment were purchased; (e) interest or amortization payments on any mortgages; (f) net basic rents under ground leases; (g) costs representing an amount paid to an affiliate of Landlord which is in excess of the amount which would have been paid in the absence of such relationship; (h) costs specifically billed to and paid by specific tenants; (i) damage and repairs to the extent actually covered under any insurance policy carried by Landlord in connection with the Building, Common Areas or Parking Facilities; (j) Landlord's general overhead expenses not related to the Building, Common Areas or Parking Facility; (k) costs (including permit, license and inspection fees) incurred in renovating or otherwise improving, decorating, painting or altering space for other tenants or other occupants of the vacant space within the Building; or (l) costs incurred due to a violation by Landlord or any other tenant in the Building of the terms and conditions of any lease. There shall be no duplication of costs or reimbursement Operating Costs attributable to the Common Areas or Parking Facilities in general will be equitably prorated among all of the buildings in the Project and Tenant shall be responsible for Tenant's Share of those costs attributable to the Building. In the event of any dispute as to the amount of Tenant's Share of Operating Costs, Tenant or an accounting firm selected by Tenant and reasonably satisfactory to Landlord (billing hourly and not on a contingency fee basis) will have the right, by prior written notice ("Audit Notice") given within sixty
(60) days ("Audit Period") following receipt of Landlord's annual reconciliation ("Actual Statement") and at reasonable times during normal business hours, to audit Landlord's accounting records with respect to Operating Costs relative to the year to which such Actual Statement relates at the offices of Landlord's property manager. In no event will Landlord or its property manager be required to (i) photocopy any accounting records or other items or contracts, (ii) create any ledgers or schedules not already in existence, (iii) incur any costs or costs relative to such inspection, or (iv) perform any other tasks other than making available such accounting records as aforesaid. Neither Tenant nor its auditor may leave the offices of Landlord's property manager with copies of any materials supplied by Landlord. Tenant must pay its Share of Operating Costs when due pursuant to the terms of this Lease and may not withhold payment of Operating Costs or any other rent pending results of the audit or during a dispute regarding Operating Costs. The audit must be completed within thirty
(30) days

-12-

of the date of Tenant's Audit Notice and the results of such audit shall be delivered to Landlord within forty-five (45) days of the date of Tenant's Audit Notice. If Tenant does not comply with any of the aforementioned time frames, then such Actual Statement will be conclusively binding on Tenant. If such audit or review correctly reveals that Landlord has overcharged Tenant then within thirty (30) days after the results of such audit are made available to Landlord, Landlord agrees to reimburse Tenant the amount of such overcharge. If the audit reveals that Tenant was undercharged, then within thirty (30) days after the results of the audit are made available to Tenant, Tenant agrees to reimburse Landlord the amount of such undercharge. In all cases, Tenant agrees to pay the cost of such audit Tenant agrees to keep the results of the audit confidential and will cause its agents, employees and contractors to keep such results confidential. To that end, Landlord may require Tenant and its auditor to execute a confidentiality agreement provided by Landlord.

5.3 If The Building is not fully occupied (meaning ninety-five percent (95%) of the Net Rentable Area of the Building) during any full or fractional year of the Term, the actual Operating Costs shall be adjusted for such year to an amount which Landlord estimates would have been incurred in Landlord's reasonable judgment had the Building been ninety-five percent (95%) occupied.

5.4 If during the Term any change occurs in either the number of square feet of the Net Rentable Area of the Premises or of the Net Rentable Area of the Building, Tenant's Share of Operating Costs shall be adjusted, effective as of the date of any such change. Landlord shall promptly notify Tenant in writing of such change and the reason therefor. Any changes made pursuant to this Section 5.4 shall not alter the computation of Operating Costs as provided in this Article 5, but, on and after the date of any such change, Tenant's Operating Costs Payment pursuant to Section 5.1A shall be computed upon Tenant's Share thereof, as adjusted. If such estimated payments of Tenant's Share are so adjusted during a year, a reconciliation payment for Tenant's Share of Operating Costs pursuant to this Article 5 for the calendar year in which such change occurs shall be computed pursuant to the method set forth in Section 5.1B, such computation to take into account the daily weighted average of Tenant's Share of Operating Costs during such year.

ARTICLE VI
PARKING

6.1 Subject to the terms hereof, Landlord hereby grants to Tenant, throughout the Term of this Lease, a license to use in common with other tenants and with the public the Parking Facility and shall issue Parking Permits for such use. Each unassigned Parking Permit shall entitle Tenant to one (1) unassigned parking space in the Parking Facility. Each reserved Parking Permit shall entitle Tenant to one (1) reserved parking space in the Parking Facility in a location to be designated by Landlord from time to time. Any costs incurred by Landlord to designate Tenant's reserved parking spaces as reserved for Tenant shall be paid by Tenant, as additional rent, within ten (10) days after Tenant's receipt of an invoice therefor. All such parking shall be free of charge throughout the initial Lease Term. Thereafter, Landlord shall have the right to charge Tenant for all such parking to the extent that landlords of buildings comparable to the Building in the general vicinity of the Building are charging their tenants for comparable parking privileges; provided, however, that any such parking charge parable by

-13-

Tenant hereunder shall not exceed the prevailing rate charged by such landlords of comparable buildings for comparable parking privileges. The number of Parking Permits to be issued to Tenant is set forth in Section 1.1P. Landlord shall not be obligated to provide Tenant with any additional Parking Permits. If Tenant fails to observe the Rules and Regulations with respect to the Parking Facility, then Landlord, at its option, shall have the right to treat such failure as a default under this Lease and to terminate Tenant's Parking Permits, without legal process, and to remove Tenant's vehicles and those of its employees, licensees or invitees and all of Tenant's personal property from the Parking Facility. If all or any portion of the Parking Facility shall be damaged or rendered unusable by fire or other casualty or any taking pursuant to eminent domain proceeding (or deed in lieu thereof), and as a result thereof Landlord or the garage operator is unable to make available to Tenant the parking provided, for herein, then the number of cars which Tenant shall be entitled to park hereunder shall be proportionately reduced so !hat the number of cars which Tenant may park in the Parking Facility after the casualty or condemnation in question shall bear the same ratio to the total number of cars which can be parked in the Parking Facility at such time as the number of cars Tenant had the right to park in the Parking Facility prior to such casualty condemnation bore to the aggregate number of cars which could be parked therein at that time.

ARTICLE VII
UTILITIES AND SERVICES

7.1 A. During the Term, Landlord shall furnish Tenant with the following services: (a) hot and cold water in Building Standard bathrooms and chilled water in Building Standard drinking fountains; (b) heating, ventilating or air-conditioning, as appropriate, during Business Hours at such temperatures and in such amounts as customarily and seasonally provided to tenants occupying comparable space in first-class office buildings in the San Diego Corporate Center of Del Mar Heights office submarket area ("Comparison Area"); (c) electric lighting for the Common Areas of the Project; (d) passenger elevator service, in Common with others for access to and from the Premises twenty-four
(24) hours per day, seven (7) day per week; provided, however, that Landlord shall have the right to limit the number of (but not cease to operate all) elevators to be operated after Business Hours and on Saturdays, Sundays and Holidays; (e) janitorial cleaning services; (f) facilities for Tenant's loading, unloading, delivery and pick-up activities, including access thereto during Business Hours, subject to the Rules and Regulations, the type of facilities, and other limitations of such loading facilities; and (g) replacement, as necessary, of all Building Standard lamps and ballasts in Building Standard light fixtures within the Premises. All services referred to in this Section 7.1A shall be provided by Landlord and paid for by Tenant as part of Tenant's Operating Costs Payment.

B. If Tenant requires air-conditioning, heating or other services, including cleaning services, routinely supplied by Landlord for hours or days in addition to the hours and days specified in Section 7.1A, Landlord shall make reasonable efforts to provide such additional service after reasonable prior written request therefor from Tenant, and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for the cost of such additional service plus an administrative fee of ten percent (10%). Landlord shall have no obligation to provide any additional service to Tenant at any time Tenant is in default under this Lease unless Tenant pays to Landlord, in advance, the cost of such additional service. If any machinery or equipment which generates abnormal heat or otherwise creates unusual demands on the air-conditioning or heating system serving the Premises is used

-14-

in the Premises and if Tenant has not, within five (5) days after demand from Landlord, taken such steps, at Tenant's expense, as shall be necessary to cease such adverse affect on the air-conditioning or heating system, Landlord shall have the right to install supplemental air-conditioning or heating units in the Premises, and the fun cost of such supplemental units (including the cost of acquisition, installation, operation, use and maintenance thereof) shall be paid by Tenant to Landlord in advance or on demand. Subject to Tenant's compliance with the terms of Article 10 of this Lease, Tenant shall have the right to install a supplemental HVAC unit on the roof of the Building without additional charge. Said HVAC unit shall be installed, operated, screened, maintained, repaired and removed at the sole expense of Tenant.

C. All charges for electricity used within the Premises shall be separately metered and billed directly to Tenant by the electricity supplier. Tenant therefore covenants to contract directly with the electricity supplier for service to the Premises; and at its sole cost and expense, shall pay all service establishment fees, other service fees which may be imposed by the supplier in conjunction with its service to Tenant, and all charges for electric current used by Tenant during the Term of this Lease within the Premises. Tenant shall make all such payments directly to the electricity supplier as and when bills are rendered. Should Tenant fail to pay such amounts, Landlord shall have the right to pay same on Tenant's behalf and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for all costs and expenses incurred by Landlord in conjunction with such payment within ten (10) days after demand therefor. All such costs and expenses incurred by Landlord on Tenant's behalf shall be deemed Additional Rent payable by Tenant and collectible by Landlord as such. Notwithstanding any contrary provision herein, Tenant acknowledges that in addition to the foregoing charges, Tenant's Share of electricity charges for the Common Areas of the Project shall be included as part of Tenant's Share of Operating Costs, Throughout the Term, Tenant shall keep its electricity meter and appurtenant equipment in good working order and condition, and shall repair and if necessary, replace same at Tenant's sole cost and expense should Tenant fail to so repair and maintain the meter and equipment, Landlord may, but shall have no obligation to, cause such meter and equipment to be repaired or replaced at Tenant's sole cost and expense, in which event Tenant shall pay to Landlord as Additional Rent, all costs and expenses incurred by Landlord in conjunction with maintenance, repair and/or replacement of the electricity meter and equipment. Any such amounts shall be due and payable by Tenant within ten (10) days after demand therefor from Landlord. At no time shall use of electricity in the Premises exceed the capacity of existing feeders and risers to or wiring in the Premises. Any risers or wiring to meet Tenant's excess electrical requirements shall, upon Tenant's written request, be installed by Landlord, at Tenant's sole cost, if, in Landlord's reasonable judgment, the same are necessary and shall not (i) cause permanent damage or injury to the Project, the Building or, the Premises, (ii) cause or create a dangerous or hazardous condition, (iii) entail excessive or unreasonable alterations, repairs or expenses, or (iv) interfere with or disturb other tenants or occupants of the Building.

7.2 Landlord's obligation to furnish the utility services specified herein shall be subject to the rules and regulations of the supplier of such electricity of other utility services and the rules and regulations of any municipal or other governmental authority regulating the business of providing electricity and other utility services. Landlord shall have the right, at Landlord's option, upon not less than thirty (30) days' prior written notice to Tenant (provided such prior notice will be less if either the discontinuance of such service is required by applicable law or Landlord receives shorter notice from the utility company providing electricity or other

-15-

utility service), to discontinue utility services to the Premises and arrange for a direct connection thereof through a public utility supplying such service. If Landlord gives such notice of discontinuance, Landlord shall make all necessary arrangements with the public utility supplying such utility service directly to the Building to furnish such utility service to the Premises, and, unless prohibited by law or regulations of such public utility, Landlord shall not discontinue such utility service to the Premises until such public utility is ready to supply service to the Premises, Tenant shall, however, be responsible for contracting promptly and directly with such public utility supplying such service and for paying all deposits for, and all costs relating to, such service.

7.3 No failure to furnish, or any stoppage of, the services referred to in this Article 7 resulting from any, cause shall make Landlord liable in any respect for damages to any person, property or business, or be construed as an eviction of Tenant, or entitle, except as expressly provided below in Section 7.4, Tenant to any abatement of Rent or other relief from any of Tenant's obligations under this Lease. Should any malfunction of any systems or facilities occur within the Project or should maintenance or alterations of such systems or facilities become necessary, Landlord shall repair the same promptly and with reasonable diligence, and Tenant shall have no claim for rebate, abatement of Rent, or damages because of malfunctions or any such interruptions in service. Tenant hereby waives the provisions of California Civil Code Section 1932(1) or any other applicable existing or future law, ordinance or governmental regulation permitting the termination of this Lease due to an interruption, failure or inability to provide any services.

7.4 Notwithstanding anything above to the contrary, in the event that Tenant is prevented from using, and does not use, the Premises or any portion thereof, as a result of any failure to provide services to the Premises (an "ABATEMENT EVENT"), then Tenant shall give Landlord notice ("ABATEMENT NOTICE") of such Abatement Event, and if such Abatement Event continues beyond the "Eligibility Period" (as that term is defined below), then the Base Rent and Tenant's Share of Operating Costs and Tenant's obligation to pay for parking (if any) shall be abated entirely or reduced, as the case may be, after expiration of the Eligibility Period for such time that Tenant continues to be so prevented from using, and does not use, the Premises or a portion thereof, in the proportion that the rentable area of the portion of the Premises that Tenant is prevented from using, and does not use, bears to the total rentable area of the Premises; provided, however, in the event that Tenant is prevented from using, and does not use, a portion of the Premises for a period of time in excess of the Eligibility Period and the remaining portion of the Premises is not sufficient to allow Tenant to effectively conduct its business therein, and if Tenant does not conduct its business from such remaining portion, then for such time after expiration of the Eligibility Period during which Tenant is so prevented from effectively conducting its business therein, the Base Rent and Tenant's Share of Operating Costs and Tenant's obligation to pay for parking (if any) for the entire Premises shall be abated entirely for such time as Tenant continues to be so prevented from using, and does not use the Premises. If, however, Tenant reoccupies any portion of the Premises during such period, the rent allocable to such reoccupied portion, based on the proportion that the rentable area of such reoccupied portion of the Premises bears to the total rentable area of the Premises, shall be payable by Tenant from the date Tenant reoccupies such portion of the Premises. The term "ELIGIBILITY PERIOD" shall mean a period of three (3) consecutive business days after Landlord's receipt of any Abatement Notice(s). Such right to abate Base Rent and Tenant's Share of Operating Costs

-16-

shall be Tenant's sole and exclusive remedy at law or in equity for an Abatement Event. This paragraph shall not apply in case of damage to, or destruction of, the Premises or the Building, or any eminent domain proceedings which shall be governed by separate provisions of this Lease.

ARTICLE VIII
ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING

8.1 Neither Tenant nor its legal representatives or successors in interest shall, by operation of law or otherwise, assign, mortgage, pledge, encumber or otherwise transfer this Lease or any part hereof, or the interest of Tenant under this Lease, or in any sublease or the rent thereunder. The Premises or any part thereof shall not be sublet, occupied or used for any purpose by anyone other than Tenant, without Tenant's obtaining in each instance the prior written consent of Landlord in the manner hereinafter provided. As indicated in, and subject to, Section 8.4 below, Landlord's consent shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed. Tenant shall not modify, extend, or amend a sublease previously consented to by Landlord without obtaining Landlord's prior written consent thereto.

8.2 An assignment of this Lease shall be deemed to have occurred (a) if, in a single transaction or in a series of transactions, a more than 50% interest in Tenant, any guarantor of this Lease, or any subtenant (whether stock, partnership, interest or otherwise) is transferred, diluted, reduced, or otherwise affected with the result that the present holder or owners of Tenant, such guarantor, or such subtenant have less than a 50% interest in Tenant, such guarantor or such subtenant, or (b) if Tenant's obligations under this Lease are taken over or assumed in consideration of Tenant leasing space in another office building. The transfer of the outstanding capital stock of any corporate Tenant, guarantor or subtenant through the "over-the-counter" market or any recognized national securities exchange (other than by persons owning 5% or more of the voting calculation of such 50% interest of clause 8.2(a) above) shall not be included in the calculation of such 50% interest in clause (a) above.

8.3 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Section 8.1, Tenant shall have the right, upon notice to Landlord, to (a) sublet all or part of the Premises to any related corporation or other entity which controls Tenant, is controlled by Tenant or is under common control with Tenant; or (b) assign this Lease to a successor corporation into which or with which Tenant is merged or consolidated or which acquired substantially all of Tenant's assets and property; provided that (i) such successor corporation assumes substantially all of the obligations and liabilities of Tenant and shall have assets, capitalization and net worth at least sufficient to perform the obligations of Tenant under this Lease, accounting for the obligations assumed by such successor in such transaction, and (ii) Tenant shall provide in its notice to Landlord the information required in Section 8.4. No such transaction shall operate to release Tenant from any liability under this Lease. For the purpose hereof "control" shall mean ownership of not less than 50% of all the voting stock or legal and equitable interest in such corporation or entity.

8.4 If Tenant should desire to assign this Lease or sublet the Premises (or any part thereof), Tenant shall give Landlord written notice no later than the time required for notice under Section 8.3 in the case of an assignment or subletting, or thirty (30) days in advance of the proposed effective date of any other proposed assignment or sublease, specifying (a) the name, current address, and business of the proposed assignee or sublessee, {b) the amount "and

-17-

location of the space within the Premises proposed to be so subleased, (c) the proposed effective date and duration of the assignment or subletting, and (d) the proposed rent or consideration to be paid to Tenant by such assignee or sublessee. Tenant shall promptly supply Landlord with financial statements and other information as Landlord may reasonably request to evaluate the proposed assignment or sublease. For assignments and sublettings other than those permitted by Section 8.3, Landlord shall have fifteen (15) days following receipt of such notice and other information requested by Landlord within which to notify Tenant in writing that Landlord elects: (i) to terminate this Lease as to the space so affected as of the proposed effective date set forth in Tenant's notice, in which event Tenant shall be relieved of all further obligations hereunder as to such space, except for obligations under Articles 17, 19 and 22 and all other provisions of this Lease which expressly survive the termination hereof; or (ii) to permit Tenant to assign or sublet such space; provided, however, that, if the rent rate agreed upon between Tenant and its proposed subtenant is greater than the rent rate that Tenant must pay Landlord hereunder for that portion of the Premises, or if any consideration shall be promised to or received by Tenant in connection with such proposed assignment or sublease (in addition to rent), then fifty percent (50%) of such excess rent and other consideration shall be considered Additional Rent owed by Tenant to Landlord (less brokerage commissions, attorneys' fees and other disbursements reasonably incurred by Tenant for such assignment and subletting if acceptable evidence of such disbursements is delivered to Landlord), and shall be paid by Tenant to Landlord in the case of excess rent, in the same manner that Tenant pays Base Rent and, in the case of any other consideration, within ten (10) Business Days after receipt thereof by Tenant; or (iii) to refuse, in Landlord's reasonable discretion, to consent to Tenant's assignment or subleasing of such space and to continue this Lease in full force and effect as to the entire Premises. Landlord cannot unreasonably withhold, condition or delay its consent, but the parties agree that Landlord may reasonably refuse to consent to an assignment or subletting if the proposed assignee or subtenant is not financially creditworthy, is a governmental authority or agency, an organization or person enjoying sovereign or diplomatic immunity, a medical or dental practice or a user that will attract a volume, frequency or type of visitor or employee to the Building which is not consistent with the standards of a high quality office building or that will impose an excessive demand on or use of the facilities or services of the Building. It shall also be reasonable for Landlord to refuse to consent to any assignment or subletting if (x) Tenant is then in default under this Lease, or (y) such assignment of subletting would cause a default under another lease in the Building or under any ground lease, deed of trust, mortgage, restrictive ,covenant, easement or other encumbrance affecting the Project. If Landlord should fail to notify Tenant in writing of such election within the aforesaid fifteen (15) day period, Landlord shall be deemed to have elected option (iii) above. Tenant agrees to reimburse Landlord for reasonable legal fees and any other reasonable costs incurred by Landlord in connection with any permitted assignment or subletting and such payment shall not be deducted from the Additional Rent owed to Landlord pursuant to subsection (ii) above. Tenant shall deliver to Landlord copies of all documents executed in connection with any permitted assignment or subletting, which documents shall be in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to Landlord and which shall require any assignee to assume performance of all terms of this Lease to be performed by Tenant or any subtenant to comply with all the terms of this Lease to be performed by Tenant. No acceptance by Landlord of any Rent or any other sum of money from any assignee, sublessee or other category of transferee shall be deemed to constitute Landlord's consent to any assignment, sublease, or transfer.

-18-

8.5 Any attempted assignment or sublease by Tenant in violation of the terms and provisions of this Article 8 shall be void and shall constitute a material breach of this Lease. In no event, shall any assignment, subletting or transfer, whether or not with Landlord's consent, relieve Tenant of its primary liability under this Lease for the entire Term, and Tenant shall in no way be released from the full and complete performance of all the terms hereof. If Landlord takes possession of the Premises before the expiration of the Term of this Lease, Landlord shall have the right, at its option, to terminate all subleases, or to take over any sublease of the Premises or any portion thereof and such subtenant shall attorn to Landlord, as its landlord, under all the terms and obligations of such sublease occurring from and after such date, but excluding previous acts, omissions, negligence, or defaults of Tenant and any repair or obligation in excess of available net insurance proceeds or condemnation award.

8.6 A. Tenant acknowledges that this Lease is a lease of nonresidential real property and therefore agrees that Tenant, as the debtor in possession, or the trustee for Tenant (collectively the "Trustee") in any proceeding under Title 11 of the United State Bankruptcy Code relating to Bankruptcy, as amended (the "Bankruptcy Code"), shall not seek or request any extension of time to assume or reject this Lease or to perform any obligations of this Lease which arise from or after the order of relief.

B. The Trustee shall have the right to assume or assign Tenant's rights and obligations under this Lease only if the Trustee: (a) promptly cures or provides adequate assurance that the Trustee will promptly cure any default under the Lease; (b) compensates or provides adequate assurance that the Trustee will promptly compensate Landlord for any actual pecuniary loss incurred by Landlord as a result of Tenant's default under this Lease; and (c) provides adequate assurance of future performance under the Lease. All payments of Rent required of Tenant under this Lease, whether or not expressly denominated as such in this Lease, shall constitute rent for the purposes of Title 11 of the Bankruptcy Code.

8.7 The term "Landlord," as used in this Lease, so far as covenants or obligations on the part of Landlord are concerned, shall be limited to mean and include only the owner or owners, at the time in question, of the fee title to, or a lessee's interest in a ground lease of, the Land or the Building. In the event of any transfer, assignment or other conveyance or transfers of any such title or interest, Landlord herein named (and in case of any subsequent transfers or conveyances, the then grantor) shall be automatically freed and relieved from and after the date of such transfer, assignment or conveyance of all liability as respects the performance of any covenants or obligations on the part of Landlord contained in this Lease thereafter to be performed and, without further agreement, the transferee of such title or interest shall be deemed to have assumed and agreed to observe and perform any and all obligations of Landlord hereunder, during its ownership of the Project. Landlord may transfer its interest in the Project without the consent of Tenant and such transfer or subsequent transfer shall not be deemed a violation on Landlord's part of any of the terms of this Lease.

ARTICLE IX
REPAIRS

9.1 Landlord agrees to repair and maintain the structural portions of the Building and the plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning and electrical systems installed or furnished

-19-

by Landlord, unless such maintenance and repairs are (i) attributable to items installed in the Premises by Tenant or which are above standard interior improvements (such as, for example, custom lighting, special HVAC and/or electrical panels or systems, kitchen or restroom facilities and appliances constructed or installed within the Premises) or (ii) caused by the negligence or willful misconduct or gross negligence of Tenant or its agents, contractors, invitees and licensees, in which case Tenant will pay to Landlord, as additional rent, the cost of such maintenance and repair plus a fee equal to ten percent (10%) of the actual costs to cover overhead and a fee for Landlord's agent or manager. Amounts payable by Tenant pursuant to this Section 9.1 shall be payable on demand after receipt of an invoice therefor from Landlord. Landlord has no obligation and has made no promise to maintain, alter, remodel, improve, repair, decorate, or paint the Premises or any part thereof, except as specifically set forth in this Lease. In no event shall Landlord have any obligation to maintain, repair or replace any furniture, furnishings, fixtures or personal property of Tenant. Tenant hereby waives the provisions of California Civil Code Sections 1932(1), 1941 and 1942 and of any similar law, statute or ordinance now or hereafter in effect.

9.2 Tenant shall keep the Premises (including the Leasehold Improvements) in good order and in a safe, neat and clean condition, and, when and if needed, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, shall make all repairs to the Premises and every part thereof. No representations respecting the condition of the Premises or the Building or the other portions of the Project have been made by Landlord to Tenant except as specifically set forth in this Lease. In the event Tenant fails to promptly commence and diligently pursue the performance of such maintenance or the making of such repairs or replacements, then Landlord, at its option, may perform such maintenance or make such repairs and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord, on demand after Tenant receives an invoice therefor, the cost thereof plus a fee equal to fifteen percent (15%) of the actual costs to cover overhead and a fee for Landlord's agent or manager.

9.3 All repairs made by Tenant pursuant to Section 9.2 shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner by contractors or other repair personnel selected by Tenant from an approved list of contractors and repair personnel maintained by Landlord in the Project's management office; provided, however, that neither Tenant nor its contractors or repair personnel shall be permitted to do any work affecting the Central Systems. In no event shall such work be done for Landlord's account or in a manner which allows any liens to be filed in violation of Article 11. To the extent any repairs involve the making of alterations to the Premises, Tenant shall comply with the provisions of Article 10.

9.4 Subject to the other provisions of this Lease imposing obligations regarding repair upon Tenant, Landlord shall repair all machinery and equipment necessary to provide the services of Landlord described in Article 7 (provided that Tenant shall pay the costs of any repair to such systems or any part thereof damaged by Tenant and Tenant's employees, customers, clients, agents, licensees and invitees) and for repair of all portions of the Project which do not comprise a part of the Premises and are not leased to others.

-20-

ARTICLE X
ALTERATIONS

10.1 Tenant shall not at any time during the Term make any alterations to the Premises without first obtaining Landlord's written consent thereto, which consent Landlord shall not reasonably withhold or delay; provided, however, that Landlord shall not be deemed unreasonable by refusing to consent to any alterations which are visible from the exterior of the Building or the Project, which will or are likely to cause any weakening of any part of the structure of the Premises, the Building or the Project or which will or are likely to cause damage or disruption to the Central Systems or which are prohibited by any underlying ground lease or mortgage. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Landlord's prior approval will not be required for any cosmetic, alterations to the interior of the Premises which are not visible from the exterior of the Premises which are either cosmetic in nature (such as floor or wall coverings) or are nonstructural in nature and do not affect any Central Systems and cost less than Five Thousand Dollars ($5,000), provided Landlord receives prior notice thereof and the other conditions set forth in this Article X are satisfied. Should Tenant desire to make any alterations to the Premises, Tenant shall submit all plans and specifications for such proposed alterations to Landlord for Landlord's review before Tenant allows any such work to commence, and Landlord shall promptly approve or disapprove such plans and specifications for any of the reasons set forth in this Section 10.1 or for any other reason reasonably deemed sufficient by Landlord. Tenant shall select and use only contractors, subcontractors or other repair personnel from those listed on Landlord's approved list maintained by Landlord in the Project management office. Upon Tenant's receipt of written approval from Landlord, and upon Tenant's payment to Landlord of a reasonable fee prescribed by Landlord for the work of Landlord and Landlord's employees and representatives in reviewing and approving such plans and specifications, Tenant shall have the right to proceed with the construction of all approved alterations, but only so long as such alterations are in strict compliance with the plans and specifications so approved by Landlord and with the provisions of this Article 10. All alterations shall be made at Tenant's sole cost and expense, either by Tenant's contractors or, at Tenant's option, by Landlord on terms reasonably satisfactory to Tenant, including a fee of ten percent (10%) of the actual costs of such work to cover Landlord's overhead and a fee for Landlord's agent or manager in supervising and coordinating such work. In no event, however, shall anyone other than Landlord or Landlord's employees or representatives perform work to be done which affects the Central Systems.

10.2 All construction, alterations and repair work done by or for Tenant shall (a) be performed in such a manner as to maintain harmonious labor relations; (b) not adversely affect the safety of the Project, the Building or the Premises or the systems thereof and not affect the Central Systems; (c) comply with all building, safety, fire, plumbing, electrical, and other codes and governmental and insurance requirements; (d) not result in any usage in excess of Building Standard of water; electricity, gas, or other utilities or of heating, ventilating or air-conditioning (either during or after such work) unless prior written arrangements satisfactory to Landlord are made with respect thereto; (e) be completed promptly and in a good and workmanlike manner and in compliance with all rules and regulations promulgated by Landlord; and (f) not disturb Landlord or other tenants in the Building. After completion of any alterations to the Premises, Tenant will deliver to Landlord a copy of "as built" plans and specifications depicting and describing such alterations.

-21-

10.3 All Leasehold Improvements, alterations and other physical additions made to or installed by or for Tenant in the Premises shall be and remain Landlord's property (except for Tenant's furniture, personal property and movable trade fixtures) and shall not be removed without Landlord's written consent; provided, however, Landlord may, by notice to Tenant given concurrently with Landlord's approval of any alterations or physical additions made to the Premises after the Commencement Date, elect to require Tenant to remove same upon the expiration or earlier termination of the Term of this Lease. Tenant agrees to remove, at its sole cost and expense, all of Tenant's furniture, personal property and movable trade fixtures, and, if directed to or permitted to do so by Landlord in writing, all, or any part of, the alterations and other physical additions made by Tenant to the Premises, on or before the Expiration Date or any earlier date of termination of this Lease. Tenant shall repair, or promptly reimburse Landlord for the cost of repairing, all damage done to the Premises or the Building by such removal. Any alterations or physical additions made by Tenant which Landlord does not direct or permit Tenant to remove at any time during or at the end of the Term shall become the property of Landlord at the end of the Term without any payment to Tenant. Landlord reserves the right to require Tenant to remove any alterations or physical additions made by Tenant to which Landlord did not expressly consent. If Tenant fails to remove any of Tenant's furniture, personal property or movable trade fixtures by the Expiration Date or any sooner date of termination of the Lease or, if Tenant fails to remove any alterations and other physical additions made by Tenant to the Premises which Landlord has in writing directed Tenant to remove, Landlord shall have the right, on the fifth (5th) day after Landlord's delivery of written notice to Tenant to deem such property abandoned by Tenant and to remove, store, sell, discard or otherwise deal with or dispose of such abandoned property in a commercially reasonable manner. Tenant shall be liable for all costs of such disposition of Tenant's abandoned property, and Landlord shall have no liability to Tenant in any respect regarding such property of Tenant. The provisions of this Section 10.3 shall survive the expiration or any earlier termination of this Lease.

ARTICLE XI
LIENS

11.1 Tenant shall keep the Project, the Building and the Premises and Landlord's interest therein from any liens arising from any work performed, materials furnished, or obligations incurred by, or on behalf of Tenant (other than by Landlord pursuant to Exhibit "C"). Notice is hereby given that neither Landlord nor any mortgagee or Lessor of Landlord shall be liable for any labor or materials furnished to Tenant except as furnished to Tenant by Landlord pursuant to Exhibit "C". If any lien is filed for such work or materials, such lien shall encumber only Tenant's interest in leasehold improvements on the Premises. Within ten (10) days after Tenant learns of the filing of any such lien, Tenant shall notify Landlord of such lien and shall either discharge and cancel such lien of record or post a bond sufficient under the laws of the State of California to cover the amount of the lien claim plus any penalties, interest, attorneys' fees, court costs, and other legal expenses in connection with such lien. If Tenant fails to so discharge or bond such lien within ten
(10) calendar days after written demand from Landlord, Landlord shall have the right, at Landlord's option, to pay the full amount of such lien without inquiry into the validity thereof, and Landlord shall be promptly reimbursed by Tenant, as Additional Rent, for all amounts so paid by Landlord, including expenses, interest, and attorneys' fees.

-22-

ARTICLE XII
USE AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS

12.1 The Premises shall be used only for executive and administrative offices for the uses specifically set forth in Section 1.1Q and for no other purposes whatsoever. Tenant shall use and maintain the Premises in a clean, careful, safe, lawful and proper manner and shall not allow within the Premises, any offensive noise, odor, conduct or private or public nuisance or permit Tenant's employees, agents, licensees or invitees to create a public or private nuisance or act in a disorderly manner within the Building or in the Project. Any statement as to the particular nature of the business to be conducted by Tenant in the Premises and uses to be made thereof by Tenant as set forth in
Section 1.1Q hereof shall not constitute a representation or warranty by Landlord that such business or uses are lawful or permissible under any certificate or occupancy for the Premises or the Building or are otherwise permitted by law. Landlord does, however, represent that any certificate of occupancy issued with respect to the Premises shall allow use for executive and administrative offices.

12.2 Tenant shall, at Tenant's sole expense, (a) comply with all laws, orders, ordinances, and regulations of federal, state, county, and municipal authorities having jurisdiction over the Premises, (b) comply with any directive, order or citation made pursuant to Law by any public officer requiring abatement of any nuisance or which imposes upon Landlord or Tenant any duty or obligation arising from Tenant's occupancy or use of the Premises or from conditions which have been created by or at the request or insistence of Tenant, or required by reason of a breach of any of Tenant's obligations hereunder or by or through other fault of Tenant, (c) comply with all insurance requirements applicable to the Premises and (d) indemnify and hold Landlord harmless from any loss, cost, claim or expense which Landlord incurs or suffers by reason of Tenant's failure to comply with its obligations under clauses (a),
(b) or (c) above. If Tenant receives notice of any such directive, order citation or of any violation of any law, order, ordinance, regulation or any insurance requirement, Tenant shall promptly notify Landlord in writing of such alleged violation and furnish Landlord with a copy of such notice. Nothing contained herein shall be interpreted to require Tenant to perform structural or capital improvement work unless required due to Tenant's specific use of the Premises as opposed to office use in general. Landlord shall be responsible for compliance pursuant to subparagraphs (a), (b) and (c) above to the extent such compliance relates to the Building or the Project (exclusive of the Premises), which compliance costs shall be part of Operating Costs, subject to the terms of
Section 5.2A above. If Tenant receives notice of any such directive, order, citation or of any violation of any law, order, ordinance, regulation or any insurance requirement, Tenant shall promptly notify Landlord in writing of such alleged violation and furnish Landlord with a copy of such notice.

12.3 After completion of the Leasehold Improvements in the Premises, Tenant shall be responsible for causing, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, the Premises to comply with the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990, as subsequently amended (then ADAM), and all similar federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations and subsequent amendments thereof. Landlord shall also be responsible for causing the initial Leasehold Improvements to comply with the requirements of the ADA then in effect. Landlord shall be responsible for causing, as and when deemed appropriate by Landlord, the Common Areas to comply with the ADA, the costs for which shall constitute a component of Operating Costs, except to the extent such costs

-23-

are incurred as a result of Tenant's specific use of the Premises, or as a result of any alterations to the Premises made by or on behalf of Tenant, in which case such costs will be the sole responsibility of Tenant.

ARTICLE XIII
DEFAULT AND REMEDIES

13.1 The occurrence of any one or more of the following events shall constitute an Event of Default (herein so called) of Tenant under this Lease:
(a) if Tenant fails to pay any Rent hereunder as and when such Rent becomes due and such failure shall continue for more than five (5) days after Landlord gives Tenant notice of past due Rent; (b) if an Event of Default in Tenant's obligation to pay Rent hereunder occurs more than twice in any period of twelve
(12) months; (c) if the Premises are abandoned; (d) if Tenant permits to be done anything which creates a lien upon the Premises and fails to discharge or bond such lien or post such security with Landlord as is required by Article 11; (e) if Tenant violates the provisions of Article 8 by attempting to make an unpermitted assignment or sublease; (f) if Tenant fails to maintain in force all policies of insurance required by this Lease and such failure shall continue for more than ten (10) days after Landlord gives Tenant notice of such failure; (g) if any petition is filed by or against Tenant or any guarantor of this Lease under any present or future Section or chapter of the Bankruptcy Code, or under any similar law or statute of the United States or any state thereof (which, in the case of an involuntary proceeding, is not permanently discharged, dismissed, stayed, or vacated, as the case may be, within sixty (60) days of commencement), or if any order for relief shall be entered against Tenant or any guarantor of this Lease in any such proceedings; (h) if Tenant or any guarantor of this Lease becomes insolvent or makes a transfer in fraud of creditors or makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors; (i) if a receiver, custodian, or trustee is appointed for the Premises or for all or substantially all of the assets of Tenant or of any guarantor of this Lease, which appointment is not vacated within sixty (60) days following the date of such appointment; or (j) if Tenant fails to perform or observe any other terms of this Lease and such failure shall continue for more than thirty (30) days after Landlord gives Tenant notice of such failure, or, if such failure cannot be corrected within such thirty (30) day period, if Tenant does not commence to correct such default within said thirty (30) day period .and thereafter diligently prosecute the correction of same to completion within a reasonable time and in any event prior to the time a failure to complete such correction could cause Landlord to be subject to prosecution for violation of any law, rule, ordinance or regulation or causes, or could cause, a default under any mortgage, underlying lease, tenant leases or other agreements applicable to the Project. The provisions of any notice given pursuant to the foregoing will be in lieu of, and not in addition to, any notice required under applicable law (including, without limitation, California Code of Civil Procedure Section 1161 regarding unlawful detainer actions and any successor statute or similar law).

13.2 If an Event of Default occurs, Landlord shall have the right at any time to give a written termination notice to Tenant and, on the date specified in such notice, Tenant's right to possession shall terminate and this Lease shall terminate. Upon such termination, Landlord shall have the right to recover from Tenant:

A. The worth at the time of award of all unpaid Base Rent and Additional Rent which had been earned at the time of termination;

-24-

B. The worth at the time of award of the amount by which all unpaid Base Rent and Additional Rent which would have been earned after termination until the time of award exceeds the amount of such rental loss that Tenant proves could have been reasonably avoided;

C. The worth at the time of award of the amount by which all unpaid Base Rent and Additional Rent for the balance of the term of this Lease after the time of award exceeds the amount of such rental loss that Tenant proves could be reasonably avoided; and

D. All other amounts necessary to compensate Landlord for all the detriment proximately caused by Tenant's failure to perform all of Tenant's obligations under this Lease or which in the ordinary course of things would be likely to result therefrom. The "worth at the time of award" of the amounts referred to in clauses (a) and (b) above shall be computed by allowing interest at the Interest Rate. The "worth at the time of award" of the amount referred to in clause (c) above shall be computed by discounting such amount at the discount rate of the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco at the time of award plus one percent (1%).

Notwithstanding the occurrence of an Event of Default, pursuant to California Civil Code Section 1951.4, or any successor statute thereof, Landlord may continue this Lease in effect after Tenant's breach and abandonment and recover all rent as it becomes due, if Tenant has the right to sublet or assign, subject only to reasonable restrictions. Acts of maintenance or preservation or efforts to relet the Premises or the appointment of a receiver upon initiative of Landlord to protect Landlord's interest under this Lease shall not constitute a termination of Tenant's right to possession unless written notice of termination is given by Landlord to Tenant. The remedies provided for in this Lease are in addition to all other remedies available to Landlord at law or in equity by statute or otherwise.

13.3 No agreement to accept a surrender of the Premises and no act or omission by Landlord or Landlord's agents during the Term shall constitute an acceptance or surrender of the Premises unless made in writing and signed by Landlord. No re-entry or taking possession of the Premises by Landlord shall constitute an election by Landlord to terminate this Lease unless a written notice of such intention is given to Tenant.

13.4 No provision of this Lease shall be deemed to have been waived by Landlord unless such waiver is in writing and signed by Landlord. Landlord's acceptance of Rent following an Event of Default hereunder shall not be construed as a waiver of such Event of Default. No custom or practice which may arise between the parties in connection with the terms of this Lease shall be construed to waive or lessen Landlord's right to insist upon strict performance of the terms of this Lease, without a written notice thereof to Tenant from Landlord.

13.5 The rights granted to Landlord in this Article 13 shall be cumulative of every other right or remedy provided in this Lease or which Landlord may otherwise have at law or in equity or by statute, and the exercise of one or more rights or remedies shall not prejudice or impair the concurrent or subsequent exercise of other rights or remedies or constitute a forfeiture or waiver of Rent or damages accruing to Landlord by reason of any Event of Default under this Lease. Tenant agrees to pay to Landlord all costs and expenses incurred by Landlord in the

-25-

enforcement of this Lease, including all attorneys' fees incurred in connection with the collection of any sums due hereunder or the enforcement of any right or remedy of Landlord.

13.6 Landlord win not be in default in the performance of any obligation required to be performed by Landlord under this Lease unless Landlord fails to perform such obligation within thirty (30) days after the receipt of written notice from Tenant specifying in detail Landlord's failure to perform; provided however, that if the nature of Landlord's obligation is such that more than thirty (30) days are required for performance, then Landlord will not be deemed in default if it commences such performance within such thirty (30) day period and thereafter diligently pursues the same to completion. Upon any default by Landlord, Tenant may exercise any of its rights provided at law or in equity, subject to the limitations on liability set forth in Section 25.5 of this Lease. Tenant shall also be entitled to its professional fees from Landlord to the extent Tenant is the prevailing party in any action against Landlord as provided in Section 25.1 hereof.

ARTICLE XIV
INSURANCE

14.1 A. Tenant, at its sole expense, shall obtain and keep in force during the Term the following insurance: (a) "All Risk" insurance insuring all property located in the Premises, including furniture, equipment, fittings, installations, fixtures, supplies and any other personal property, leasehold improvements and alterations, other than the Leasehold Improvements ("Tenant's Property"), in an amount equal to the full replacement value, it being understood that no lack or inadequacy of insurance by Tenant shall in any event make Landlord subject to any claim by virtue of any theft of or loss or damage to any uninsured or inadequately insured property; (b) Business Interruption insurance in an amount that will reimburse Tenant for direct or indirect loss of earnings attributable to all perils insured against under Section 14.1(a) or attributable to the prevention of access to the Premises by civil authority; and sufficient to reimburse Tenant for Rent in the event of a casualty to, or temporary taking of the Building or the Premises; (c) Commercial general public liability insurance including personal injury, bodily injury, broad form property damage, operations hazard, owner's protective coverage, contractual liability, with a cross liability clause and a severability of interests clause to cover Tenant's indemnities set forth herein, and products and completed operations liability, in limits not less than $2,000,000.00 inclusive per occurrence or such higher limits as Landlord may reasonably require from time to time during the Term; (d) Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability insurance, with a waiver of subrogation endorsement, in form and amount as required by applicable law for Worker's Compensation, and $1,000,000 per occurrence for Employer's Liability; and (e) any other form or forms of insurance or any changes or endorsements to the insurance required herein as Landlord, or any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord may reasonably require, from time to time, in form or in amount, and for insurance risks against which a prudent tenant would protect itself, but only to the extent coverage for such risks and amounts are available in the insurance market at commercially acceptable rates.

B. Tenant shall have the right to include the insurance required by Section l4.1A under Tenant's policies of "blanket insurance," provided that no other loss which may also be insured by such blanket insurance shall affect the insurance coverages required hereby and further provided that Tenant delivers to Landlord a certificate specifically stating that such

-26-

coverages apply to Landlord, the Premises and the Project. All policies of insurance required by Section 14.1A(c) shall name Landlord as additional insured and shall also name all mortgagees and lessors of Landlord, of which Tenant has been notified, additional insureds, all as their respective interest may appear. An such policies or certificates shall be issued by insurers reasonably acceptable to Landlord and in form satisfactory to Landlord. Tenant shall deliver to Landlord certificates with copies of policies, together with satisfactory evidence of payment of premiums for such policies, by the Commencement Date and, with respect to renewals of such policies, not later than thirty (30) days prior to the end of the expiring term of coverage. All policies of insurance shall be endorsed to be primary and noncontributory to any insurance which may be carried by Landlord. All such policies shall contain an agreement by the insurers that the insurers shall notify Landlord and any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord in writing, by certified mail, return receipt requested, not less than thirty (30) days before any material change, reduction in coverage, cancellation, including cancellation for nonpayment of premium, or other termination thereof or change therein and shall (with respect to the insurance required by clauses (a) and (b) of Section 14.1A) include a clause or endorsement denying the insurer any rights or subrogation against Landlord.

14.2 Landlord shall insure the Building and Leasehold Improvements against damage with property insurance and shall carry commercial general public liability insurance, all in such amounts and with such deductible as Landlord reasonably deems appropriate. Notwithstanding any contribution by Tenant to the cost of insurance premiums, as provided hereinabove, Landlord shall not be required to carry insurance of any kind on Tenant's Property, and Tenant hereby agrees that Tenant shall have no right to receive any proceeds from any insurance policies carried by Landlord.

14.3 Tenant shall not knowingly conduct or permit to be conducted in the Premises any activity, or place any equipment in or about the Premises or the Building, which will invalidate the insurance coverage in effect or increase the rate of insurance on the Premises or the Building, and Tenant shall comply with all requirements and regulations of Landlord's insurers. If any invalidation of coverage or increase in the rate of fire insurance or other insurance occurs or is threatened by any insurance company due to any act or omission by Tenant, or its agents, employees, representatives, or contractors, such statement or threat shall be conclusive evidence that the increase in such rate is due to such act of Tenant or the contents or equipment in or about the Premises, and, as a result thereof, Tenant shall be liable for such increase and shall be considered Additional Rent payable with the next monthly installment of Base Rent due under this Lease. In no event shall Tenant introduce or permit to be kept on the Premises or brought into the Building any dangerous, noxious, radioactive or explosive substance.

14.4 Landlord and Tenant each hereby waive any right of subrogation and right of recovery or cause of action for injury or loss to the extent that such injury or loss is covered by fire, extended coverage, "All Risk" or similar policies covering real property or personal property (or which would have been covered if Tenant or Landlord, as the case may be, was carrying the insurance required by this Lease). Said waivers shall be in addition to, and not in limitation or derogation of, any other waiver or release contained in this Lease. Insurance policies shall be properly endorsed, if necessary, to prevent the invalidation of said policies by reason of such waivers.

-27-

ARTICLE XV
DAMAGE BY FIRE OR OTHER CAUSE

15.1 Within sixty (60) days after the date Landlord learns of the necessity for repairs as a result of a casualty, Landlord shall notify Tenant ("Damage Repair Estimate") of Landlord's estimated assessment of the period of time in which the repairs will be completed, which assessment shall be based upon the opinion of a contractor reasonably selected by Landlord and experienced in comparable repairs of comparable buildings. If the Premises or the Building or any portion thereof (exclusive of the Premises) is damaged or destroyed by any casualty to the extent that, in Landlord's reasonable judgment, (a) repair of such damage or destruction would not be economically feasible, or (b) the damage or destruction to the Building and/or the Premises cannot be repaired within one hundred eighty (180) days after the date Landlord learns (if the necessity for repairs as a result of such damage or destruction, or if the proceeds from insurance remaining after any required payment to any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord are insufficient to repair such damage or destruction, Landlord shall have the right, at Landlord's option, to terminate this Lease (provided Landlord terminates, with respect to a damage or destruction to the Building only, the leases of all of the other tenants of the Building similarly situated) by giving Tenant notice of such termination, within sixty (60) days after the date Landlord learns of the necessity for repairs as a result of such damage or destruction.

15.2 If Landlord does not elect to terminate this Lease pursuant to Landlord's termination right as provided above, and the Damage Repair Estimate indicates that repairs cannot be completed within one hundred eighty (180) days after being commenced, Tenant may elect, not later than thirty (30) days after Tenant's receipt of the Damage Repair Estimate, to terminate this Lease by written notice to Landlord effective as of the date specified in Tenant's notice.

15.3 In the event of partial destruction or damage to the Building or the Premises which is not subject to Section 15.1 or 15.2, but which renders the Premises partially but not wholly untenantable, this Lease shall not terminate and Rent shall be abated in proportion to the area of the Premises which cannot be used or occupied by Tenant as a result of such casualty. Landlord shall in such event, within a reasonable time after the date of such destruction or damage, subject to force majeure (as defined in Section 25.6) or to Tenant Delay and to the extent and availability of insurance proceeds, restore the Premises to as near the same condition as existed prior to such partial damage or destruction. If Landlord fails to proceed with reasonable diligence to rebuild the Premises, or if the Premises are not repaired or rebuilt within one hundred eighty (180) days, for a reason other than force majeure or Tenant Delays, then Tenant may, at Tenant's sole option, elect to terminate this Lease upon thirty
(30) days written notice to Landlord, unless Landlord cures the failure within such thirty (30) day period of time, in which case Tenant's termination notice shall be of no effect. In no event shall Rent abate (except to the extent Landlord recovers insurance therefor) or shall any termination by Tenant occur if damage to or destruction of the Premises is the result of the negligence or willful act of Tenant, or Tenant's agents, employees, representatives, contractors, successors, assigns, licensees or invitees.

15.4 If any material portion of the Premises is destroyed by fire or other causes at any time during the last year of the Term, such that the Premises or a material portion thereof cannot

-28-

be occupied for in excess of thirty (30) days as a result thereof, then either Landlord or Tenant shall have the right, at the option of either party, to terminate this Lease by giving written notice to the other within fifteen (15) days after the date of such destruction.

15.5 Landlord shall have no liability to Tenant for inconvenience, loss of business, or annoyance arising from any repair of any portion of the Premises or the Building, provided that Landlord shall use good faith efforts to minimize such inconvenience, loss or annoyance. Tenant hereby waives California Civil Code Sections 1932(2) and 1933(4), providing for termination of hiring upon destruction of the thing hired and Sections 1941 and 1942, providing for repairs to and of the Premises.

15.6 In the event of termination of this Lease pursuant to Sections 15.1, 15.2 or 15.4, all Rent shall be apportioned and paid to the date on which possession is relinquished or the date of such damage, whichever last occurs, and Tenant shall immediately vacate the Premises according to such notice of termination: provided, however, that those provisions of this Lease which are designated to cover matters of termination and the period thereafter shall survive the termination hereof.

ARTICLE XVI
CONDEMNATION

16.1 In the event the whole or substantially the whole of the Building or the Premises are taken or condemned by eminent domain or by any conveyance in lieu thereof (such taking, condemnation or conveyance in lieu thereof being hereinafter referred to as "condemnation"), this Lease shall terminate on the earlier of the date the condemning authority takes possession or the date title vests in the condemning authority.

16.2 In the event any portion of the Building shall be taken by condemnation (whether or not such taking includes any portion of the Premises), which taking, in Landlord's judgment, is such that the Building cannot be restored in an economically feasible manner for use substantially as originally designed, then Landlord shall have the right, at Landlord's option, to terminate this Lease (provided Landlord also terminates the leases of the other tenants of the Building similarly situated), effective as of the date specified by Landlord (at least sixty (60) days in the future) in a written notice of termination from Landlord to Tenant.

16.3 In the event any portion of the Parking Facility shall be taken by condemnation, which taking in Landlord's judgment is such that the Parking Facility cannot be restored in an economically feasible manner for use substantially as originally designed, including in such consideration the possible use of additional Parking Facility in the vicinity of the Building, then Landlord shall have the right, at Landlord's option, to terminate this Lease (provided Landlord also terminates the leases of the other tenants of the Building similarly situated), effective as of the date specified by Landlord (at least sixty (60) days in the future) in a written notice of termination from Landlord to Tenant. In addition, Tenant shall have the right to terminate this Lease if twenty-five percent (25%) or more of the parking spaces in the Parking Facility is taken and Landlord does not provide reasonably suitable alternative parking within walking distance from the Building.

-29-

16.4 In the event that a portion, but less than substantially the whole, of the Premises shall be taken by condemnation, then this Lease shall be terminated as of the date of such condemnation as to the portion of the Premises so taken, and unless Landlord exercises its option to terminate this Lease pursuant to Section 16.2 or Tenant exercises its option to terminate this Lease pursuant to this Section 16.4 below, this Lease shall remain in full force and effect as to the remainder of the Premises. If (i) more than ten percent (10%) of the Net Rentable Area of the Premises shall be taken by condemnation and such condemnation renders the Premises unusable for the business of Tenant, as reasonably determined by Tenant, or (ii) a substantial portion of the Building or the Parking Facility is taken by condemnation rendering the Premises unusable for the business of Tenant, as reasonably determined by Tenant, or (iii) all or any portion of the Premises is taken by condemnation for a period in excess of sixty (60) days, then in any such event Tenant may elect to terminate this Lease as of the date specified by Tenant in a written notice of termination from Tenant to Landlord, which date shall not be later than sixty (60) days following the date of the taking. If such condemnation is not sufficiently extensive to render the Premises unusable for the business of Tenant as reasonably determined by Tenant, and Landlord has not elected to terminate this Lease in accordance with the provisions of Section 16.2, 16.3 or this Section 16.4, then Landlord shall promptly restore the Premises to a condition comparable to its condition immediately prior to such condemnation (excluding Tenant's alterations, furniture, fixtures and equipment), less the portion thereof lost in such condemnation, and this Lease shall continue in full force and effect, except that after the date of any such taking of the Premises, the Rent shall be equitably apportioned from and after such date.

16.5 In the event of termination of this Lease pursuant to the provisions of Section 16.1, 16.2, or 16.3, the Rent shall be apportioned as of such date of termination; provided, however, that those provisions of this Lease which are designated to cover matters of termination and the period thereafter shall survive the termination hereof.

16.6 All compensation awarded or paid upon a condemnation of any portion of the Project shall belong to and be the property of Landlord without participation by Tenant. Nothing herein shall be construed, however, to preclude Tenant from prosecuting any claim directly against the condemning authority for loss of business, loss of good will, moving expenses, damage to, and cost of removal of, trade fixtures, furniture and other personal property belonging to Tenant.

16.7 If any portion of the Project other than the Building or the Parking Facility is taken by condemnation, or if the temporary use or occupancy of all or any part of the Premises shall be taken by condemnation during the Term for a period of less than sixty (60) days, this Lease shall, subject to
Section 16.4 above, be and remain unaffected by such condemnation, and Tenant shall continue to pay in full the Rent payable hereunder. In the event of any such temporary taking for use or occupancy of all or any part of the Premises, Tenant shall be entitled to appear, claim, prove and receive the portion of the award for such taking that represents compensation for use or occupancy of the Premises during the Term and Landlord shall be entitled to appear, claim, prove and receive the portion of the award that represents the cost of restoration of the Premises and the use or occupancy of the Premises after the end of the Term hereof. In the event of any such condemnation of any portion of the Project other than the Building, Landlord shall be entitled to appear, claim, prove and receive all of that award. In the event of any permanent taking of the Premises, Tenant will have the right to recover from the

-30-

condemning authority (but not from Landlord) any compensation as may be separately awarded or recoverable by Tenant for the taking of Tenant's furniture, fixtures, equipment and other personal property within the Premises, for Tenant relocation expenses, and for any loss of good will or other damage to Tenant's business by reason of such taking, but Tenant will not be entitled to any so-called bonus or excess value of this Lease, which will be the sole property of Landlord.

16.8 Landlord and Tenant each hereby waive the provisions of California Code of Civil Procedure Section 1265.130 and any other applicable existing or future law, ordinance or governmental regulation providing for, or allowing either party to petition the courts of the state in which the Project is located for, a termination of this Lease upon a partial taking of the Premises and/or the Building.

ARTICLE XVII
INDEMNIFICATION

17.1 Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Article XVII, Tenant shall, and hereby agrees to, indemnify, defend and hold Landlord harmless from any Claims (as such term is defined below) arising from the use or occupancy of the Common Areas and the Premises by Tenant or any Tenant Party (as such term is defined below). Notwithstanding the foregoing, Tenant shall not be required to indemnify, defend, and/or hold Landlord harmless from any Claims to the extent any such Claim results from the negligence or willful misconduct of Landlord or any Landlord Party (as such term is defined below). Additionally, without limiting the foregoing, because Landlord maintains insurance on the Building and the Leasehold Improvements pursuant to Section 14.2 of this Lease, and because Tenant compensates Landlord for such insurance as part of Tenant's Share of Operating Costs, and because of the existence of waivers of subrogation set forth in Section 14.4 of this Lease, the foregoing obligation of Tenant to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Landlord shall not apply to any Claims pertaining to loss or damage to any property to the extent such Claim is covered by such insurance required to be carried by Landlord under this Lease, even if such Claim results in whole or in part from the negligent acts, omissions/or willful misconduct of Tenant or any Tenant Party. If Landlord is made a party to any litigation commenced by or against Tenant pertaining to any Claim caused or alleged to have been caused by Tenant or any Tenant Party for which Tenant is obligated pursuant to the foregoing to indemnify Landlord, and provided that in any such litigation Landlord or a Landlord Party is not finally adjudicated to be at fault, then Tenant shall pay all costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees and court costs, incurred by or imposed upon Landlord because of any such litigation, and the amount of all such costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees and court costs, shall be a demand obligation owing by Tenant to Landlord.

17.2 Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Article XVII, Landlord shall, and hereby agrees to, indemnify, defend, and hold harmless Tenant from any Claims which result from the negligent or willful misconduct of Landlord or any Landlord Party. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Landlord shall not be required to indemnify, defend, and/or hold Tenant harmless from any Claims to the extent any such Claim results from the negligence or willful misconduct of Tenant or any Tenant Party. Without limiting the foregoing, Landlord shall not be liable for any Claims caused by other tenants or persons in the Building or by occupants of adjacent property thereto, or by the public, or caused by construction (except if such construction is

-31-

carried out by or under the direction of Landlord or any Landlord Party), or by any private, public, or quasi-public work. Additionally, without limiting the foregoing, because Tenant is required to carry insurance covering Tenant's Property pursuant to Section 14.1 of this Lease, and because of the existence of waivers of subrogation set forth in Section 14.4 of this Lease, the foregoing obligation of Landlord to indemnify, defend, and hold harmless Tenant shall not apply to any Claims pertaining to loss or damage to any of Tenant's Property to the extent such Claim is covered by such insurance required to be carried by Tenant under this Lease, even if such Claim results in whole or in part from the negligent acts, omissions, or willful misconduct of Landlord or any Landlord Party. If Tenant is made a party to any litigation commenced by or against Landlord pertaining to any Claim caused or alleged to have been caused by Landlord or any Landlord Party for which Landlord is obligated pursuant to the foregoing to indemnify Tenant, and provided that in any such litigation Tenant or a Tenant Party is not finally adjudicated to be at fault, then Landlord shall pay all costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees and court costs, incurred by or imposed upon Tenant because of any such litigation, and the amount of all such costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees and court costs, shall be a demand obligation owing by Landlord to Tenant.

17.3 For purposes of this Article XVII: "Claims" shall mean and refer to any damage to any property or injury to, or death of, any person, including, without limitation, attorneys' fees and costs; "Landlord Party" and "Tenant Party," respectively, shall mean and refer to Landlord and Tenant, and their respective agents, employees, representatives, contractors, successors, assigns, and licensees. The provisions of this Article XVII shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease with respect to any Claims arising before such expiration or termination.

ARTICLE XVIII
SUBORDINATION AND ESTOPPEL CERTIFICATES

18.1 This Lease and all rights of Tenant hereunder are subject and subordinate to all underlying leases now or hereafter in existence, and to any supplements, amendments, modifications, and extensions of such leases heretofore or hereafter made and to any deeds to secure debt, mortgages, or other security instruments which now or hereafter cover all or any portion of the Project or any interest of Landlord therein, and to any advances made on the security thereof, and to any increases, renewals, modifications, consolidations, replacements, and extensions of any of such mortgages. Except as expressly provided in this Section 18.1 below, this provision is declared by Landlord and Tenant to be self-operative and no further instrument shall be required to effect such subordination of this Lease. Upon demand, however, Tenant shall execute, acknowledge, and deliver to Landlord any further instruments and certificates evidencing such subordination as Landlord, and any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord shall reasonably require, and if Tenant fails to so execute, acknowledge and deliver such Instruments within ten (10) days after Landlord's request, Tenant shall be in default of this Lease. Tenant shall not unreasonably withhold, delay, or defer its written consent reasonable modifications in this Lease which are a condition of any construction, interim or permanent financing for the Project or any reciprocal easement agreement with facilities in the vicinity of the Building, provided that such modifications do not increase the obligations of Tenant hereunder or materially and adversely affect Tenant's use and enjoyment of the Premises. This Lease is further subject and subordinate to:
(a) all applicable ordinances of any government authority

-32-

having jurisdiction over the Project, relating to easements, franchises, and other interests or rights upon, across, or appurtenant to the Project; and (b) all utility easements and agreements, now or hereafter created for the benefit of the Project. Notwithstanding anything above to the contrary, Landlord agrees to provide Tenant with commercially reasonable non-disturbance agreement(s) in favor of Tenant from any ground lessors, mortgage holders and deed of trust beneficiaries of Landlord acquiring an interest in the Building or the underlying land after the date of this Lease until the expiration of the Term of this Lease in consideration of, and as an express condition precedent to, any subordination of the Lease provided hereunder. Further, Landlord agrees to use commercially reasonable efforts to provide to Tenant, within ninety (90) days after the date hereof, the Subordination, Non-Disturbance and Attornment Agreement substantially in the form of Exhibit "F" attached hereto and made a part hereof, in recordable form, fully executed by any ground lessors, mortgage holders and deed of trust beneficiaries in existence as of the date hereof, which Subordination, Non-Disturbance and Attornment Agreement Tenant shall execute and deliver to Landlord within ten (10) days of Tenant's receipt thereof.

18.2 Notwithstanding the generality of the foregoing provisions of
Section 18.1, any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord shall have the right at any time to subordinate any such mortgage or underlying lease to this Lease, or to any of the provisions hereof, on such terms and subject to such conditions as such mortgagee or lessor of Landlord may consider appropriate in its discretion. At any time, before or after the institution of any proceedings for the foreclosure of any such mortgage, or the sale of the Building under any such mortgage, or the termination of any underlying lease, Tenant shall, upon request of such mortgagee or any person or entities succeeding to the interest of such mortgagee or the purchaser at any foreclosure sale ("Successor Landlord"), automatically become the Tenant (or if the Premises has been validly subleased, the subtenant) of the Successor Landlord, without change in the terms or other provisions of this Lease (or, in the case of a permitted sublease, without change in this Lease or in the instrument setting forth the terms of such sublease); provided, however, that the Successor Landlord shall not be (i) bound by any payment made by Tenant of Rent or Additional Rent for more than one (1) month in advance, except for a Security Deposit previously paid to Landlord (and then only if such Security Deposit has been deposited with and is under the control of the Successor Landlord), (ii) bound by any termination, modification, amendment or surrender of the Lease done without the Successor Landlord's consent, (iii) liable for any damages or subject to any offset or defense by Tenant to the payment of Rent by reason of any act or omission of any prior landlord (including Landlord), or (iv) personally or corporately liable, in any event, beyond the limitations on liability set forth in Section 25.5 of this Lease. This agreement of Tenant to attorn to a Successor Landlord shall survive any such foreclosure sale, trustee's sale conveyance in lieu thereof or termination of any underlying lease. Tenant shall upon demand at any time, before or after any such foreclosure or termination execute, acknowledge, and deliver to the Successor Landlord any written instruments and certificates evidencing such attornment as such Successor Landlord may reasonably require; provided, however, that Landlord shall use its reasonable efforts to require that such agreement provide that upon such attornment, as long as Tenant is not in default hereunder, Tenant's possession of the Premises under this Lease shall not be disturbed.

18.3 Tenant shall, from time to time, within ten (10) days after request from Landlord, or from any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord, execute, acknowledge and deliver in recordable form a certificate certifying, to the extent true, that this Lease is in full force and effect and

-33-

unmodified (or, if there have been modifications, that the same is in full force and effect as modified and stating the modifications); that the Term has commenced and the full amount of the Rent then accruing hereunder; the dates to which the Rent has been paid; that Tenant has accepted possession of the Premises and that any improvements required by the terms of this Lease to be made by Landlord have been completed to the satisfaction of Tenant; the amount, if any, that Tenant has paid to Landlord as a Security Deposit; that no Rent under this Lease has been paid more than thirty (30) days in advance of its due date; that the address for notices to be sent to Tenant is as set forth in this Lease (or has been changed by notice duly given and is as set forth in the certificate); that Tenant, as of the date of such certificate, has no charge, lien, or claim of offset under this Lease or otherwise against Rent or other charges due or to become due hereunder; that, to the knowledge of Tenant, Landlord is not then in default under this Lease; and such other matters as may be requested by Landlord or any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord. Any such certificate may be relied upon by Landlord, any Successor Landlord, or any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord.

ARTICLE XIX
SURRENDER OF THE PREMISES

19.1 Upon the Expiration Date or earlier termination of this Lease, or upon any re-entry of the Premises by Landlord in accordance with this Lease without terminating this Lease pursuant to Section 13.2, Tenant, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, shall peacefully vacate and surrender the Premises to Landlord in good order, broom clean and in the same condition as at the beginning of the Term or as the Premises may thereafter have been improved by Landlord or Tenant (subject to Section 10.3 hereof), reasonable use and wear thereof and repairs which are Landlord's obligations under Articles 9, 15 and l6 only excepted, and Tenant shall remove all of Tenant's Property and turn over all keys for the Premises to Landlord. No provision of this Lease shall impose upon Landlord any obligation to care for or preserve any of Tenant's Property left upon the Premises, and Tenant hereby waives and releases Landlord from any claim or liability in connection with the removal of such property from the Premises and the storage thereof and specifically waives the provisions of California Civil Code Section 1542 with respect to such release. Should Tenant continue to hold the Premises after the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease, such holding over, unless otherwise agreed to by Landlord in writing, shall constitute and be construed as a tenancy at sufferance at monthly installments of Rent equal to one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the monthly portion of Rent in effect as of the date of expiration or earlier termination, and subject to all of the other terms, charges and expenses set forth herein except any right to renew this Lease or to expand the Premises or any right to additional services. Tenant shall also be liable to Landlord for all damage which Landlord suffers because of any holding over by Tenant, and Tenant shall indemnify Landlord against all claims made by any other tenant or prospective tenant against Landlord resulting from delay by Landlord in delivering possession of the Premises to such other tenant or prospective tenant. The provisions of this Article 19 shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease.

ARTICLE XX
LANDLORD'S RIGHT TO INSPECT

20.1 Landlord shall retain duplicate keys to all doors of the Premises. Tenant shall provide Landlord with new keys should Tenant receive Landlord's consent to change the locks.

-34-

Landlord shall have the right to enter the Premises to provide janitorial service as required under this Lease and other times at reasonable hours following reasonable prior notice (or, in the event of an emergency, at any hour) (a) to exhibit the same to present to prospective mortgagees, lessors or purchasers during the Term and to prospective tenants during the last year of the Term, (b) to inspect the Premises, (c) to confirm that Tenant is complying with all of Tenant's covenants and obligations under this Lease, (d) to make repairs required of Landlord under the terms of this Lease, (e) to make repairs to areas adjoining the Premises, and (f) to repair and service utility lines or other components of the Building; provided, however, Landlord shall use reasonable efforts to minimize interference with Tenant's business.

ARTICLE XXI
SECURITY DEPOSIT

21.1 Tenant's Security Deposit shall be held by Landlord, without liability for interest except to the extent required by law, as security for the performance of Tenant's obligations under this Lease. Unless required by applicable law, Landlord shall not be required to keep the Security Deposit segregated from other funds of Landlord. Tenant shall not assign or in any way encumber the Security Deposit. Upon the occurrence of any Event of Default by Tenant, Landlord shall have the right, without prejudice to any other remedy, to use the Security Deposit, or portions thereof, to the extent necessary to pay any arrearages in Rent, and any other damage, injury or expense. Following any such application of all or any portion of the Security Deposit, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, on demand, the amount so applied in order to restore the Security Deposit to its original amount. If Tenant is not in default at the termination of this Lease, any remaining balance of the Security Deposit shall be returned to Tenant, provided that Tenant surrenders the Premises without damage pursuant to Article 19 hereof. If Landlord transfers its interest in the Premises during the Term, Landlord shall assign the Security Deposit to the transferee, and thereafter Landlord shall have no further liability to Tenant for the Security Deposit.

ARTICLE XXII
BROKERAGE

22.1 Tenant and Landlord each represent and warrant to the other that it has not entered into any agreement with, or otherwise had any dealings with, any broker or agent in connection with the negotiation or execution of this Lease which could form the basis of any claim by any such broker or agent for a brokerage fee or commission, finder's fee, or any other compensation of any kind or nature in connection herewith, other than with Broker(s) (who shall be paid by Landlord in accordance with Landlord's separate agreement(s) with the Broker(s)) and each party shall, and hereby agrees to, indemnity and hold the other harmless from all costs (including court costs, investigation costs, and attorneys' fees), expenses, or liability for commissions or other compensation claimed by any broker or agent with respect to this Lease which arise out of any agreement or dealings, or alleged agreement or dealings, between the indemnifying party and any such agent or broker, other than with Broker(s). This provision shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease.

-35-

ARTICLE XXIII
OBSERVANCE OF RULES AND REGULATIONS

23.1 Tenant and Tenant's servants, employees, agents, visitors, and licensees shall observe faithfully and comply strictly with all Rules and Regulations (herein so called) attached to this Lease as such Rules and Regulations may be changed from time to time. Landlord shall at all times have the right to make reasonable changes in and additions to such Rules and Regulations; provided Landlord gives Tenant prior notice of such changes and provided that such new rules and regulations or changes in existing rules and regulations do not conflict with this Lease, and do not materially interfere with the lawful conduct of Tenant's business in the Premises. Any failure by Landlord to enforce any of the Rules and Regulations now or hereafter in effect, either against Tenant or any other tenant in the Building, shall not constitute a waiver of any such Rules and Regulations. Landlord shall not be liable to Tenant for the failure or refusal by any other tenant, guest, invitee, visitor, or occupant of the Building to comply with any of the Rules and Regulations.

ARTICLE XXIV
NOTICES

24.1 All notices, consents, demands, requests, documents, or other communications (other than payment of Rent) required or permitted hereunder (collectively, "notices") shall be deemed given, whether actually received or not, when dispatched for hand delivery or delivery by air express courier (with signed receipts) to the other party, or on the second Business Day after deposit in the United States mail, postage prepaid, certified, return receipt requested, except for notice of change of address which shall be deemed given only upon actual receipt. The addresses of the parties for notices are set forth in Article 1, or any such other addresses subsequently specified by each party in notices given pursuant to this Section 24.1.

ARTICLE XXV
MISCELLANEOUS

25.1 Professional Fees. In any action or proceeding brought by either party against the other under this Lease, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover from the other party its professional fees for attorneys, appraisers and accountants, its investigation costs, and any other legal expenses and court costs incurred by the prevailing party in such action or proceeding.

25.2 Reimbursements. Wherever the Lease requires Tenant to reimburse Landlord for the cost of any item, such costs will be the reasonable and customary charge periodically established by Landlord for such item. Landlord shall keep in its on-site manager's office a schedule of such charges (which Landlord may periodically change) for Tenant's examination. The schedule of charges may include, at the discretion of Landlord, a reasonable allocation of overhead, administrative, and related costs and a reasonable fee for Landlord's agent or manager who performs such services or arranges for performance of such services. All such charges shall be payable upon demand as Additional Rent.

25.3 Severability. Every agreement contained in this Lease is, and shall be construed as, a separate and independent agreement. If any term of this Lease or the application thereof to

-36-

any person or circumstances shall be invalid or unenforceable, the remaining agreements contained in this Lease shall not be affected.

25.4 Non-Merger. There shall be no merger of this Lease with any ground leasehold interest or the fee estate in the Project or any part thereof by reason of the fact that the same person may acquire or hold, directly or indirectly, this Lease or any interest in this Lease as well as any ground leasehold interest or fee estate in the Project or any interest in such fee estate.

25.5 Landlord's Liability. Anything contained in this Lease to the contrary notwithstanding, Tenant agrees that Tenant shall look solely to the estate and property of Landlord in the Project for the collection of any judgment or other judicial process requiring the payment of money by Landlord for any default or breach by Landlord under this Lease, subject, however, to the prior rights of any mortgagee or lessor of the Project. No other assets of Landlord or any members, partners, shareholders, or other principals of Landlord shall be subject to levy, execution or other judicial process for the satisfaction of Tenant's claim.

25.6 Force Majeure. Whenever the period of time is herein prescribed for action to be taken by Landlord or Tenant, Landlord or Tenant shall not be liable or responsible for, and there shall be excluded from the computation for any such period of time, any delays due to force majeure, which term shall include strikes, riots, acts of God, shortages of labor or materials, war, governmental approvals, laws, regulations, or restrictions, or any other cause of any kind whatsoever which is beyond the reasonable control of Landlord or Tenant. Force Majeure shall not excuse or delay Tenant's obligation to pay Rent or any other amount due under this Lease.

25.7 Headings. The article headings contained in this Lease are for convenience only and shall not enlarge or limit the scope or meaning of the various and several articles hereof. Words in the singular number shall be held to include the plural, unless the context otherwise requires. All agreements and covenants herein contained shall be binding upon the respective heirs, personal representatives, and successors and assigns of the parties thereto.

25.8 Successors and Assigns. All agreements and covenants herein contained shall be binding upon the respective heirs, personal representatives, successors and assigns or the parties hereto. If there be more than one Tenant; the obligations hereunder imposed upon Tenant shall be joint and several. If there is a guarantor of Tenant's obligations hereunder, Tenant's obligations shall be joint and several obligations of Tenant and such guarantor, and Landlord need not first proceed against Tenant hereunder before proceeding against such guarantor, and any such guarantor shall not be released from its guarantee for any reason, including any amendment of this Lease, any forbearance by Landlord or waiver of any of Landlord's rights, the failure to give Tenant or such guarantor any notices, or the release of any party liable for the payment or performance of Tenant's obligations hereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing contained in this Section 25.8 shall be deemed to override Article 8.

25.9 Landlord's Representations. Neither Landlord nor Landlord's agents or brokers have made any representations or promises with respect to the Premises, the Building, the Parking Facility, the Land, or any other portions of the Project except as herein expressly set forth and all reliance with respect to any representations or promises is based solely on those

-37-

contained herein. No rights, easements, or licenses are acquired by Tenant under this Lease by implication or otherwise except as, and unless, expressly set forth in this Lease.

25.10 Entire Agreements; Amendments. This Lease and the Exhibits and Riders attached hereto set forth the entire agreement between the parties and cancel all prior negotiations, arrangements, brochures, agreements, and understandings, if any, between Landlord and Tenant regarding the subject matter of this Lease. No amendment or modification of this Lease shall be binding or valid unless expressed in writing executed by both parties hereto.

25.11 Tenant's Authority. If Tenant signs as a corporation, execution hereof shall constitute a representation and warranty by Tenant that Tenant is a duly organized and existing corporation, that Tenant has been and is qualified to do business in the State of California and in good standing with the State of California, that the corporation has full right and authority to enter into this Lease, and that all persons signing on behalf of the corporation were authorized to do so by appropriate corporate action. If Tenant signs as a limited liability company, partnership, trust; or other legal entity, execution hereof shall constitute a representation and warranty by Tenant that Tenant has complied with all applicable laws, rules, and governmental regulations relative to Tenant's right to do business in the State of California, that such entity has the full right and authority to enter into this Lease, and that all persons signing on behalf of Tenant were authorized to do so by any and all necessary or appropriate company, partnership, trust, or other actions.

25.12 Governing Law. This Lease shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California. Should any provision of this Lease require judicial interpretation, Landlord and Tenant hereby agree and stipulate that the court interpreting or considering same shall not apply the presumption that the terms hereof shall be more strictly construed against a party by reason of any rule or conclusion that a document should be construed more strictly against the party who itself or through its agents prepared the same, it being agreed that all parties hereto have participated in the preparation of this Lease and that each Party had full opportunity to consult legal counsel of its choice before the execution of this Lease.

25.13 Tenant's Use of Name of the Building. Tenant shall not, without the prior written consent of Landlord, use the name of the Building for any purpose other than as the address of the business to be conducted by Tenant in the Premises, and Tenant shall not do or permit the doing of anything in connection with Tenant's business or advertising (including brokers' flyers promoting sublease space) which in the reasonable judgment of Landlord may reflect unfavorably on Landlord or the Building or confuse or mislead the public as to any apparent connection or relationship between Tenant and Landlord, the Building, or the Land.

25.14 Ancient Lights. Any elimination or shutting off of light, air, or view by any structure which may be erected on lands adjacent to the Building shall in no way affect this Lease and Landlord shall have no liability to Tenant with respect thereto.

25.15 Changes to Project by Landlord. Landlord shall have the unrestricted right to make changes to all portions of the Project in Landlord's reasonable discretion for the purpose of improving access or security to the Project or the flow of pedestrian and vehicular traffic therein.

-38-

Landlord shall have the right at any time, without the same constituting an actual or constructive eviction and without incurring any liability to Tenant therefor, to change the arrangement or location of entrances or passageways, doors and doorways, corridors, elevators, stairs, bathrooms, or any other Common Areas so long as reasonable access to the Premises remains available. Landlord shall also have the right to (a) rearrange, change, expand or contract portions of the Project constituting Common Areas, (b) to use Common Areas while engaged in making improvements, repairs or alterations to the Project, or any portion thereof, and (c) to do and perform such other acts and make such other changes in to or with respect to the Project, or any portion thereof, as Landlord may, in the exercise of sound business judgment, deem to be appropriate. Landlord shall be entitled to change the name or address of the Building or the Project. Landlord shall have the right to close, from time to time, the Common Areas and other portions of the Project for such temporary periods as Landlord deems legally sufficient to evidence Landlord's ownership and control thereof and to prevent any claim of adverse possession by, or any implied or actual dedication to, the public or any party other than Landlord.

25.16 Time of Essence. Time is of the essence of this Lease.

25.17 Landlord's Acceptance of Lease. The submission of this Lease to Tenant shall not be construed as an offer and Tenant shall not have any rights with respect thereto unless said Lease is consented to by mortgagee, and any lessor of Landlord, to the extent such consent is required, and Landlord executes a copy of this Lease and delivers the same to Tenant.

25.18 Performance by Tenant. All covenants and agreements to be performed by Tenant under any of the terms of this Lease shall be performed by Tenant, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, and without any abatement of Rent. If Tenant shall fail to pay any Rent, other than Base Rent, required to be paid by it hereunder or shall fail to perform any other act on its part to be performed hereunder, and such failure shall continue for longer than the period of cure, if any, permitted in Section 13.l, Landlord may, at its option, without waiving or releasing Tenant from obligations of Tenant, make any such payment or perform any such other act on behalf of Tenant. All sums so paid by Landlord and all necessary incidental costs, together with interest thereon at the Interest Rate, from the date of such payment by Landlord, shall be payable to Landlord on demand. Tenant covenants to pay any such sums, and Landlord shall have (in addition to any other right or remedy of Landlord) the same rights and remedies in the event of the non-payment thereof by Tenant as in the case of default by Tenant in the payment of Rent.

25.19 Financial Statements. At any time during the term of this Lease, Tenant shall, upon ten (10) days prior written notice from Landlord, provide Landlord with, if available, the most recent existing financial statement and existing financial statements of the two (2) years prior to the most recent financial statement year. Such statements shall be prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and, if such is the normal practice of Tenant, shall be audited by an independent certified public accountant.

25.20 Guaranty. For the benefit of Landlord, this Lease is subject to and conditional upon the Guarantor(s)' delivery to Landlord, concurrently with Tenant's execution and delivery of this Lease to Landlord, of Guaranty in the form of and upon the terms contained in Exhibit

-39-

"E" attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference, which shall be fully executed by the Guarantor(s) specified in Section 1.1W of Article I of this Lease.

25.21 Quiet Enjoyment. Landlord covenants and agrees with Tenant that upon Tenant paying the rent required under this Lease and paying all other charges and performing all of the covenants and provisions on Tenant's part to be observed and performed under this Lease, Tenant may peaceably and quietly have, hold and enjoy the Premises in accordance with this Lease without hindrance or molestation by Landlord or its employees or agents.

25.22 Directory; Signs. Landlord shall provide to Tenant entry door signage at Tenant's cost, and such entry door signage shall be comparable to that used by Landlord for other similar floors in the Building and shall comply with Landlord's Building standard signage program. Tenant shall also be entitled to have Tenant's name, as well as the names of Tenant's employees, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, listed on a directory sign in the main lobby of the Building, up to a maximum of five (5) directory strips. Any signs, notices, logos, pictures, names or advertisements which are installed and that have not been separately approved by Landlord may be removed without notice by Landlord at the sole expense of Tenant. Tenant may not install any signs on the exterior or roof of the Project or the Common Areas. Any signs, window coverings, or blinds (even if the same are located behind the Landlord-approved window coverings for the Building), or other items visible from the exterior of the Premises or Building, shall be subject to the prior approval of Landlord, in its sole discretion.

ARTICLE XXVI
SUBSTITUTION SPACE

26.1 Landlord shall have a one-time right, which right may be exercised by Landlord at any time prior to the end of the Term of this Lease, or any renewal or extension hereof, to substitute, instead of the Premises, other space within the Project (which space shall have a Net Rentable Area of not less than the Net Rentable Area in the Premises as of the date of such substitution and shall be located on a floor of a building in the Project no lower than the floor on which the original Premises are located and in an area substantially similar to the location of the original Premises in the Building), hereinafter called the "Substitution Space".

26.2 If Landlord desires to exercise such right prior to the Commencement Date, Landlord shall give written notice thereof to Tenant not later than thirty (30) days prior to the effective date of such substitution, which notice shall specify the Substitution Space in question and the description of the Premises set forth in this Lease shall, without further act on the part of Landlord or Tenant, be deemed amended so that the Substitution Space shall, for all purposes, be deemed the Premises hereunder and all of the terms, covenants, conditions, provisions, and agreements of this Lease, including those agreements to pay Rent, shall continue in full force and effect and shall apply to the Substitution Space. The Leasehold Improvements in the Substitution Space shall be completed in the manner set forth in Exhibit "C" of this lease, and the costs thereof shall be allocated between Landlord and Tenant as described therein; provided, however, that if, prior to Landlord's notice of its election to substitute the Substitution Space for the Premises, Tenant has reasonably incurred costs or expenses in connection with planning or construction of the Leasehold Improvements in the original Premises and Tenant is (i) unable to use the plans or materials in question in connection with the Leasehold Improvements in the

-40-

Substitution Space or (ii) unable to cancel orders for or return the materials in question for credit. Landlord shall reimburse Tenant for such costs and expenses (net of all applicable credits) upon presentation by Tenant of appropriate invoices and other substantiating materials therefor.

26.3 If Landlord desires to exercise such right after the Commencement Date, Landlord shall give Tenant at least sixty (60) days' prior written notice thereof specifying the effective date of such substitution, whereupon, as of such effective date: (a) the description of the Premises set forth in this Lease shall, without further act on the part of Landlord or Tenant, be deemed amended so that the Substitution Space shall, for all purposes, be deemed the Premises hereunder, and all of the terms, covenants, conditions, provisions, and agreements of this Lease, including those agreements to pay Rent, shall, subject to adjustment as provided in Section 26.6 below, continue in full force and effect and shall apply to the Substitution Space, and (b) Tenant shall move from the present Premises into the Substitution Space and shall vacate and surrender possession to Landlord of the present Premises, and if Tenant continues to occupy the present Premises after such effective date, then thereafter, during the period of such occupancy, Tenant shall pay Rent for the present Premises as set forth in this Lease, in addition to the Rent for the Substitution Space at the above-described rates. Tenant shall accept possession of the Substitution Space in its "as-is" condition as of such effective date.

26.4 Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 26.3 above, if Landlord exercises its right to substitute the Substitution Space for the Premises after the Commencement Date, then Tenant shall have the option to require Landlord, at Landlord's expense, to alter the Substitution Space in a manner substantially similar to the manner as the present Premises were finished out or altered pursuant to this Lease. Such option shall be exercised, if at all, by notice from Tenant to Landlord within fifteen (15) days after the aforesaid notice from Landlord to Tenant of such proposed substitution; otherwise, such option in favor of Tenant shall be null and void. If such option is validly so exercised by Tenant: (a) Tenant shall continue to occupy the present Premises (upon all of the terms, covenants, conditions, provisions, and agreements of this Lease, including the covenant for the payment of Rent) until the date on which Landlord shall have substantially completed such alteration work in the Substitution Space such that Tenant can commence business operations from the Substitution Space; and (b) Tenant shall move from the present Premises into the Substitution Space immediately upon the date of such substantial completion by Landlord and shall vacate and surrender possession to Landlord of the present Premises after such date, and if Tenant continues to occupy the present Premises following such date of substantial completion, then, thereafter during the period of such occupancy, Tenant shall pay Rent for the present Premises as set forth in this lease in addition to the Rent for the Substitution Space at the above-described rates. Landlord shall use its good faith efforts to allow Tenant to move into the Substitution Space over the weekend immediately prior to the date of substantial completion of the same. With respect to such alteration work in the Substitution Space, if Tenant requests materials or installations other than those originally installed by Landlord, or if Tenant shall make changes in the work (such non-original materials or installations or changes being subject to Landlord's prior written approval), and if such non-original materials or installations or changes shall delay the work to be performed by Landlord, or if Tenant shall otherwise delay the substantial completion of the work, the occurrence of such delays shall in no event postpone the date for the commencement of the payment of Rent for such Substitution Space beyond the date on which such work would have been substantially completed but for such delays, and in addition, Tenant shall continue to pay Rent for the present

-41-

Premises as set forth in this Lease until it vacates and surrenders same as aforesaid. Landlord at its discretion may substitute materials of like quality for the materials originally utilized.

26.5 If Landlord exercises this relocation right after the Commencement Date, Landlord shall reimburse Tenant for Tenant's reasonable out-of-pocket expenses for moving Tenant's furniture, equipment (including computer equipment), supplies and telephones and telephone equipment from the present Premises to the Substitution Space and for reprinting Tenant's stationery of the same quality and quantity of Tenant's stationery supply on hand immediately prior to Landlord's notice to Tenant of the exercise of this substitution right.

26.6 Notwithstanding anything above to the contrary, in the event the Net Rentable Area of the Substitution Space is greater than the Net Rentable Area of the Premises, then Tenant's Share and Base Rent shall be proportionately adjusted (but shall not be increased by more than five percent (5%).

ARTICLE XXVII
OTHER DEFINITIONS

When used in this Lease, the terms set forth hereinbelow shall have the following meanings:

(a) "BUSINESS DAYS" shall mean Monday through Friday (except for Holidays); "Business Hours" shall mean 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. on Monday through Friday and 9:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m. on Saturdays (except for Holidays); and "Holidays" shall mean those holidays designated by Landlord, which holidays shall be consistent with those holidays designated by landlords of other first-class office buildings in the Comparison Area.

(b) "COMMON AREAS" shall mean those certain areas and facilities of the Building and the Parking Facility and those certain improvements to the Land which are from time to time provided by Landlord for the use of tenants of the Building and their employees, clients, customers, licensees and invitees or for use by the public, which facilities and improvements include any and all corridors, elevator foyers, vending areas, bathrooms, electrical and telephone rooms, mechanical rooms, janitorial areas and other similar facilities of the Building and of the Parking Facility and any and all grounds, parks, landscaped areas, outside sitting areas, sidewalks, walkways, tunnels, pedestrian ways, skybridges, and generally all other improvements located on the Land, or which connect the Land to other buildings.

(c) The words "DAY" or "DAYS" shall refer to calendar days, except where "Business Days" are specified.

(d) The words "HEREIN", "HEREOF", "HEREBY", "HEREUNDER" and words of similar import shall be construed to refer to this Lease as a whole and not to any particular Article or Section thereof unless expressly so stated.

(e) The wards "INCLUDE" and "INCLUDING" shall be construed as if followed by the phrase "without being limited to."

-42-

(f) "NET RENTABLE AREA" and "USABLE AREA" shall mean "Net Rentable Area" and "Usable Area" (as applicable) determined in accordance with the Standard Method For Measuring Floor Area in Office Buildings ANSI/BOMA Z265.1-1996 ("BOMA STANDARD"); Landlord shall have the right, within ninety (90) days after the Commencement Date, to verify the Net Rentable Area and/or Usable Area of the Premises in accordance with the BOMA Standard. If, as a result of such verification, it is determined that the Net Rentable Area and/or Usable Area of the Premises are different than the amounts set forth in Section 1.1 above, all corresponding amounts set forth this Lease (including, without limitation, Tenant's Share, the amount of monthly Base Rent, the amount of the Security Deposit and the Allowance) shall be retroactively adjusted and appropriate payments, if applicable, shall be made by Landlord to Tenant or Tenant to Landlord (as applicable) within ten (10) days after written notice of such determination is delivered to Tenant. Both parties agree to execute a commercially reasonable instrument in order to document such revised amounts.

(g) Reference to Landlord as having "NO LIABILITY TO TENANT" or being "WITHOUT LIABILITY TO TENANT" or words of like import shall mean that Tenant is not entitled to terminate this Lease, or to claim actual or constructive eviction, partial or total, or to receive any abatement or diminution of rent, or to be relieved in any manner of any of Tenant's other obligations hereunder, or to be compensated for loss or injury suffered or to enforce any other right or kind of liability whatsoever against Landlord under or with respect to this Lease or with respect to Tenant's use or occupancy of the Premises.

(h) A "REPAIR" shall be deemed to include such rebuilding, replacement and restoration as may be necessary to achieve and maintain good working order and condition.

(i) The "TERMINATION OF THIS LEASE" and words of like import includes the expiration of the Term or the cancellation of this Lease pursuant to any of the provisions of this Lease or to law. Upon the termination of this Lease, the Term shall end at 11:59 p.m. (local time for the Building) on the date of termination as if such date were the Expiration Date, and neither party shall have any further obligation or liability to the other after such termination except (i) as shall be expressly provided for in this Lease and (ii) for such obligations as by their nature or under the circumstances can only be, or by the provisions of this Lease, may be, performed after such termination and, in any event, unless expressly otherwise provided in this Lease, any liability for a payment (which shall be apportioned as of the date of such termination) which shall have accrued to or with respect to, any period ending at the time of termination shall survive the termination of this Lease.

(j) The "TERMS OF THIS LEASE" shall be deemed to include all terms, covenants, conditions, provisions, obligations, limitations, restrictions, reservations and agreements contained in this Lease.

(k) "TENANT" shall be deemed to include Tenant's successors and assigns (to the extent permitted by Landlord) and any and all occupants of the Premises permitted by Landlord and claiming by, through or under Tenant.

(l) A "YEAR" shall mean twelve (12) consecutive months.

-43-

ARTICLE XXVIII
RIGHT OF FIRST OFFER

Landlord hereby grants to Tenant a right of first offer with respect to the remaining space on the second (2nd) floor of the Building ("First Offer Space"). Notwithstanding the foregoing (i) such first offer right of Tenant shall commence only following the expiration or ear1ier termination of any then existing lease pertaining to the First Offer Space (collectively, the "Superior Leases"), including any renewal or extension of such lease(s), whether or not such renewal or extension is pursuant to an express written provision in such lease(s), and regardless of whether any such renewal or extension is consummated pursuant to a lease amendment or a new lease, and (ii) such first offer right shall be subordinate and secondary to all rights of expansion, first refusal, first offer or similar rights granted to (A) the tenants of the Superior Leases and (B) any other tenant of the Project (the rights described in items (i) and
(ii), above to be known collectively as "Superior Rights"). Tenant's right of first offer shall be on the terms and conditions set forth in this Article 28.

28.1 Procedure for Offer. Tenant may, at any time during the Lease Term, provide written notice to Landlord (the "Space Availability Notice") that Tenant requests a list of any First Offer Space then available for lease; provided, however, that Tenant may not provide a Space Availability Notice to Landlord more than one (1) time in any ninety (90) day period. Within ten (10) business days after Landlord's receipt of a Space Availability Notice, Landlord shall provide Tenant with written notice (the "First Offer Notice") listing any then available First Offer Space and offering Tenant the opportunity to lease such space. The First Offer Notice shall describe the space so offered to Tenant and shall set forth Landlord's proposed economic terms and conditions applicable to Tenant's lease of such space (collectively, the "Economic Terms"). Notwithstanding the foregoing, Landlord's obligation to deliver the First Offer Notice shall not apply during the last six (6) months of the initial Lease Term unless Tenant has exercised its Extension Option pursuant to Section 3.6 above.

28.2 Procedure for Acceptance. If Tenant wishes to exercise Tenant's right of first offer with respect to the space described in the First Offer Notice, then within five (5) business days after delivery of the First Offer Notice to Tenant, Tenant shall deliver notice to Landlord of Tenant's intention to exercise its right of first offer with respect to the entire space described in the First Offer Notice. If concurrently with Tenant's exercise of the first offer right, Tenant notifies Landlord that it does not accept the Economic Terms set forth in the First Offer Notice, Landlord and Tenant shall, for a period of fifteen (15) days after Tenant's exercise, negotiate in good faith to reach agreement as to such Economic Terms. If Tenant does not so notify Landlord that it does not accept the Economic Terms set forth in the First Offer Notice concurrently with Tenant's exercise of the first offer right, the Economic Terms shall be as set forth in the First Offer Notice. In addition, if Tenant does not exercise its right of first offer within the five (5) business day period, or, if Tenant exercises its first offer right but timely objects to Landlord's determination of the Economic Terms and if Landlord and Tenant are unable to reach agreement on such Economic Terms within said fifteen (15) day period, then Landlord shall be free to lease the space described in the First Offer Notice to anyone to whom Landlord desires on any terms Landlord desires and Tenant's right of first offer shall terminate as to the First Offer Space described in the First Office Notice. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, Tenant must elect to exercise its right of first offer, if at all, with respect to all of the space

-44-

offered by Landlord to Tenant at any particular time, and Tenant may not elect to lease only a portion thereof.

28.3 Construction of First Offer Space. Except as included in the Economic Terms, Tenant shall take the First Offer Space in its "as-is" condition.

28.4 Lease of First Offer Space. If Tenant timely exercises Tenant's right to lease the First Offer Space as set forth herein, Landlord and Tenant shall execute an amendment adding such First Offer Space to this Lease upon the same non-economic terms and conditions as applicable to the initial Premises, and the economic terms and conditions as provided in this Article 28. Tenant shall commence payment of rent for the First Offer Space and the Lease Term of the First Offer Space shall commence upon the date of delivery of such space to Tenant. The Lease Term for the First Offer Space shall expire co-terminously with Tenant's lease of the initial Premises.

28.5 No Defaults. The rights contained in this Article 28 shall be personal to the Original Tenant or any Permitted Transferee, and may only be exercised by the Original Tenant or any Permitted Transferee (and not any other assignee, sublessee or other transferee of the Tenant's interest in this Lease) if Tenant occupies the entire Premises as of the date of the First Offer Notice. Tenant shall not have the right to lease First Office Space as provided in this Article 28 if, as of the date of the First Offer Notice, or, at Landlord's option, as of the scheduled date of delivery of such First Offer Space to Tenant, Tenant is in default under this Lease or Tenant has previously been in default under this Lease more than once.

-45-

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Landlord and Tenant have executed this Lease as of the date set forth on the cover page hereof.

TENANT*:                          LANDLORD:

                                  PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION
CONTIASSET RECEIVABLES            PARTNERS, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership
MANAGEMENT LLC, a Delaware
limited liability company         By:      Prentiss Properties I, Inc.
                                           Its:  General Partner
By:    /s/ Glenn S. Goldman
       --------------------
       Name: Glenn S. Goldman     By:      /s/ Louay Alsadek
       Title: Chairman                     -----------------
                                           Name: Louay Alsadek
                                           Title: Vice President

By:    /s/ Samir M. Shah
       -----------------          By:      /s/ J. Kevan Dilbeck
       Name: Samir M. Shah                 ----------------------
       Title: Vice President               Name: J. Kevan Dilbeck
                                           Title: Vice President


* NOTE:

If Tenant is a California corporation, then one of the following alternative requirements must be satisfied:

(A) This Lease must be signed by two (2) officers of such corporation: one being the chairman of the board, the president or a vice president, and the other being the secretary, an assistant secretary, the chief financial officer or an assistant treasurer. If one (1) individual is signing in two (2) of the foregoing capacities, that individual must sign twice; once as one officer and again as the other officer.

(B) If there is only one (1) individual signing in two (2)

capacities, or if the two (2) signatories do not satisfy the requirements of (A) above, then Tenant shall deliver to Landlord a certified copy of a corporate resolution acceptable to Landlord authorizing the signatory(ies) to execute this Lease.

-46-

FIRST AMENDMENT TO LEASE
(EXECUTIVE CENTER DEL MAR)

THIS FIRST AMENDMENT TO LEASE ("FIRST AMENDMENT") is made and entered into as of the 15th day of November, 2002, by and between PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION PARTNERS, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership ("LANDLORD") and BANK OF INTERNET U.S.A., a Federal Savings Bank ("TENANT").

R E C I T A L S :

A. Landlord and ContiAsset Receivables Management, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company ("ORIGINAL TENANT") entered into that certain Lease Agreement dated as of March 16, 1998 (the "Lease"), whereby Landlord leased to Original Tenant and Original Tenant leased from Landlord certain office space located in that certain building located and addressed at 12220 El Camino Real, San Diego, California (the "BUILDING"). Tenant is the successor-in-interest in the Lease to Bofi.com Holding, Inc. a Delaware corporation, successor-in-interest in the Lease to Original Tenant pursuant to that certain Assignment and Assumption Agreement and Consent to Assignment dated as of September 22, 1999 by and between Landlord, Original Tenant (as assignor), Tenant (as assignee), and ContiFinancial Corporation, a Delaware corporation (as "GUARANTOR" under the Lease).

B. By this First Amendment, Landlord and Tenant desire to (i) expand the Existing Premises (as defined below), (ii) extend the Term of the Lease, and
(iii) otherwise modify the Lease as provided herein.

C. Unless otherwise defined herein, capitalized terms as used herein shall have the same meanings as given thereto in the Lease.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing recitals and the mutual covenants contained herein, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto hereby agree as follows:

A G R E E M E N T :

1. The Existing Premises. Landlord and Tenant hereby agree that pursuant to the Lease, Landlord currently leases to Tenant and Tenant currently leases from Landlord that certain office space in the Building containing 5,478 square feet of Net Rentable Area (4,729 square feet of Usable Area) located on the second (2nd) floor of the Building and known as Suite 220 (the "EXISTING PREMISES"), as outlined on Exhibit "A" to the Lease.

2. Expansion of the Existing Premises. That certain space contiguous to the Existing Premises located on the second (2nd) floor of the Building and outlined on the floor plan attached hereto as Exhibit "A" and made a part hereof, may be referred to herein as the "EXPANSION SPACE." Landlord and Tenant hereby stipulate that the Expansion Space contains 2,251 square feet of Net Rentable Area (1,743 square feet of Usable Area). Effective as of the earlier of
(i) the date of substantial completion of Landlord's Work (as defined in Section 5.2 below); or (ii) the date Tenant commences business operations in all or any portion of the

-1-

Expansion Space ("EXPANSION COMMENCEMENT DATE"), Tenant shall, subject to
Section 13 below, lease from Landlord and Landlord shall lease to Tenant the Expansion Space. Accordingly, effective upon the Expansion Commencement Date, the Existing Premises shall, subject to Section 13 below, be increased to include the Expansion Space. Landlord and Tenant hereby agree that such addition of the Expansion Space to the Existing Premises shall, effective as of the Expansion Commencement Date (but subject to Section 13 below), increase the number of square feet leased by Tenant in the Building to a total of 7,729 square feet of Net Rentable Area (6,472 square feet of Usable Area). Effective as of the Expansion Commencement Date, all references to the "Premises" shall mean and refer to the Existing Premises as expanded by the Expansion Space. The anticipated Expansion Commencement Date is February 1, 2003.

3. Expansion Space Term and Monthly Base Rent for the Expansion Space. The Lease Expiration Date of June 30, 2003 shall be extended by two (2) years such that the Lease shall terminate on June 30, 2005 ("NEW TERMINATION DATE"). The Term for Tenant's lease of the Expansion Space ("EXPANSION SPACE TERM") shall, subject to Section 13 below, commenced on the Expansion Commencement Date and shall expire co-terminously with Tenant's lease of the Existing Premises on New Termination Date. During the Expansion Space Term, Tenant shall pay, in accordance with the provisions of this Section 3, monthly Base Rent for the Premises (including the Existing Premises and the Expansion Space) as follows:

                                                  MONTHLY BASE RENT PER
                                                   SQUARE FOOT OF NET
    TIME PERIOD           *MONTHLY BASE RENT     RENTABLE AREA OF PREMISES
    -----------           ------------------      ------------------------
Expansion Commencement       $17,003.80                     $2.20
  Date -06/30/03

 07/01/03-06/30/04           $17,776.70                     $2.30

 07/01/04-06/30/05           $18,317.73                     $2.37

4. Tenant's Share and Base Year. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Lease, during the Expansion Space Term, Tenant's Share of any increase in Operating Costs for the Premises (including the Existing Premises and the Expansion Space) shall be 13.67%. Accordingly, effective as of the Expansion Commencement Date, Tenant's Share, as set forth in Section 1.1.K of the Basic Lease Information of the Lease, shall be deemed revised to be 13.67%. Effective as of July 1, 2003, the Base Year set forth in Section 1.1.0 of the Lease shall be deemed revised to be the calendar year 2003.

5. Condition of Expansion Space and Tenant Improvements.

5.1 Condition of Expansion Space. Tenant hereby agrees to accept the Expansion Space in its "as-is" condition and Tenant hereby acknowledges that Landlord, except as otherwise provided in this First Amendment, shall not be obligated to provide or pay for any improvement work or services related to the improvement of the Expansion space. Tenant also acknowledges that Landlord has made no representation or warranty regarding the condition of the Expansion Space.

-2-

5.2 Tenant Improvements. As soon as reasonably possible after the date of the full execution and delivery of this First Amendment by Landlord and Tenant, Landlord shall, at Landlord's sole cost and expense using Building-standard materials and in Landlord's Building-standard manner, perform the improvement work in the Expansions Space described on Exhibit "B" attached hereto ("LANDLORD'S WORK").

6. Parking. Effective as of the Expansion Commencement Date and continuing throughout the Expansion Space Term, Tenant shall have the right (but not the obligation) to use, at no additional cost to Tenant, a total of thirty-four (34) Parking Permits consisting of twenty-seven (27) unreserved Parking Permits and seven (7) reserved Parking Permits for use in the Building's Parking Facility. Tenant's use of such Parking Permits shall be in accordance with, and subject to, all of the provisions of Article VI of the Lease.

7. Security Deposit. Tenant has previously deposited with Landlord Thirty-Three Thousand Six Hundred Eighty-Nine And 70/100 Dollars ($33,689.70) as a Security Deposit under the Lease. Landlord shall continue to hold the Security Deposit in accordance with the terms and conditions of Article XXI of the Lease.

8. Commencement Notice. Landlord may deliver to Tenant a Commencement Notice in a form substantially similar to that attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part hereof at any time after the Expansion Commencement Date. The Commencement Notice shall be conclusive and binding upon Tenant as to all matters set forth herein unless Tenant objects thereto in writing within five
(5) days following delivery of such Commencement Notice.

9. Brokers. Except for Prentiss Properties Management, LP. ("LANDLORD'S BROKER"), each party represents and warrants to the other that no broker, agent or finder negotiated or was instrumental in negotiating or consummating this First Amendment. Each party further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the other party from and against any claim for commission or finder's fee by any entity (other than Landlord's Broker) who claims or alleges that they were retained or engaged by the first party or at the request of such party in connection with this First Amendment.

10. Defaults. Tenant hereby represents and warrants to Landlord that, as of the date of this First Amendment, Tenant is in full compliance with all terms, covenants and conditions of the Lease and that there are no breaches or defaults under the Lease by Landlord or Tenant.

11. Signing Authority. Each individual executing this First Amendment on behalf of Tenant hereby represents and warrants that Tenant is a duly formed and existing entity qualified to do business in California and that Tenant has the full right and authority to execute and deliver this First Amendment and that each person signing on behalf of Tenant is authorized to do so.

12. No Further Modification. Except as set forth in this First Amendment, all of the terms and provisions of the Lease shall apply with respect to the Expansion Space and shall remain unmodified and in full force and effect.

13. Condition Precedent. Notwithstanding anything above to the contrary, Landlord and Tenant acknowledge and agree that the rights and obligations of Landlord and Tenant under this First Amendment are expressly conditioned upon the full execution and delivery by

-3-

Landlord and Smith Consulting Architects ("SMITH") of a lease amendment pertaining to a reduction of a portion of Smith's premises in the Building (i.e., the Expansion Space), and Smith's surrender, vacation and delivery of the Expansion Space to Landlord when and as required by Landlord, which lease amendment shall be on terms and conditions acceptable to Landlord in Landlord's sole and absolute discretion (collectively, the "CONDITION PRECEDENT"). Landlord and Tenant acknowledge and agree that if the Condition Precedent is not satisfied on or before December 1, 2002, either party may terminate this First Amendment (but not the Lease) by giving the other written notice thereof.

14. Release of Guarantor. Effective as of the Expansion Commencement Date, Guarantor is hereby released from all obligations under the Lease accruing after the Expansion Commencement Date.

-4-

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this First Amendment has been executed as of the day and year first above written.

"LANDLORD"                    PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION PARTNERS, L.P.,
                              a Delaware limited partnership

                              By:      Prentiss Properties I, Inc.
                                       a Delaware corporation
                                       general partner


                                       By:   /s/ Deborah Street
                                             -----------------------------------
                                             Print Name:  Deborah Street
                                             Print Title:  Vice President

                                       By:   /s/ J. Kevan Dilbeck
                                             -----------------------------------
                                             Print Name:  J. Kevan Dilbeck
                                             Print Title:  Senior Vice President

"TENANT"                     BANK OF INTERNET U.S.A.,
                             a Federal Savings Bank


                             By:    /s/ Gary Evans
                                    ----------------------------------
                                    Print Name:  Gary Evans
                                    Print Title:  President and CEO

-5-

EXHIBIT 10.6

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

This Employment Agreement (the "Agreement") is dated for reference purposes and entered into as of July 1, 2003 (the "Effective Date"), by and between Bank of Internet USA, a federal savings bank ("Bank"), having a principal place of business at 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220, San Diego, California, and Gary Lewis Evans ("Executive"), whose address is 4925 Caminito Exquisito, San Diego, CA 92130. Bank and Executive are sometimes collectively referred to in this Agreement as the "Parties." As used in this Agreement, the term "Effective Date" means the date this Employment Agreement becomes effective.

RECITALS

A. Bank desires to employ Executive and avail itself of his skill, knowledge and experience in the management of Bank's business.

B. The Parties desire to set forth in this Agreement the terms of Executive's employment by Bank.

The Parties therefore agree as follows:

A. TERM OF EMPLOYMENT

1. Term. Bank employs Executive to perform the duties described in this Agreement, and Executive accepts such employment, for a term of one year commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the day preceding the one year anniversary of the Effective Date, except (i) that the Term of this Agreement shall be renewed without further notice for a one year period commencing on the annual anniversary date of the Effective Date (the "Anniversary Date") and on each subsequent Anniversary Date following any such one year period of employment, and (ii) this Agreement may be terminated prior to the end of such Term by Bank or Employee in accordance with and subject to the terms of Paragraph F. (Termination) of this Agreement, including, but not limited to, Paragraph F.2.(a) providing Executive with a

1

Severance Payment (as defined therein) upon termination of this Agreement by Bank other than for cause. When used in this Agreement, "Term" shall refer to the entire period of employment of Executive by Bank under this Agreement.

B. DUTIES OF EXECUTIVE

Subject to the powers and directions of the policies, procedures and directives of the board of directors, as adopted and modified from time to time, Executive shall perform the duties and shall have the titles of President & Chief Executive Officer. During the Term, Executive shall perform exclusively for Bank the services contemplated in this Agreement to be performed by Executive, faithfully, diligently and to the best of Executive's ability, consistent with the highest and best standards of the banking industry and in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations and the Bank's federal stock charter and bylaws. Except as permitted by the prior written consent of Bank's board of directors, Executive shall devote Executive's entire working time, ability and attention to the business of Bank during the Term.

C. COMPENSATION

1. Base Salary. In consideration of Executive's services to be performed under this Agreement, Bank shall pay or cause to be paid to Executive a base salary in the following amounts, payable in equal installments in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods:

a. $171,000 per annum, effective as of July 1, 2003.

b. $180,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2004, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $399,098,000.

2

c. $200,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2005, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $532,964,000.

Executive's salary shall be reviewed by the board of directors from time to time at its discretion and Executive shall receive such additional or other salary increases, if any, as the board of directors, in its sole discretion, shall determine.

2. One-Time Deferred Compensation. Executive is entitled to one-time deferred compensation in the amount of $75,000 (the "One-Time Deferred Compensation"), subject to the terms of this Agreement and the Bank of Internet USA Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plan, adopted effective as of July 1, 2003 (the "Deferred Comp Plan". The Executive's deferred compensation account shall be credited for $75,000 plus 4% on July 1, 2004. The One-Time Deferred Compensation amount and all earnings in the account shall vest to the Executive on the following:

July 1,2004......................................    20%
July 1,2005......................................    40%
July 1,2006......................................    60%
July 1,2007......................................    80%
July 1,2008......................................   100%

The bank shall pay 4% only on July 1, 2004. Thereafter, investment of the Executive's Account shall comply with the investment provision of the Deferred Comp Plan.

3. Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Executive shall be entitled to a benefit based on the pre-tax net income of the Bank, as calculated in accordance with the formula and terms set forth in Exhibit A, the terms of which are incorporated by this reference as if set forth in full in this paragraph (the "Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit"). The amount of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, if any, to which Executive shall be entitled shall be subject to the terms governing the deferral of such benefit set forth in Exhibit A. Executive shall be eligible for such other benefits and other incentive compensation, if any, that may be made available to the Bank's senior executive officers from time to time by the board of directors in its sole discretion.

D. EXECUTIVE BENEFITS

3

1. Vacation. Executive shall be entitled to vacation as prescribed in the Bank's Employee Manual maintained on the Bank's Intranet. In the event this Agreement is terminated pursuant to Paragraph F.2, Bank reserves the right to require Executive to take any unused vacation time prior to the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2).

2. Directors and Officers Liability Insurance. Bank shall provide for Executive, at Bank's expense, coverage under a directors and officers liability insurance policy in such amounts and on such terms as may be approved by Bank's board of directors and as may be consistent with such coverage provided by Bank for its other officers and directors.

3. Group Insurance Benefits; and Death Benefit. Executive shall participate in all group insurance plans provided by Bank for all of its senior executive officers at Bank's expense to the same extent and on the same terms as Bank's other senior executive officers. Throughout the term of employment, the Bank shall, at its sole cost, will provide a death benefit on the life of Executive in an amount equal to three times Executive's then-current annual salary.

4. Stock Options. As of Effective Date, BofI Holding, Inc. a Delaware corporation ("Holding"), the sole shareholder of Bank, had granted to Executive incentive stock options, as provided in Section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code (ISOs"), pursuant to the Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan of BOI Holding, Inc. (the "Plan") and as memorialized in three Incentive Stock Option Agreements, dated April 27, 2000, April 2, 2001, and January 28, 2002. (collectively, the "Grant"), which such agreements provide for, among other things, the vesting of such ISOs. Notwithstanding the terms of the Plan, in the event that the Bank terminates Executive under this Agreement for any reason other than for cause pursuant to Paragraph F.I or in the event Executive's death or disability causes the termination of this Agreement, all of Executive's lSOs issued pursuant to the Grant and any subsequently issued grant of ISOs under the Plan, including all ISOs held by Executive

4

that are not otherwise vested at such time, shall become fully vested and Executive may exercise such vested ISOs, in whole or in part, at any time within the terms of the option plan. In the event that Executive terminates this Agreement, Executive shall be entitled to exercise only those lSOs that are vested as of the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2, below), and may be exercised within a 90 day period in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.7(a) of the Plan. Neither Bank nor Holding shall enter into any transaction during or after the Term that would have the effect of canceling any of Executive's ISOs issued under the Grant.

5. Retirement, Profit Sharing and Other Plans. Executive shall be entitled to participate in any retirement plans, profit-sharing plans, salary deferral and other deferred compensation plans, medical expense reimbursement plans and other similar plans that Bank may establish with respect to all employees; provided, however, that nothing herein shall require Bank to establish or maintain any of such plans.

5

E. BUSINESS EXPENSES AND REIMBURSEMENT

1. Business Expenses. In addition to Bank's payment or reimbursement of costs of the type described in Paragraph E.2, Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for any ordinary and necessary business expenses incurred by Executive in the performance of his duties and in acting for or on behalf of Bank during the Term, provided that: (a) each such expenditure is of a nature qualifying it as a proper deduction on the federal and state income tax returns of Bank as a business expense and not as deductible compensation to Executive, (b) Executive furnishes to Bank adequate records and other documentary evidence required by federal and state statutes and regulations issued by the appropriate taxing authorities for the substantiation of such expenditures and deductible business expenses of Bank, and (c) Executive's expense reimbursement reports are submitted for approval in accordance with Bank's internal policies.

2. Additional Expenses. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for the costs and expenses set forth below, subject to the following requirements:
(a) Executive shall comply with the Bank's expense payment or reimbursement guidelines and procedures as the Bank may amend such guidelines and procedures or may adopt new guidelines and procedures from time to time, and (b) prior to the Bank becoming liable for any expenses or reimbursement relating to equipment, publications, education, training or professional organizations pursuant to subparagraphs (iii) through (vi) below, any such expenses or reimbursement shall be approved by Bank's board of directors or any committee or person authorized by the board of directors to grant such approval, in advance of incurring any such expenses. Subject to such prior approval of incurring expenses or reimbursement and to compliance with Bank's payment or reimbursement procedures, Bank's obligation to make any such payment or reimbursement pursuant to this paragraph shall not be contingent on whether or to what extent a particular expense may constitute a deductible business expense of Bank or be excludable from Executive's taxable compensation.

6

(i) Automobile Allowance. Standard business mileage reimbursement will be provided to Executive.

(ii) Parking. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for his reasonable automobile parking expenses during the Term.

(iii) Equipment. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for a digital cellular telephone (including the initial purchase price and connection charges as well as all business-related air charges), and other equipment as needed. Such equipment shall be the property of the Bank and upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, all of such equipment shall be returned to Bank, as more particularly provided in Paragraph G.3.

(iv) Publications. Bank shall reimburse Executive for the costs incurred by Executive during the term for subscriptions to business-related periodical publications that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.

(v) Education and Training. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for attending business-related seminars, training programs, conferences and conventions that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties to Bank.

(vi) Professional Organizations. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for membership fees and dues of professional organizations that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.

7

F. TERMINATION

1. Termination for Cause. Bank may terminate this Agreement for cause at any time without advance notice and without further obligation or liability to Executive, by action of Bank's board of directors:

(a) If Executive materially fails to perform his duties in a satisfactory manner or habitually neglects his duties; provided, however, that before any termination pursuant to this subparagraph (a) shall become effective,
(i) Bank shall have given Executive written notice setting forth the specific grounds for termination ("Warning Notice"), (ii) Bank shall have met and informed Executive of the grounds for termination, of the extent and nature of his unsatisfactory or negligent performance and of what Executive must do to correct such deficiencies, and (iii) Executive shall have been afforded a reasonable opportunity over a period of not less than forty-five (45) days from the date of the Warning Notice to correct the unsatisfactory or negligent performance described in the Warning Notice to the satisfaction of the board of directors, provided, however, that Executive shall be terminated at the end of such period if Executive fails to correct his deficient performance in the manner prescribed by and to the reasonable satisfaction of the board of directors;

(b) If Executive is convicted of illegal activity which materially adversely affects Bank's reputation in the community or which evidences the lack of Executive's fitness or ability to perform Executive's duties as determined by the board of directors, in good faith;

(c) If Executive commits any act which causes termination of coverage under Bank's Bankers Blanket Bond as to Executive, as distinguished from termination of coverage as to Bank as a whole;

(d) If Executive dies;

8

(e) If Executive is found to be physically or mentally incapable of performing Executive's duties for a consecutive period of ninety
(90) days or greater by the board of directors, reasonably and in good faith. Termination pursuant to this subparagraph (e) shall become effective immediately on written notice of termination given by Bank to Executive after the expiration of such 90-day period;

(f) If Bank is closed or taken over by any of the bank regulatory authorities having jurisdiction over Bank's activities; or

(g) If any bank regulatory authority should successfully exercise its cease and desist powers to remove Executive from office.

The Parties understand and agree that notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement: (1) this Agreement is subject to the requirements and terms set forth in the regulations of the Office of Thrift Supervision ("OTS") contained in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39; (2) specifically, without limitation, the required provisions set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) are incorporated by reference in this Agreement as if set forth in full; (3) to the greatest extent possible, this Agreement shall be interpreted so as to be consistent with said regulation; and (4) in the event of conflict or inconsistency between the terms of this Agreement and said regulation, the required provisions of said OTS regulation shall supersede any inconsistent or conflicting provisions of this Agreement. The termination of this Agreement for any of the reasons set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) shall be considered termination for cause pursuant to this Paragraph F.1.

2. Termination at Will. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated by either party at any time upon thirty (30) days' written notice of termination to the other Party ("Notice of Termination"). As used in this Paragraph F.2, "Date of Termination" means the thirtieth (30th) day following the date on which Notice of Termination is given.

9

(a) Termination by Bank. In the event Bank elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to compensation from Bank as follows: (i) Bank shall pay Executive his normal compensation then in effect through the Date of Termination; and (ii) Bank shall pay to Executive a severance payment equal to his then-current base monthly salary, multiplied by twelve (12) (the "Severance Payment"), which amount shall be paid by the Bank in either of the following two ways, in the sole discretion of the board of directors: (A) the Bank may pay the Severance Payment in twelve (12) equal installments during the succeeding twelve
(12) month period beginning on the Date of Termination (the "Severance Period") in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods, or (B) the Bank may pay the Severance Payment in one lump sum, subject to such withholding and other deductions as may be required by applicable law. In addition, Executive shall be entitled to the continuation of the group insurance benefits provided under Paragraph D.3, subject to Executive's reasonable cooperation with Bank, until the first to occur of: (x) the expiration of the Severance Period, or (y) Executive's commencement of work for a new employer that provides group medical insurance benefits to Executive. Executive's acceptance of new employment or earnings from other sources during the Severance Period shall not affect Bank's obligation to make the Severance Payment as provided above. At any time between Bank giving Executive Notice of Termination and the Date of Termination, Bank, in its sole discretion, may direct Executive to cease performing services for Bank or to absent himself from Bank's premises and operations, provided that Bank shall nonetheless compensate Executive as provided above.

(b) Termination by Executive. In the event Executive elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to such compensation as may be due and payable to him through and including such Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any other compensation except as may be required by law or by written agreement, including this Agreement and the Deferred Comp Plan.

10

3. Effect of Termination. In the event of the termination of this Agreement prior to the completion of the Term for any of the reasons specified in Paragraphs F.1 and F.2, Executive shall be entitled to the compensation earned by Executive prior to the Date of Termination, as provided in this Agreement, computed pro rata up to and including the Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any further compensation or other benefits for services rendered after the Date of Termination, except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement. As used in this Paragraph F.3. "Date of Termination" includes the effective date of any termination, whether pursuant to Paragraph F.1 or F.2.

G. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1. Solicitation of Customers and Employees. For any period during which Executive receives any salary from Bank and for a one (1) year period following any termination of Executive from Bank, Executive shall not solicit any customers or employees of Bank to move their banking or employment relationships from Bank. Nothing in this Agreement shall preclude Executive from any mass solicitation to groups and individual follow-up solicitations of persons or businesses named in any list or data base not specifically related to or previously defined by the Bank, even though the names of certain Bank customers may appear in such list or data base.

11

2. Indemnification. To the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall pay any and all expenses incurred by Executive in connection with the defense or settlement of, and shall pay and satisfy any judgments, awards, fines and penalties rendered, assessed or levied against Executive in, any judicial, arbitration, mediation or administrative suit, action, hearing, inquiry or proceeding (whether or not Bank is joined as a party) relating to acts or omissions of Executive alleged to have occurred while an "agent" of Bank, or by Bank, or by both, provided however, that Bank shall not be obligated to defend, indemnify or hold Executive harmless from the consequences of his own negligent or reckless act or omission or willful misconduct or dishonesty. In addition, to the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall advance to Executive, upon receipt of the undertaking required by California Corporations Code Section
317(f), any expenses incurred in defending against any such proceeding to which Executive is a party or has been threatened to be made a party.

3. Return of Property. Executive expressly agrees that all manuals, documents, files, reports, studies, instruments, equipment and other materials and property used and/or developed by Bank or Executive (whether on his personal time or while performing services for the Bank) during the Term ("Preparatory Work") are the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest in such property. Executive further agrees that, subject to the execution of this Agreement, all Preparatory Work is the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest, legal or beneficial, in such Preparatory Work or in any benefits that may arise from such Preparatory Work. Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, Executive or Executive's representative shall promptly deliver possession of all of said property to Bank in original or good, operating condition, normal wear and tear excepted.

12

4. Notices. Any notice, request, demand or other communication required or permitted hereunder shall be considered to be properly given when personally served in writing, when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, or when delivered to a generally recognized overnight courier service (such as, for example, Federal Express or United Parcel Service) addressed to the Party at such Party's address appearing at the beginning of this Agreement. Either Party may change its address by written notice in accordance with this paragraph.

5. Benefit of Agreement; Assignment. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Parties and their respective executors, administrators, successors and assigns. This Agreement is for the personal services of Executive and may not be assigned by Executive.

6. Applicable Law. Except to the extent governed by the laws of the United States, this Agreement is to be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California.

7. Captions and Paragraphs Headings. Captions and paragraph headings used herein are for convenience only and are not a part of this Agreement and shall not be used in constructing it.

8. Invalid Provisions. Should any provision of this Agreement for any reason be declared invalid, void, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the validity and binding effect of any remaining portion shall not be affected, and the remaining portions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect as if this Agreement had been executed with said provision eliminated.

13

9. Entire Agreement. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the Parties. It supersedes any and all other agreements or understandings, whether oral or written, between the Parties with respect to the employment of Executive by Bank. The terms of this Agreement in Paragraph D.4 applicable to stock options supersede the terms of the Plan or any agreement between the Parties to the extent the terms of the Plan and any other agreement are inconsistent with the terms of Paragraph D.4. Each party to this Agreement acknowledges that no representations, inducements, promises, or agreements, oral or otherwise, have been made by any party, or anyone acting on behalf of any party, that are not embodied in this Agreement, and that no other agreement, statement, or promise not contained in this Agreement shall be valid or binding. This Agreement, may be modified or amended only in a written document signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. The amendment or other modification of the Plan or other any other agreement generally applicable to the grant of stock options or issuance of ISOs by the Holding Company to employees, including Executive will not supersede the terms of this Agreement pertaining to ISOs without the express written approval of the Parties contained in a writing expressly stating its intent to supersede the specific terms of this Agreement applicable to ISOs. Additionally, terms of this Agreement will prevail in any conflicts with other agreements.

10. Attorney's Fees. Each party shall bear his or its own attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the negotiation, preparation and delivery of this Agreement. However, if any action is instituted to enforce or interpret any of the obligations set forth in this Agreement, the prevailing party(ies) shall be entitled to recover its (their) reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the enforcement or interpretive action.

14

11. Trade Secrets. To the extent that during the Term Bank develops any trade secrets, as that term is defined under California law, the Parties agree that such trade secrets belong to and are the property of the Bank. Executive agrees that for a period of one (1) year after the termination of this Agreement. Executive shall not disclose any of Bank's trade secrets, directly or indirectly, or use them in any way in contravention of the rights of the Bank to such trade secrets.

12. Restricted Securities. The ISOs, the underlying common stock issuable upon the exercise of the lSOs and the shares of Holding's common stock issuable pursuant thereto shall be issued by Holding without registration under the Securities Act of 1933, or registration or qualification of such securities under any state securities or "blue sky" laws in reliance upon certain exemptions from registration or qualification, as the case may he. Upon issuance, such securities shall be considered "restricted securities," subject to certain limitations on transfer or other disposition imposed under applicable federal and state securities or "blue sky" laws and regulations and such restrictions shall be set forth in one or more legends appearing on the certificate or agreement evidencing such securities.

13. Accounting Principles. Wherever in this Agreement, including any exhibit hereto, there is a reference to or need to use or rely upon accounting principles and procedures, such accounting principles and procedures shall be those used by the Bank in the preparation and filing of its reports of financial condition and operations in the form of Thrift Financial Reports, as filed with the Office of Thrift Supervision in the ordinary course ("TFRs"). By way of example, such items as Total Assets and loan loss reserves shall be computed as they are computed for purposes of reporting such information in the Bank's TFRs.

15

The Parties execute this Agreement as of the Effective Date first above written.

EXECUTIVE: BANK OF INTERNET, USA

                                            a federal savings bank

/s/ Gary Lewis Evans                        By:      /s/ Jerry Englert
------------------------------                 ---------------------------------
Gary Lewis  Evans                           Name:  Jerry Englert
4925 Caminito Exquisito                     Title:  Chairman of the Board
San Diego, CA 92130
                                            Attest:/s/ C. Michelle Paulus
                                                   -----------------------------
                                                   Secretary

CONSENT OF BOFI HOLDING, INC.

By execution of this Agreement below, BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation, consents to and agrees to perform its obligations under Paragraph D.4.

BofI Holding, Inc.

By:      /s/ Jerry Englert                      Attest:/s/ C. Michelle Paulus
   ---------------------------------                   -------------------------
Jerry Englert, Chairman of the Board
                                                Name: C. Michelle Paulus
                                                Title: Secretary

16

EXHIBIT A

PRE-TAX NET INCOME BENEFIT

The following terms apply to the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit provided in Paragraph C.2 of the Agreement.

A. Definitions.

1. "Adjusted Net Income" refers to Net Income Before Income Taxes (as defined below) as reported in a TFR (as defined below), reduced by the amount of Specific Reserves (as defined below), as reported in a TFR, and increased by the sum of (a) the amount of General Reserves (as defined below),
(b) the amount of any expense accrued by the Bank for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, and (c) the amount of any non-taxable or tax preferred income "grossed up" to its pre-tax equivalent or equivalent income without such tax preference (the "Tax Preferred Income "gross up").

2. "Average Asset Balance" refers to the average amount of Total Assets reported by the Bank on a daily for the period covered by a TFR.

3. "Asset Target" refers to the level of Total Assets reported in the Bank's TFR at June 30, 2004 and at June 30, 2005. The Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2004 is $399,098,000 and is referred to as the "2004 Asset Target" and the Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2005 is $532,963,000 and is referred to as the "2005 Asset Target."

4. "Bonus Calculation Table" refers to the following table showing the Bonus Percentage (which will be applied as a percentage of Net Income Before Income Taxes earned by Executive) if the Bank attains certain levels of profitability (expressed as a percentage attained by dividing Adjusted Net Income by the Average Asset Balance):

If the Bank's Return on Assets Before Taxes (as defined below) is

   Bonus
Percentage                at least:           but not greater than:
----------                --------            --------------------
0.10                       1.200%                    1.399%
0.15                       1.400%                    1.799%
0.25                       1.800%                    2.199%
0.35                       2.200%                    No limit

5. "TFR" refers to the Thrift Financial Report of the Bank, consisting of various financial statements, including balance sheet, statement of operations and other statements, prepared by the Bank in the ordinary course and filed quarterly with the Office of Thrift Supervision.

17

6. "General Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of a reserve or an allowance against loan losses generally and not allocable to one or more specific assets, as set forth in its TFR for the applicable period.

7. "Net Income Before Income Taxes" refers to the amount reported as "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes" in a TFR for the applicable period.

8. "Deferred Comp Plan" has the meaning set forth in Section C.3 of the Agreement.

9. "Pre-Tax Net Income" refers to the "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes," as set forth on the Statement of Operations included in a TFR.

10. "Return on Assets Before Taxes" refers to the percentage derived from dividing (a) the Adjusted Net Income for such TFR period, by (b) the Average Asset Balance with respect to such period.

10. "Specific Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of reserves or allowances against loan losses specifically attributable to actual losses or to prospective losses from one or more identified assets, as set forth in a TFR.

B. Calculation of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit

1. Executive shall be entitled to a Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and June 30, 2005. All calculations leading to the computation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit for each of such years shall be based upon the results reported in the Bank's TFRs for each such 12-month period. No Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit shall be calculated or payable with respect to any period less than a full 12-month fiscal year.

2. As promptly as possible after the filing of the TFR for the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and 2005, as the case may be, but in no event later than 30 days after such filing, the Bank shall (i) determine the Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, (ii) calculate the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with this Agreement, and (iii) report the results of such calculation to Executive and the board of directors of the Bank. As promptly as possible after reporting such calculation, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, Executive and the Bank shall meet to confirm their agreement on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. On the date that the Executive and the Bank mutually agree on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit (the "Determination Date"), the Executive shall have a right to the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit as provided in this Agreement.

3. As a condition precedent to Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the 2004 and 2005 fiscal years, the Bank shall have achieved the 2004 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2004, and the Bank shall have achieved the 2005 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2005.

18

4. Provided that the Bank shall have achieved the applicable Asset Target and subject to the provisions of Paragraph C.3, below, governing the payment and crediting, as the case may be, of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in an amount equal to the product of multiplying: (1) the Bonus Percentage for which the Executive is eligible for such fiscal year, based on the Bank's Return on Assets Before Income Taxes, as derived from the Bonus Calculation Table, times (2) Executive's rate of annual salary payable as of the end of such fiscal year.

5. The following is an example only of the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Assume: that the Bank has achieved the applicable Asset Target.

Net Income Before Income Taxes (from TFR)                     $  4,600,000

Adjustments:

Add/Increase:

General Reserves                                              $    300,000
         Accrued Expense for Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit       $     60,000
         Tax Preferred Income "gross up"                      $     70,000
Subtract/Reduce:

         Specific Reserves/Charge-Offs                        $    (20,000)

Adjusted Net Income                                           $  5,010,000
                                                              ============

Average Asset Balance                                         $405,000,000
                                                              ============

Return on Assets Before Taxes:

            Adjusted Net Income / Average Asset Balance =

                                                             $   5,010,000 = 1.237%
                                                             -------------
                                                             $ 405,000,000

Bonus Percentage based on 1.237% Return on Average Assets = 0.10
(from Bonus Calculation Table)

Calculation of Bonus (assuming at end of fiscal year, Executive's rate of annual salary is $171,000 per annum):

Bonus Percentage X Executive's Annual Salary = Bonus

0.10 X $171,000 = $17,100

19

C. Payment and Crediting of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit

1. Within thirty days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and subject to the Deferred Comp Plan.

2. As of each Determination Date, Executive is entitled to receive no more than one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in cash (the "Cash Portion") and at least one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in the form of a credit to Executive's Account (as such term is defined under the Deferred Comp Plan)("Executive's Account. In accordance with the requirements of the Deferred Comp Plan, Executive shall make in a timely manner any and all elections with respect to the Deferred Comp Plan, including, but not limited to, elections with respect to the deferral of compensation.

3. Within 30 days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall pay the Cash Portion, if any, to Executive in cash, subject to any withholding required by law.

4. The Deferred Portion shall be credited to Executive's Account effective on July 1 of the year closest to the calculation date of the specific Pre Tax Net Income Benefit. Installments vest annually over 3 years on July 1, and annually on July 1 thereafter until fully vested as provide in the deferred compensation plan.

5. If this Agreement is terminated by Executive pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(b) or by the Bank for cause (other than due to Executive's death or disability) pursuant to Paragraph F.1, Executive shall be entitled only to that part of the Deferred Portion that has been vested prior to the Date of Termination.

6. If this Agreement is terminated due to Executive's death or disability or by the Bank without cause pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(a), then, on the Date of Termination of this Agreement on such basis, Executive's Account shall be credited with all remaining portions of any Deferred Portion that have not previously been fully vested as of such Date of Termination.

7. In the event of the termination of Executive's employment, the amount in Executive's Account shall be distributed to Executive in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.

20

EXHIBIT 10.7

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

This Employment Agreement (the "Agreement") is dated for reference purposes and entered into as of July 1, 2003 (the "Effective Date"), by and between Bank of Internet USA, a federal savings bank ("Bank'), having a principal place of business at 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220, San Diego, California, and Patrick Dunn ("Executive"), whose address is 2864 Anaheim Street, Escondido, CA 92025. Bank and Executive are sometimes collectively referred to in this Agreement as the "Parties." As used in this Agreement, the term "Effective Date" means the date this Employment Agreement becomes effective.

RECITALS

A. Bank desires to employ Executive and avail itself of his skill, knowledge and experience in the management of Bank's business.

B. The Parties desire to set forth in this Agreement the terms of Executive's employment by Bank.

The Parties therefore agree as follows:

A. TERM OF EMPLOYMENT

1. Term. Bank employs Executive to perform the duties described in this Agreement, and Executive accepts such employment, for a term of one year commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the day preceding the one year anniversary of the Effective Date, except (i) that the Term of this Agreement shall be renewed without further notice for a one year period commencing on the annual anniversary date of the Effective Date (the "Anniversary Date") and on each subsequent Anniversary Date following any such one year period of employment, and (ii) this Agreement may be terminated prior to the end of such Term by Bank or Employee in accordance with and subject to the terms of Paragraph F. (Termination) of this Agreement, including, but not limited to, Paragraph F.2.(a) providing Executive with a

1

Severance Payment (as defined therein) upon termination of this Agreement by Bank other than for cause. When used in this Agreement, "Term" shall refer to the entire period of employment of Executive by Bank under this Agreement.

B. DUTIES OF EXECUTIVE

Subject to the powers and directions of the policies, procedures and directives of the board of directors, as adopted and modified from time to time, Executive shall perform the duties and shall have the titles of Vice President and Chief Credit Officer. During the Term, Executive shall perform exclusively for Bank the services contemplated in this Agreement to be performed by Executive, faithfully, diligently and to the best of Executive's ability, consistent with the highest and best standards of the banking industry and in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations and the Bank's federal stock charter and bylaws. Except as permitted by the prior written consent of Bank's board of directors, Executive shall devote Executive's entire working time, ability and attention to the business of Bank during the Term.

C. COMPENSATION

1. Base Salary. In consideration of Executive's services to be performed under this Agreement, Bank shall pay or cause to be paid to Executive a base salary in the following amounts, payable in equal installments in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods:

a. $152,000 per annum, effective as of July 1, 2003.

b. $160,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2004, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $399,098,000.

2

c. $175,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2005, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $532,964,000.

Executive's salary shall be reviewed by the board of directors from time to time at its discretion and Executive shall receive such additional or other salary increases, if any, as the board of directors, in its sole discretion, shall determine.

2. One-Time Deferred Compensation. Executive is entitled to one-time deferred compensation in the amount of $50,000 (the "One-Time Deferred Compensation"), subject to the terms of this Agreement and the Bank of Internet USA Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plan, adopted effective as of July 1, 2003 (the "Deferred Comp Plan". The Executive's deferred compensation account shall be credited for $50,000 plus 4% on July 1, 2004. The One-Time Deferred Compensation amount and all earnings in the account shall vest to the Executive on the following:

July 1, 2004......................................     20%
July 1, 2005......................................     40%
July 1, 2006......................................     60%
July 1, 2007......................................     80%
July 1, 2008......................................    100%

The bank shall pay 4% only on July 1, 2004. Thereafter, investment of the Executive's Account shall comply with the investment provision of the Deferred Comp Plan.

3. Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Executive shall be entitled to a benefit based on the pre-tax net income of the Bank, as calculated in accordance with the formula and terms set forth in Exhibit A, the terms of which are incorporated by this reference as if set forth in full in this paragraph (the "Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit"). The amount of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, if any, to which Executive shall be entitled shall be subject to the terms governing the deferral of such benefit set forth in Exhibit A. Executive shall be eligible for such other benefits and other incentive compensation, if any, that may be made available to the Bank's senior executive officers from time to time by the board of directors in its sole discretion.

4. Special Discretionary Contribution. Executive shall be eligible to receive the Special Discretionary Contribution as defined and to the extent described in

3

Exhibit B, attached to this Agreement and incorporated in this Agreement as if set forth in full in this paragraph.

D. EXECUTIVE BENEFITS

1. Vacation. Executive shall be entitled to vacation as prescribed in the Bank's Employee Manual maintained on the Bank's Intranet. In the event this Agreement is terminated pursuant to Paragraph F.2, Bank reserves the right to require Executive to take any unused vacation time prior to the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2).

2. Directors and Officers Liability Insurance. Bank shall provide for Executive, at Bank's expense, coverage under a directors and officers liability insurance policy in such amounts and on such terms as may be approved by Bank's board of directors and as may be consistent with such coverage provided by Bank for its other officers and directors.

3. Group Insurance Benefits; and Death Benefit. Executive shall participate in all group insurance plans provided by Bank for all of its senior executive officers at Bank's expense to the same extent and on the same terms as Bank's other senior executive officers. Throughout the term of employment, the Bank shall, at its sole cost, will provide a death benefit on the life of Executive in an amount equal to three times Executive's then-current annual salary.

4. Stock Options. As of Effective Date, BofI Holding, Inc. a Delaware corporation ("Holding"), the sole shareholder of Bank, had granted to Executive incentive stock options, as provided in Section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code (ISOs"), pursuant to the Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan of BOI Holding, Inc. (the "Plan") and as memorialized in three Incentive Stock Option Agreements, dated April 27, 2000, April 2, 2001, and January 28, 2002. (collectively, the "Grant"), which such agreements provide for, among other things, the vesting of such ISOs. Notwithstanding the terms of the Plan, in the event that the Bank terminates

4

Executive under this Agreement for any reason other than for cause pursuant to Paragraph F.I or in the event Executive's death or disability causes the termination of this Agreement, all of Executive's lSOs issued pursuant to the Grant and any subsequently issued grant of ISOs under the Plan, including all ISOs held by Executive that are not otherwise vested at such time, shall become fully vested and Executive may exercise such vested ISOs, in whole or in part, at any time within the terms of the option plan. In the event that Executive terminates this Agreement, Executive shall be entitled to exercise only those lSOs that are vested as of the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2, below), and may be exercised within a 90 day period in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.7(a) of the Plan. Neither Bank nor Holding shall enter into any transaction during or after the Term that would have the effect of canceling any of Executive's ISOs issued under the Grant.

5. Retirement, Profit Sharing and Other Plans. Executive shall be entitled to participate in any retirement plans, profit-sharing plans, salary deferral and other deferred compensation plans, medical expense reimbursement plans and other similar plans that Bank may establish with respect to all employees; provided, however, that nothing herein shall require Bank to establish or maintain any of such plans.

E. BUSINESS EXPENSES AND REIMBURSEMENT

1. Business Expenses. In addition to Bank's payment or reimbursement of costs of the type described in Paragraph E.2, Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for any ordinary and necessary business expenses incurred by Executive in the performance of his duties and in acting for or on behalf of Bank during the Term, provided that: (a) each such expenditure is of a nature qualifying it as a proper deduction on the federal and state income tax returns of Bank as a business expense and not as deductible compensation to Executive, (b) Executive furnishes to Bank adequate records and other documentary evidence required by federal and state statutes and regulations issued by the appropriate taxing authorities for the substantiation of such expenditures and deductible business expenses of Bank, and (c)

5

Executive's expense reimbursement reports are submitted for approval in accordance with Bank's internal policies.

2. Additional Expenses. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for the costs and expenses set forth below, subject to the following requirements:
(a) Executive shall comply with the Bank's expense payment or reimbursement guidelines and procedures as the Bank may amend such guidelines and procedures or may adopt new guidelines and procedures from time to time, and (b) prior to the Bank becoming liable for any expenses or reimbursement relating to equipment, publications, education, training or professional organizations pursuant to subparagraphs (iii) through (vi) below, any such expenses or reimbursement shall be approved by Bank's board of directors or any committee or person authorized by the board of directors to grant such approval, in advance of incurring any such expenses. Subject to such prior approval of incurring expenses or reimbursement and to compliance with Bank's payment or reimbursement procedures, Bank's obligation to make any such payment or reimbursement pursuant to this paragraph shall not be contingent on whether or to what extent a particular expense may constitute a deductible business expense of Bank or be excludable from Executive's taxable compensation.

(i) Automobile Allowance. Standard business mileage reimbursement will be provided to Executive.

(ii) Parking. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for his reasonable automobile parking expenses during the Term.

(iii) Equipment. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for a digital cellular telephone (including the initial purchase price and connection charges as well as all business-related air charges), and other equipment as needed. Such equipment shall be the property of the Bank and upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, all of such equipment shall be returned to Bank, as more particularly provided in Paragraph G.3.

6

(iv) Publications. Bank shall reimburse Executive for the costs incurred by Executive during the term for subscriptions to business-related periodical publications that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.

(v) Education and Training. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for attending business-related seminars, training programs, conferences and conventions that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties to Bank.

(vi) Professional Organizations. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for membership fees and dues of professional organizations that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.

F. TERMINATION

1. Termination for Cause. Bank may terminate this Agreement for cause at any time without advance notice and without further obligation or liability to Executive, by action of Bank's board of directors:

(a) If Executive materially fails to perform his duties in a satisfactory manner or habitually neglects his duties; provided, however, that before any termination pursuant to this subparagraph (a) shall become effective,
(i) Bank shall have given Executive written notice setting forth the specific grounds for termination ("Warning Notice"), (ii) Bank shall have met and informed Executive of the grounds for termination, of the extent and nature of his unsatisfactory or negligent performance and of what Executive must do to correct such deficiencies, and (iii) Executive shall have been afforded a reasonable opportunity over a period of not less than forty-five (45) days from the date of the Warning Notice to correct the unsatisfactory or negligent performance described in the Warning Notice to the satisfaction of the board of directors, provided, however, that Executive shall be terminated at the end of such

7

period if Executive fails to correct his deficient performance in the manner prescribed by and to the reasonable satisfaction of the board of directors;

(b) If Executive is convicted of illegal activity which materially adversely affects Bank's reputation in the community or which evidences the lack of Executive's fitness or ability to perform Executive's duties as determined by the board of directors, in good faith;

(c) If Executive commits any act which causes termination of coverage under Bank's Bankers Blanket Bond as to Executive, as distinguished from termination of coverage as to Bank as a whole;

(d) If Executive dies;

(e) If Executive is found to be physically or mentally incapable of performing Executive's duties for a consecutive period of ninety
(90) days or greater by the board of directors, reasonably and in good faith. Termination pursuant to this subparagraph (e) shall become effective immediately on written notice of termination given by Bank to Executive after the expiration of such 90-day period;

(f) If Bank is closed or taken over by any of the bank regulatory authorities having jurisdiction over Bank's activities; or

(g) If any bank regulatory authority should successfully exercise its cease and desist powers to remove Executive from office.

The Parties understand and agree that notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement: (1) this Agreement is subject to the requirements and terms set forth in the regulations of the Office of Thrift Supervision ("OTS") contained in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39; (2) specifically, without limitation, the required provisions set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) are incorporated by reference in this Agreement as if set forth in full; (3) to the greatest extent possible, this Agreement shall be interpreted

8

so as to be consistent with said regulation; and (4) in the event of conflict or inconsistency between the terms of this Agreement and said regulation, the required provisions of said OTS regulation shall supersede any inconsistent or conflicting provisions of this Agreement. The termination of this Agreement for any of the reasons set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) shall be considered termination for cause pursuant to this Paragraph F.1.

2. Termination at Will. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated by either party at any time upon thirty (30) days' written notice of termination to the other Party ("Notice of Termination"). As used in this Paragraph F.2, "Date of Termination" means the thirtieth (30th) day following the date on which Notice of Termination is given.

(a) Termination by Bank. In the event Bank elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to compensation from Bank as follows: (i) Bank shall pay Executive his normal compensation then in effect through the Date of Termination; and (ii) Bank shall pay to Executive a severance payment equal to his then-current base monthly salary, multiplied by twelve (12) (the "Severance Payment"), which amount shall be paid by the Bank in either of the following two ways, in the sole discretion of the board of directors: (A) the Bank may pay the Severance Payment in twelve (12) equal installments during the succeeding twelve
(12) month period beginning on the Date of Termination (the "Severance Period") in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods, or (B) the Bank may pay the Severance Payment in one lump sum, subject to such withholding and other deductions as may be required by applicable law. In addition, Executive shall be entitled to the continuation of the group insurance benefits provided under Paragraph D.3, subject to Executive's reasonable cooperation with Bank, until the first to occur of: (x) the expiration of the Severance Period, or (y) Executive's commencement of work for a new employer that provides group medical insurance benefits to Executive. Executive's acceptance of new employment or earnings from other sources during the Severance Period shall not affect Bank's obligation to make the Severance Payment as provided above. At any time between Bank giving

9

Executive Notice of Termination and the Date of Termination, Bank, in its sole discretion, may direct Executive to cease performing services for Bank or to absent himself from Bank's premises and operations, provided that Bank shall nonetheless compensate Executive as provided above.

(b) Termination by Executive. In the event Executive elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to such compensation as may be due and payable to him through and including such Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any other compensation except as may be required by law or by written agreement, including this Agreement and the Deferred Comp Plan.

3. Effect of Termination. In the event of the termination of this Agreement prior to the completion of the Term for any of the reasons specified in Paragraphs F.1 and F.2, Executive shall be entitled to the compensation earned by Executive prior to the Date of Termination, as provided in this Agreement, computed pro rata up to and including the Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any further compensation or other benefits for services rendered after the Date of Termination, except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement. As used in this Paragraph F.3. "Date of Termination" includes the effective date of any termination, whether pursuant to Paragraph F.1 or F.2.

G. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1. Solicitation of Customers and Employees. For any period during which Executive receives any salary from Bank and for a one (1) year period following any termination of Executive from Bank, Executive shall not solicit any customers or employees of Bank to move their banking or employment relationships from Bank. Nothing in this Agreement shall preclude Executive from any mass solicitation to groups and individual follow-up solicitations of persons or businesses named in any list or data base not specifically related to or previously defined by the Bank, even though the names of certain Bank customers may appear in such list or data base.

10

2. Indemnification. To the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall pay any and all expenses incurred by Executive in connection with the defense or settlement of, and shall pay and satisfy any judgments, awards, fines and penalties rendered, assessed or levied against Executive in, any judicial, arbitration, mediation or administrative suit, action, hearing, inquiry or proceeding (whether or not Bank is joined as a party) relating to acts or omissions of Executive alleged to have occurred while an "agent" of Bank, or by Bank, or by both, provided however, that Bank shall not be obligated to defend, indemnify or hold Executive harmless from the consequences of his own negligent or reckless act or omission or willful misconduct or dishonesty. In addition, to the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall advance to Executive, upon receipt of the undertaking required by California Corporations Code Section
317(f), any expenses incurred in defending against any such proceeding to which Executive is a party or has been threatened to be made a party.

3. Return of Property. Executive expressly agrees that all manuals, documents, files, reports, studies, instruments, equipment and other materials and property used and/or developed by Bank or Executive (whether on his personal time or while performing services for the Bank) during the Term ("Preparatory Work") are the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest in such property. Executive further agrees that, subject to the execution of this Agreement, all Preparatory Work is the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest, legal or beneficial, in such Preparatory Work or in any benefits that may arise from such Preparatory Work. Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, Executive or Executive's representative shall promptly deliver possession of all of said property to Bank in original or good, operating condition, normal wear and tear excepted.

4. Notices. Any notice, request, demand or other communication required or permitted hereunder shall be considered to be properly given when personally served in writing, when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, or when delivered to a generally recognized overnight courier service (such as, for

11

example, Federal Express or United Parcel Service) addressed to the Party at such Party's address appearing at the beginning of this Agreement. Either Party may change its address by written notice in accordance with this paragraph.

5. Benefit of Agreement; Assignment. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Parties and their respective executors, administrators, successors and assigns. This Agreement is for the personal services of Executive and may not be assigned by Executive.

6. Applicable Law. Except to the extent governed by the laws of the United States, this Agreement is to be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California.

7. Captions and Paragraphs Headings. Captions and paragraph headings used herein are for convenience only and are not a part of this Agreement and shall not be used in constructing it.

8. Invalid Provisions. Should any provision of this Agreement for any reason be declared invalid, void, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the validity and binding effect of any remaining portion shall not be affected, and the remaining portions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect as if this Agreement had been executed with said provision eliminated.

9. Entire Agreement. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the Parties. It supersedes any and all other agreements or understandings, whether oral or written, between the Parties with respect to the employment of Executive by Bank. The terms of this Agreement in Paragraph D.4 applicable to stock options supersede the terms of the Plan or any agreement between the Parties to the extent the terms of the Plan and any other agreement are inconsistent with the terms of Paragraph D.4. Each party to this Agreement acknowledges that no representations, inducements, promises, or agreements, oral or otherwise, have been made by any party, or anyone acting on behalf of any party, that are not embodied in this Agreement, and that no

12

other agreement, statement, or promise not contained in this Agreement shall be valid or binding. This Agreement, may be modified or amended only in a written document signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. The amendment or other modification of the Plan or other any other agreement generally applicable to the grant of stock options or issuance of ISOs by the Holding Company to employees, including Executive will not supersede the terms of this Agreement pertaining to ISOs without the express written approval of the Parties contained in a writing expressly stating its intent to supersede the specific terms of this Agreement applicable to ISOs. Additionally, terms of this Agreement will prevail in any conflicts with other agreements.

10. Attorney's Fees. Each party shall bear his or its own attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the negotiation, preparation and delivery of this Agreement. However, if any action is instituted to enforce or interpret any of the obligations set forth in this Agreement, the prevailing party(ies) shall be entitled to recover its (their) reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the enforcement or interpretive action.

11. Trade Secrets. To the extent that during the Term Bank develops any trade secrets, as that term is defined under California law, the Parties agree that such trade secrets belong to and are the property of the Bank. Executive agrees that for a period of one (1) year after the termination of this Agreement. Executive shall not disclose any of Bank's trade secrets, directly or indirectly, or use them in any way in contravention of the rights of the Bank to such trade secrets.

12. Restricted Securities. The ISOs, the underlying common stock issuable upon the exercise of the lSOs and the shares of Holding's common stock issuable pursuant thereto shall be issued by Holding without registration under the Securities Act of 1933, or registration or qualification of such securities under any state securities or "blue sky" laws in reliance upon certain exemptions from registration or qualification, as the case may he. Upon issuance, such securities shall be considered "restricted securities," subject to certain limitations on transfer or other disposition imposed under applicable federal and state securities or "blue sky" laws and regulations

13

and such restrictions shall be set forth in one or more legends appearing on the certificate or agreement evidencing such securities.

13. Accounting Principles. Wherever in this Agreement, including any exhibit hereto, there is a reference to or need to use or rely upon accounting principles and procedures, such accounting principles and procedures shall be those used by the Bank in the preparation and filing of its reports of financial condition and operations in the form of Thrift Financial Reports, as filed with the Office of Thrift Supervision in the ordinary course ("TFRs"). By way of example, such items as Total Assets and loan loss reserves shall be computed as they are computed for purposes of reporting such information in the Bank's TFRs.

The Parties execute this Agreement as of the Effective Date first above written.

EXECUTIVE: BANK OF INTERNET, USA

                                            a federal savings bank

/s/ Patrick Dunn                            By:      /s/ Jerry Englert
------------------------------                 ---------------------------------
Patrick Dunn                                Name: Jerry Englert
2864 Anaheim Street                         Title: Chairman of the Board
Escondido, CA  92025
                                            Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus
                                                   -----------------------------
                                                   Secretary

CONSENT OF BOFI HOLDING, INC.

By execution of this Agreement below, BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation, consents to and agrees to perform its obligations under Paragraph D.4.

BofI Holding, Inc.

By: /s/ Jerry Englert                            Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus
   -----------------------------------------            ------------------------
Jerry Englert, Chairman of the Board
                                                 Name: C. Michelle Paulus
                                                 Title: Secretary

14

EXHIBIT A

PRE-TAX NET INCOME BENEFIT

The following terms apply to the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit provided in Paragraph C.2 of the Agreement.

A. Definitions.

1. "Adjusted Net Income" refers to Net Income Before Income Taxes (as defined below) as reported in a TFR (as defined below), reduced by the amount of Specific Reserves (as defined below), as reported in a TFR, and increased by the sum of (a) the amount of General Reserves (as defined below),
(b) the amount of any expense accrued by the Bank for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, and (c) the amount of any non-taxable or tax preferred income "grossed up" to its pre-tax equivalent or equivalent income without such tax preference (the "Tax Preferred Income "gross up").

2. "Average Asset Balance" refers to the average amount of Total Assets reported by the Bank on a daily for the period covered by a TFR.

3. "Asset Target" refers to the level of Total Assets reported in the Bank's TFR at June 30, 2004 and at June 30, 2005. The Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2004 is $399,098,000 and is referred to as the "2004 Asset Target" and the Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2005 is $532,963,000 and is referred to as the "2005 Asset Target."

4. "Bonus Calculation Table" refers to the following table showing the Bonus Percentage (which will be applied as a percentage of Net Income Before Income Taxes earned by Executive) if the Bank attains certain levels of profitability (expressed as a percentage attained by dividing Adjusted Net Income by the Average Asset Balance):

If the Bank's Return on Assets Before Taxes (as defined below)

is

   Bonus
Percentage        at least:        but not greater than:
----------        --------         --------------------
0.05               1.200%                1.399%
0.10               1.400%                1.799%
0.20               1.800%                2.199%
0.30               2.200%                No limit

5. "TFR" refers to the Thrift Financial Report of the Bank, consisting of various financial statements, including balance sheet, statement of operations and other statements, prepared by the Bank in the ordinary course and filed quarterly with the Office of Thrift Supervision.

15

6. "General Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of a reserve or an allowance against loan losses generally and not allocable to one or more specific assets, as set forth in its TFR for the applicable period.

7. "Net Income Before Income Taxes" refers to the amount reported as "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes" in a TFR for the applicable period.

8. "Deferred Comp Plan" has the meaning set forth in Section C.3 of the Agreement.

9. "Pre-Tax Net Income" refers to the "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes," as set forth on the Statement of Operations included in a TFR.

10. "Return on Assets Before Taxes" refers to the percentage derived from dividing (a) the Adjusted Net Income for such TFR period, by (b) the Average Asset Balance with respect to such period.

10. "Specific Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of reserves or allowances against loan losses specifically attributable to actual losses or to prospective losses from one or more identified assets, as set forth in a TFR.

B. Calculation of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit

1. Executive shall be entitled to a Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and June 30, 2005. All calculations leading to the computation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit for each of such years shall be based upon the results reported in the Bank's TFRs for each such 12-month period. No Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit shall be calculated or payable with respect to any period less than a full 12-month fiscal year.

2. As promptly as possible after the filing of the TFR for the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and 2005, as the case may be, but in no event later than 30 days after such filing, the Bank shall (i) determine the Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, (ii) calculate the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with this Agreement, and (iii) report the results of such calculation to Executive and the board of directors of the Bank. As promptly as possible after reporting such calculation, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, Executive and the Bank shall meet to confirm their agreement on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. On the date that the Executive and the Bank mutually agree on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit (the "Determination Date"), the Executive shall have a right to the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit as provided in this Agreement.

3. As a condition precedent to Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the 2004 and 2005 fiscal years, the Bank shall have achieved the 2004 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2004, and the Bank shall have achieved the 2005 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2005.

16

4. Provided that the Bank shall have achieved the applicable Asset Target and subject to the provisions of Paragraph C.3, below, governing the payment and crediting, as the case may be, of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in an amount equal to the product of multiplying: (1) the Bonus Percentage for which the Executive is eligible for such fiscal year, based on the Bank's Return on Assets Before Income Taxes, as derived from the Bonus Calculation Table, times (2) Executive's rate of annual salary payable as of the end of such fiscal year.

5. The following is an example only of the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Assume: that the Bank has achieved the applicable Asset Target.

Net Income Before Income Taxes (from TFR)                     $  4,600,000

Adjustments:

Add/Increase:

General Reserves                                              $    300,000
         Accrued Expense for Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit       $     60,000
         Tax Preferred Income "gross up"                      $     70,000
Subtract/Reduce:

         Specific Reserves/Charge-Offs                        $    (20,000)

Adjusted Net Income                                           $  5,010,000
                                                              ============

Average Asset Balance                                         $405,000,000
                                                              ============

Return on Assets Before Taxes:

            Adjusted Net Income / Average Asset Balance =

                                                              $  5,010,000 = 1.237%
                                                              ------------
                                                              $405,000,000

Bonus Percentage based on 1.237% Return on Average Assets = 0.05
(from Bonus Calculation Table)

Calculation of Bonus (assuming at end of fiscal year, Executive's rate of annual salary is $152,000 per annum):

Bonus Percentage X Executive's Annual Salary = Bonus

0.05 X $152,000 = $7,600

17

C. Payment and Crediting of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit

1. Within thirty days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and subject to the Deferred Comp Plan.

2. As of each Determination Date, Executive is entitled to receive no more than one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in cash (the "Cash Portion") and at least one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in the form of a credit to Executive's Account (as such term is defined under the Deferred Comp Plan)("Executive's Account. In accordance with the requirements of the Deferred Comp Plan, Executive shall make in a timely manner any and all elections with respect to the Deferred Comp Plan, including, but not limited to, elections with respect to the deferral of compensation.

3. Within 30 days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall pay the Cash Portion, if any, to Executive in cash, subject to any withholding required by law.

4. The Deferred Portion shall be credited to Executive's Account effective on July 1 of the year closest to the calculation date of the specific Pre Tax Net Income Benefit. Installments vest annually over 3 years on July 1, and annually on July 1 thereafter until fully vested as provide in the deferred compensation plan.

5. If this Agreement is terminated by Executive pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(b) or by the Bank for cause (other than due to Executive's death or disability) pursuant to Paragraph F.1, Executive shall be entitled only to that part of the Deferred Portion that has been vested prior to the Date of Termination.

6. If this Agreement is terminated due to Executive's death or disability or by the Bank without cause pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(a), then, on the Date of Termination of this Agreement on such basis, Executive's Account shall be credited with all remaining portions of any Deferred Portion that have not previously been fully vested as of such Date of Termination.

7. In the event of the termination of Executive's employment, the amount in Executive's Account shall be distributed to Executive in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.

18

EXHIBIT B

SPECIAL DISCRETIONARY CONTRIBUTION

The Bank acknowledges that since his joining the Bank, Executive has been a major contributor to the success of the Bank. In recognition of that valuable contribution, the Bank agrees that Executive is entitled to a special Discretionary Contribution in the amount of $250,000 (the "Special Discretionary Contribution"), payable subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. Eligibility. Executive shall be eligible for the Special Discretionary Contribution when the Total Assets of the Bank as of the end of a calendar month, as reported by the Bank in the ordinary course, shall equal or exceed $500,000,000. The first day of the calendar month immediately following the month in which the Bank shall have reported at month end Total Assets equal to or exceeding $500,000,000, is referred in this Agreement as the "Eligibility Date."

2. Allocation to Deferred Comp Plan. The Special Discretionary Contribution shall be allocated and credited to Executive's Account in the Deferred Comp Plan in three installments as follows, except as provided in Paragraph 3, below:

a. First Allocation. On the first anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank shall allocate and credit to Executive's Account $100,000 of the Special Discretionary Contribution.

b. Second Allocation. On the second anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank shall allocate and credit to Executive's Account $100,000 of the Special Discretionary Contribution.

c. Third Allocation. On the third anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank shall allocate and credit to Executive's Account the remaining $50,000 of the Special Discretionary Contribution.

All amounts allocated and credited to Executive's Account in the Deferred Comp Plan shall be allocated and credited irrevocably and shall be held subject to the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.

3. Termination. The following terms govern the allocation and payment of the Special Discretionary Contribution only in the event this Agreement is terminated before all of the Special Discretionary Contribution has been allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan. If at the time of termination of this Agreement all of the Special Discretionary Contribution has been allocated and credited to the Deferred Comp Plan, the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan alone shall govern the disposition of the amounts in Executive's Account.

a. Termination by Death or Disability of Executive and Termination by the Bank Without Cause. In the event this Agreement is terminated pursuant to

19

Paragraph F.1(d) (death of Executive), Paragraph F.1(e)(disability of Executive) or Paragraph F.2(a) (by Bank upon giving Notice of Termination):

(1) The portion, if any, of the Special Discretionary Contribution that was previously allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to such Date of Termination shall be distributed in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.

(2) The portion, if any, of the Special Discretionary Contribution that has not already been allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to the Date of Termination for such reason shall be paid by the Bank directly to Executive in a lump cash sum within 30 business days of the Date of Termination.

b. Termination By Bank for Cause and Termination by Executive. In the event this Agreement is terminated by the Bank for cause pursuant to Paragraph F.1 (other than for death or disability of Executive) or by the Executive pursuant to Paragraph F.2(b)(upon Executive giving Notice of Termination):

(1) The portion, if any, of the Special Discretionary Contribution that was previously allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to such Date of Termination shall be distributed in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.

(2) The portion or portions, if any, of the Special Discretionary Contribution that has not already been allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to the Date of Termination for such reason shall be paid by the Bank directly to Executive (i) in the amount(s) and (ii) at the time(s), of the remaining scheduled allocation(s) set forth in Paragraph 2, above.

c. Examples. For purposes of the following examples, assume the Eligibility Date is October 1, 2004.

(1) Example 1: Assume that this Agreement is terminated before the one year anniversary of the Eligibility Date for a reason described in Paragraph 3a., above (death or disability of Executive or by Bank without cause). As of the date of such termination, no portion of the Special Discretionary Contribution has been allocated or credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan. In this case, all of the $250,000 Special Discretionary Contribution shall be paid to Executive directly by the Bank in a lump cash sum within 30 business days of the Date of Termination.

20

(2) Example 2: Assume that on the first anniversary of the Eligibility Date, October 1, 2005, the Bank allocated and credited $100,000 to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan. Assume further that this Agreement is terminated on January 10, 2006 for a reason described in Paragraph
3.a., above (that is, due to the death or disability of Executive or terminated by the Bank without cause). Within 30 days of January 10, 2006, the remaining portion of the Special Discretionary Contribution that has not previously been allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan (that is, $150,000) will be paid by the Bank to the Executive or his estate, as the case may be, in a lump cash sum. The portion of the Special Discretionary Contribution that was previously allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to such Date of Termination (that is, the $100,000 allocated and credited on October 1, 2005) shall be distributed in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.

(3) Example 3: Assume that this Agreement is terminated on January 10, 2006 for a reason described in Paragraph 3b., above (the Executive resigns or is terminated by Bank for cause). In that case, no action of any kind shall be taken with respect to the Special Discretionary Contribution on or about the Date of Termination, January 10, 2006. However, on October 1, 2006, the second anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank will pay $100,000 directly to Executive in a lump cash sum, and on October 1, 2007, the third anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank will pay $50,000 to Executive directly in a lump cash sum. The portion of the Special Discretionary Contribution that was previously allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to such Date of Termination (that is, the $100,000 allocated and credited on October 1, 2005) shall be distributed in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.

(4) Example 4: Assume that this Agreement is terminated on January 10, 2005 for a reason described in Paragraph 3b., above (the Executive resigns or is terminated by Bank for cause). As of that date, no portion of the Special Discretionary Contribution has yet been allocated or credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan. In that case, no action of any kind shall be taken with respect to the Special Discretionary Contribution on or about the Date of Termination, January 10, 2005. However, on October 1, 2005, the first anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank will pay $100,000 directly to Executive in a lump cash sum, and on October 1, 2006, the second anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank will pay $100,000 directly to Executive in a lump cash sum, and on October 1, 2007, the third anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank will pay $50,000 to Executive directly in a lump cash sum.

21

EXHIBIT 10.8

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

This Employment Agreement (the "Agreement") is dated for reference purposes and entered into as of July 1, 2003 (the "Effective Date"), by and between Bank of Internet USA, a federal savings bank ("Bank'), having a principal place of business at 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220, San Diego, California, and Andrew Micheletti ("Executive"), whose address is 831 Havenhurst Drive, La Jolla, CA 92037. Bank and Executive are sometimes collectively referred to in this Agreement as the "Parties." As used in this Agreement, the term "Effective Date" means the date this Employment Agreement becomes effective.

RECITALS

A. Bank desires to employ Executive and avail itself of his skill, knowledge and experience in the management of Bank's business.

B. The Parties desire to set forth in this Agreement the terms of Executive's employment by Bank.

The Parties therefore agree as follows:

A. TERM OF EMPLOYMENT

1. Term. Bank employs Executive to perform the duties described in this Agreement, and Executive accepts such employment, for a term of one year commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the day preceding the one year anniversary of the Effective Date, except (i) that the Term of this Agreement shall be renewed without further notice for a one year period commencing on the annual anniversary date of the Effective Date (the "Anniversary Date") and on each subsequent Anniversary Date following any such one year period of employment, and (ii) this Agreement may be terminated prior to the end of such Term by Bank or Employee in accordance with and subject to the terms of Paragraph F. (Termination) of this Agreement, including, but not limited to, Paragraph F.2.(a) providing Executive with a

1

Severance Payment (as defined therein) upon termination of this Agreement by Bank other than for cause. When used in this Agreement, "Term" shall refer to the entire period of employment of Executive by Bank under this Agreement.

B. DUTIES OF EXECUTIVE

Subject to the powers and directions of the policies, procedures and directives of the board of directors, as adopted and modified from time to time, Executive shall perform the duties and shall have the titles of Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. During the Term, Executive shall perform exclusively for Bank the services contemplated in this Agreement to be performed by Executive, faithfully, diligently and to the best of Executive's ability, consistent with the highest and best standards of the banking industry and in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations and the Bank's federal stock charter and bylaws. Except as permitted by the prior written consent of Bank's board of directors, Executive shall devote Executive's entire working time, ability and attention to the business of Bank during the Term.

C. COMPENSATION

1. Base Salary. In consideration of Executive's services to be performed under this Agreement, Bank shall pay or cause to be paid to Executive a base salary in the following amounts, payable in equal installments in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods:

a. $133,000 per annum, effective as of July 1, 2003.

b. $151,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2004, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $399,098,000.

2

c. $168,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2005, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $532,964,000.

Executive's salary shall be reviewed by the board of directors from time to time at its discretion and Executive shall receive such additional or other salary increases, if any, as the board of directors, in its sole discretion, shall determine.

2. One-Time Deferred Compensation. Executive is entitled to one-time deferred compensation in the amount of $50,000 (the "One-Time Deferred Compensation"), subject to the terms of this Agreement and the Bank of Internet USA Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plan, adopted effective as of July 1, 2003 (the "Deferred Comp Plan". The Executive's deferred compensation account shall be credited for $50,000 plus 4% on July 1, 2004. The One-Time Deferred Compensation amount and all earnings in the account shall vest to the Executive on the following:

July 1, 2004...................................   20%
July 1, 2005...................................   40%
July 1, 2006...................................   60%
July 1, 2007...................................   80%
July 1, 2008...................................  100%

The bank shall pay 4% only on July 1, 2004. Thereafter, investment of the Executive's Account shall comply with the investment provision of the Deferred Comp Plan.

3. Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Executive shall be entitled to a benefit based on the pre-tax net income of the Bank, as calculated in accordance with the formula and terms set forth in Exhibit A, the terms of which are incorporated by this reference as if set forth in full in this paragraph (the "Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit"). The amount of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, if any, to which Executive shall be entitled shall be subject to the terms governing the deferral of such benefit set forth in Exhibit A. Executive shall be eligible for such other benefits and other incentive compensation, if any, that may be made available to the Bank's senior executive officers from time to time by the board of directors in its sole discretion.

3

D. EXECUTIVE BENEFITS

1. Vacation. Executive shall be entitled to vacation as prescribed in the Bank's Employee Manual maintained on the Bank's Intranet. In the event this Agreement is terminated pursuant to Paragraph F.2, Bank reserves the right to require Executive to take any unused vacation time prior to the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2).

2. Directors and Officers Liability Insurance. Bank shall provide for Executive, at Bank's expense, coverage under a directors and officers liability insurance policy in such amounts and on such terms as may be approved by Bank's board of directors and as may be consistent with such coverage provided by Bank for its other officers and directors.

3. Group Insurance Benefits; and Death Benefit. Executive shall participate in all group insurance plans provided by Bank for all of its senior executive officers at Bank's expense to the same extent and on the same terms as Bank's other senior executive officers. Throughout the term of employment, the Bank shall, at its sole cost, will provide a death benefit on the life of Executive in an amount equal to three times Executive's then-current annual salary.

4. Stock Options. As of Effective Date, BofI Holding, Inc. a Delaware corporation ("Holding"), the sole shareholder of Bank, had granted to Executive incentive stock options, as provided in Section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code (ISOs"), pursuant to the Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan of BOI Holding, Inc. (the "Plan") and as memorialized in two Incentive Stock Option Agreements, dated April 2, 2001, and January 28, 2002. (collectively, the "Grant"), which such agreements provide for, among other things, the vesting of such ISOs. Notwithstanding the terms of the Plan, in the event that the Bank terminates Executive under this Agreement for any reason other than for cause pursuant to Paragraph F.I or in the event Executive's death or disability causes the termination of this Agreement, all of Executive's lSOs issued pursuant to the Grant and any subsequently issued grant of

4

ISOs under the Plan, including all ISOs held by Executive that are not otherwise vested at such time, shall become fully vested and Executive may exercise such vested ISOs, in whole or in part, at any time within the terms of the option plan. In the event that Executive terminates this Agreement, Executive shall be entitled to exercise only those lSOs that are vested as of the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2, below), and may be exercised within a 90 day period in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.7(a) of the Plan. Neither Bank nor Holding shall enter into any transaction during or after the Term that would have the effect of canceling any of Executive's ISOs issued under the Grant.

5. Retirement, Profit Sharing and Other Plans. Executive shall be entitled to participate in any retirement plans, profit-sharing plans, salary deferral and other deferred compensation plans, medical expense reimbursement plans and other similar plans that Bank may establish with respect to all employees; provided, however, that nothing herein shall require Bank to establish or maintain any of such plans.

E. BUSINESS EXPENSES AND REIMBURSEMENT

1. Business Expenses. In addition to Bank's payment or reimbursement of costs of the type described in Paragraph E.2, Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for any ordinary and necessary business expenses incurred by Executive in the performance of his duties and in acting for or on behalf of Bank during the Term, provided that: (a) each such expenditure is of a nature qualifying it as a proper deduction on the federal and state income tax returns of Bank as a business expense and not as deductible compensation to Executive, (b) Executive furnishes to Bank adequate records and other documentary evidence required by federal and state statutes and regulations issued by the appropriate taxing authorities for the substantiation of such expenditures and deductible business expenses of Bank, and (c) Executive's expense reimbursement reports are submitted for approval in accordance with Bank's internal policies.

5

2. Additional Expenses. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for the costs and expenses set forth below, subject to the following requirements:
(a) Executive shall comply with the Bank's expense payment or reimbursement guidelines and procedures as the Bank may amend such guidelines and procedures or may adopt new guidelines and procedures from time to time, and (b) prior to the Bank becoming liable for any expenses or reimbursement relating to equipment, publications, education, training or professional organizations pursuant to subparagraphs (iii) through (vi) below, any such expenses or reimbursement shall be approved by Bank's board of directors or any committee or person authorized by the board of directors to grant such approval, in advance of incurring any such expenses. Subject to such prior approval of incurring expenses or reimbursement and to compliance with Bank's payment or reimbursement procedures, Bank's obligation to make any such payment or reimbursement pursuant to this paragraph shall not be contingent on whether or to what extent a particular expense may constitute a deductible business expense of Bank or be excludable from Executive's taxable compensation.

(i) Automobile Allowance. Standard business mileage reimbursement will be provided to Executive.

(ii) Parking. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for his reasonable automobile parking expenses during the Term.

(iii) Equipment. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for a digital cellular telephone (including the initial purchase price and connection charges as well as all business-related air charges), and other equipment as needed. Such equipment shall be the property of the Bank and upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, all of such equipment shall be returned to Bank, as more particularly provided in Paragraph G.3.

(iv) Publications. Bank shall reimburse Executive for the costs incurred by Executive during the term for subscriptions to business-related periodical

6

publications that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.

(v) Education and Training. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for attending business-related seminars, training programs, conferences and conventions that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties to Bank.

(vi) Professional Organizations. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for membership fees and dues of professional organizations that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.

F. TERMINATION

1. Termination for Cause. Bank may terminate this Agreement for cause at any time without advance notice and without further obligation or liability to Executive, by action of Bank's board of directors:

(a) If Executive materially fails to perform his duties in a satisfactory manner or habitually neglects his duties; provided, however, that before any termination pursuant to this subparagraph (a) shall become effective,
(i) Bank shall have given Executive written notice setting forth the specific grounds for termination ("Warning Notice"), (ii) Bank shall have met and informed Executive of the grounds for termination, of the extent and nature of his unsatisfactory or negligent performance and of what Executive must do to correct such deficiencies, and (iii) Executive shall have been afforded a reasonable opportunity over a period of not less than forty-five (45) days from the date of the Warning Notice to correct the unsatisfactory or negligent performance described in the Warning Notice to the satisfaction of the board of directors, provided, however, that Executive shall be terminated at the end of such period if Executive fails to correct his deficient performance in the manner prescribed by and to the reasonable satisfaction of the board of directors;

7

(b) If Executive is convicted of illegal activity which materially adversely affects Bank's reputation in the community or which evidences the lack of Executive's fitness or ability to perform Executive's duties as determined by the board of directors, in good faith;

(c) If Executive commits any act which causes termination of coverage under Bank's Bankers Blanket Bond as to Executive, as distinguished from termination of coverage as to Bank as a whole;

(d) If Executive dies;

(e) If Executive is found to be physically or mentally incapable of performing Executive's duties for a consecutive period of ninety
(90) days or greater by the board of directors, reasonably and in good faith. Termination pursuant to this subparagraph (e) shall become effective immediately on written notice of termination given by Bank to Executive after the expiration of such 90-day period;

(f) If Bank is closed or taken over by any of the bank regulatory authorities having jurisdiction over Bank's activities; or

(g) If any bank regulatory authority should successfully exercise its cease and desist powers to remove Executive from office.

The Parties understand and agree that notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement: (1) this Agreement is subject to the requirements and terms set forth in the regulations of the Office of Thrift Supervision ("OTS") contained in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39; (2) specifically, without limitation, the required provisions set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) are incorporated by reference in this Agreement as if set forth in full; (3) to the greatest extent possible, this Agreement shall be interpreted so as to be consistent with said regulation; and (4) in the event of conflict or inconsistency between the terms of this Agreement and said regulation, the required

8

provisions of said OTS regulation shall supersede any inconsistent or conflicting provisions of this Agreement. The termination of this Agreement for any of the reasons set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) shall be considered termination for cause pursuant to this Paragraph F.1.

2. Termination at Will. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated by either party at any time upon thirty (30) days' written notice of termination to the other Party ("Notice of Termination"). As used in this Paragraph F.2, "Date of Termination" means the thirtieth (30th) day following the date on which Notice of Termination is given.

(a) Termination by Bank. In the event Bank elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to compensation from Bank as follows: (i) Bank shall pay Executive his normal compensation then in effect through the Date of Termination; and (ii) Bank shall pay to Executive a severance payment equal to his then-current base monthly salary, multiplied by twelve (12) (the "Severance Payment"), which amount shall be paid by the Bank in either of the following two ways, in the sole discretion of the board of directors: (A) the Bank may pay the Severance Payment in twelve (12) equal installments during the succeeding twelve
(12) month period beginning on the Date of Termination (the "Severance Period") in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods, or (B) the Bank may pay the Severance Payment in one lump sum, subject to such withholding and other deductions as may be required by applicable law. In addition, Executive shall be entitled to the continuation of the group insurance benefits provided under Paragraph D.3, subject to Executive's reasonable cooperation with Bank, until the first to occur of: (x) the expiration of the Severance Period, or (y) Executive's commencement of work for a new employer that provides group medical insurance benefits to Executive. Executive's acceptance of new employment or earnings from other sources during the Severance Period shall not affect Bank's obligation to make the Severance Payment as provided above. At any time between Bank giving Executive Notice of Termination and the Date of Termination, Bank, in its sole discretion, may direct Executive to cease performing services for Bank or to absent

9

himself from Bank's premises and operations, provided that Bank shall nonetheless compensate Executive as provided above.

(b) Termination by Executive. In the event Executive elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to such compensation as may be due and payable to him through and including such Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any other compensation except as may be required by law or by written agreement, including this Agreement and the Deferred Comp Plan.

3. Effect of Termination. In the event of the termination of this Agreement prior to the completion of the Term for any of the reasons specified in Paragraphs F.1 and F.2, Executive shall be entitled to the compensation earned by Executive prior to the Date of Termination, as provided in this Agreement, computed pro rata up to and including the Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any further compensation or other benefits for services rendered after the Date of Termination, except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement. As used in this Paragraph F.3. "Date of Termination" includes the effective date of any termination, whether pursuant to Paragraph F.1 or F.2.

G. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1. Solicitation of Customers and Employees. For any period during which Executive receives any salary from Bank and for a one (1) year period following any termination of Executive from Bank, Executive shall not solicit any customers or employees of Bank to move their banking or employment relationships from Bank. Nothing in this Agreement shall preclude Executive from any mass solicitation to groups and individual follow-up solicitations of persons or businesses named in any list or data base not specifically related to or previously defined by the Bank, even though the names of certain Bank customers may appear in such list or data base.

10

2. Indemnification. To the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall pay any and all expenses incurred by Executive in connection with the defense or settlement of, and shall pay and satisfy any judgments, awards, fines and penalties rendered, assessed or levied against Executive in, any judicial, arbitration, mediation or administrative suit, action, hearing, inquiry or proceeding (whether or not Bank is joined as a party) relating to acts or omissions of Executive alleged to have occurred while an "agent" of Bank, or by Bank, or by both, provided however, that Bank shall not be obligated to defend, indemnify or hold Executive harmless from the consequences of his own negligent or reckless act or omission or willful misconduct or dishonesty. In addition, to the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall advance to Executive, upon receipt of the undertaking required by California Corporations Code Section
317(f), any expenses incurred in defending against any such proceeding to which Executive is a party or has been threatened to be made a party.

3. Return of Property. Executive expressly agrees that all manuals, documents, files, reports, studies, instruments, equipment and other materials and property used and/or developed by Bank or Executive (whether on his personal time or while performing services for the Bank) during the Term ("Preparatory Work") are the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest in such property. Executive further agrees that, subject to the execution of this Agreement, all Preparatory Work is the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest, legal or beneficial, in such Preparatory Work or in any benefits that may arise from such Preparatory Work. Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, Executive or Executive's representative shall promptly deliver possession of all of said property to Bank in original or good, operating condition, normal wear and tear excepted.

4. Notices. Any notice, request, demand or other communication required or permitted hereunder shall be considered to be properly given when personally served in writing, when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, or when delivered to a generally recognized overnight courier service (such as, for example, Federal Express or United Parcel Service) addressed to the Party at such

11

Party's address appearing at the beginning of this Agreement. Either Party may change its address by written notice in accordance with this paragraph.

5. Benefit of Agreement; Assignment. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Parties and their respective executors, administrators, successors and assigns. This Agreement is for the personal services of Executive and may not be assigned by Executive.

6. Applicable Law. Except to the extent governed by the laws of the United States, this Agreement is to be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California.

7. Captions and Paragraphs Headings. Captions and paragraph headings used herein are for convenience only and are not a part of this Agreement and shall not be used in constructing it.

8. Invalid Provisions. Should any provision of this Agreement for any reason be declared invalid, void, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the validity and binding effect of any remaining portion shall not be affected, and the remaining portions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect as if this Agreement had been executed with said provision eliminated.

9. Entire Agreement. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the Parties. It supersedes any and all other agreements or understandings, whether oral or written, between the Parties with respect to the employment of Executive by Bank. The terms of this Agreement in Paragraph D.4 applicable to stock options supersede the terms of the Plan or any agreement between the Parties to the extent the terms of the Plan and any other agreement are inconsistent with the terms of Paragraph D.4. Each party to this Agreement acknowledges that no representations, inducements, promises, or agreements, oral or otherwise, have been made by any party, or anyone acting on behalf of any party, that are not embodied in this Agreement, and that no other agreement, statement, or promise not contained in this Agreement shall be valid

12

or binding. This Agreement, may be modified or amended only in a written document signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. The amendment or other modification of the Plan or other any other agreement generally applicable to the grant of stock options or issuance of ISOs by the Holding Company to employees, including Executive will not supersede the terms of this Agreement pertaining to ISOs without the express written approval of the Parties contained in a writing expressly stating its intent to supersede the specific terms of this Agreement applicable to ISOs. Additionally, terms of this Agreement will prevail in any conflicts with other agreements.

10. Attorney's Fees. Each party shall bear his or its own attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the negotiation, preparation and delivery of this Agreement. However, if any action is instituted to enforce or interpret any of the obligations set forth in this Agreement, the prevailing party(ies) shall be entitled to recover its (their) reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the enforcement or interpretive action.

11. Trade Secrets. To the extent that during the Term Bank develops any trade secrets, as that term is defined under California law, the Parties agree that such trade secrets belong to and are the property of the Bank. Executive agrees that for a period of one (1) year after the termination of this Agreement. Executive shall not disclose any of Bank's trade secrets, directly or indirectly, or use them in any way in contravention of the rights of the Bank to such trade secrets.

12. Restricted Securities. The ISOs, the underlying common stock issuable upon the exercise of the lSOs and the shares of Holding's common stock issuable pursuant thereto shall be issued by Holding without registration under the Securities Act of 1933, or registration or qualification of such securities under any state securities or "blue sky" laws in reliance upon certain exemptions from registration or qualification, as the case may he. Upon issuance, such securities shall be considered "restricted securities," subject to certain limitations on transfer or other disposition imposed under applicable federal and state securities or "blue sky" laws and regulations

13

and such restrictions shall be set forth in one or more legends appearing on the certificate or agreement evidencing such securities.

13. Accounting Principles. Wherever in this Agreement, including any exhibit hereto, there is a reference to or need to use or rely upon accounting principles and procedures, such accounting principles and procedures shall be those used by the Bank in the preparation and filing of its reports of financial condition and operations in the form of Thrift Financial Reports, as filed with the Office of Thrift Supervision in the ordinary course ("TFRs"). By way of example, such items as Total Assets and loan loss reserves shall be computed as they are computed for purposes of reporting such information in the Bank's TFRs.

The Parties execute this Agreement as of the Effective Date first above written.

EXECUTIVE:                                           BANK OF INTERNET, USA
                                                     a federal savings bank

/s/ Andrew Micheletti                       By: /s/ Jerry Englert
------------------------------------            --------------------------------
Andrew Micheletti                                  Name: Jerry Englert
831 Havenhurst Drive                        Title: Chairman of the Board
La Jolla, CA 92037

                                            Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus
                                                    ----------------------------
                                                    Secretary

CONSENT OF BOFI HOLDING, INC.

By execution of this Agreement below, BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation, consents to and agrees to perform its obligations under Paragraph D.4.

BofI Holding, Inc.

By:  /s/ Jerry Englert                      Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus
    ---------------------------------               ----------------------------
Jerry Englert, Chairman of the Board                Name: C. Michelle Paulus
                                                    Title: Secretary

14

EXHIBIT A

PRE-TAX NET INCOME BENEFIT

The following terms apply to the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit provided in Paragraph C.2 of the Agreement.

A. Definitions.

1. "Adjusted Net Income" refers to Net Income Before Income Taxes (as defined below) as reported in a TFR (as defined below), reduced by the amount of Specific Reserves (as defined below), as reported in a TFR, and increased by the sum of (a) the amount of General Reserves (as defined below),
(b) the amount of any expense accrued by the Bank for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, and (c) the amount of any non-taxable or tax preferred income "grossed up" to its pre-tax equivalent or equivalent income without such tax preference (the "Tax Preferred Income "gross up").

2. "Average Asset Balance" refers to the average amount of Total Assets reported by the Bank on a daily for the period covered by a TFR.

3. "Asset Target" refers to the level of Total Assets reported in the Bank's TFR at June 30, 2004 and at June 30, 2005. The Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2004 is $399,098,000 and is referred to as the "2004 Asset Target" and the Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2005 is $532,963,000 and is referred to as the "2005 Asset Target."

4. "Bonus Calculation Table" refers to the following table showing the Bonus Percentage (which will be applied as a percentage of Net Income Before Income Taxes earned by Executive) if the Bank attains certain levels of profitability (expressed as a percentage attained by dividing Adjusted Net Income by the Average Asset Balance):

If the Bank's Return on Assets Before Taxes (as defined below) is

Bonus
Percentage   at least:                 but not greater than:
----------   --------                  --------------------
0.05          1.200%                          1.399%
0.10          1.400%                          1.799%
0.20          1.800%                          2.199%
0.30          2.200%                          No limit

5. "TFR" refers to the Thrift Financial Report of the Bank, consisting of various financial statements, including balance sheet, statement of operations and other statements, prepared by the Bank in the ordinary course and filed quarterly with the Office of Thrift Supervision.

15

6. "General Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of a reserve or an allowance against loan losses generally and not allocable to one or more specific assets, as set forth in its TFR for the applicable period.

7. "Net Income Before Income Taxes" refers to the amount reported as "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes" in a TFR for the applicable period.

8. "Deferred Comp Plan" has the meaning set forth in Section C.3 of the Agreement.

9. "Pre-Tax Net Income" refers to the "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes," as set forth on the Statement of Operations included in a TFR.

10. "Return on Assets Before Taxes" refers to the percentage derived from dividing (a) the Adjusted Net Income for such TFR period, by (b) the Average Asset Balance with respect to such period.

10. "Specific Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of reserves or allowances against loan losses specifically attributable to actual losses or to prospective losses from one or more identified assets, as set forth in a TFR.

B. Calculation of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit

1. Executive shall be entitled to a Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and June 30, 2005. All calculations leading to the computation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit for each of such years shall be based upon the results reported in the Bank's TFRs for each such 12-month period. No Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit shall be calculated or payable with respect to any period less than a full 12-month fiscal year.

2. As promptly as possible after the filing of the TFR for the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and 2005, as the case may be, but in no event later than 30 days after such filing, the Bank shall (i) determine the Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, (ii) calculate the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with this Agreement, and (iii) report the results of such calculation to Executive and the board of directors of the Bank. As promptly as possible after reporting such calculation, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, Executive and the Bank shall meet to confirm their agreement on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. On the date that the Executive and the Bank mutually agree on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit (the "Determination Date"), the Executive shall have a right to the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit as provided in this Agreement.

3. As a condition precedent to Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the 2004 and 2005 fiscal years, the Bank shall have achieved the 2004 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2004, and the Bank shall have achieved the 2005 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2005.

16

4. Provided that the Bank shall have achieved the applicable Asset Target and subject to the provisions of Paragraph C.3, below, governing the payment and crediting, as the case may be, of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in an amount equal to the product of multiplying: (1) the Bonus Percentage for which the Executive is eligible for such fiscal year, based on the Bank's Return on Assets Before Income Taxes, as derived from the Bonus Calculation Table, times (2) Executive's rate of annual salary payable as of the end of such fiscal year.

5. The following is an example only of the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Assume: that the Bank has achieved the applicable Asset Target.

Net Income Before Income Taxes (from TFR)                     $  4,600,000

Adjustments:

Add/Increase:

General Reserves                                              $    300,000
         Accrued Expense for Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit       $     60,000
         Tax Preferred Income "gross up"                      $     70,000
Subtract/Reduce:

         Specific Reserves/Charge-Offs                        $    (20,000)

Adjusted Net Income                                           $  5,010,000
                                                              ============

Average Asset Balance                                         $405,000,000
                                                              ============

Return on Assets Before Taxes:

Adjusted Net Income / Average Asset Balance =

$ 5,010,000 = 1.237%

$ 405,000,000

Bonus Percentage based on 1.237% Return on Average Assets = 0.05
(from Bonus Calculation Table)

Calculation of Bonus (assuming at end of fiscal year, Executive's rate of annual salary is $133,000 per annum):

Bonus Percentage X Executive's Annual Salary = Bonus

0.05 X $133,000 = $6,650

17

C. Payment and Crediting of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit

1. Within thirty days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and subject to the Deferred Comp Plan.

2. As of each Determination Date, Executive is entitled to receive no more than one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in cash (the "Cash Portion") and at least one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in the form of a credit to Executive's Account (as such term is defined under the Deferred Comp Plan)("Executive's Account. In accordance with the requirements of the Deferred Comp Plan, Executive shall make in a timely manner any and all elections with respect to the Deferred Comp Plan, including, but not limited to, elections with respect to the deferral of compensation.

3. Within 30 days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall pay the Cash Portion, if any, to Executive in cash, subject to any withholding required by law.

4. The Deferred Portion shall be credited to Executive's Account effective on July 1 of the year closest to the calculation date of the specific Pre Tax Net Income Benefit. Installments vest annually over 3 years on July 1, and annually on July 1 thereafter until fully vested as provide in the deferred compensation plan.

5. If this Agreement is terminated by Executive pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(b) or by the Bank for cause (other than due to Executive's death or disability) pursuant to Paragraph F.1, Executive shall be entitled only to that part of the Deferred Portion that has been vested prior to the Date of Termination.

6. If this Agreement is terminated due to Executive's death or disability or by the Bank without cause pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(a), then, on the Date of Termination of this Agreement on such basis, Executive's Account shall be credited with all remaining portions of any Deferred Portion that have not previously been fully vested as of such Date of Termination.

7. In the event of the termination of Executive's employment, the amount in Executive's Account shall be distributed to Executive in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.

18

EXHIBIT 10.9

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

This Employment Agreement (the "Agreement") is dated for reference purposes and entered into as of July 1, 2003 (the "Effective Date"), by and between Bank of Internet USA, a federal savings bank ("Bank'), having a principal place of business at 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220, San Diego, California, and Michael J. Berengolts ("Executive"), whose address is 10621 Queen Avenue, La Mesa, CA 91941. Bank and Executive are sometimes collectively referred to in this Agreement as the "Parties." As used in this Agreement, the term "Effective Date" means the date this Employment Agreement becomes effective.

RECITALS

A. Bank desires to employ Executive and avail itself of his skill, knowledge and experience in the management of Bank's business.

B. The Parties desire to set forth in this Agreement the terms of Executive's employment by Bank.

The Parties therefore agree as follows:

A. TERM OF EMPLOYMENT

1. Term. Bank employs Executive to perform the duties described in this Agreement, and Executive accepts such employment, for a term of one year commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the day preceding the one year anniversary of the Effective Date, except (i) that the Term of this Agreement shall be renewed without further notice for a one year period commencing on the annual anniversary date of the Effective Date (the "Anniversary Date") and on each subsequent Anniversary Date following any such one year period of employment, and (ii) this Agreement may be terminated prior to the end of such Term by Bank or Employee in accordance with and subject to the terms of Paragraph F. (Termination) of this Agreement, including,

1

but not limited to, Paragraph F.2.(a) providing Executive with a Severance Payment (as defined therein) upon termination of this Agreement by Bank other than for cause. When used in this Agreement, "Term" shall refer to the entire period of employment of Executive by Bank under this Agreement.

B. DUTIES OF EXECUTIVE

Subject to the powers and directions of the policies, procedures and directives of the board of directors, as adopted and modified from time to time, Executive shall perform the duties and shall have the title of Chief Technology Officer. During the Term, Executive shall perform exclusively for Bank the services contemplated in this Agreement to be performed by Executive, faithfully, diligently and to the best of Executive's ability, consistent with the highest and best standards of the banking industry and in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations and the Bank's federal stock charter and bylaws. Except as permitted by the prior written consent of Bank's board of directors, Executive shall devote Executive's entire working time, ability and attention to the business of Bank during the Term.

C. COMPENSATION

1. Base Salary. In consideration of Executive's services to be performed under this Agreement, Bank shall pay or cause to be paid to Executive a base salary in the following amounts, payable in equal installments in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods:

a. $115,000 per annum, effective as of July 1, 2003.

b. $120,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2004, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $399,098,000.

2

c. $130,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2005, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $532,964,000.

Executive's salary shall be reviewed by the board of directors from time to time at its discretion and Executive shall receive such additional or other salary increases, if any, as the board of directors, in its sole discretion, shall determine.

2. One-Time Deferred Compensation. Executive is entitled to one-time deferred compensation in the amount of $25,000 (the "One-Time Deferred Compensation"), subject to the terms of this Agreement and the Bank of Internet USA Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plan, adopted effective as of July 1, 2003 (the "Deferred Comp Plan". The Executive's deferred compensation account shall be credited for $25,000 plus 4% on July 1, 2004. The One-Time Deferred Compensation amount and all earnings in the account shall vest to the Executive on the following:

July 1, 2004..............................   20%
July 1, 2005..............................   40%
July 1, 2006..............................   60%
July 1, 2007..............................   80%
July 1, 2008..............................  100%

The bank shall pay 4% only on July 1, 2004. Thereafter, investment of the Executive's Account shall comply with the investment provision of the Deferred Comp Plan.

3. Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Executive shall be entitled to a benefit based on the pre-tax net income of the Bank, as calculated in accordance with the formula and terms set forth in Exhibit A, the terms of which are incorporated by this reference as if set forth in full in this paragraph (the "Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit"). The amount of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, if any, to which Executive shall be entitled shall be subject to the terms governing the deferral of such benefit set forth in Exhibit A. Executive shall be eligible for such other benefits and other incentive compensation, if any, that may be made available to the Bank's senior executive officers from time to time by the board of directors in its sole discretion.

3

D. EXECUTIVE BENEFITS

1. Vacation. Executive shall be entitled to vacation as prescribed in the Bank's Employee Manual maintained on the Bank's Intranet. In the event this Agreement is terminated pursuant to Paragraph F.2, Bank reserves the right to require Executive to take any unused vacation time prior to the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2).

2. Directors and Officers Liability Insurance. Bank shall provide for Executive, at Bank's expense, coverage under a directors and officers liability insurance policy in such amounts and on such terms as may be approved by Bank's board of directors and as may be consistent with such coverage provided by Bank for its other officers and directors.

3. Group Insurance Benefits; and Death Benefit. Executive shall participate in all group insurance plans provided by Bank for all of its senior executive officers at Bank's expense to the same extent and on the same terms as Bank's other senior executive officers. Throughout the term of employment, the Bank shall, at its sole cost, will provide a death benefit on the life of Executive in an amount equal to three times Executive's then-current annual salary.

4. Stock Options. As of Effective Date, BofI Holding, Inc. a Delaware corporation ("Holding"), the sole shareholder of Bank, had granted to Executive incentive stock options, as provided in Section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code (ISOs"), pursuant to the Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan of BOI Holding, Inc. (the "Plan") and as memorialized in three Incentive Stock Option Agreements, dated April 27, 2000, April 2, 2001, and January 28, 2002. (collectively, the "Grant"), which such agreements provide for, among other things, the vesting of such ISOs. Notwithstanding the terms of the Plan, in the event that the Bank terminates Executive under this Agreement for any reason other than for cause pursuant to Paragraph F.I or in the event Executive's death or disability causes the termination of this Agreement, all of

4

Executive's lSOs issued pursuant to the Grant and any subsequently issued grant of ISOs under the Plan, including all ISOs held by Executive that are not otherwise vested at such time, shall become fully vested and Executive may exercise such vested ISOs, in whole or in part, at any time within the terms of the option plan. In the event that Executive terminates this Agreement, Executive shall be entitled to exercise only those lSOs that are vested as of the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2, below), and may be exercised within a 90 day period in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.7(a) of the Plan. Neither Bank nor Holding shall enter into any transaction during or after the Term that would have the effect of canceling any of Executive's ISOs issued under the Grant.

5. Retirement, Profit Sharing and Other Plans. Executive shall be entitled to participate in any retirement plans, profit-sharing plans, salary deferral and other deferred compensation plans, medical expense reimbursement plans and other similar plans that Bank may establish with respect to all employees; provided, however, that nothing herein shall require Bank to establish or maintain any of such plans.

E. BUSINESS EXPENSES AND REIMBURSEMENT

1. Business Expenses. In addition to Bank's payment or reimbursement of costs of the type described in Paragraph E.2, Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for any ordinary and necessary business expenses incurred by Executive in the performance of his duties and in acting for or on behalf of Bank during the Term, provided that: (a) each such expenditure is of a nature qualifying it as a proper deduction on the federal and state income tax returns of Bank as a business expense and not as deductible compensation to Executive, (b) Executive furnishes to Bank adequate records and other documentary evidence required by federal and state statutes and regulations issued by the appropriate taxing authorities for the substantiation of such expenditures and deductible business expenses of Bank, and (c) Executive's expense reimbursement reports are submitted for approval in accordance with Bank's internal policies.

5

2. Additional Expenses. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for the costs and expenses set forth below, subject to the following requirements:
(a) Executive shall comply with the Bank's expense payment or reimbursement guidelines and procedures as the Bank may amend such guidelines and procedures or may adopt new guidelines and procedures from time to time, and (b) prior to the Bank becoming liable for any expenses or reimbursement relating to equipment, publications, education, training or professional organizations pursuant to subparagraphs (iii) through (vi) below, any such expenses or reimbursement shall be approved by Bank's board of directors or any committee or person authorized by the board of directors to grant such approval, in advance of incurring any such expenses. Subject to such prior approval of incurring expenses or reimbursement and to compliance with Bank's payment or reimbursement procedures, Bank's obligation to make any such payment or reimbursement pursuant to this paragraph shall not be contingent on whether or to what extent a particular expense may constitute a deductible business expense of Bank or be excludable from Executive's taxable compensation.

(i) Automobile Allowance. Standard business mileage reimbursement will be provided to Executive.

(ii) Parking. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for his reasonable automobile parking expenses during the Term.

(iii) Equipment. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for a digital cellular telephone (including the initial purchase price and connection charges as well as all business-related air charges), and other equipment as needed. Such equipment shall be the property of the Bank and upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, all of such equipment shall be returned to Bank, as more particularly provided in Paragraph G.3.

(iv) Publications. Bank shall reimburse Executive for the costs incurred by Executive during the term for subscriptions to business-related

6

periodical publications that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.

(v) Education and Training. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for attending business-related seminars, training programs, conferences and conventions that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties to Bank.

(vi) Professional Organizations. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for membership fees and dues of professional organizations that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.

F. TERMINATION

1. Termination for Cause. Bank may terminate this Agreement for cause at any time without advance notice and without further obligation or liability to Executive, by action of Bank's board of directors:

(a) If Executive materially fails to perform his duties in a satisfactory manner or habitually neglects his duties; provided, however, that before any termination pursuant to this subparagraph (a) shall become effective,
(i) Bank shall have given Executive written notice setting forth the specific grounds for termination ("Warning Notice"), (ii) Bank shall have met and informed Executive of the grounds for termination, of the extent and nature of his unsatisfactory or negligent performance and of what Executive must do to correct such deficiencies, and (iii) Executive shall have been afforded a reasonable opportunity over a period of not less than forty-five (45) days from the date of the Warning Notice to correct the unsatisfactory or negligent performance described in the Warning Notice to the satisfaction of the board of directors, provided, however, that Executive shall be terminated at the end of such period if

7

Executive fails to correct his deficient performance in the manner prescribed by and to the reasonable satisfaction of the board of directors;

(b) If Executive is convicted of illegal activity which materially adversely affects Bank's reputation in the community or which evidences the lack of Executive's fitness or ability to perform Executive's duties as determined by the board of directors, in good faith;

(c) If Executive commits any act which causes termination of coverage under Bank's Bankers Blanket Bond as to Executive, as distinguished from termination of coverage as to Bank as a whole;

(d) If Executive dies;

(e) If Executive is found to be physically or mentally incapable of performing Executive's duties for a consecutive period of ninety
(90) days or greater by the board of directors, reasonably and in good faith. Termination pursuant to this subparagraph (e) shall become effective immediately on written notice of termination given by Bank to Executive after the expiration of such 90-day period;

(f) If Bank is closed or taken over by any of the bank regulatory authorities having jurisdiction over Bank's activities; or

(g) If any bank regulatory authority should successfully exercise its cease and desist powers to remove Executive from office.

The Parties understand and agree that notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement: (1) this Agreement is subject to the requirements and terms set forth in the regulations of the Office of Thrift Supervision ("OTS") contained in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39; (2) specifically, without limitation, the required provisions set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b)

8

are incorporated by reference in this Agreement as if set forth in full; (3) to the greatest extent possible, this Agreement shall be interpreted so as to be consistent with said regulation; and (4) in the event of conflict or inconsistency between the terms of this Agreement and said regulation, the required provisions of said OTS regulation shall supersede any inconsistent or conflicting provisions of this Agreement. The termination of this Agreement for any of the reasons set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) shall be considered termination for cause pursuant to this Paragraph F.1.

2. Termination at Will. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated by either party at any time upon thirty (30) days' written notice of termination to the other Party ("Notice of Termination"). As used in this Paragraph F.2, "Date of Termination" means the thirtieth (30th) day following the date on which Notice of Termination is given.

(a) Termination by Bank. In the event Bank elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to compensation from Bank as follows: (i) Bank shall pay Executive his normal compensation then in effect through the Date of Termination; and (ii) Bank shall pay to Executive a severance payment equal to his then-current base monthly salary, multiplied by twelve (12) (the "Severance Payment"), which amount shall be paid by the Bank in either of the following two ways, in the sole discretion of the board of directors: (A) the Bank may pay the Severance Payment in twelve (12) equal installments during the succeeding twelve
(12) month period beginning on the Date of Termination (the "Severance Period") in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods, or (B) the Bank may pay the Severance Payment in one lump sum, subject to such withholding and other deductions as may be required by applicable law. In addition, Executive shall be entitled to the continuation of the group insurance benefits provided under Paragraph D.3, subject to Executive's reasonable cooperation with Bank, until the first to occur of: (x) the expiration of the

9

Severance Period, or (y) Executive's commencement of work for a new employer that provides group medical insurance benefits to Executive. Executive's acceptance of new employment or earnings from other sources during the Severance Period shall not affect Bank's obligation to make the Severance Payment as provided above. At any time between Bank giving Executive Notice of Termination and the Date of Termination, Bank, in its sole discretion, may direct Executive to cease performing services for Bank or to absent himself from Bank's premises and operations, provided that Bank shall nonetheless compensate Executive as provided above.

(b) Termination by Executive. In the event Executive elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to such compensation as may be due and payable to him through and including such Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any other compensation except as may be required by law or by written agreement, including this Agreement and the Deferred Comp Plan.

3. Effect of Termination. In the event of the termination of this Agreement prior to the completion of the Term for any of the reasons specified in Paragraphs F.1 and F.2, Executive shall be entitled to the compensation earned by Executive prior to the Date of Termination, as provided in this Agreement, computed pro rata up to and including the Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any further compensation or other benefits for services rendered after the Date of Termination, except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement. As used in this Paragraph F.3. "Date of Termination" includes the effective date of any termination, whether pursuant to Paragraph F.1 or F.2.

G. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1. Solicitation of Customers and Employees. For any period during which Executive receives any salary from Bank and for a one (1) year

10

period following any termination of Executive from Bank, Executive shall not solicit any customers or employees of Bank to move their banking or employment relationships from Bank. Nothing in this Agreement shall preclude Executive from any mass solicitation to groups and individual follow-up solicitations of persons or businesses named in any list or data base not specifically related to or previously defined by the Bank, even though the names of certain Bank customers may appear in such list or data base.

2. Indemnification. To the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall pay any and all expenses incurred by Executive in connection with the defense or settlement of, and shall pay and satisfy any judgments, awards, fines and penalties rendered, assessed or levied against Executive in, any judicial, arbitration, mediation or administrative suit, action, hearing, inquiry or proceeding (whether or not Bank is joined as a party) relating to acts or omissions of Executive alleged to have occurred while an "agent" of Bank, or by Bank, or by both, provided however, that Bank shall not be obligated to defend, indemnify or hold Executive harmless from the consequences of his own negligent or reckless act or omission or willful misconduct or dishonesty. In addition, to the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall advance to Executive, upon receipt of the undertaking required by California Corporations Code Section
317(f), any expenses incurred in defending against any such proceeding to which Executive is a party or has been threatened to be made a party.

3. Return of Property. Executive expressly agrees that all manuals, documents, files, reports, studies, instruments, equipment and other materials and property used and/or developed by Bank or Executive (whether on his personal time or while performing services for the Bank) during the Term ("Preparatory Work") are the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest in such property. Executive further agrees that, subject to the execution of this Agreement, all Preparatory Work is the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest, legal or beneficial, in such

11

Preparatory Work or in any benefits that may arise from such Preparatory Work. Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, Executive or Executive's representative shall promptly deliver possession of all of said property to Bank in original or good, operating condition, normal wear and tear excepted.

4. Notices. Any notice, request, demand or other communication required or permitted hereunder shall be considered to be properly given when personally served in writing, when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, or when delivered to a generally recognized overnight courier service (such as, for example, Federal Express or United Parcel Service) addressed to the Party at such Party's address appearing at the beginning of this Agreement. Either Party may change its address by written notice in accordance with this paragraph.

5. Benefit of Agreement; Assignment. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Parties and their respective executors, administrators, successors and assigns. This Agreement is for the personal services of Executive and may not be assigned by Executive.

6. Applicable Law. Except to the extent governed by the laws of the United States, this Agreement is to be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California.

7. Captions and Paragraphs Headings. Captions and paragraph headings used herein are for convenience only and are not a part of this Agreement and shall not be used in constructing it.

8. Invalid Provisions. Should any provision of this Agreement for any reason be declared invalid, void, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the validity and binding effect of any remaining portion shall not be affected, and the remaining portions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect as if this Agreement had been executed with said provision eliminated.

12

9. Entire Agreement. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the Parties. It supersedes any and all other agreements or understandings, whether oral or written, between the Parties with respect to the employment of Executive by Bank. The terms of this Agreement in Paragraph D.4 applicable to stock options supersede the terms of the Plan or any agreement between the Parties to the extent the terms of the Plan and any other agreement are inconsistent with the terms of Paragraph D.4. Each party to this Agreement acknowledges that no representations, inducements, promises, or agreements, oral or otherwise, have been made by any party, or anyone acting on behalf of any party, that are not embodied in this Agreement, and that no other agreement, statement, or promise not contained in this Agreement shall be valid or binding. This Agreement, may be modified or amended only in a written document signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. The amendment or other modification of the Plan or other any other agreement generally applicable to the grant of stock options or issuance of ISOs by the Holding Company to employees, including Executive will not supersede the terms of this Agreement pertaining to ISOs without the express written approval of the Parties contained in a writing expressly stating its intent to supersede the specific terms of this Agreement applicable to ISOs. Additionally, terms of this Agreement will prevail in any conflicts with other agreements.

10. Attorney's Fees. Each party shall bear his or its own attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the negotiation, preparation and delivery of this Agreement. However, if any action is instituted to enforce or interpret any of the obligations set forth in this Agreement, the prevailing party(ies) shall be entitled to recover its (their) reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the enforcement or interpretive action.

11. Trade Secrets. To the extent that during the Term Bank develops any trade secrets, as that term is defined under California law, the Parties agree that such trade secrets belong to and are the property of the Bank.

13

Executive agrees that for a period of one (1) year after the termination of this Agreement. Executive shall not disclose any of Bank's trade secrets, directly or indirectly, or use them in any way in contravention of the rights of the Bank to such trade secrets.

12. Restricted Securities. The ISOs, the underlying common stock issuable upon the exercise of the ISOs and the shares of Holding's common stock issuable pursuant thereto shall be issued by Holding without registration under the Securities Act of 1933, or registration or qualification of such securities under any state securities or "blue sky" laws in reliance upon certain exemptions from registration or qualification, as the case may he. Upon issuance, such securities shall be considered "restricted securities," subject to certain limitations on transfer or other disposition imposed under applicable federal and state securities or "blue sky" laws and regulations and such restrictions shall be set forth in one or more legends appearing on the certificate or agreement evidencing such securities.

13. Accounting Principles. Wherever in this Agreement, including any exhibit hereto, there is a reference to or need to use or rely upon accounting principles and procedures, such accounting principles and procedures shall be those used by the Bank in the preparation and filing of its reports of financial condition and operations in the form of Thrift Financial Reports, as filed with the Office of Thrift Supervision in the ordinary course ("TFRs"). By way of example, such items as Total Assets and loan loss reserves shall be computed as they are computed for purposes of reporting such information in the Bank's TFRs.

14

The Parties execute this Agreement as of the Effective Date first above written.

EXECUTIVE:                                  BANK OF INTERNET, USA
                                            a federal savings bank

/s/ Michael Berengolts                      By: /s/ Jerry Englert
------------------------------                  --------------------------------
Michael Berengolts                          Name:  Jerry Englert
10621 Queen Avenue                          Title: Chairman of the Board
La Mesa, CA  91941

                                            Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus
                                                    ---------------------------
                                                    Secretary

CONSENT OF BOFI HOLDING, INC.

By execution of this Agreement below, BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation, consents to and agrees to perform its obligations under Paragraph D.4.

BofI Holding, Inc.

By: /s/ Jerry Englert                             Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus
   ---------------------------------                      ----------------------
Jerry Englert, Chairman of the Board
                                                  Name: C. Michelle Paulus
                                                  Title: Secretary

15

EXHIBIT A

PRE-TAX NET INCOME BENEFIT

The following terms apply to the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit provided in Paragraph C.2 of the Agreement.

A. Definitions.

1. "Adjusted Net Income" refers to Net Income Before Income Taxes (as defined below) as reported in a TFR (as defined below), reduced by the amount of Specific Reserves (as defined below), as reported in a TFR, and increased by the sum of (a) the amount of General Reserves (as defined below),
(b) the amount of any expense accrued by the Bank for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, and (c) the amount of any non-taxable or tax preferred income "grossed up" to its pre-tax equivalent or equivalent income without such tax preference (the "Tax Preferred Income "gross up").

2. "Average Asset Balance" refers to the average amount of Total Assets reported by the Bank on a daily for the period covered by a TFR.

3. "Asset Target" refers to the level of Total Assets reported in the Bank's TFR at June 30, 2004 and at June 30, 2005. The Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2004 is $399,098,000 and is referred to as the "2004 Asset Target" and the Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2005 is $532,963,000 and is referred to as the "2005 Asset Target."

4. "Bonus Calculation Table" refers to the following table showing the Bonus Percentage (which will be applied as a percentage of Net Income Before Income Taxes earned by Executive) if the Bank attains certain levels of profitability (expressed as a percentage attained by dividing Adjusted Net Income by the Average Asset Balance):

If the Bank's Return on Assets Before Taxes (as defined below) is

Bonus
Percentage     at least:                 but not greater than:
----------     --------                  --------------------
0.05             1.200%                          1.399%
0.10             1.400%                          1.799%
0.15             1.800%                          2.199%
0.20             2.200%                          No limit

5. "TFR" refers to the Thrift Financial Report of the Bank, consisting of various financial statements, including balance sheet, statement of

16

operations and other statements, prepared by the Bank in the ordinary course and filed quarterly with the Office of Thrift Supervision.

6. "General Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of a reserve or an allowance against loan losses generally and not allocable to one or more specific assets, as set forth in its TFR for the applicable period.

7. "Net Income Before Income Taxes" refers to the amount reported as "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes" in a TFR for the applicable period.

8. "Deferred Comp Plan" has the meaning set forth in Section C.3 of the Agreement.

9. "Pre-Tax Net Income" refers to the "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes," as set forth on the Statement of Operations included in a TFR.

10. "Return on Assets Before Taxes" refers to the percentage derived from dividing (a) the Adjusted Net Income for such TFR period, by (b) the Average Asset Balance with respect to such period.

10. "Specific Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of reserves or allowances against loan losses specifically attributable to actual losses or to prospective losses from one or more identified assets, as set forth in a TFR.

B. Calculation of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit

1. Executive shall be entitled to a Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and June 30, 2005. All calculations leading to the computation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit for each of such years shall be based upon the results reported in the Bank's TFRs for each such 12-month period. No Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit shall be calculated or payable with respect to any period less than a full 12-month fiscal year.

2. As promptly as possible after the filing of the TFR for the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and 2005, as the case may be, but in no event later than 30 days after such filing, the Bank shall (i) determine the Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, (ii) calculate the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with this Agreement, and (iii) report the results of such calculation to Executive and the board of directors of the Bank. As promptly as possible after reporting such calculation, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, Executive and the Bank shall meet to confirm their agreement on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net

17

Income Benefit. On the date that the Executive and the Bank mutually agree on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit (the "Determination Date"), the Executive shall have a right to the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit as provided in this Agreement.

3. As a condition precedent to Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the 2004 and 2005 fiscal years, the Bank shall have achieved the 2004 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2004, and the Bank shall have achieved the 2005 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2005.

4. Provided that the Bank shall have achieved the applicable Asset Target and subject to the provisions of Paragraph C.3, below, governing the payment and crediting, as the case may be, of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in an amount equal to the product of multiplying: (1) the Bonus Percentage for which the Executive is eligible for such fiscal year, based on the Bank's Return on Assets Before Income Taxes, as derived from the Bonus Calculation Table, times (2) Executive's rate of annual salary payable as of the end of such fiscal year.

5. The following is an example only of the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Assume: that the Bank has achieved the applicable Asset Target.

Net Income Before Income Taxes (from TFR)                     $  4,600,000

Adjustments:

Add/Increase:

General Reserves                                              $    300,000
         Accrued Expense for Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit       $     60,000
         Tax Preferred Income "gross up"                      $     70,000
Subtract/Reduce:

         Specific Reserves/Charge-Offs                        $    (20,000)

Adjusted Net Income                                           $  5,010,000
                                                              ============

Average Asset Balance                                         $405,000,000
                                                              ============

Return on Assets Before Taxes:

Adjusted Net Income / Average Asset Balance =

$ 5,010,000 = 1.237%

$ 405,000,000

Bonus Percentage based on 1.237% Return on Average Assets = 0.05
(from Bonus Calculation Table)

18

Calculation of Bonus (assuming at end of fiscal year, Executive's rate of annual salary is $115,000 per annum):

Bonus Percentage X Executive's Annual Salary = Bonus

0.05 X $115,000 = $5,750

19

C. Payment and Crediting of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit

1. Within thirty days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and subject to the Deferred Comp Plan.

2. As of each Determination Date, Executive is entitled to receive no more than one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in cash (the "Cash Portion") and at least one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in the form of a credit to Executive's Account (as such term is defined under the Deferred Comp Plan)("Executive's Account. In accordance with the requirements of the Deferred Comp Plan, Executive shall make in a timely manner any and all elections with respect to the Deferred Comp Plan, including, but not limited to, elections with respect to the deferral of compensation.

3. Within 30 days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall pay the Cash Portion, if any, to Executive in cash, subject to any withholding required by law.

4. The Deferred Portion shall be credited to Executive's Account effective on July 1 of the year closest to the calculation date of the specific Pre Tax Net Income Benefit. Installments vest annually over 3 years on July 1, and annually on July 1 thereafter until fully vested as provide in the deferred compensation plan.

5. If this Agreement is terminated by Executive pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(b) or by the Bank for cause (other than due to Executive's death or disability) pursuant to Paragraph F.1, Executive shall be entitled only to that part of the Deferred Portion that has been vested prior to the Date of Termination.

6. If this Agreement is terminated due to Executive's death or disability or by the Bank without cause pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(a), then, on the Date of Termination of this Agreement on such basis, Executive's Account shall be credited with all remaining portions of any Deferred Portion that have not previously been fully vested as of such Date of Termination.

7. In the event of the termination of Executive's employment, the amount in Executive's Account shall be distributed to Executive in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.

20

 

Exhibit 23.2

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We consent to the use in this Registration Statement of BofI Holding, Inc. on Form S-1 of our report dated October 13, 2004, appearing in the Prospectus, which is part of this Registration Statement.

We also consent to the reference to us under the headings “Experts” in such Prospectus.

 
 

/s/ DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP
Los Angeles, California
December 16, 2004